R&S®SMW-K42/-K83 3GPP FDD, HSPA/HSPA+, Enhanced BS/MS tests (download version)

R&S®SMW-K42/-K83 3GPP FDD, HSPA/HSPA+, Enhanced BS/MS tests (download version)
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD incl. enhanced MS/BS
tests, HSPA, HSPA+
User Manual
(;ÙÐè2)
User Manual
Test & Measurement
1175.6690.02 ─ 08
This document describes the following software options:
●
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
1413.3784.xx, 1413.4580.xx
This manual describes firmware version FW 3.20.390.xx and later of the R&S®SMW200A.
© 2015 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
Mühldorfstr. 15, 81671 München, Germany
Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0
Fax: +49 89 41 29 12 164
Email: info@rohde-schwarz.com
Internet: www.rohde-schwarz.com
Subject to change – Data without tolerance limits is not binding.
R&S® is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual: R&S®SMW200A is abbreviated as R&S SMW, R&S®WinIQSIM2TM is
abbreviated as R&S WinIQSIM2; the license types 02/03/07/11/13/16/12 are abbreviated as xx.
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Contents
Contents
1 Preface.................................................................................................. 13
1.1
About this Manual....................................................................................................... 13
1.2
Documentation Overview........................................................................................... 14
1.3
Conventions Used in the Documentation.................................................................15
1.3.1
Typographical Conventions...........................................................................................15
1.3.2
Conventions for Procedure Descriptions.......................................................................16
1.3.3
Notes on Screenshots...................................................................................................16
2 Welcome to the 3GPP FDD Digital Standard..................................... 17
2.1
Accessing the 3GPP FDD Dialog...............................................................................19
2.2
Scope........................................................................................................................... 19
3 About the 3GPP FDD Options.............................................................20
3.1
Modulation System 3GPP FDD.................................................................................. 21
3.1.1
Scrambling Code Generator......................................................................................... 21
3.1.1.1
Downlink Scrambling Code Generator..........................................................................21
3.1.1.2
Uplink Scrambling Code Generator.............................................................................. 22
3.1.2
Scrambling Unit.............................................................................................................24
3.1.3
Channelization Code Generator....................................................................................25
3.1.4
Data Source.................................................................................................................. 25
3.1.5
Slot and Frame Builder................................................................................................. 25
3.1.6
Timing Offset.................................................................................................................26
3.1.7
Demultiplexer................................................................................................................ 27
3.1.8
Power Control............................................................................................................... 27
3.1.9
Summation and Filtering............................................................................................... 28
3.1.10
Multicode.......................................................................................................................28
3.1.11
Orthogonal Channel Noise (OCNS).............................................................................. 29
3.1.11.1
Standard, HSDPA and HSDPA2 modes....................................................................... 29
3.1.11.2
3i OCNS mode.............................................................................................................. 30
3.1.12
HARQ Feedback........................................................................................................... 32
3.1.12.1
Limitations..................................................................................................................... 32
3.1.12.2
Setup.............................................................................................................................32
3.1.12.3
Timing........................................................................................................................... 32
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
3
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Contents
3.1.13
HS-SCCH less operation.............................................................................................. 34
3.1.13.1
HS-SCCH Type 2..........................................................................................................34
3.1.13.2
HS-SCCH Type 2 Fixed Reference Channel: H-Set 7..................................................35
3.1.14
Higher Order Modulation...............................................................................................35
3.1.14.1
64QAM in downlink....................................................................................................... 35
3.1.14.2
64QAM Fixed Reference Channel: H-Set 8.................................................................. 36
3.1.14.3
16QAM in uplink............................................................................................................36
3.1.14.4
16QAM Fixed Reference Channel: FRC 8....................................................................36
3.1.15
MIMO in HSPA+............................................................................................................36
3.1.15.1
D-TxAA Feedback signaling: PCI and CQI................................................................... 37
3.1.15.2
MIMO downlink control channel support....................................................................... 38
3.1.15.3
Redundancy Version.....................................................................................................39
3.1.15.4
HARQ Processes.......................................................................................................... 39
3.1.15.5
MIMO uplink control channel support............................................................................40
3.1.15.6
CQI Reports: Type A and Type B................................................................................. 41
3.1.15.7
PCI reports.................................................................................................................... 41
3.1.15.8
MIMO Fixed Reference Channels: H-Set 9 and H-Set 11............................................ 42
3.1.16
Dual Cell HSDPA (DC-HSDPA).................................................................................... 42
3.1.16.1
DC-HSDPA Data Acknowledgement (non MIMO mode).............................................. 43
CQI reports: CQI1 and CQI2.........................................................................................45
3.1.16.2
DC-HSDPA + MIMO......................................................................................................45
3.1.16.3
Dual Cell HSDPA (DC-HSDPA) Fixed Reference Channel: H-Set 12.......................... 45
3.1.17
HS-DPCCH Extension for 4C-HSDPA and 8C-HSDPA................................................46
3.1.18
Dual Cell HSUPA (Dual Cell E-DCH)............................................................................46
3.1.19
UE Capabilities..............................................................................................................46
3.1.19.1
MIMO and 64QAM UE Capabilities...............................................................................46
3.1.19.2
UL 16QAM UE Capabilities...........................................................................................47
3.1.19.3
MIMO and DC-HSDPA Operation UE Capabilities....................................................... 47
3.1.19.4
Dual Cell E-DCH Operation UE Capabilities.................................................................47
3.1.20
Uplink discontinuous transmission (UL DTX)................................................................47
3.1.21
Uplink User Scheduling.................................................................................................49
3.2
Routing and enabling an external control signal..................................................... 52
4 3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings.............................................. 53
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
4
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Contents
4.1
General Settings for 3GPP FDD Signals................................................................... 54
4.2
Trigger Settings...........................................................................................................56
4.3
Marker Settings........................................................................................................... 61
4.4
Clock Settings............................................................................................................. 64
4.5
Local and Global Connector Settings....................................................................... 65
4.6
Basestations and User Equipments Settings...........................................................66
4.6.1
Common Configuration Settings................................................................................... 67
4.6.2
General Power Settings................................................................................................ 70
4.7
Test Setups/Models.................................................................................................... 72
4.8
Predefined Settings - Downlink................................................................................. 76
4.9
Additional User Equipment - Uplink..........................................................................78
4.10
Base Station Settings................................................................................................. 79
4.10.1
Common Settings..........................................................................................................80
4.10.2
Orthogonal Channel Noise (OCNS) Settings................................................................ 82
4.10.3
Channel Table...............................................................................................................83
4.10.4
Channel Graph - BS......................................................................................................89
4.10.5
Code Domain Graph - BS............................................................................................. 90
4.11
Compressed Mode...................................................................................................... 93
4.11.1
Compressed Mode General Settings............................................................................ 94
4.11.2
Compressed Mode Configuration Graph...................................................................... 96
4.11.2.1
Transmission Gaps....................................................................................................... 97
4.11.2.2
Compressed Ranges.................................................................................................... 98
4.11.2.3
Non-compressed ranges...............................................................................................98
4.12
HSDPA Settings - BS.................................................................................................. 99
4.12.1
Enhanced HSDPA Mode Settings.................................................................................99
4.12.2
MIMO Configuration.................................................................................................... 101
4.13
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS........................................................................... 103
4.13.1
HSDPA H-Set General Setting....................................................................................103
4.13.2
H-Set Configuration Common Settings....................................................................... 104
4.13.3
MIMO Settings............................................................................................................ 107
4.13.4
Global Settings............................................................................................................108
4.13.5
Coding Configuration.................................................................................................. 111
4.13.6
Signal Structure...........................................................................................................114
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
5
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Contents
4.13.7
HARQ Simulation........................................................................................................ 116
4.13.8
Error Insertion............................................................................................................. 117
4.13.9
Randomly Varying Modulation And Number Of Codes (Type 3i) Settings..................118
4.14
Enhanced Settings for P-CPICH - BS1.................................................................... 120
4.15
Enhanced Settings for P-CCPCH - BS1.................................................................. 121
4.15.1
Channel Number and State.........................................................................................121
4.15.2
Channel Coding - Enhanced P-CCPCH BS1..............................................................122
4.16
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1.......................................................................123
4.16.1
Channel Number and State.........................................................................................124
4.16.2
Channel Coding.......................................................................................................... 125
4.16.3
Transport Channel - Enhanced DPCHs BS1.............................................................. 128
4.16.4
Error Insertion - Enhanced DPCHs BS1..................................................................... 131
4.16.5
Dynamic Power Control - Enhanced DPCHs BS1...................................................... 133
4.17
S-CCPCH Settings - BS Channel Table...................................................................138
4.18
Config AICH/AP-AICH - BS Channel Table............................................................. 139
4.19
DPCCH Settings - BS Channel Table...................................................................... 140
4.19.1
Common Slot Structure (DPCCH)...............................................................................140
4.19.2
TPC Settings............................................................................................................... 143
4.19.3
DPCCH Power Offset..................................................................................................146
4.20
Config E-AGCH - BS Channel Table........................................................................147
4.21
Config E-RGCH/E-HICH - BS Channel Table...........................................................149
4.22
Config F-DPCH - BS Channel Table........................................................................ 151
4.22.1
Common Settings........................................................................................................151
4.22.2
TPC Settings............................................................................................................... 152
4.23
Multi Channel Assistant - BS................................................................................... 155
4.24
User Equipment Configuration (UE)........................................................................159
4.24.1
General and Common Settings...................................................................................160
4.24.2
Code Domain Graph - UE........................................................................................... 162
4.24.3
Channel Settings.........................................................................................................163
4.25
UL-DTX/User Scheduling - UE................................................................................. 163
4.26
Dynamic Power Control - UE................................................................................... 168
4.27
Scheduling List......................................................................................................... 172
4.28
DPCCH Settings - UE................................................................................................ 174
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
6
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Contents
4.29
DPDCH Settings - UE................................................................................................ 180
4.29.1
DPDCH Common Settings..........................................................................................181
4.29.2
Channel Table.............................................................................................................183
4.30
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE..........................................................................................185
4.30.1
About HS-DPCCH.......................................................................................................186
4.30.2
HS-DPCCH Common Settings....................................................................................188
4.30.3
HS-DPCCH Scheduling Table (Release 8 and Later/Release 8 and Later RT)......... 192
4.30.4
HS-DPCCH Settings for Normal Operation (Up to Release 7)................................... 201
4.30.5
MIMO Settings HS-DPCCH (Up to Release 7)........................................................... 203
4.31
E-DPCCH Settings - UE............................................................................................ 207
4.32
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE........................................................................................208
4.32.1
FRC General Settings................................................................................................. 209
4.32.2
Coding And Physical Channels Settings.....................................................................210
4.32.3
DTX Mode Settings..................................................................................................... 214
4.32.4
HARQ Simulation Settings.......................................................................................... 215
4.32.5
Bit and Block Error Insertion Settings......................................................................... 219
4.33
E-DPDCH Settings - UE............................................................................................ 220
4.33.1
E-DPDCH Common Settings...................................................................................... 221
4.33.2
Channel Table.............................................................................................................222
4.34
E-DCH Scheduling - UE............................................................................................ 224
4.35
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1.............................................................. 227
4.35.1
Enhanced Channels State.......................................................................................... 228
4.35.2
Channel Coding.......................................................................................................... 228
4.35.3
Transport Channel...................................................................................................... 232
4.35.4
Error Insertion............................................................................................................. 235
4.36
PRACH Settings - UE................................................................................................ 236
4.36.1
Graphical Display........................................................................................................ 239
4.36.2
Preamble Settings.......................................................................................................242
4.36.3
Message Part Settings................................................................................................ 244
4.36.4
Channel Coding State................................................................................................. 246
4.37
PCPCH Settings - UE................................................................................................ 247
4.37.1
Graphical Display........................................................................................................ 249
4.37.2
Preamble Settings.......................................................................................................252
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
7
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Contents
4.37.3
Message Part Settings................................................................................................ 254
4.37.4
Channel Coding Settings............................................................................................ 257
4.38
Filtering, Clipping, ARB Settings.............................................................................259
4.38.1
Filter Settings.............................................................................................................. 259
4.38.2
Clipping Settings......................................................................................................... 261
4.38.3
ARB Settings...............................................................................................................263
5 How to Work with the 3GPP FDD Option......................................... 264
5.1
Resolving Domain Conflicts.................................................................................... 264
5.2
Using the DL-UL Timing Offset Settings.................................................................266
5.3
Configuring UL-DTX Transmission and Visualizing the Scheduling................... 267
5.4
Configuring and Visualizing the Uplink User Scheduling..................................... 269
5.5
How to Configure the HS-DPCCH Settings for 4C-HSDPA Tests......................... 271
6 Application Sheets.............................................................................273
6.1
Uplink Dual Cell HSDPA Test Signal Generation................................................... 273
6.1.1
Options and Equipment Required............................................................................... 273
6.1.2
Test Setup...................................................................................................................273
6.1.3
Generating an uplink DC-HSDPA Test Signal (Non MIMO Mode)............................. 274
6.1.4
Generating an Uplink Test Signal for Simultaneous Dual Cell and MIMO Operation. 275
7 Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141.............. 277
7.1
Introduction............................................................................................................... 277
7.1.1
General Considerations.............................................................................................. 279
7.1.2
General Settings......................................................................................................... 281
7.1.3
Basestation Configuration........................................................................................... 285
7.1.4
Apply........................................................................................................................... 286
7.2
Receiver Tests...........................................................................................................286
7.2.1
Overview..................................................................................................................... 286
7.2.1.1
Basic Configuration..................................................................................................... 286
7.2.1.2
Test Setups - Receiver Tests......................................................................................287
Standard Test Setup - One Path.................................................................................287
Standard Test Setup - Two Paths............................................................................... 287
Standard Test Setup - Diversity Measurements......................................................... 288
7.2.1.3
Carrying Out a Receiver Test Measurement...............................................................288
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
8
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Contents
7.2.1.4
General Wanted Signal Parameters........................................................................... 289
7.2.2
Receiver Characteristics............................................................................................. 290
7.2.2.1
Test Case 7.2 - Reference Sensitivity Level............................................................... 290
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.2........................................................ 291
7.2.2.2
Test Case 7.3 - Dynamic Range................................................................................. 292
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.3........................................................ 293
7.2.2.3
Test Case 7.4 - Adjacent Channel Selectivity............................................................. 295
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.4........................................................ 295
7.2.2.4
Test Case 7.5 - Blocking Characteristics.................................................................... 297
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.5........................................................ 298
Interferer Signal...........................................................................................................300
Blocking performance requirements........................................................................... 302
7.2.2.5
Test Case 7.6 - Intermodulation Characteristics......................................................... 306
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.6........................................................ 307
7.2.2.6
Test Case 7.8 - Verification of Internal BER............................................................... 310
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.8........................................................ 311
7.2.3
Performance Requirements........................................................................................ 313
7.2.3.1
Test Case 8.2.1 - Demodulation of DCH in Static Propagation Conditions................ 313
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.2.1..................................................... 314
7.2.3.2
Test Case 8.3.1 - Demodulation of DCH in Multipath Fading Case 1 Conditions.......316
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.3.1..................................................... 317
7.2.3.3
Test Case 8.3.2 - Demodulation of DCH in Multipath Fading Case 2 Conditions.......319
7.2.3.4
Test Case 8.3.3 - Demodulation of DCH in Multipath Fading Case 3 Conditions.......320
7.2.3.5
Test Case 8.3.4 - Demodulation of DCH in Multipath Fading Case 4 Conditions.......320
7.2.3.6
Test Case 8.4 - Demodulation of DCH in Moving Propagation Conditions.................322
7.2.3.7
Test Case 8.5 - Demodulation of DCH in Birth/Death Propagation Conditions.......... 322
7.2.3.8
Test Case 8.6 - Verification of Internal BLER............................................................. 323
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.6........................................................ 323
7.2.3.9
Test Case 8.8.1 - RACH Preamble Detection in Static Propagation Conditions.........325
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.8.1..................................................... 326
7.2.3.10
Test Case 8.8.2 - RACH Preamble Detection in Multipath Fading Case 3................. 329
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.8.2..................................................... 329
7.2.3.11
Test Case 8.8.3 - RACH Demodulation of Message Part in Static Propagation Conditions.............................................................................................................................331
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
9
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Contents
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.8.3..................................................... 332
7.2.3.12
Test Case 8.8.4 - RACH Demodulation of Message Part in Multipath Fading Case 3
.................................................................................................................................... 335
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.8.4..................................................... 336
7.2.3.13
Test Case 8.9.1 - CPCH Access Preamble and Collision Detection Preamble Detection
in Static Propagation Conditions................................................................................. 337
7.2.3.14
Test Case 8.9.2 - CPCH Access Preamble and Collision Detection Preamble Detection
in Multipath Fading Case 3......................................................................................... 337
7.2.3.15
Test Case 8.9.3 - Demodulation of CPCH Message in Static Propagation Conditions
.................................................................................................................................... 337
7.2.3.16
Test Case 8.9.4 - Demodulation of CPCH Message in Multipath Fading Case 3.......338
7.3
Transmitter Tests...................................................................................................... 338
7.3.1
Basic Configuration..................................................................................................... 338
7.3.2
Test Case 6.4.2 - Power Control Steps.......................................................................339
7.3.2.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 6.4.2..................................................... 340
7.3.2.2
Carrying Out the Test Case 6.4.2 Measurement........................................................ 344
7.3.3
Test Case 6.6 - Transmit Intermodulation...................................................................345
7.3.3.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 6.6........................................................ 346
7.3.3.2
Carrying Out a Test Case 6.6 Measurement.............................................................. 349
8 Remote-Control Commands............................................................. 351
8.1
General Commands.................................................................................................. 352
8.2
Filter/Clipping Settings.............................................................................................358
8.3
Trigger Settings.........................................................................................................362
8.4
Marker Settings......................................................................................................... 369
8.5
Clock Settings........................................................................................................... 372
8.6
Test Models and Predefined Settings..................................................................... 373
8.7
Setting Base Stations............................................................................................... 378
8.8
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1....................................................................426
8.8.1
General Settings......................................................................................................... 426
8.8.2
Channel Coding.......................................................................................................... 427
8.8.3
Dynamic Power Control Settings................................................................................ 439
8.8.4
Error Insertion............................................................................................................. 443
8.9
User Equipment Settings......................................................................................... 447
8.9.1
General Settings......................................................................................................... 447
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
10
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Contents
8.9.2
Compressed Mode Settings........................................................................................452
8.9.3
DPCCH Settings......................................................................................................... 454
8.9.4
HS-DPCCH Settings................................................................................................... 461
8.9.4.1
Common Settings........................................................................................................461
8.9.4.2
Up to Release 7 Settings............................................................................................ 463
8.9.4.3
Release 8 and Later (RT) Settings..............................................................................471
8.9.5
DPDCH Settings......................................................................................................... 479
8.9.6
PCPCH Settings..........................................................................................................483
8.9.7
PRACH Settings..........................................................................................................494
8.9.8
HSUPA Settings..........................................................................................................502
8.9.9
UL-DTX and Uplink Scheduling Settings.................................................................... 523
8.9.10
Dynamic Power Control Settings................................................................................ 528
8.10
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment.......................................................... 532
8.11
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141...................................................... 545
Annex.................................................................................................. 567
A Reference............................................................................................567
List of Commands..............................................................................574
Index....................................................................................................585
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
11
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
Contents
12
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Preface
About this Manual
1 Preface
1.1 About this Manual
This user manual provides all the information specific to the digital standard 3GPP
FDD.
All general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating
modes are described in the main R&S SMW User Manual.
The main focus in this manual is on the provided settings and the tasks required to
generate a signal. The following topics are included:
●
Welcome to the 3GPP FDD options R&S SMW-K42/-K83
Introduction to and getting familiar with the option
●
About the 3GPP FDD and Basics
Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the signal
generation
●
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
A concise description of all functions and settings available to configure signal generation with their corresponding remote control commands
●
How to Generate a Signal with the 3GPP FDD Options
The basic procedure to perform signal generation tasks and step-by-step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods
As well as detailed examples to guide you through typical signal generation scenarios and allow you to try out the application immediately
●
Application Examples
Example signal generation scenarios in which the option is frequently used.
●
Test Case Wizard
Description of the provided test cases for tests on Base Stations in Conformance
with the 3G Standard 3GPP FDD
●
Remote Control Commands
Remote commands required to configure and perform signal generation in a
remote environment, sorted by tasks
(Commands required to set up the instrument or to perform common tasks on the
instrument are provided in the main R&S SMW user manual)
Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually
be executed directly for test purposes
●
Annex
Reference material, such as extensive lists
●
List of remote commands
Alphabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual
●
Index
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
13
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Preface
Documentation Overview
1.2 Documentation Overview
The user documentation for the R&S SMW consists of the following parts:
●
Getting started, printed manual
●
Online help system on the instrument, incl. tutorials
●
User manuals and online manual, see the product page
●
Service manual, provided on the internet for registrated users
●
Instrument security procedures, see the product page
●
General safety instructions, printed brochure
●
Release notes, see the product page (download > firmware)
●
Data sheet and brochures, see the product page (download > brochures and data
sheets)
●
Application notes, provided on the internet
You find the user documentation on the R&S SMW product page mainly at:
http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/product/SMW200A.html > "Downloads" > "Manuals"
Additional download paths are stated directly in the following abstracts of the documentation types.
Getting Started
Introduces the R&S SMW and describes how to set up and start working with the product. Includes basic operations, typical measurement examples, and general information, e.g. safety instructions, etc.
Online Help and Tutorials
The online help offers quick, context-sensitive access to the information needed for
operation and programming. It contains the description for the base unit and the software options.
The tutorials offer guided examples and demonstrations on operating the R&S SMW.
User Manual and Online Manual
Separate manuals are provided for the base unit and the software options:
●
Base unit manual
Contains the description of the graphical user interface, an introduction to remote
control, the description of all SCPI remote control commands, programming examples, and information on maintenance, instrument interfaces and error messages.
Includes the contents of the getting started manual.
●
Software option manuals
Describe the specific functions of an option. Basic information on operating the
R&S SMW is not included.
The online manual provides the contents of the user manual for immediate display on
the internet.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
14
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Preface
Conventions Used in the Documentation
Service Manual
Describes the performance test for checking the rated specifications, module replacement and repair, firmware update, troubleshooting and fault elimination, and contains
mechanical drawings and spare part lists.
The service manual is available for registered users on the global Rohde & Schwarz
information system (GLORIS).
Instrument Security Procedures
Deals with security issues when working with the R&S SMW in secure areas.
Data Sheets and Brochures
The data sheet contains the technical specifications of the R&S SMW. Brochures provide an overview of the instrument and deal with the specific characteristics, see http://
www.rohde-schwarz.com/product/SMW200A.html > "Download" > "Brochures and
Data Sheets".
General Safety Instructions
Contains basic safety instructions in English, Spanish, German and French.
Release Notes
Describes the firmware installation, new and modified features and fixed issues
according to the current firmware version. You find the latest version at:
http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/product/SMW200A.html > "Downloads" > "Firmware"
Application Notes, Application Cards, White Papers, etc.
These documents deal with special applications or background information on particular topics, see http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/appnotes.
1.3 Conventions Used in the Documentation
1.3.1 Typographical Conventions
The following text markers are used throughout this documentation:
Convention
Description
"Graphical user interface elements"
All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen, such as
dialog boxes, menus, options, buttons, and softkeys are enclosed by
quotation marks.
KEYS
Key names are written in capital letters.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
15
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Preface
Conventions Used in the Documentation
Convention
Description
File names, commands,
program code
File names, commands, coding samples and screen output are distinguished by their font.
Input
Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics.
Links
Links that you can click are displayed in blue font.
"References"
References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quotation marks.
1.3.2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions
When describing how to operate the instrument, several alternative methods may be
available to perform the same task. In this case, the procedure using the touchscreen
is described. Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using
an additionally connected mouse. The alternative procedure using the keys on the
instrument or the on-screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard
operating procedures.
The term "select" may refer to any of the described methods, i.e. using a finger on the
touchscreen, a mouse pointer in the display, or a key on the instrument or on a keyboard.
1.3.3 Notes on Screenshots
When describing the functions of the product, we use sample screenshots. These
screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and
possible interdependencies between parameters. The shown values may not represent
realistic test situations.
The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product, that is: with all options installed. Thus, some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your particular product configuration.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
16
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Welcome to the 3GPP FDD Digital Standard
2 Welcome to the 3GPP FDD Digital Standard
The R&S SMW-K42/-K83 are firmware applications that add functionality to generate
signals in accordance with the WCDMA standard 3GPP FDD.
WCDMA (Wideband CDMA) describes a group of mobile radio communication technologies, the details of which differ greatly. The R&S SMW supports the 3GPP FDD standard developed by the 3GPP ("3rd Generation Partnership Project") standardization
committee.
The R&S SMW generates the 3GPP FDD signals in a combination of realtime mode
(enhanced channels) and arbitrary waveform mode. Channel coding and simulation of
bit and block errors can be activated for the enhanced channels of Release 99 and for
H-Sets 1-5 generated in realtime. Channel coding can also be activated for HSDPA/
HSPA+ H-Sets and all HSUPA/HSPA+ FRC channels which are generated in arbitrary
wave mode. Data lists can also be used for the data and TPC fields. The enhanced
state of realtime channels can be switched off to generate specific test scenarios. In
arbitrary waveform mode, the signal is first calculated and then output.
The R&S SMW simulates 3GPP FDD at the physical channel level and also at the
transport layer level for all channels for which channel coding can be activated.
3GPP FDD/HSDPA/HSUPA/HSPA+ key features
●
Support of all physical channels of 3GPP FDD, HSDPA, HSUPA and HSPA+
●
HSDPA H-Sets 1 to 12 with channel coding; user-definable H-Set configuration
●
HSUPA fixed reference channels with channel coding and HARQ feedback simulation
●
Realtime generation of P-CCPCH and up to three DPCHs in downlink
●
One UE in realtime in uplink, up to 128 additional mobile stations via ARB
●
External dynamic power control of a code channel possible
●
Support of UL-DTX,DC-HSDPA, 4C-HSDPA and 8C-HSDPA
Functional overview of option R&S SMW-K42
The following list gives an overview of the functions provided by the option R&S SMWK42 for generating a 3GPP FDD signal:
●
Configuration of up to 4 base stations and 4 user equipment.
●
Combination of realtime mode (enhanced channels) and arbitrary waveform mode
●
All special channels and up to 512 channels on the downlink, except HSDPA,
HSUPA and HSPA+
●
Various test models and pre-defined settings for the uplink and the downlink
●
Modulation 16QAM and 64QAM (downlink) for configuring high-speed channels in
continuous mode (test model 5&6, HSDPA)
●
Clipping for reducing the crest factor
●
Misuse TPC" parameter for varying the original normal transmit power over time
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
17
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
●
Welcome to the 3GPP FDD Digital Standard
Simulation of up to 128 additional user equipment
The following functions are provided specifically for the receiver test:
●
Realtime generation of up to 4 code channels with the option of using data lists for
the data and TPC fields
●
Channel coding of the reference measurement channels, AMR and BCH in realtime
●
Feeding through of bit errors (to test a BER tester) and block errors (to test a BLER
tester)
●
Simulation of orthogonal channel noise (OCNS in accordance with TS 25.101)
●
Presettings in accordance with 3GPP specifications
●
HSDPA Downlink in continuous mode (test model 5&6 for TX tests)
Functional overview of the extension R&S SMW-K83
Enhanced MS/BS tests incl. HSDPA extends the 3GPP FDD signal generation with
simulation of high speed channels in the downlink (HS-SCCH, HS-PDSCH) and the
uplink (HS-DPCCH) and with dynamic power control in real time. HSDPA (high speed
downlink packet access) mode enhances the 3GPP FDD standard by data channels
with high data rates especially for multi media applications.
The following functions are provided for enhanced BS/MS tests including HSDPA:
●
HSDPA uplink
●
HSDPA downlink (packet mode and H-Set mode without CPC, 64QAM and MIMO)
●
Dynamic Power Control
●
Predefined and user-definable H-Sets
●
Assistance in the setting of the appropriate sequence length for arbitrary waveform
mode
HSUPA extends the 3GPP FDD signal generation with full HSUPA (high speed uplink
packet access) support. Option K59 3GPP FDD HSPA+ extends the HSDPA and/or
HSUPA signal generation with HSPA+ features in the downlink and uplink
The following functions are provided for HSUPA:
●
HSUPA Downlink (RX measurements on 3GPP FDD UEs with correct timing )
●
HSUPA Uplink (RX measurements on 3GPP FDD Node BS supporting HSUPA)
●
HSUPA HARQ Feedback support
The following functions are provided for HSPA+:
●
Downlink 64QAM with channel coding
●
Uplink 16QAM (4PAM)
●
Downlink MIMO
●
Uplink ACK/PCI/CQI feedback for downlink MIMO and/or Dual Cell HSDPA
●
CPC in downlink (HS-SCCH less operation, Enhanced F-DPCH) and uplink (ULDTX, Uplink DPCCH slot format 4)
●
Support for the generation of 3i OCNS and for randomly varying modulation and
the number of HS-PDSCH channels in H-Set over time (type 3i enhanced performance requirements tests).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
18
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Welcome to the 3GPP FDD Digital Standard
Scope
This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the application provides, including remote control operation.
All functions not discussed in this manual are the same as in the base unit and are
described in the R&S SMW user manual. The latest version is available at the
R&S SMW product page >"Downloads" > "Manuals".
Installation
You can find detailed installation instructions in the delivery of the option or in the
R&S SMW Service Manual.
2.1 Accessing the 3GPP FDD Dialog
To open the dialog with 3GPP FDD settings
► In the block diagram of the R&S SMW, select "Baseband > 3GPP FDD".
A dialog box opens that display the provided general settings.
The signal generation is not started immediately. To start signal generation with the
default settings, select "State > On".
2.2 Scope
Tasks (in manual or remote operation) that are also performed in the base unit in the
same way are not described here.
In particular, this includes:
●
Managing settings and data lists, like storing and loading settings, creating and
accessing data lists, or accessing files in a particular directory.
●
Information on regular trigger, marker and clock signals, and filter settings, if appropriate.
●
General instrument configuration, such as checking the system configuration, configuring networks and remote operation
●
Using the common status registers
For a description of such tasks, see the R&S SMW user manual.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
19
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
3 About the 3GPP FDD Options
Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in the 3GPP FDD
modulation system is provided here for better understanding of the required configuration settings.
The following table gives an overview of parameters of the modulation system 3GPP
FDD.
Table 3-1: Parameters of the modulation system
Parameter
Value
Chip rate
3.84 Mcps
Channel types
Downlink:
●
Primary Common Pilot Channel (P-CPICH)
●
Secondary Common Pilot Channel (S-CPICH)
●
Primary Sync Channel (P-SCH)
●
Secondary Sync Channel (S-SCH)
●
Primary Common Control Phys. Channel (P-CCPCH)
●
Secondary Common Control Phys. Channel (S-CCPCH)
●
Page Indication Channel (PICH)
●
Acquisition Indication Channel (AICH)
●
Access Preamble Acquisition Indication Channel (AP-AICH)
●
Collision Detection Acquisition Indication Channel (CD-AICH)
●
Phys. Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH)
●
Dedicated Physical Control Channel (DL-DPCCH)
●
Dedicated Phys. Channel (DPCH)
●
High Speed Shared Control Channel (HS-SCCH)
●
High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel (HS-PDSCH), Modulation
QPSK, 16 QAM or 64QAM
●
HSUPA channels (E-AGCH, E-RGCH, E-HICH, F-DPCH)
Uplink:
●
Phys. Random Access Channel (PRACH)
●
Phys. Common Packet Channel (PCPCH)
●
Dedicated Physical Control Channel (DPCCH)
●
Dedicated Physical Data Channel (DPDCH)
●
High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel (HS-DPCCH)
●
E-DCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH)
●
E-DCH dedicated physical data channel (E-DPDCH)
Symbol rates
7.5 ksps, 15 ksps, 30 ksps to 960 ksps depending on the channel type (downlink)
15 ksps, 30 ksps, 60 ksps to 1920 ksps depending on the channel type (uplink)
Channel count
In downlink 4 base stations each with up to 128 DPCHs and 11 special channels.
In uplink 4 user equipment either with PRACH or PCPCH or a combination of
DPCCH, up to 6 DPDCH, HS-DPCCH, E-DPCCH and up to 4 E-DPDCH channels.
Frame structure
Timeslot: 0.667 ms,
Subframe: 3 timeslots = 2 ms
Radio frame: 15 timeslots = 10 ms
The frame structure in symbols depends on the symbol rate.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
20
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Parameter
Value
Scrambling code
Downlink: 18 bit M sequence
Uplink: 25 bit M sequence in long mode and 8 bit M sequence in short mode
Channelization code for
most of the channel
types
"Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor Code (OVSF)" square matrix of dimension chip rate/symbol rate
3.1 Modulation System 3GPP FDD
The following block diagram shows the components of the 3GPP FDD transmission
system.
Figure 3-1: Components of the 3GPP FDD transmission system
3.1.1 Scrambling Code Generator
The scrambling code generator (previously called long code generator) is used to
scramble the chip sequence as a function of the transmitter.
Depending on the link direction and mode (long or short), the structure and initialization
regulation of the generator are different.
3.1.1.1
Downlink Scrambling Code Generator
This generator consists of a pair of shift registers from which the binary sequences for
inphase and orthogonal component of the scrambling code are determined. The Figure 3-2 shows that the I component is produced as EXOR operation of the LSB outputs, whereas the register contents are first masked and read out for the Q component
and then EXORed.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
21
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Table 3-2: Generator polynomials of the downlink scrambling code generators
Shift register 1
x18+x7+1
Shift register 2
x18+x10+x7+x5+1
Figure 3-2: Structure of downlink scrambling code generator
The shift registers are initialized by loading shift register 1 with "0...01" and shift register 2 completely with "1". In addition, shift register 1 is wound forward by n cycles, n
being the scrambling code number or Scrambling Code (SC) for short.
After a cycle time of one radio frame the generators are reset, i.e. the above initialization is carried out again.
3.1.1.2
Uplink Scrambling Code Generator
In the uplink, a differentiation is made between two SC modes. The long SC, on the
one hand, can be used for all types of channel. The short SC, on the other hand, can
be used as an alternative to the long SC for all channels except PRACH and PCPCH.
Uplink long scrambling code
Principally, the code generator of the long SC in the uplink is of the same structure as
the SC in the downlink. However, the generator polynomials of the shift registers and
the type of initialization are different.
Table 3-3: Generator polynomials of the uplink long scrambling code generator
Shift register 1
x25+x3+1
Shift register 2
x25+x3+x2+x+1
The shift registers are initialized by allocating 1 to shift register 1 bit number 24 and the
binary form of the scrambling code number n to bits 23 to 0. Shift register 2 is completely loaded with "1".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
22
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
The read-out positions for the Q component are defined such that they correspond to
an IQ offset of 16.777.232 cycles.
After a cycle time of one radio frame the generators are reset, i.e. the above initialization is carried out again.
Uplink short scrambling code
The code generator of the short SC in the uplink consists of a total of 3 coupled shift
registers.
Figure 3-3: Structure of uplink short scrambling code generator
Table 3-4: Generator polynomials of uplink short scrambling code generator
Shift register 1 (binary)
x8+x7+x5+x4+1
Shift register 2 (binary)
x8+x7+x5+x+1
Shift register 3 (quaternary)
x8+x5+3x3+x2+2x+1
The output sequences of the two binary shift registers are weighted with factor 2 and
added to the output sequence of the quaternary shift register (Modulo 4 addition). The
resulting quaternary output sequence is mapped into the binary complex level by the
mapper block.
For initialization of the three 8-bit shift registers (in a modified way) the binary form of
the 24-bit short SC number n is used, for details see 3GPP TS 25 213, Spreading and
Modulation.
Table 3-5: Mapping of the quaternary output sequence into the binary IQ level
zv(n)
Sv(n)
0
+1 + j1
1
-1 + j1
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
23
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
zv(n)
Sv(n)
2
-1 - j1
3
+1 - j1
Preamble scrambling code generator
When generating the preambles of the PRACH and PCPCH a special SC is used. It is
based on the Long SC described under a), however only the I component is taken and
subsequently a pointer (ej(PI/4 + PI/4 * k) , k=0 to 4095) modulated upon it.
Modification of the long and short scrambling code output sequence
The scrambling code sequence of the Q component is modified as standard to reduce
the crest factor of the signal. Zero-crossings can thus be avoided for every second
cycle. (This method is often called "HPSK").
For details see 3GPP TS 25 213, Spreading and Modulation. The R&S SMW makes
use of a decimation factor of 2.
3.1.2 Scrambling Unit
In the scrambling unit, the output of the scrambling code generator is linked with
spread symbols. If the input signal and the scrambling code signal are interpreted as
complex signal (Ci , Cq , SCi , SCq' ∈ { -1, +1 }), the output signal is a complex multiplication of the two signals:
Si + j Sq = (Ci + j Cq) * (SCi + j SCq')
and the following equations apply
Si = CiSCi – CqSCq'
Sq = CiSCq' + CqSCi
The signal thus obtained can be interpreted as a QPSK signal with the following constellation diagram:
Figure 3-4: Constellation diagram of a channel with 0 dB power
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
24
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
There are auxiliary conditions for some types of channels that may result in different
constellation diagrams. If, for instance, symbols of the SCH are coded, a BPSK constellation is obtained without the scrambling unit.
Furthermore, with HSDPA and HSPA+, the higher order modulations 4PAM, 16QAM
and 64QAM were introduced.
3.1.3 Channelization Code Generator
The channelization code generator cyclically outputs a channel-specific bit pattern. The
length of the cycle corresponds to the period of the source symbol to be spread, i.e.
the number of bits corresponds to the spread factor. The spreading sequence for the I
and Q branch is identical (real value). Spreading is a simple EXOR operation.
Two different channelization code generators are used depending on the type of channel:
Channelization code generator for all channels except SCH
Due to this channelization code the channel separation takes place in the sum signal.
The channelization code number is the line of an orthogonal spreading matrix which is
generated according to an iterative scheme ("OVSF").
Channelization code generator SCH
This generator replaces the one described above if the synchronization code symbol of
the SCH channels is spread.
The spreading matrix is replaced by a method that forms the spreading sequence from
a Hadamard sequence and a statistical sequence. For details see 3GPP TS 25 213.
3.1.4 Data Source
The data and TPC fields of the enhanced channels (realtime channels) can be filled
from data lists containing data defined by the user. This allows user information from
the physical layer or from higher layers such as the transport layer to be introduced
into the signal generation process.
The choice of data sources is crucially important for the signal characteristics. The constellation diagram and the crest factor in particular are modeled to a great extent by a
suitable choice of data.
3.1.5 Slot and Frame Builder
The bits from the data source are first entered into a frame structure. The frames are
made up of three hierarchical levels:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
25
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Table 3-6: Hierarchical structure of 3GPP FDD frames
Hierarchy
Length in ms
Remarks
Timeslot
0,667
Subframe
2 ms
One subframe consists of 3 timeslots.
Radio frame
10
After a radio frame, pilot symbols are repeated. One radio
frame consists of 15 timeslots.
A frame is also the length of a scrambling code cycle. Frames
are the basic unit.
The sequence length is stated in radio frames.
The configuration of the timeslots depends on the channel type and symbol rate. The
following components are distinguished:
●
Pilot sequence
The pilot sequence characterizes the timeslot position within the radio frame and
also depends on the symbol rate, transmit diversity and the pilot length parameter.Channel types DPCH, S-CCPCH, DL-DPCCH, DPCCH, PRACH and PCPCH
have a pilot sequence.
The pilot sequence cannot be changed by the user.
●
Synchronization code symbol
The synchronization code symbol is the only symbol of the SCH.
●
TPC symbol
This symbol is used to control the transmit power. It is used in DPCH, DL-DPCCH
and DPCCH.
A bit pattern for the sequence of TPC symbols can be indicated as a channel-specific pattern.
●
Data symbols
These symbols carry the user information and are fed from the data source. They
are used in DPCH, P-CCPCH, S-CCPCH, PDSCH, E-AGCH, E-RGCH, E-HICH,
DPDCH, PRACH, PCPCH, HS-PDSCH and E-DPDCH.
●
Signature
The signature is used in PRACH and PCPCH. 16 fixed bit patterns are defined of
which the user may select one.
●
TFCI
The "Transport Format Combination Indicator" is used in DPCH/DPCCH if the state
is set to On. In this case, a code sequence with the length of 30 is defined using
this value and distributed among 15 subsequent timeslots. In PRACH and PCPCH,
the TFCI field is provided as standard.
●
FBI
Feedback indication bits are only used in DPCCH and PCPCH.
3.1.6 Timing Offset
The symbol stream can be shifted in time relative to the other channels. For this purpose a timing offset can be entered into the channel table, stating the range of shifting
in multiples of 256 chips. Since the generator does not generate infinite symbol
streams like a real-time system, this offset is implemented as a rotation.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
26
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Example:
DPCH 30 ksps, 1 timeslot, timing offset = 2;
2 x 256 chips = 512 chip offset;
4 data symbols shifting at a symbol rate of 30 ksps (1 symbol corresponds to 3.84
Mcps / 30 ksps = 128 chips).
previously:
11
11
11
11
00
01
10
11
00
10
01
11
11
01
00
01
10
11
01
00
00
11
11
11
11
00
01
10
11
00
10
01
11
11
01
00
01
afterwards:
10
11
01
The use of the timing offset usually causes a reduction of the crest factor of the total
signal, since it is not always the same spreading chips (channelization chips) CH and
scramble chips SCi/SCq' that are applied to the pilot sequences of the channels.
3.1.7 Demultiplexer
In the downlink, the symbol stream is divided into two bit streams Di and Dq prior to
processing in the spreading unit. For example, if QPSK modulation is used for a channel, the symbol stream is divided by allocating bits 1, 3, 5, to 2n-1 to the in-phase bit
stream Di, and bits 2, 4, 6, 2n to the quadrature bit stream Dq.
For the above example with timing offset:
Di = 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0
Dq = 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1
(left-hand bit is always the first one in the time sequence)
In the uplink, independent data are used for the two paths.
PRACH/PCPCH:
Preamble : signature parallel to I and Q
Message part : data to I, pilot, TPC and TFCI to Q
DPCCH/E-DPCCH:
all bits to I, Q always unused
DPDCH/HS-DPCCH/EDPDCH:
all bits are always to I or Q (dependent on channel number), the other
path is unused.
3.1.8 Power Control
After spreading and scrambling, a channel-specific power factor p is applied to the signal. A value of -6 dB therefore results in half the level (or ¼ power) and the following
diagram (DPCH):
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
27
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Figure 3-5: Constellation diagram of a channel with –6 dB power
3.1.9 Summation and Filtering
After application of the channel power, the components of the individual channels are
summed up.
The constellation diagram of the sum signal is obtained by superposition of the diagrams of the individual channels. If the signal consists of two channels with a power of
-6 dB and -12 dB and each channel contains independent source data (DPCH), the following constellation diagram is obtained:
Figure 3-6: Constellation diagram of a 3GPP W-CDMA signal with two DPCH channels
3.1.10 Multicode
3GPP FDD supports multicode transmission for downlink-dedicated physical channels
(DPCH).
This form of transmission is used for channels intended for the same receiver, i.e.
those receivers that belong to a radio link. The first channel of this group is used as a
master channel.
Shared parts (pilot, TPC and TCFI) are spread for all channels using the spreading
code of the master channel.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
28
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Instead of changing the spreading code within a slot several times, the master code
rather than the shared parts can be sent at higher power. The other channels then
have to be blanked out correspondingly.
3.1.11 Orthogonal Channel Noise (OCNS)
With Orthogonal Channel Noise, a practical downlink signal is generated to test the
maximum input levels of user equipment in accordance with standard specifications.
This simulates the data and control signals of the other orthogonal channels in the
downlink. 3GPP TS 25.101 contains a precise definition of the required appearance of
the OCNS signal.
Four different OCNS scenarios are defined in the standard; one "standard" scenario,
two scenarios for HSDPA test cases and one scenario for type 3i enhanced performance requirements tests according to 3GPP TS34.121-1 ("other user's channels").
When activating OCNS and depending on the selected OCNS mode, different channel
groups with different presetting are assigned as in the following tables. These channels
cannot be edited in the channel table.
3.1.11.1
Standard, HSDPA and HSDPA2 modes
For the "Standard", "HSDPA" and "HSDPA2" modes, the OCNS channels are all normal DPCHs. The symbol rate is set at 30 kps and the pilot length to 8 bits.
The powers of the OCNS channel outputs are relative. In the R&S SMW, the power of
the OCNS component is automatically set so that OCNS channels supplement the
remaining channels in base station 1 to make a total power of 0 dB (linear 1).
It is not possible to adapt the OCNS power if the linear power of the remaining channels is >1, this will produce an error message. The OCNS channels are then given the
maximum power (all -80 dB).
The "Total Power" display is updated after automatic calculation of the output; it is not
possible to use "Adjust Total Power" to make the setting.
Table 3-7: Defined settings for the OCNS signal in base station 1 in Standard mode
Chan. code
Timing offset
(x256Tchip)
Level setting
(dB)
Channel type
Symbol rate
Pilot length
2
86
-1
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
11
134
-3
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
17
52
-3
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
23
45
-5
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
31
143
-2
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
38
112
-4
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
47
59
-8
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
55
23
-7
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
29
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Chan. code
Timing offset
(x256Tchip)
Level setting
(dB)
Channel type
Symbol rate
Pilot length
62
1
-4
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
69
88
-6
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
78
30
-5
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
85
18
-9
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
94
30
-10
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
125
61
-8
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
113
128
-6
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
119
143
0
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
Table 3-8: Defined settings for the OCNS signal in base station 1 in HSDPA mode
Channelization
code at SF=128
Relative Level
setting (dB)
Channel type
Symbol rate
Pilot length
122
0
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
123
-2
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
124
-2
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
125
-4
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
126
-1
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
127
-3
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
Table 3-9: Defined settings for the OCNS signal in base station 1 in HSDPA2 mode
3.1.11.2
Channelization
code at SF=128
Relative Level
setting (dB)
Channel type
Symbol rate
Pilot length
4
0
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
5
-2
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
6
-4
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
7
-1
DPCH
30 ksps
8 bit
3i OCNS mode
(requires option R&S SMW-K83)
In the "3i" OCNS mode, 16 DPCH channels are inserted in the BS 1 channel according
to 3GPP TS34.121-1, chapter E.5E.
According to 3GPP TS34.121-1, table E.5E.1.3, the channelization code of each of
these channels changes randomly on a symbol-by-symbol basis between two possible
values.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
30
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
The power control sequence modeling according to 3GPP TS34.121-1, chapter E.5E.3
is applied to these channels; the power relationship between these channels is according to 3GPP TS34.121-1, table E.5E.1.3 only during the very first slot, and can deviate
in the subsequent slots up to a certain range, but the total power of these channels is
maintained constant (by normalization).
If the "3i" OCNS mode is activated (and the "3GPP FDD > State > On"), the OCNS
channels are automatically leveled in order to have a total power of 0 dB for all channels of BS 1.
Table 3-10: Defined settings for the OCNS signal in base station 1 in 3i mode
Slot format
Symbol Rate,
kbps
First Ch. Code of
the channel
Second Ch. Code
of the channel
Relative Power,
dB
(prior to the 0 dB
adjustment)
10
30
2
108
-1.7
10
30
3
103
-2.7
10
30
5
109
-3.5
10
30
6
118
-0.8
10
30
90
4
-6.2
10
30
94
123
-4.6
10
30
96
111
-2.3
10
30
98
106
-4.1
10
30
99
100
-3.1
10
30
101
113
-5.1
12
60
52
44
0.0
10
30
110
124
-4.6
10
30
114
115
-4.8
10
30
116
126
-4.8
12
60
60
46
-1.1
10
30
125
95
-4.1
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
31
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Refer to Chapter 4.13.9, "Randomly Varying Modulation And Number Of Codes (Type
3i) Settings", on page 118 for description of the further settings required for the 3i
Enhanced Performance Requirements tests according to 3GPP TS34.121-1.
3.1.12 HARQ Feedback
The HARQ Feedback functionality extends the basic 3GPP FDD option in order to
meet the requirements defined in 3GPP TS 25.141, chapter 8.12 and 8.13.
This allows the user to dynamically control the transmission of the HSUPA fixed reference channels (FRC 1-7), the HSPA+ fixed reference channel (FPC 8) and the user
defined fixed reference channels. An ACK from the base station leads to the transmission of a new packet while a NACK forces the instrument to retransmit the packet with
a new channel coding configuration (i.e. new redundancy version RV) of the concerned
HARQ process.
3.1.12.1
Limitations
Although an arbitrary data source can be selected, the same user data is used for all
HARQ processes and for all retransmissions.
Example:
If FRC4 is configured and the data source is set to PN9, then the first 5076 bits of the
PN9 are used as input for all four HARQ processes, regardless of which retransmission is performed. Note that the bitstream after channel coding of course is different for
different retransmissions due to different redundancy versions.
Furthermore, "DTX-Mode" and "Bit-Error-Insertion/Block-Error-Insertion" are not available in this mode.
3.1.12.2
Setup
If an instrument with fading simulation is available, no more test equipment is needed
in order to fulfill the test setup described in 3GPP TS 25.141, Annex B.3.4.
As the instrument has no RF input available, the HARQ feedback from the base station
is expected as a TTL signal. The instrument provides two input connectors for this signal, the LEVATT connector on the external AUX I/O BNC adapter board R&S SMx-Z5
and the USER 1 connector on the instrument. Use the parameter Connector (HARQ)
to enable the currently used in each baseband.
A high level (TTL) is interpreted as an ACK, while a low level corresponds to a NACK.
Use the parameter ACK Definition (HARQ) to re-defined it.
3.1.12.3
Timing
In general, the ACK/NACK feedback from the base station should be available at the
selected instruments connector (LEVATT or the USER 1) with the same timing the E-
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
32
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
HICH is transmitted. The instrument will read out this port at time TSMx after the start of
the HARQ process the feedback is related to (see Figure 3-7). The user is able to
adjust this time via the parameter Additional User Delay parameter. The signal should
be constant on this instrument's input for 0.5 ms before and after the defined point in
time.
As it probably takes some time for the base station to be synchronized to the signal
transmitted from the instrument, the ACK/NACK feedback should be NACK during this
period, in order to force the instrument to retransmit the packets, until the first packet is
read out correctly from the base station.
Figure 3-7: Timing diagram for TTI 10ms, tau_dpch = 0, tau_E-HICH = -7slots
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
33
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
3.1.13 HS-SCCH less operation
HS-SCCH less operation is a special HSDPA mode of operation which reduces the
HS-SCCH overhead and reduces UE battery consumption. It changes the conventional
structure of HSDPA data reception. In HSDPA as defined from 3GPP release 5
onwards, UE is supposed to read continuously HS-SCCH where data allocations are
being signaled. The UE is being addressed via a UE specific identity (16 bit H-RNTI /
HSDPA Radio Network Temporary Identifier) on HS-SCCH. As soon as the UE detects
relevant control information on HS-SCCH it switches to the associated HS-PDSCH
resources and receives the data packet.
This scheme is fundamentally changed in HS-SCCH less operation and HS-SCCH less
operation is optimized for services with relatively small packets, e.g. VoIP.
In HS-SCCH less operation mode, the base station can decide for each packet again
whether to apply HS-SCCH less operation or not, i.e. conventional operation is always
possible.
The first transmission of a data packet on HS-DSCH is done without an associated HSSCCH. The first transmission always uses QPSK and redundancy version Xrv = 0.
Only four pre-defined transport formats can be used so the UE can blindly detect the
correct format. The four possible transport formats are configured by higher layers.
Only predefined channelization codes can be used for this operation mode and are
configured per UE by higher layers: the parameter HS-PDSCH code index provides the
index of the first HS-PDSCH code to use. For each of the transport formats, it is configured whether one or two channelization codes are required.
In order to allow detection of the packets on HS-DSCH, the HS-DSCH CRC (Cyclic
Redundancy Check) becomes UE specific based on the 16 bit HRNTI. This is called
CRC attachment method 2 (CRC attachment method 1 is conventional as of 3GPP
release 5).
In case of successful reception of the packet, the UE will send an ACK on HS-DPCCH.
If the packet was not received correctly, the UE will send nothing.
If the packet is not received in the initial transmission, the base station may retransmit
it. The number of retransmissions is limited to two in HS-SCCH less operation.
In contrast to the initial transmission, the retransmissions are using HS-SCCH signaling. However, the coding of the HS-SCCH deviates from release 5, since the bits on
HS-SCCH are re-interpreted. This is called HS-SCCH type 2. The conventional HSSCCH as of 3GPP release 5 is called HS-SCCH type 1.
3.1.13.1
HS-SCCH Type 2
The table below gives a comparison of the HS-SCCH Type 1 (normal operation) and
HS-SCCH Type 2 (Less Operation) formats.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
34
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Table 3-11: Comparison of HS-SCCH Type 1 and Type 2
HS-SCCH Type 1 (normal operation)
HS-SCCH Type 2 (less operation)
Channelization code set information (7 bits)
Channelization code set information (7 bits)
Modulation scheme information (1 bit)
Modulation scheme information (1 bit)
Transport block size information ( 6 bits)
Special Information type (6 bits)
HARQ process information (3 bits)
Special Information (7 bits)
Redundancy and constellation version (3 bits)
UE identity ( 16 bits)
New data indicator (1 bit)
UE identity ( 16 bits)
The Special Information type on HS-SCCH type 2 must be set to 111110 to indicate
HS-SCCH less operation. The 7 bits Special information then contains:
●
2 bit transport block size information (one of the four possible transport block sizes
as configured by higher layers)
●
3 bit pointer to the previous transmission of the same transport block (to allow soft
combining with the initial transmission)
●
1 bit indicator for the second or third transmission
●
1 bit reserved.
QPSK is also used for the retransmissions. The redundancy version Xrv for the second
and third transmissions shall be equal to 3 and 4, respectively.
For the retransmissions, also HS-DSCH CRC attachment method 2 is used.
ACK or NACK are reported by the UE for the retransmitted packets.
3.1.13.2
HS-SCCH Type 2 Fixed Reference Channel: H-Set 7
In order to support HS-SCCH Type 2 (Less Operation) testing, a fixed reference channel has been introduced. H-Set 7 is specified as reference test channel for HSDPA test
cases.
The H-Set 7 consists of one HS-PDSCH and its parameterization and coding chain is
based on 1 code with QPSK modulation and one HARQ process.
3.1.14 Higher Order Modulation
3.1.14.1
64QAM in downlink
With the possibility to use 64QAM in downlink, HSPA+ can achieve downlink data rates
of 21 Mbps. This theoretical peak data rate (physical channel bit rate) with 64QAM is
calculated as follow:
Peak data rate (64QAM) = 15 [codes] * 2880 bits/ 2 ms [subframe] = 21.6 MBps
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
35
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
3.1.14.2
64QAM Fixed Reference Channel: H-Set 8
In order to support 64QAM testing, a fixed reference channel has been introduced. HSet 8 is specified as reference test channel for HSPA+ test cases.
The H-Set 8 parameterization and coding chain is based on 15 codes with 64QAM
modulation. Six Hybrid ARQ processes are used, and HS-DSCH is continuously transmitted.
3.1.14.3
16QAM in uplink
With the possibility to use 16QAM on E-DCH (Enhanced Dedicated Channel) in uplink,
HSPA+ can achieve uplink peak data rates of 11.5 Mbps. A new uplink UE category 7
has been introduced which supports 16QAM in addition to BSPK.
Uplink transmission in HSPA+ is based on IQ multiplexing of E-DPDCH (Enhanced
Dedicated Physical Data Channel) physical channels as in HSUPA of 3GPP release 6.
In fact, the 16QAM constellation is made up of two orthogonal 4PAM (pulse amplitude
modulation) constellations. In case of 4PAM modulation, a set of two consecutive
binary symbols nk, nk+1 is converted to a real valued sequence following the mapping
described in the table below.
Table 3-12: Mapping of E-DPDCH with 4PAM modulation
nk, nk+1
00
01
10
11
Mapped real value
0.4472
1.3416
-0.4477
-1.3416
This results in the following symbol mapping:
An E-DPDCH may use BPSK or 4PAM modulation symbols.
3.1.14.4
16QAM Fixed Reference Channel: FRC 8
To support 16QAM (4PAM) testing in the uplink, a E-DPDCH fixed reference channel
(FRC 8) has been introduced.
The FRC 8 parameterization and channel coding is based on four Physical Channel
Codes (2xSF2 and 2xSF4) with overall symbol rate of 2x960 + 2x1920 ksps, 4PAM
modulation and E-DCH TTI of 2 ms. Eight Hybrid ARQ processes are used.
3.1.15 MIMO in HSPA+
HSPA+ uses full MIMO approach including spatial multiplexing. The approach is called
D-TxAA (Double Transmit Antenna Array). It is only applicable for the High Speed
Downlink Shared Channel, the HS-DSCH.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
36
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
The figure below shows the basic principle of the 2x2 approach. The figure is taken
from 3GPP TS 25.214.
Figure 3-8: MIMO for HSPA+
With D-TxAA, two independent data streams (transport blocks) can be transmitted
simultaneously over the radio channel over the same WCDMA channelization codes.
Each transport block is processed and channel coded separately. After spreading and
scrambling, precoding based on weight factors is applied to optimize the signal for
transmission over the mobile radio channel.
Four precoding weights w1- w4 are available. The first stream is multiplied with w1 and
w2, the second stream is multiplied with w3 and w4. The weights can take the following
values:
Precoding weight w1 is always fixed, and only w2 can be selected by the base station.
Weights w3 and w4 are automatically derived from w1 and w2, because they have to
be orthogonal.
3.1.15.1
D-TxAA Feedback signaling: PCI and CQI
D-TxAA requires a feedback signaling from the UE to assist the base station in taking
the right decision in terms of modulation and coding scheme and precoding weight
selection. The UE has to determine the preferred primary precoding vector for transport block 1 consisting of w1 and w2. Since w1 is fixed, the feedback message only
consists of a proposed value for w2. This feedback is called precoding control information (PCI). The UE also recommends whether one or two streams can be supported in the current channel situation. In case dual stream transmission is possible, the
secondary precoding vector consisting of weights w3 and w4 is inferred in the base
station, because it has to be orthogonal to the first precoding vector with w1 and w2.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
37
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Thus, the UE does not have to report it explicitly. The UE also indicates the optimum
modulation and coding scheme for each stream. This report is called channel quality
indicator (CQI).
Based on the composite PCI/CQI reports, the base station scheduler decides whether
to schedule one or two data streams to the UE and what packet sizes (transport block
sizes) and modulation schemes to use for each stream.
3.1.15.2
MIMO downlink control channel support
In order to support MIMO operation, changes to the HSDPA downlink control channel
have become necessary, i.e. the HS-SCCH.
There is a new HS-SCCH Type 3 for MIMO operation defined. The table below gives a
comparison of the HS-SCCH Type 1 and Type 3 formats.
HS-SCCH Type 1
HS-SCCH Type 3
MIMO
(normal operation)
One transport block
Two transports blocks
Channelization code set
information (7 bits)
Channelization code set
information (7 bits)
Channelization code set information (7 bits)
Modulation scheme information (1 bit)
Modulation scheme and
number of transport blocks
Transport block size informa- information (3 bits)
tion (6 bits)
Precoding weight information (2 bits)
HARQ process information
(3 bits)
Redundancy and constellation version(3 bits)
New data indicator (1 bit)
UE identity ( 16 bits)
Modulation scheme and number of transport
blocks information (3 bits)
Precoding weight information for primary
transport block (2 bits)
Transport block size information for primary
transport block (6 bits)
Transport block size information(6 bits)
Transport block size information for secondary transport block (6 bits)
HARQ process information
(4 bits)
HARQ process information (4 bits)
Redundancy and constellation version (2 bits)
UE identity ( 16 bits)
Redundancy and constellation version for
primary transport block (2 bits)
Redundancy and constellation version for
secondary transport block (2 bits)
UE identity ( 16 bits)
The "Precoding weight info for the primary transport block" contains the information on
weight factor w2 as described above. Weight factors w1, w3, and w4 are derived
accordingly. The number of transport blocks transmitted and the modulation scheme
information are jointly coded as shown in Table 3-13.
Table 3-13: Interpretation of "Modulation scheme and number of transport blocks info" sent on HSSCCH
Modulation scheme +
number of transport
blocks info (3 bits)
Modulation for primary
transport block
Modulation for secondary transport block
Number of transport
blocks
111
16QAM
16QAM
2
110
16QAM
QPSK
2
101
64QAM
n/a
1
64QAM
QPSK
2
16QAM
n.a.
1
100
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
38
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
3.1.15.3
Modulation scheme +
number of transport
blocks info (3 bits)
Modulation for primary
transport block
Modulation for secondary transport block
Number of transport
blocks
011
QPSK
QPSK
2
010
64QAM
64QAM
2
001
64QAM
16QAM
2
000
QPSK
n.a.
1
Redundancy Version
Redundancy versions for the primary transport block and for the secondary transport
block are signaled. Four redundancy version values are possible (unlike HSDPA in
3GPP release 5 where eight values for the redundancy version could be signaled).
3.1.15.4
HARQ Processes
Also the signaling of the HARQ processes differs from HSDPA in 3GPP release 5. In
3GPP release 5, up to eight HARQ processes can be signaled. A minimum of six
HARQ processes needs to be configured to achieve continuous data transmission.
Similarly, in MIMO with dual stream transmission, a minimum of twelve HARQ processes would be needed to achieve continuous data transmission.
Each HARQ process has independent acknowledgements and retransmissions. In
theory, HARQ processes on both streams could run completely independently from
one another. This would however increase the signaling overhead quite significantly (to
8 bits), since each possible combination of HARQ processes would need to be
addressed.
To save signaling overhead, a restriction is introduced: HARQ processes are only signaled for the primary transport block within 4 bits, the HARQ process for the secondary
transport block is derived from that according to a fixed rule; according to
3GPP TS 25.212. Thus, there is a one-to-one mapping between the HARQ process
used for the primary transport block and the HARQ process used for the secondary
transport block. The relation is shown in the table below for the example of 12 HARQ
processes configured.
Table 3-14: Combinations of HARQ process numbers for dual stream transmission (12 HARQ processes configured)
HARQ process number on primary stream
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
HARQ process number on secondary stream
6
7
8
9
10
11
0
1
2
3
4
5
Only an even number of HARQ processes is allowed to be configured with MIMO operation.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
39
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
3.1.15.5
MIMO uplink control channel support
Also the uplink control channel for HSDPA operation is affected by MIMO, i.e. the HSDPCCH (High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel). In addition to CQI reporting as already defined from 3GPP release 5 onwards, PCI reporting for precoding
feedback is introduced. Channel coding is done separately for the composite precoding
control indication (PCI) / channel quality indication (CQI) and for HARQ-ACK (acknowledgement or negative acknowledgement information). The figure below shows the
principle.
Figure 3-9: Channel coding for HS-DPCCH (MIMO mode)
The 10 bits of the HARQ-ACK messages are interpreted according to 3GPP TS 25.212
(see table below). ACK/NACK information is provided for the primary and for the secondary transport block.
Table 3-15: Interpretation of HARQ-ACK in MIMO operation (non DC-HSDPA case)
HARQ-ACK message to be transmitted
w0
w1
w2
w3
w4
w5
w6
w7
w8
w9
HARQ-ACK in response to a single scheduled transport block
ACK
1
NACK
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
HARQ-ACK in response to two scheduled transport blocks
Response to primary
transport block
Response to secondary
transport block
ACK
ACK
ACK
NACK
NACK
NACK
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
ACK
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
NACK
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
PRE/POST indication
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
40
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
PRE
0
POST
3.1.15.6
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
CQI Reports: Type A and Type B
In MIMO case, two types of CQI reports shall be supported:
●
Type A CQI reports can indicate the supported transport format(s) for the number
of transport block(s) that the UE prefers. Single and dual stream transmissions are
supported.
●
Type B CQI reports are used for single stream transmission according to what has
been defined from 3GPP release 5 onwards.
For type A CQI reports, the UE selects the appropriate CQI1 and CQI2 values for each
transport block in dual stream transmission, or the appropriate CQIS value in single
stream transmission, and then creates the CQI value to report on HS-DPCCH as follows:
For dual stream transmission, new CQI tables are specified in 3GPP TS25.214 for correct interpretation of transport formats based on CQI1 and CQI2.
3.1.15.7
PCI reports
The PCI value to report in the uplink is created in the UE according to the preferred
precoding weight w2 according to the table below.
Table 3-16: Mapping of preferred precoding weight to PCI values
PCI value
0
1
2
3
The PCI value shall be transmitted together with the CQI value as a composite
PCI/CQI value. The figure below shows how the composite PCI/CQI report is created.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
41
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Figure 3-10: Composite PCI/CQI information (MIMO mode)
3.1.15.8
MIMO Fixed Reference Channels: H-Set 9 and H-Set 11
In order to support MIMO testing, two fixed reference channels have been introduced.
H-Set 9 and H-Set 11 are specified as reference test channel for HSPA+ test cases.
The H-Set 9 parameterization and coding chain is based on 15 codes with two different
modulations, 16QAM and QPSK, for the primary and secondary transport blocks
respectively. Six HARQ processes are used, and HS-DSCH is continuously transmitted.
The H-Set 11 parameterization and coding chain is also based on 15 codes and uses
two different modulations, six HARQ processes and HS-DSCH is continuously transmitted. The modulation schemes specified for the H-Set 11 are however 64QAM and
16QAM for the primary and secondary transport blocks respectively.
3.1.16 Dual Cell HSDPA (DC-HSDPA)
Within 3GPP Release 7 the peak user throughout was significantly enhanced (MIMO,
Higher Order Modulation). In order to fulfill the desire for even better and more consistent user experience across the cell the deployment of a second HSDPA carrier creates an opportunity for network resource pooling as a way to enhance the user experience, in particular when the radio conditions are such that existing techniques (e.g.
MIMO) can not be used.
In DC-HSDPA operation the UE is configured with secondary serving HS-DSCH cell.
With one HS-SCCH in each of the two cells scheduling flexibility to have different
transport formats depending on CQI feedback on each carrier is maintained.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
42
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Figure 3-11: Dual Cell HSDPA Operation
The following restrictions apply in case of DC-HSDPA operation:
3.1.16.1
●
The dual cell transmission only applies to HSDPA physical channels
●
The two cells belong to the same Node-B
●
In Release 8 it is required that the two cells are on adjacent carriers; from Release
9 onwards the paired cells can operate on two different frequency bands.
●
The two cells may use MIMO to serve UEs configured for dual cell operation
DC-HSDPA Data Acknowledgement (non MIMO mode)
When the UE is configured to work in DC-HSDPA non MIMO mode, the coding of the
HS-DPCCH is performed according to the general coding flow, i.e. parallel coding of
the HARQ-ACK and the CQI is performed. The figure below shows the principle.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
43
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Figure 3-12: Channel coding for HS-DPCCH (non MIMO mode)
The 10 bits of the HARQ-ACK messages are interpreted according to 3GPP TS 25.212
(see the table below). ACK/NACK information is provided for the transport block of the
serving and secondary serving HS-DSCH cells.
Table 3-17: Interpretation of HARQ-ACK in DC-HSDPA non MIMO operation
HARQ-ACK message to be transmitted
w0
w1
w2
w3
w4
w5
w6
w7
w8
w9
HARQ-ACK in response to a single scheduled transport block,
detected on the serving HS-DSCH cell
ACK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NACK
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
HARQ-ACK in response to a single scheduled transport block,
detected on the secondary serving HS-DSCH cell
ACK
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
NACK
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
HARQ-ACK in response to a single scheduled transport block,
detected on each of the serving and secondary serving HS-DSCH cells
Response to transport block from setving HS-DSCH cell
Response to transport block from secondary serving HSDSCH cell
ACK
ACK
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
ACK
NACK
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
NACK
ACK
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
NACK
NACK
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
PRE/POST indication
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
44
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
PRE
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
POST
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
CQI reports: CQI1 and CQI2
Two individual CQI reports CQI1 and CQI2 are concatenated to form the composite
channel quality information. CQI1 corresponds to the serving HS-DSCH cell and CQI2
to the secondary serving cell respectively. The figure below show how the CQI report is
constructed.
Figure 3-13: Composite CQI information (DC-HSDPA operation, non MIMO mode)
3.1.16.2
DC-HSDPA + MIMO
Channel coding is done separately for the composite PCI/CQI and for HARQ-ACK
information.
The principle is shown on figure Figure 3-9.
The composite PCI/CQI report is created as illustrated on figure Figure 3-10.
The HARQ-ACK message is coded to 10 bits according to 3GPP TS 25.212. The standard defines the HARQ-ACK coding for the feedback of the serving and secondary
serving HS-DSCH cells for normal and dual stream transmission.
3.1.16.3
Dual Cell HSDPA (DC-HSDPA) Fixed Reference Channel: H-Set 12
In order to support DC-HSDPA testing, a fixed reference channel has been introduced.
H-Set 12 is specified as reference test channel for HSDPA test cases.
The H-Set 12 parameterization and coding chain is based on 1 code with QPSK modulation. Six Hybrid ARQ processes are used, and HS-DSCH is continuously transmitted.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
45
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
3.1.17 HS-DPCCH Extension for 4C-HSDPA and 8C-HSDPA
The 3GPP Release 11 extends the dual cell HSDPA (DC-HSDPA) transmission up to 8
cells HSDPA (8C-HSDPA). This extension basically enables the simultaneous scheduling of HSDPA transmission over 4 or 8 cells, one serving and up to three respectively
up to seven secondary serving cells. The transmission on the serving cells are independent and are dynamically activated and deactivated.
For each of the cells, MIMO can be enabled. The channel coding of the feedback data
transmitted via the HS-DPCCH is based on the same principle as in MIMO single cell
transmission.
For detailed description on the channel coding, refer to the 3GPP specification TS
25.212.
The related instrument settings are described in Chapter 4.30, "HS-DPCCH Settings UE", on page 185.
3.1.18 Dual Cell HSUPA (Dual Cell E-DCH)
The Dual Cell HSUPA employs carrier aggregation in the uplink. The DC-HSUPA operation is available only in combination with the DC-HSDPA. This operation uses two
independent carriers, each assigned to one of the DC-HSDPA "cells".
3.1.19 UE Capabilities
MIMO, 64QAM and DC-HSDPA operation in downlink as well as 16QAM in uplink are
UE capability, i.e. not all UEs will have to support them.
Several UE categories have been introduced to provide:
●
DL MIMO support and support of 64QAM in addition to 16QAM and QPSK in dowlink
●
16QAM support in uplink
●
Support of dual cell operation and MIMO
The R&S SMW supports all UE categories.
3.1.19.1
MIMO and 64QAM UE Capabilities
According to 3GPP TS25.306 V8.4.0, the following release 8 HS-DSCH categories
with MIMO and 64QAM support are defined:
●
Categories 13 and 14:
Support of 64QAM
No support of MIMO
Maximum data rate of category 14 is 21 Mbps
●
Categories 15 and 16:
Support of MIMO with modulation schemes QPSK and 16QAM
No support of 64QAM
Maximum data rate of category 16 is 27.6 Mbps
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
46
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
3.1.19.2
●
Categories 17 and 18:
Support of MIMO with modulation schemes QPSK and 16QAM
Support of 64QAM and MIMO, but not simultaneously
Maximum data rate of category 18 is 27.6 Mbps when MIMO is used and 21 Mbps
when 64QAM is used
●
Categories 19 and 20:
Simultaneous support of MIMO and all modulation schemes (QPSK, 16QAM and
64QAM)
Maximum data rate of category 20 is 42.1 Mbps
UL 16QAM UE Capabilities
According to 3GPP TS25.306 V9.5.0, the following release 8 E-DCH categories with
16QAM uplink support are defined:
●
3.1.19.3
Category 7 and 9:
Support of 16QAM in addition to BPSK
MIMO and DC-HSDPA Operation UE Capabilities
According to 3GPP TS25.306 V9.0.0, the following release 9 HS-DSCH categories
with MIMO and dual cell operation support are defined:
3.1.19.4
●
Categories 21, 22, 23 and 24:
Support of QPSK, 16QAM and for categories 23 and 24 also 64QAM
Support of dual cell operation, but without MIMO
●
Categories 25, 26, 27 and 28:
Support of QPSK, 16QAM and for categories 27 and 28 also 64QAM
Simultaneous support of MIMO and dual cell operation
Dual Cell E-DCH Operation UE Capabilities
According to 3GPP TS25.306 V9.5.0, the following release 9 E-DCH categories with
Dual Cell E-DCH support are defined:
●
Category 8:
Supports only QPSK in Dual Cell E-DCH operation
●
Category 9:
Supports QPSK and 16QAM in Dual Cell E-DCH operation
3.1.20 Uplink discontinuous transmission (UL DTX)
Uplink discontinuous transmission (UL DTX) is one of the features of the Continuous
Packet Connectivity (CPC) provided to reduce the uplink control channel overhead. UL
DTX allows the UE to stop transmission of uplink DPCCH in case there is no transmission activity on E-DCH or HS-DPCCH. This is sometimes also called uplink DPCCH
gating.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
47
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Figure 3-14: Principle of UL-DTX
Uplink DPCCH is not transmitted continuously any more, but it is transmitted from time
to time according to a known activity pattern (UE-DTX cycle). This regular activity is
needed in order to maintain synchronization and power control loop. Gating is only
active if there is no uplink data transmission on E-DCH or HS-DPCCH transmission
ongoing. In case E-DCH or HS-DPCCH is used, the uplink DPCCH is transmitted in
parallel.
The 3GPP specifications defines two patterns that can be applied to adapt the DTX
cycle to the traffic conditions, the UE-DTX cycle 1 and the UE-DTX cycle 2 (see also
Chapter 5.3, "Configuring UL-DTX Transmission and Visualizing the Scheduling",
on page 267). The UE-DTX cycle 1 is applied depending on the duration of E-DCH
inactivity; the UE-DTX cycle 2 has less frequent DPCCH transmission instants and is
applied whenever there is no uplink data transmission. The switching from UE-DTX
cycle 1 to UE-DTX cycle 2 is determined by a configurable period of inactivity.
The transmission of control signaling on the HS-DPCCH is not affected by the UL-DTX
pattern. With enabled UL-DTX, the HARQ-ACK messages and the CQI reporting
remains unchanged and the UE transmits acknowledgment according to the HARQACK pattern, regardless of the UL-DTX cycle. Transmission of control signals does not
cause switching from UE-DTX cycle 2 to UE-DTX cycle 1.
A preamble and postamble are added to the DPCCH burst for synchronisation reasons. The length of the uplink DPCCH preamble and postamble depend whether the
DPCCH burst transmission is caused by user-data transmission on the E-DCH or control signaling on the HS-DPCCH.
●
for the E-DCH transmission
During the UE-DTX cycle 1, the DPCCH transmission starts two slots prior to the
start of E-DPDCH and terminates one slot after it. For the UE-DTX cycle 2, an
extended preamble of up to 15 slots is applied.
●
for the HS-DPCCH transmission
The preamble length depends whether an HARQ-ACK or CQI report is transmitted.
Two slots are applied for the HARQ-ACK case (unless an HARQ preamble PRE is
transmitted) and three in case of CQI reporting. For the latter case, an extended
preamble may be applied too.
The DPCCH transmission terminates at the end of the first full DPCCH slot after
the end of the HARQ-ACK/CQI field.
An instrument equipped with the required options provided an UL-DTX functionality,
that is fully compliant with 3GPP TS 25.214. All dependencies from E-DCH transmis-
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
48
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
sions, HARQ-ACK transmissions or CQI transmissions on the DPCCH are respected.
The corresponding settings are described in Chapter 4.25, "UL-DTX/User Scheduling UE", on page 163.
Use the Scheduling List to display the UL-DTX burst pattern and transmissions of EDCH and HS-DPCCH, as well as the impact on the UL-DPCCH transmissions or the
configured uplink user scheduling.
Refer to Chapter 5.3, "Configuring UL-DTX Transmission and Visualizing the Scheduling", on page 267 for an example on how to use the UL-DTX function.
3.1.21 Uplink User Scheduling
The R&S SMW supports uplink user scheduling in Baseband A/B.
The uplink user scheduling is a function that enables you to flexible configure the
scheduling of the uplink transmission. The instrument provides an interfaces for loading of externally created XML-like files with predefined file structure. The corresponding
settings are described in Chapter 4.25, "UL-DTX/User Scheduling - UE", on page 163
Inter-dependencies
●
The UL-DTX and the User Scheduling functions excludes each other and cannot
be activated simultaneously.
●
The uplink scheduling information is processed in real time and this feature can be
enabled together with the "Dynamic Power Control". All UE1 channels can be
power controlled.
●
With enabled "User Scheduling", the value of the parameter Power Reference is
fixed to "First DPCCH".
●
Activated "User Scheduling" limits the number of E-DPDCH physical channel configurations. The "Overall Symbol Rates = 2x960 ksps, 2x1920 ksps and 2x960 +
2x1920 ksps" are not allowed. 1)
●
The features uplink user schedulung and the internal E-DCH channel codding
excludes each other. 2)
●
A PRACH preamble cannot be directly scheduled in the user schedulung file,
because the user scheduling is enabled in the "DPCCH+DPDCH" mode. 3)
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
49
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Some possible workaround approaches
●
To generate a signal with "Overall Symbol Rates = 2x960 ksps, 2x1920 ksps and
2x960 + 2x1920 ksps", enable two Baseband blocks to generate the corresponding
"I only" and "Q only" channels and combine the outputs of the two Basebands.
The resulting composite signal comprises the physical channel configuration
according to the specifications.
●
2)
●
3)
1)
If channel coded data in the E-DCH is required, consider the use of pre-channelcoded data lists as data source for the physical E-DPDCH channel.
Enable a PRACH preamble for UE2, configure the required user scheduling for
UE1 and "delay" the beginning of the UE1 transmission (use the commands with
parameters slot="0" and action="DPCCH_OFF", "DPDCH_OFF" and
"EDCH_OFF")
File Structure
Files with user scheduling information use the predefined file extension *.3g_sch and
follow a predefined file structure. To explain the file structure, the following simple
scheduling example is used:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<SMxScheduling>
<head type="3GPP FDD" subtype="Uplink User Scheduling" Version="1" />
<!-- Comment -->
<command slot="0" action="DPCCH_OFF" />
<command slot="15" action="DPCCH_ON" />
</SMxScheduling>
The highlighted lines are mandatory and must not be changed. The user scheduling is
performed with the <command> tag. The Table 3-18 describes the tag structure. All
parameters of this tag are mandatory.
Table 3-18: Structure of tag <command>
Parameter
name
Value Range
Description
<slot>
0 to 3749
Value range deviates in the following cases:
●
for <action="EDCH_TTIS"> the <slot> must be a multiple of
15
(changes in the E-DCH TTI size are allowed only at the beginning
of a 3GPP frame)
●
for <action="REPEAT"> the <slot> must be a multiple of 15
and within the value range 15 to 3750.
<action>
DPCCH_OFF
Disables DPCCH transmission starting from the beginning of the
specified slot
DPCCH_ON *
Enables DPCCH transmission starting from the beginning of the specified slot
DPDCH_OFF
Disables DPDCH transmission starting from the beginning of the
specified slot
DPDCH_ON *
Enables DPDCH transmission starting from the beginning of the specified slot. The DPDCH must be activated with the corresponding settings in the instrument’s user interface, see State (DPDCH).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
50
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Modulation System 3GPP FDD
Parameter
name
Value Range
Description
EDCH_OFF
Disables E-DCH transmission (i.e. the transmission in the E-DPCCH
and E-DPDCH physical channels) starting from the beginning of the
specified slot.
EDCH_ON *
Enables E-DCH transmission starting from the beginning of the specified slot. The E-DPCCH and/or the E-DPDCH must be activated in the
instrument’s user interface, see State (E-DPCCH) and State (EDPDCH).
This <action> affects only the currently active channels (E-DPCCH
and/or E-DPDCH).
EDCH_TTIS
Determines the TTI size of all E-DCH transmissions starting from the
beginning of the specified slot.
EDCH_ETFCI
Determines the E-TFCI (Transport Block Size Index) of all subsequent
E-DCH transmissions.
The change of the E-TFCI applies always at the beginning of the next
E-DCH TTI, i.e. the E-TFCI cannot be changed during an ongoing EDCH TTI.
DYNPC_OFF
Disables the dynamic power control starting from the beginning of the
specified slot.
DYNPC_ON **
Enables the dynamic power control starting from the beginning of the
specified slot, i.e. the instrument applies changes in the channel transmit powers starting from the specified slot.
The dynamic power control must be activated with the corresponding
settings in the instrument’s user interface, see Dynamic Power Control
State.
REPEAT
Performs a loop in the action's sequence and repeats all prior defined
actions starting from the beginning of the specified slot.
The repetition periodicity of the user scheduling is determined by the
<slot> value. If <action="REPEAT"> is omitted, the instrument follows the defined user scheduling sequence once.
Note: The <action="REPEAT"> causes a repetition of the scheduling commands, but not necessarily guarantee an identical signal. For
example, long data lists are not restarted and the effects of former
dynamic power control commands still persist, even after the
sequence is looped.
ttis
2 | 10
For <action="EDCH_TTIS">, determines the TTI size (2 ms or 10
ms)
etfci
0 to 127
For <action="EDCH_ETFCI">, determines the E-TFCI
*) The instrument schedules DPCCH/DPDCH/E-DCH transmissions by default, unless
an <action="DPCCH_OFF">, <action="DPDCH_OFF"> and/or
<action="EDCH_OFF"> is scheduled.
**) If dynamic power control is activated in the user interface, the instrument applies the
power control by default, unless an <action="DYNPC_OFF"> is scheduled.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
51
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
About the 3GPP FDD Options
Routing and enabling an external control signal
Scheduling Example
Refer to Chapter 5.4, "Configuring and Visualizing the Uplink User Scheduling",
on page 269 for an example on how to use the user scheduling function.
3.2 Routing and enabling an external control signal
The R&S SMW uses a flexible signal to connector mapping concept. In the default
instrument state, the local T/M 3 and the globally shared USER 6 connector are not
configured as inputs of the external control signal.
To route and enable an external control signal, perform the following general steps:
●
Define the connector type, "Global" or "Local", the external control signal is expected at.
●
Use the Local and Global Connector Settings and define:
●
–
"Connector > Direction > Input".
–
"Connector > Signal > Feedback" to route and map the corresponding signal.
Connect the control line to the configured connector.
In this firmware version, the "Global" connector is disabled.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
52
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
4 3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
► To access the 3GPP FDD settings, select "Baseband > 3GPP FDD".
Overview of the realtime functions that are disabled in Baseband C/D
You can access the 3GPP FDD settings in each of the baseband blocks. Consider,
however, that the following realtime functions are not available in "Baseband C/D":
●
UL and DL Dynamic Power Control, see Dynamic Power Control - Enhanced
DPCHs BS1 and Dynamic Power Control - UE
●
User Scheduling, see UL-DTX/User Scheduling - UE
●
Real Time HS-DPCCH, see Compatibility Mode (HS-DPCCH)
●
HARQ Feedback, see HARQ Simulation Settings
●
the HSDPA H-Set Advanced mode is permanently active, see Advanced Mode
(requires ARB)
The 3GPP FDD dialog is extremely comprehensive. To simplify the description and the
orientation through this documentation, the headings of the follwoing section follow a
common naming convention:
<DialogName/TabName>< - ><SourceDialog>
This common structure is intended to identify your current location in the dialog.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 8,
"Remote-Control Commands", on page 351.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
General Settings for 3GPP FDD Signals................................................................ 54
Trigger Settings.......................................................................................................56
Marker Settings....................................................................................................... 61
Clock Settings......................................................................................................... 64
Local and Global Connector Settings......................................................................65
Basestations and User Equipments Settings.......................................................... 66
Test Setups/Models................................................................................................ 72
Predefined Settings - Downlink............................................................................... 76
Additional User Equipment - Uplink........................................................................ 78
Base Station Settings..............................................................................................79
Compressed Mode..................................................................................................93
HSDPA Settings - BS..............................................................................................99
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS........................................................................103
Enhanced Settings for P-CPICH - BS1................................................................. 120
Enhanced Settings for P-CCPCH - BS1............................................................... 121
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1....................................................................123
S-CCPCH Settings - BS Channel Table............................................................... 138
Config AICH/AP-AICH - BS Channel Table.......................................................... 139
DPCCH Settings - BS Channel Table................................................................... 140
Config E-AGCH - BS Channel Table.................................................................... 147
Config E-RGCH/E-HICH - BS Channel Table.......................................................149
Config F-DPCH - BS Channel Table.....................................................................151
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
53
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
General Settings for 3GPP FDD Signals
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Multi Channel Assistant - BS.................................................................................155
User Equipment Configuration (UE)......................................................................159
UL-DTX/User Scheduling - UE..............................................................................163
Dynamic Power Control - UE................................................................................ 168
Scheduling List......................................................................................................172
DPCCH Settings - UE........................................................................................... 174
DPDCH Settings - UE........................................................................................... 180
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE..................................................................................... 185
E-DPCCH Settings - UE........................................................................................207
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE................................................................................... 208
E-DPDCH Settings - UE........................................................................................220
E-DCH Scheduling - UE........................................................................................224
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1............................................................ 227
PRACH Settings - UE........................................................................................... 236
PCPCH Settings - UE........................................................................................... 247
Filtering, Clipping, ARB Settings........................................................................... 259
4.1 General Settings for 3GPP FDD Signals
► To access the dialog for setting the 3GPP FDD digital standard, select "Baseband
> 3GPP FDD".
This tab comprises the standard general settings, valid for the signal in both transmission directions.
State
Activates the standard and deactivates all the other digital standards and digital modulation modes in the same path.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
54
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
General Settings for 3GPP FDD Signals
The instrument generates the 3GPP FDD signal as a combination of realtime mode
(enhanced channels) and arbitrary waveform mode (all the other channels). The follwoing is a more datailed list of the channels generated in realtime:
● Downlink channels: P-CCPCH and up to three DPCHs of base station 1 as well as
H-Sets 1 to 5.
● Uplink channels: DPCCH and one DPDCH of user equipment 1.
Depending on the actual configurations, other channels of user equipment 1 may
also be generated in realtime.
Generated in arbitrary waveform mode and added to the realtime signal are: PRACH
and PCPCH channels and the channels of the other user equipments.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:STATe on page 354
Set to default
Calls the default settings. Test Model 1 (64 channels) is preset.
The parameter "State" is not affected.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PRESet on page 352
Save/Recall
Accesses the "Save/Recall" dialog, i.e. the standard instrument function for storing and
recalling the complete dialog related settings in a file. The provided navigation possibilities in the dialog are self-explanatory.
The file name and the directory it is stored in are user-definable; the file extension is
however predefined.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:CATalog? on page 353
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:LOAD on page 353
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:STORe on page 354
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:DELete on page 353
Generate Waveform
With enabled signal generation, triggers the instrument to store the current settings as
an ARB signal in a waveform file. Waveform files can be further processed by the ARB
and/or as a multi-carrier or a multi-segment signal.
The file name and the directory it is stored in are user-definable; the predefined file
extension for waveform files is *.wv.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:WAVeform:CREate on page 355
Test Case Wizard
Access configuration dialog with a selection of predefined settings according to Test
Cases in TS 25.141.
The provided test cases are described in Chapter 7.1, "Introduction", on page 277.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
55
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Trigger Settings
Remote command:
n.a.
3GPP Version
Displays the current implemented version of the 3GPP FDD standard.
The default settings and parameters provided are oriented towards the specifications
of the version displayed.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:GPP3:VERSion? on page 355
Chip Rate
Displays the system chip rate. This is fixed at 3.84 Mcps.
To vary the output chip rate, use the parameters in the "Filter/Clipping/ARB Settings"
dialog (see Chapter 4.38, "Filtering, Clipping, ARB Settings", on page 259).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CRATe? on page 359
Link Direction
Selects the transmission direction. Further provided settings are in accordance with
this selection.
"Downlink/
Forward Link"
The transmission direction selected is base station to user equipment. The signal corresponds to that of a base station.
"Uplink/
Reverse Link"
The transmission direction selected is user equipment to base station. The signal corresponds to that of user equipment.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:LINK on page 357
Offline Signal Generation > On
This indication appears in "Baseband C/D" to informs you that the signal generation is
performed in offline.
A subset of realtime functions are not available in "Baseband C/D", see "Overview of
the realtime functions that are disabled in Baseband C/D" on page 53.
Filtering/Clipping/ARB Settings
Access a dilaog for setting baseband filtering, clipping and the sequence length of the
arbitrary waveform component. An indication of the key parameters values is provided.
See Chapter 4.38, "Filtering, Clipping, ARB Settings", on page 259 for detailed
description.
Remote command:
n.a.
4.2 Trigger Settings
This tab provides an access to the settings necessary to select and configure the trigger, like trigger source, mode, trigger delay, trigger suppression, as well as to arm or
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
56
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Trigger Settings
trigger an internal trigger manually. The current signal generation status is displayed in
the header of the tab together with information on the enabled trigger mode. As in the
"Marker" and "Clock" tabs, this tab provides also an access to the settings of the related connectors.
This section focus on the available settings.
For information on how this settings affect the signal, refer to chapter "Basics" in the
R&S SMW User Manual.
Routing and Enabling a Trigger
The provided trigger signals are not dedicated to a particular connector but can be
mapped to one or more globally shared USER or local T/M/(C) connectors.
Use the Local and Global Connector Settings to configure the signal mapping as well
as the polarity, the trigger threshold and the input impedance of the input connectors.
To route and enable a trigger signal, perform the following general steps:
●
Define the signal source and the effect of a trigger event, i.e. select the "Trigger In
> Mode" and "Trigger In > Source"
●
Define the connector, USER or T/M/(C), the selected signal is provided at, i.e. configure the Local and Global Connector Settings.
Trigger Settings Common to All Basebands
To enable simultaneous signal generation in all basebands, the R&S SMW couples the
trigger settings in the available basebands in any instrument's configuration involving
signal routing with signal addition (e.g. MIMO configuration, routing and summing of
basebands and/or streams).
The icon
indicates that common trigger settings are applied.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
57
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Trigger Settings
You can access and configure the common trigger source and trigger mode settings in
any of the basebands. An arm or a restart trigger event applies to all basebands, too.
You can still apply different delay to each of the triggers individually.
Trigger Mode ← Trigger Settings Common to All Basebands
Selects trigger mode, i.e. determines the effect of a trigger event on the signal generation.
For more information, refer to chapter "Basics" in the R&S SMW user manual.
●
●
●
●
●
"Auto"
The signal is generated continuously.
"Retrigger"
The signal is generated continuously. A trigger event (internal or external) causes a
restart.
"Armed_Auto"
The signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs. Then the signal is generated continuously.
An "Arm" stops the signal generation. A subsequent trigger event (internal with or
external) causes a restart.
"Armed_Retrigger"
The signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs. Then the signal is generated continuously. Every subsequent trigger event causes a restart.
An "Arm" stops signal generation. A subsequent trigger event (internal with or
external) causes a restart.
"Single"
The signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs. Then the signal is generated once to the length specified at "Signal Duration".
Every subsequent trigger event (internal or external) causes a restart.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp[:TRIGger]:SEQuence on page 368
Signal Duration Unit ← Trigger Settings Common to All Basebands
Defines the unit for describing the length of the signal sequence to be output in the
"Single" trigger mode.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:SLUNit on page 366
Trigger Signal Duration ← Trigger Settings Common to All Basebands
Enters the length of the signal sequence to be output in the "Single" trigger mode.
Use this parameter to deliberately output part of the signal, an exact sequence of the
signal, or a defined number of repetitions of the signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:SLENgth on page 365
Running/Stopped ← Trigger Settings Common to All Basebands
For enabled modulation, displays the status of signal generation for all trigger modes.
●
"Running"
The signal is generated; a trigger was (internally or externally) initiated in triggered
mode.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
58
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Trigger Settings
●
"Stopped"
The signal is not generated and the instrument waits for a trigger event.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:RMODe? on page 365
Arm ← Trigger Settings Common to All Basebands
Stops the signal generation until subsequent trigger event occurs.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:ARM:EXECute on page 363
Execute Trigger ← Trigger Settings Common to All Basebands
For internal trigger source, executes trigger manually.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:EXECute on page 363
Trigger Source ← Trigger Settings Common to All Basebands
The following sources of the trigger signal are available:
● "Internal"
The trigger event is executed manually by the "Execute Trigger".
● "Internal (Baseband A/B)"
The trigger event is provided by the trigger signal from the other basebands.
● "External Global Trigger 1 / 2"
The trigger event is the active edge of an external trigger signal provided and configured at the global USER connectors.
● "External Global Clock 1 / 2"
The trigger event is the active edge of an external global clock signal provided and
configured at the global USER connectors.
● "External Local Trigger"
The trigger event is the active edge of an external trigger signal provided and configured at the local T/M/(C) connector.
With coupled trigger settings, the signal has to be provided at the T/M/C 1/2/3 connectors.
● "External Local Clock"
The trigger event is the active edge of an external local clock signal provided and
configured at the local T/M/C connector.
With coupled trigger settings, the signal has to be provided at the T/M/C 1 connector.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:SOURce on page 366
Sync. Output to External Trigger ← Trigger Settings Common to All Basebands
For an external trigger signal, enables/disables the output of a signal synchronous to
the external trigger event.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
59
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Trigger Settings
"On"
Corresponds to the default state of this parameter.
The signal calculation starts simultaneously with the external trigger
event but because of the instrument’s processing time the first samples are cut off and no signal is output. After elapsing of the internal
processing time, the output signal is synchronous to the trigger event.
"Off"
The signal output begins after elapsing of the processing time and
starts with sample 0, i.e. the complete signal is output.
This mode is recommended for triggering of short signal sequences
with signal duration comparable with the processing time of the
instrument.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:EXTernal:SYNChronize:OUTPut
on page 363
External Trigger Inhibit ← Trigger Settings Common to All Basebands
For external trigger signal or trigger signal from the other path, sets the duration a new
trigger event subsequent to triggering is suppressed. In "Retrigger" mode for example,
a new trigger event will not cause a restart of the signal generation until the specified
inhibit duration does not expire.
For more information, see chapter "Basics" in the R&S SMW User Manual.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger[:EXTernal]:INHibit on page 368
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OBASeband:INHibit on page 364
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
60
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Marker Settings
Trigger Delay
Delays the trigger event of the signal from:
● The external trigger source
● The other path
● The other basebands (internal trigger), if common trigger settings are used.
Use this setting to:
● Synchronize the instrument with the device under test (DUT) or other external devices
● Postpone the signal generation start in the basebands compared to each other
For more information, see chapter "Basics on ..." in the R&S SMW user manual.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger[:EXTernal]:DELay on page 367
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OBASeband:DELay on page 364
4.3 Marker Settings
This tab provides an access to the settings necessary to select and configure the
marker output signal, like the marker mode or marker delay settings.
This section focus on the available settings.
For information on how this settings affect the signal, refer to chapter "Basics" in the
R&S SMW User Manual.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
61
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Marker Settings
Routing and Enabling a Marker
The provided marker signals are not dedicated to a particular connector but can be
mapped to one or more globally shared USER or local T/M/(C) connectors.
To route and enable a marker signal, perform the following general steps:
●
Define the shape of the generated marker, i.e. select the "Marker > Mode"
●
Define the connector, USER or T/M/(C), the selected signal is output at, i.e. configure the Local and Global Connector Settings.
Marker Mode
Marker configuration for up to 3 marker channels. The settings are used to select the
marker mode defining the shape and periodicity of the markers. The contents of the
dialog change with the selected marker mode; the settings are self-explanatory.
"Slot"
A marker signal is generated at the start of each slot (every 2560
chips or 0.667 ms).
"Radio Frame"
A marker signal is generated at the start of each frame (every 38400
chips or 10 ms).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
62
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Marker Settings
"Chip Sequence Period (ARB)"
A marker signal is generated at the start of every arbitrary waveform
sequence (depending on the setting for the arbitrary waveform
sequence length). If the signal does not contain an arbitrary waveform component, a radio frame trigger is generated.
"System Frame Number (SFN) Restart"
A marker signal is generated at the start of every SFN period (every
4096 frames).
"ON/OFF
Ratio"
A regular marker signal that is defined by an ON/OFF ratio is generated. A period lasts one ON and OFF cycle.
The ON time and OFF time are each expressed as a number of chips
and are set in an input field which opens when ON/OFF ratio is
selected.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:ONTime on page 371
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:OFFTime on page 371
"User"
A marker signal is generated at the beginning of every user-defined
"Period".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:PERiod on page 372
"Multi Gated"
An internally used marker signal.
Marker 2 and Marker 3 are automatically set to this value in the following configuration:
● "Link Direction > Uplink"
● "User Equipment > UE1 > On"
● "User Equipment > UL-DTX/User Scheduling > State > On"
● "UL-DTX/User Scheduling > Mode > User Scheduling"
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:MODE on page 371
Marker x Delay
Defines the delay between the marker signal at the marker outputs relative to the signal generation start.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
63
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Clock Settings
"Marker x"
For the corresponding marker, sets the delay as a number of symbols.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay on page 369
"Current Range without Recalculation"
Displays the dynamic range within which the delay of the marker signals can be set without restarting the marker and the signal.
Move the setting mark to define the delay.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MAXimum?
on page 370
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MINimum?
on page 370
"Fix marker delay to current range"
Restricts the marker delay setting range to the dynamic range.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut:DELay:FIXed on page 369
4.4 Clock Settings
This tab provides an access to the settings necessary to select and configure the clock
signal, like the clock source and clock mode.
This section focus on the available settings.
For information on how this settings affect the signal, refer to chapter "Basics" in the
R&S SMW User Manual.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
64
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Local and Global Connector Settings
Defining the Clock
The provided clock signals are not dedicated to a particular connector but can be mapped to one or more globally shared USER and the two local T/M/C connectors.
Use the Local and Global Connector Settings to configure the signal mapping and the
polarity, the trigger threshold, and the input impedance of the input connectors.
To route and enable a trigger signal, perform the following general steps:
●
Define the signal source, that is select the "Clock > Source"
●
Define the connector, USER or T/M/C, the selected signal is provided at, that is
configure the Local and Global Connector Settings.
Clock Source
Selects the clock source.
● "Internal"
The instrument uses its internal clock reference.
● "External Global Clock 1/2"
The instrument expects an external clock reference at the global USER connector,
as configured in the "Global Connector Settings" dialog.
● "External Local Clock"
The instrument expects an external clock reference at the local T/M/C connector.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:SOURce on page 373
Clock Mode
Enters the type of externally supplied clock.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:MODE on page 372
Chip Clock Multiplier
Enters the multiplication factor for clock type "Multiple".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:MULTiplier on page 372
Measured External Clock
Provided for permanent monitoring of the enabled and externally supplied clock signal.
Remote command:
CLOCk:INPut:FREQuency?
4.5 Local and Global Connector Settings
Each of the "Trigger In", "Marker" and "Clock" dialogs as well as the "Trigger Marker
Clock" dialog provides a quick access to the related local and global connector settings.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
65
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Basestations and User Equipments Settings
For more information, refer to the description R&S SMW User Manual, section "Local
and Global Connectors".
4.6 Basestations and User Equipments Settings
Depending on the selected link direction, the last tab comprises either the "Basestation" or the "User Equipment" common settings.
●
"Link Direction > Downlink"
●
"Link Direction > Uplink"
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
66
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Basestations and User Equipments Settings
This section describes the configuration settings common for both tabs, like OCNS settings or power configuration.
4.6.1 Common Configuration Settings
The "Configure Basestations / User Equipments" tabs cover the general parameters for
configuring the respective transmisssion direction.
Reset all Base Stations
Resets all base stations to the predefined settings.The preset value for each parameter
is specified in the description of the remote-control commands.
Table 4-1: Overview of the base station predefined settings
Parameter
Value
State
Off
State (all channels)
Off
Scrambling Code
0
Slot Format DPCH
8
Symbol Rate DPCH
30 ksps
Channelization Code (all channels)
0
Data Source (all channels)
PN9
Timing Offset (all channels)
0
Multi Code State (all channels)
Off
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:PRESet on page 355
Reset User Equipment
Resets all user equipment to the predefined settings. The preset value for each parameter is specified in the description of the remote-control commands.
Table 4-2: Overview of the user equipment predefined settings
Parameter
Value
State
Off
Mode
DPCCH + DPDCH
Scrambling Code (hex)
0
DPCCH Settings
Power
0 dB
DPDCH Settings
DPDCH State
On
HS-DPCCH, E-DPCCH and E-DPDCH State
Off
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
67
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Basestations and User Equipments Settings
Parameter
Value
Channel Power
0 dB
Overall Symbol Rate
60 ksps
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:PRESet on page 449
Copy Basestation/Copy User Equipment...
Copies the settings of a base station or user equipment to a second base or user
equipment. A dialog opens for creating the destination station.
Downlink / Forward link direction
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
Uplink / Reverse link direction
68
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Basestations and User Equipments Settings
"Copy from Source"
Selects the base station or user equipment whose settings are to be
copied.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:COPY:SOURce on page 357
"To Destination"
Selects the base station or user equipment whose settings are to be
overwritten.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:COPY:DESTination on page 356
"Channelization Code Offset (Base Station only)"
Enters the offset to be applied when copying the base station to the
channelization codes of the destination base station. The minimum
value is 0 (channelization codes are identical), the maximum value is
511.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:COPY:COFFset on page 355
"Accept"
Starts the copy process.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:COPY:EXECute on page 356
Test Setups/Models
Provides an access to the test models defined in the 3GPP standard and further test
setups, see Chapter 4.7, "Test Setups/Models", on page 72.
Remote command:
n.a.
Predefined Settings
Access a dialog for setting predefined configurations, see Chapter 4.8, "Predefined
Settings - Downlink", on page 76.
Remote command:
n.a.
Additional User Equipment
Access a dialog for simulating up to 128 additional user equipments, see Chapter 4.9,
"Additional User Equipment - Uplink", on page 78.
Remote command:
n.a.
Select Basestation/User Equipment
Selects the base station or user equipment by pressing the accompanying block.
A dialog for editing the selected basestation or user equipment opens (see Chapter 4.10, "Base Station Settings", on page 79 and Chapter 4.24, "User Equipment
Configuration (UE)", on page 159).
To activate a base station or user equipment, enable its state.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
69
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Basestations and User Equipments Settings
Remote command:
(the base station or user equipment is selected by the keyword index
BSTation<[1]|2|3|4> or MSTation<i>)
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:STATe on page 425
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:STATe on page 451
4.6.2 General Power Settings
The power settings are enabled for "3GPP FDD > State = On".
Adjust Total Power to 0dB
Sets the power of the enabled channels so that the total power of all the active channels is 0 dB. This will not change the power ratio among the individual channels.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:POWer:ADJust on page 357
Total Power
Displays the total power of the active channels.
The total power is calculated from the power ratio of the powered up code channels
with modulation on. If the value is not equal to 0 dB, the individual code channels
(whilst still retaining the power ratios) are internally adapted so that the "Total Power"
for achieving the set output level is 0 dB.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:POWer[:TOTal]? on page 358
Power Reference
Determines the power reference for the leveling of the output signal in uplink direction.
Parameter
Power leveling performed
during
Power in "Level" display equal to
"Mode" of the first active UE
"RMS Power"
Complete signal
Output signal's mean power
●
●
●
●
●
"First DPCCH"
"First E-DCH"
"First HARQACK"
First slot in which a DPCCH,
an E-DCH, a HARQ-ACK or
a PCI/CQI is transmitted in
the first active UE
"First PCI/CQI"
Output signal's mean power during the first
active DPCCH
Note: if there are other UEs or channels
active during the reference slot, the total
power is used as a reference, not only the
DPCCH power.
●
●
PRACH Standard
PRACH Preamble Only
DPCCH+DPDCH and ULDTX Off
PCPCH Standard
PCPCH Preamble Only
DPCCH+DPDCH and ULDTX On
DPCCH+DPDCH and ULDTX Off
This mode is required if the UL-DTX is
enabled, due to the long signal parts of
inactivity.
"PRACH Message Part"
PRACH Message Part of the
first active UE
"Last PRACH
Preamble"
Last PRACH preamble of the Output signal's mean power during the last
first active UE
PRACH preamble
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
Output signal's mean power during the
PRACH Message Part
PRACH Standard
●
●
PRACH Standard
PRACH Preamble Only
70
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Basestations and User Equipments Settings
Example:
●
●
●
"RF Level" = -10 dBm (value displayed in the status bar of the instrument)
DPCCH is activated
E-DPCCH and one E-DPDCH are activated in the first subframe of each frame
The Figure 4-1 displays the power versus time for "Power Reference = First DPCCH":
the signal level in the first subframe is -10 dBm; the RMS power of the signal is -13.3
dBm.
Figure 4-1: Example: Power Reference = First DPCCH
The Figure 4-2 displays the power versus time for "Power Reference = RMS": the RMS
power of the signal is -10 dBm; the signal level in the first subframe is -6.7 dBm
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
71
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Test Setups/Models
Figure 4-2: Example: Level Reference = RMS
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:LREFerence on page 452
4.7 Test Setups/Models
► To access the dialog, select "3GPP FFD > Basestation/User Equipment > Test
Setup/Models"
The dialog offers various test models, depending on the selected transmission
direction. The presetting is defined in the 3GPP standard TS 25.141.
Test Models Downlink
Access a list of test models in accordance with the 3GPP standard TS 25.141.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
72
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Test Setups/Models
Selecting a test model for an active base station immediately generates the selected
signal configuration.
The Table 4-3 gives an overview of the available test models.
Table 4-3: Test Models Downlink
Test Model
Description
"Test Model 1 (4/8 channels)"
Test models for Home BS
●
Spectrum emission mask
●
ACLR
●
Spurious emissions
●
Transmit intermodulation
●
Modulation accuracy
●
Peak code domain error
"Test Model 1 (16/32/64 channels)"
●
●
●
●
●
●
"Test Model 2"
Output power dynamics
"Test Model 3 (4/8 channels)"
Peak code domain error test models for Home BS
"Test Model 3 (16/32 channels)"
Peak code domain error
"Test Model 4"
Error Vector Magnitude, optional P-CPICH is not active
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
Spectrum emission mask
ACLR
Spurious emissions
Transmit intermodulation
Modulation accuracy
Peak code domain error
73
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Test Setups/Models
Test Model
Description
"Test Model 4 (CPICH)"
Error Vector Magnitude, optional P-CPICH is active.
"Test Model 5 (4 HS-PDSCH + 4 DPCH)"
Error Vector Magnitude test models for Home BS
at base stations that support high speed physical downlink shared channels with 16 QAM
"Test Model 5 (8 HS-PDSCH + 30 DPCH)"
Error Vector Magnitude
"Test Model 5 (4 HS-PDSCH + 14 DPCH)"
"Test Model 5 (2 HS-PDSCH + 6 DPCH)"
at base stations that support high speed physical downlink shared channels with 16 QAM
"Test Model 6_04_4channels"
Relative Code Domain Error test models for Home BS
only applicable for 64QAM modulated codes.
"Test Model 6_30_8channels"
Relative Code Domain Error
only applicable for 64QAM modulated codes.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel:BSTation:CATalog?
on page 377
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel:BSTation on page 376
Test Models Uplink
Access the predefined test signals.
The 3GPP has not defined any test models for the Uplink transmission direction. This
implementation however, provides a list of useful test signals and enables you to
quickly generate an uplink signal.
This instrument generaters the Uplink test models in the enhanced state of user equipment 1. An exception are the test models for the E-DPCCH and E-DPDCH, these
channels are not calculated in realtime. The sequence length is not changed.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
74
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Test Setups/Models
The following table lists some examples of configurations available for selection.
Table 4-4: Test Models Uplink
Test Model
Description
"DPCCH + DPDCH 60 ksps"
User equipment 1 is activated in DPCCH + DPDCH
mode. 60 ksps is selected as the overall symbol rate. All
the other settings correspond to the preset setting.
"DPCCH + DPDCH 960 ksps"
User equipment 1 is activated in DPCCH + DPDCH
mode. 960 ksps is selected as the overall symbol rate.
All the other settings correspond to the preset setting.
"TS34121_R6_Table_C_10_1_4_Subset1 .. 6"
Uplink test model according to 3GPP TS 34.121
Release 6, Table C.10.1.4.
"TS34121_R8_Table_C_10_1_4_Subset1 .. 4"
Uplink test models for transmitter characteristics tests
with HS-DPCCH according to 3GPP TS 34.121 Release
8, Table C.10.1.4.
"TS34121_R8_Table_C_11_1_3_Subset1 .. 5"
Uplink test models for transmitter characteristics tests
with HS-DPCCH and E-DCH according to 3GPP TS
34.121 Release 8, Table C.11.1.3.
"TS34121_R8_Table_C_11_1_4_Subset1"
Uplink test model for transmitter characteristics tests
with HS-DPCCH and E-DCH with 16QAM according to
3GPP TS 34.121 Release 8, Table C.11.1.4.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
75
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Predefined Settings - Downlink
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel:MSTation:CATalog?
on page 378
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel:MSTation on page 377
4.8 Predefined Settings - Downlink
With the "Predefined Settings" function, it is possible to create highly complex scenarios with just a few modifications. This function is of use if, say, just the envelope of the
signal is of interest.
1. To access this dialog, enable "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Downlink"
2. Select "Basestation > Predefined Settings"
The channel table of base station 1 is filled (preset) with the set parameters. The
sequence length of the generated signal is 1 frame.
Use Channels
Selects if P-CPICH, P-SCH, S-SCH and PCCPCH are used in the scenario or not.
These "special channels" are required by user equipment for synchronization.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
76
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Predefined Settings - Downlink
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:SCHannels on page 376
Use S-CCPCH
Selects if S-CCPCH is used in the scenario or not.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:SCCPch:STATe on page 376
Symbol Rate S-CCPCH
Sets the symbol rate of S-CCPCH.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:SCCPch:SRATe on page 375
Number of DPCH
Sets the number of activated DPCHs.
The maximum number is the ratio of the chip rate and the symbol rate (maximum 512
at the lowest symbol rate of 7.5 ksps).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:DPCH:COUNt on page 375
Symbol Rate DPCH
Sets the symbol rate of all DPCHs.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:DPCH:SRATe on page 375
Crest Factor
Selects desired range for the crest factor of the test scenario. The crest factor of the
signal is kept in the desired range by automatically setting appropriate channelization
codes and timing offsets.
"Minimum"
The crest factor is minimized. The channelization codes are distributed uniformly over the code domain. The timing offsets are
increased by 3 per channel.
"Average"
An average crest factor is set. The channelization codes are distributed uniformly over the code domain. The timing offsets are all set to
0.
"Worst"
The crest factor is set to an unfavorable value (i.e. maximum). The
channelization codes are assigned in ascending order. The timing offsets are all set to 0.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:CRESt on page 374
Accept
Presets the channel table of basestation 1 with the parameters defined in the Predefined Settings menu. Scrambling Code 0 is automatically selected (as defined in the
3GPP test models).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
77
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Additional User Equipment - Uplink
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:EXECute on page 375
4.9 Additional User Equipment - Uplink
1. To access this dialog, enable "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink"
2. In the "User Equipment" tab , select "Additional User Equipment"
The dialog allows you to simulate up to 128 additional user equipment and thus to
generate a signal that corresponds to the received signal for a base station with
high capacity utilization.
The fourth user equipment (UE4) serves as a template for all other stations.
The following parameters are the only ones modified for the additional user equipment:
●
Scrambling code (different for all stations)
●
Power (different to UE4, but identical among themselves)
State
Emables/disables all additional user equipment.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:STATe on page 449
Number of Additional UE
Sets the number of additional user equipment. As many as 128 additional user equipments can be simulated.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
78
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Base Station Settings
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:COUNt on page 447
Scrambling Code Step
Enters the step width for increasing the scrambling code of the additional user equipment. The start value is the scrambling code of UE4.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:SCODe:STEP on page 448
Power Offset
Sets the power offset of the active channels of the additional user equipment to the
power outputs of the active channels of UE4.
The resultant power must fall within the range 0 dB to - 80 dB. If the value is above or
below this range, it is limited automatically.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:POWer:OFFSet
on page 448
Time Delay Step
Enters the step width for the time delay of the additional user equipment to one
another. The start value returns the time delay of UE4. Entry is made in chips and can
be a maximum of 1 frame.
The time delay allows user equipment to be simulated even if the arrival of their signals
is not synchronized at the base station.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:TDELay:STEP on page 449
4.10 Base Station Settings
Base stations can be configured independently of one another. Base station 1 (BS1)
also includes enhanced channels (Enhanced Channels, Realtime).
1. To access the base station settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Downlink / Forward".
2. Select "Basestation > BS 1/2/3/4".
The "Basestation" dialog provides the parameters for configuring the general settings of the base station, specific base station related settngs, as well as the channel table with graphical display of the structure of the currently seleced channel.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
79
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Base Station Settings
4.10.1 Common Settings
► Select "Common".
This tab comprises the general parameters required for configuring the basestation.
State
Activates or deactivates the selected base station.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:STATe on page 425
2nd Search Code Group
Displays the 2nd search code group.
This parameter is specified in the table defined by the 3GPP standard "Allocation of
SSCs for secondary SCH". This table assigns a specific spreading code to the synchronization code symbol for every slot in the frame. The value is calculated from the
scrambling code.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:SSCG? on page 424
Scrambling Code
Activates the scrambling code and sets the base station identification.
This value is also the initial value of the scrambling code generator (see Chapter 3.1.1,
"Scrambling Code Generator", on page 21).
The scrambling code can be deactivated for test purposes.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:SCODe:STATe on page 424
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:SCODe on page 424
Page Indicators/Frame
Enters the number of page indicators (PI) per frame in the page indicator channel
(PICH).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
80
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Base Station Settings
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:PINDicator:COUNt on page 423
Time Delay
(This feature is enabled for BS 2...4 only.)
Sets the time delay of the signal of the selected base station compared to the signal of
base station 1.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:TDELay on page 425
Diversity / MIMO
Selects the antenna and the antenna configuration to be simulated.
The R&S SMW supports two antenna configurations: a single-antenna system and a
two-antenna system. Thus, an instrument equipped with two paths can simulate simultaneously the signals of both antennas of one two-antenna system. Moreover, for this
two-antenna system, transmit diversity can be additionally activated or deactivated.
To simulate transmit diversity, a two-antenna system has to be selected and "Open
Loop Transmit Diversity" has to be activated.
To configure HS-PDSCH MIMO channels, a two-antenna system has to be selected.
"Single Antenna"
The signal of single-antenna system is calculated and applied.
"Antenna 1 of 2"
Calculates and applies the output signal for antenna 1 of a twoantenna system.
"Antenna 2 of 2"
Calculates and applies the output signal for antenna 2 of a twoantenna system.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:TDIVersity on page 425
S-CPICH as Phase Reference
Activates or deactivates the use of S-CPICH as reference phase.
If activated the phase of S-CPICH and the phase of all DPCHs is 180 degrees offset
from the phase of P-CPICH.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:SCPich:PREFerence[:STATe]
on page 424
Open Loop Transmit Diversity
(Enabled for two-antenna system only)
Activates/deactivates open loop transmit diversity. The antenna whose signal is to be
simulated is selected with the parameter "Diversity/MIMO".
Various forms of transmit diversity are described in the 3GPP standard. Different coding is used to divide the signal between the two antennas. As a result, the receiver can
decode the traffic signal from the two input signals and is less liable to fading and other
interferences.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
81
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Base Station Settings
A fixed diversity scheme is assigned to each channel type:
● TSTD (time switched transmit diversity for SCH) for P-SCH, S-SCH
● STTD (space time block coding transmit antenna diversity) for all other channels,
except HS-PDSCH MIMO.
The HS-PDSCH MIMO channels are precoded as described in Chapter 3.1.15,
"MIMO in HSPA+", on page 36.
These two schemes are described in detail in TS 25.211.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:TDIVersity on page 425
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:OLTDiversity on page 423
4.10.2 Orthogonal Channel Noise (OCNS) Settings
With Orthogonal Channel Noise, a practical downlink signal is generated to test the
maximum input levels of user equipment in accordance with standard specifications.
This simulates the data and control signals of the other orthogonal channels in the
downlink. 3GPP TS 25.101 contains a precise definition of the required appearance of
the OCNS signal.
This section describes the provided settings. For detailed information, see Chapter 3.1.11, "Orthogonal Channel Noise (OCNS)", on page 29.
OCNS On
Activates OCNS channels according to the definition in the 3GPP standard, in BS 1.
Different OCNS scenarios are defined in the 3GPP standard. Set the scenario by
means of the parameter OCNS Mode.
When activating OCNS and depending on the selected OCNS mode, different channel
groups with different presetting are assigned, see tables in Chapter 3.1.11, "Orthogonal Channel Noise (OCNS)", on page 29. These channels cannot be edited in the
channel table.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:OCNS:STATe on page 378
OCNS Mode
Chooses the scenario for activating OCNS channels.
Four different OCNS scenarios are defined in the standard; one "standard" scenario,
two scenarios for HSDPA test cases and one scenario for type 3i enhanced performance requirements tests according to 3GPP TS34.121-1 ("other user's channels"). For
an overview of the provided scenarios and their settings, refer to Chapter 3.1.11,
"Orthogonal Channel Noise (OCNS)", on page 29.
Note: If the "3i" OCNS mode is activated (and the "3GPP FDD > State > On"), the
OCNS channels are automatically leveled in order to have a total power of 0 dB for all
channels of BS 1.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
82
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Base Station Settings
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:OCNS:MODE on page 379
OCNS Seed
In "OCNS mode > 3i", sets the seed for both the random processes, the power control
simulation process and the process controling the switch over of the channelization
codes.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:OCNS:SEED on page 379
4.10.3 Channel Table
The channel table allows you to configure the individual channel parameters. The
structure of the currently selected channel is displayed graphically in the table header.
1. To access the basestation channel table, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction >
Downlink / Forward".
2. Select "Basestation > BS 1/2/3/4".
3. Select "Channel Table".
The channel table contains a list of all channels available for a base station, and
the associated parameters required for configuring the channel.
139 channels are available for each base station. Channels 0 to 10 are assigned to the
special channels, with the allocation of channels 0 to 8 being fixed. Channels 9 and 10
can be assigned a PDSCH, a DL-DPCCH, an HS-SCCH, an E-AGCH, an E-RGCH, or
an E-HICH.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
83
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Base Station Settings
Code channels 11 to 138 can either be assigned a DPCH, an HS-SCCH, an HSPDSCH (QPSK), an HS-PDSCH (16QAM), an HS-PDSCH (64QAM), an HS-PDSCH
(MIMO), an E-AGCH, an E-RGCH, an E-HICH, or an F-DPCH (see also Table A-1).
This makes it possible to simulate the signal of a base station that supports high-speed
channels.
Channels 4 and 11 to 13 of base station 1 can be generated in realtime (enhanced
channels) and are highlighted in color. User-definable channel coding can be activated
for these channels. Bit and block errors can be simulated and data can be added to the
data and TPC fields from data lists either at the physical level or in the transport layer.
At the physical level, a downlink DPCH consists of the DPDCH (Dedicated Physical
Data Channel) and the DPCCH (Dedicated Physical Control Channel); the channel
characteristics are defined by the symbol rate. The DPDCH transports the user data
that is fed directly into the data field.
The DPCCH transports the control fields, i.e. TFCI (Transport Format Combination
Indicator), TPC (Transmit Power Control) and Pilot field. DPDCH is grouped with
DPCCH using time division multiplexing in accordance with 3GPP TS 25.211 (see Figure 4-3). The formation of a downlink reference measurement channel is described in
Chapter 4.16, "Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1", on page 123.
Figure 4-3: Structure of a downlink DPCH in the time domain
Multi Channel Assistant
Accesses a dialog for configuring several DPCH channels simultaneously, see Chapter 4.23, "Multi Channel Assistant - BS", on page 155.
Remote command:
n.a.
Reset All Channels
Loads the default settings for the channel table.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel:PRESet on page 380
Preset HSDPA H-Set
(This feature is available for BS 1 only.)
Calls the default settings of the channel table for the HSDPA H-Set mode.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
84
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Base Station Settings
Channels 12 to 17 are preset for HSDPA H-Set 1.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel:HSDPa:HSET:PRESet
on page 379
Channel Number
Displays the consecutive channel numbers from 0 to 138.
All the rows are always displayed, even if the channels are inactive. They are switched
on and off by the "On/Off" button in the "State" column.
Remote command:
n.a.
(selected via the suffix to the keyword :CHANnel<n>)
Channel Type
Selects channel type.
The channel type is fixed for channel numbers 0...8; for the remaining channel numbers, the choice lays between the relevant standard channels and the high-speed
channels.
The first 11 channels are reserved for special channels.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:TYPE on page 412
Enhanced Settings / HSDPA Settings
(Enhanced Settings are available for BS1 only.)
Accesses the dialog for configuring the enhanced channels of BS1 or the dialog for
configuring the high-speed channels for all base stations.
●
●
Enhanced Settings
The channel state, "Enhanced On/Off", is displayed in different colors.
Enhanced channels are generated in realtime. Channel coding in accordance with
the 'Reference Measurement Channels' definition in TS25.101, TS25.104 and
TS25.141 can be activated. Any other user-defined coding can also be configured
and stored.
If data lists are used as the data sources for data fields and TPC fields, it is possible to load external data, for example, user information from a higher layer, to the
instrument. For example, this allows externally generated data with user information to be applied, or TPC lists to be used to generate longer, non-repetitive power
profiles.
To test the BER/BLER testers (e.g. integrated in the base station), it is possible to
feed through artificial bit errors to all the data sources (and block errors to the CRC
checksum).
The enhanced settings dialog is different for the P-CCPCH and the DPCHs (see
Chapter 4.16, "Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1", on page 123 and Chapter 4.15, "Enhanced Settings for P-CCPCH - BS1", on page 121.
HSDPA Settings
The available settings and indications of the HSDPA settings dialog depend on the
selected high-speed channel type HS-SCCH, HS-PDSCH (QPSK), HS-PDSCH
(QAM) or HS-PDSCH (MIMO).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
85
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Base Station Settings
See Chapter 4.12, "HSDPA Settings - BS", on page 99.
Remote command:
n.a.
Slot Format
Enters the slot formats for the selected channel.
The range of values depends on the channel selected. For DPCH channels, for example, the slot formats are 0 to 16.
For F-DPCH channels, the slot Formats 1 to 9 are enabled only for instruments eqquiped with additional option R&S SMW-K83. The difference between the F-DPCH slot
formats is the position of the 2 bits TPC field.
A slot format defines the complete structure of a slot made of data and control fields
and includes the symbol rate.
Parameters set via the slot format can subsequently be changed individually.
The structure of the channel currently selected is displayed in a graphic above the
channel table (slot structure).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:SFORmat
on page 411
Symbol Rate
Sets the symbol rate of the selected channel. The range of values depends on the
channel selected.
A change in the symbol rate may lead to a change in the slot format and vice versa.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:SRATe on page 411
Channelization Code
Enters the channelization code (formerly the spreading code number).
The code channel is spread with the set channelization code (spreading code). The
range of values of the channelization code depends on the symbol rate of the channel.
The standard assigns a fixed channelization code to some channels (P-CPICH, for
example, always uses channelization code 0).
The range of values runs from 0 to ((Chip Rate/Symbol Rate) - 1), where
the Chip Rate is 3.84Mcps.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:CCODe on page 381
Power
Sets the channel power in dB.
The power entered is relative to the powers of the other channels. If "3GPP > Adjust
Total Power to 0 dB" is executed, all the power data is relative to 0 dB.
The set "Power" value is also the start power of the channel for "Misuse TPC",
"Dynamic Power Control" (enhanced channels of basestation 1) and the power control
sequence simulation of the OCNS mode 3i channels.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
86
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Base Station Settings
Note: The maximum channel power of 0 dB applies to non-blanked channels (duty
cycle 100%), with blanked channels, the maximum value can be increased (by "Adjust
Total Power") to values greater than 0 dB (to 10*log101/duty_cycle).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:POWer on page 411
Data
Selects data source.
The following standard data sources are available:
● "All 0, All 1"
An internally generated sequence containing 0 data or 1 data.
● "PNxx"
An internally generated pseudo-random noise sequence.
● "Pattern"
An internally generated sequence according to a bit pattern.
Use the "Pattern" box to define the bit pattern.
● "Data List/Select DList"
A binary data from a data list, internally or externally generated.
Select "Select DList" to access the standard "Select List" dialog.
– Select the "Select Data List > navigate to the list file *.dm_iqd > Select" to
select an existing data list.
– Use the "New" and "Edit" functions to create internally new data list or to edit
an existing one.
– Use the standard "File Manager" function to transfer external data lists to the
instrument.
See also:
● Section "Modulation Data" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "File and Data Management" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "Data List Editor" in the R&S SMW user manual
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DATA on page 382
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DATA:PATTern
on page 383
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DATA:DSELect
on page 383
Data Config
(This feature is available for BS1 with active channel coding only.)
Accesses a dialog for configuring the data sources of subchannels in the transport
layer, see Chapter 4.16, "Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1", on page 123.
Remote command:
n.a.
Timing Offset
Sets the timing offset (TOffset).
The timing offset determines the shift of the source symbols before interleaving.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
87
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Base Station Settings
The absolute starting time of the frame (slot 0) is shifted relative to the start of the
scrambling code sequence by the timing offset * 256 chips. This means that
whatever the symbol rate, the resolution of the timing offset is always 256 chips.
This procedure is used to reduce the crest factor. To obtain a lower crest factor, for
example, a good offset from channel to channel is 1, e.g. for DPCH11 a timing offset 0,
for DPCH12 a timing offset 1, for DPCH13 a timing offset 2, etc.
The illustration below shows the effect of the timing offset parameter. For various scenarios, the scrambling code sequence is shown in time relation to the data slots and to
a reference time t0 (starting from t0 the signal is calculated in the instrument).
● Timing offset is not used (TOffset = 0).
The beginning of the frame (slot 0) and the beginning of the scrambling code
period are synchronous with starting point t0.
● Timing offset is used (TOffset > 0).
The absolute starting time of the frames (slot 0) is shifted relative to the reference
time t0 by TOffset * 256 chips. The beginning of the scrambling code
sequence is still synchronous with reference time t0. The beginning of the scrambling code period and the frame (slot 0) are no longer synchronous.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:TOFFset
on page 412
DPCCH Settings
Access a dialog for configuring the control fields of the selected channel, see Chapter 4.19, "DPCCH Settings - BS Channel Table", on page 140
The selected slot format predetermines the setting of the control fields. So a change is
also made to the control fields by changing the slot format and vice versa.
Remote command:
n.a.
Channel State
Activates or deactivates the channel.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
88
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Base Station Settings
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:STATe on page 412
Domain Conflict, Resolving Domain Conflicts
Displays whether the channel has a code domain conflict with one of the channels
lying above it (with a lower channel number). A special symbol marks a conflict and the
column is colored soft orange. If there is no conflict, the column is colored soft blue.
The instrument helps you to resolve code domain conflicts by automatically adapting
the channelization code of the channels involved.
To access the required function, in the "3GPP FDD > Basestation > Channel Table"
select the conflict symbol and trigger "Resolve Domain Conflicts".
Tip: Use the "Code Domain" to visualize the graphical display of code domain assignment by all the active code channels (see Chapter 4.10.5, "Code Domain Graph - BS",
on page 90.
Refer to Chapter 5, "How to Work with the 3GPP FDD Option", on page 264 for stepby-step description.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:DCONflict[:STATe]? on page 423
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:DCONflict:RESolve on page 422
4.10.4 Channel Graph - BS
The channel graph display shows the active code channels.
1. To access the base station channel graph, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction >
Downlink / Forward".
2. Select "Basestation > BS 1/2/3/4".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
89
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Base Station Settings
3. Select "Channel Graph".
The channel number is plotted on the X-axis. The red bars represent the special
channels (P-CPICH to DL-DPCCH), the green bars the other channels. The height
of the bars shows the relative power of the channel
4.10.5 Code Domain Graph - BS
The channelization codes are taken from a code tree of hierarchical structure (see Figure 4-4).
The higher the spreading factor, the smaller the symbol rate and vice versa. The product of the spreading factor and symbol rate is constant and always yields the chip rate.
The outer branches of the tree (right-most position in the figure) indicate the channelization codes for the smallest symbol rate (and thus the highest spreading factor). The
use of a channelization code of the level with spreading factor N blocks the use of all
other channelization codes of levels with spreading factor >N available in the same
branch of the code tree. Channelization codes with smaller spreading factor are contained in the codes with larger spreading factor in the same code branch. When using
such competitive channelization codes at the same time, the signals of associated
code channels are mixed such that they can no longer be separated in the receiver.
Orthogonality will then be lost.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
90
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Base Station Settings
Figure 4-4: Code tree of channelization codes
The outer branches of the tree (right-most position in the figure) indicate the channelization codes for the smallest symbol rate (and thus the highest spreading factor). The
use of a channelization code of the level with spreading factor N blocks the use of all
other channelization codes of levels with spreading factor >N available in the same
branch of the code tree.
Example:
If code c2,1 is being used, the remaining branch with c4,1 and c4,2 is blocked.
The domain of a certain channelization code is the outer branch range (with minimum
symbol rate and max. spreading factor) which is based on the channelization code
selected in the code tree. Using a spreading code means that its entire domain is used.
At a chip rate of 3.84 Mcps, the domain ranges from 0 to 511
Understanding the displayed information
The "Code Domain" display indicates the assigned code domain. The channelization
code is plotted at the X-axis, the colored bars indicate coherent code channels. The
colors are assigned to fixed symbol rates, the allocation is shown below the graph. The
relative power can be taken from the height of the bar.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
91
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Base Station Settings
It is possible to determine from this display whether the settings made have resulted in
a code domain conflict, that is to say, whether the code domains of the active channels
intersect. A code domain conflict is indicated by overlapping bars.
The occupied code domain of a channel is calculated from the symbol rate of the channel, the minimum symbol rate (for 3GPP FDD 7.5 ksps), the chip rate (3.84 Mcps) and
the channelization code number with
as follows:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
92
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Compressed Mode
"Lower domain limit" = current channelization code number * domain
factor
"Upper domain limit" = lower domain limit + domain_factor – 1.
Example:
Channel with symbol rate 30 ksps and channelization code 10:
Domain factor = 30/7.5 = 4,
Lower domain limit = 10 x 4 = 40,
Upper domain limit = 40 + 4 - 1 = 43.
The channel occupies the code domain 40 to 43.
Refer to Chapter 5.1, "Resolving Domain Conflicts", on page 264 for step-by-step
description.
4.11 Compressed Mode
(This feature is available for BS 2...4 and UE 2...4 only.)
To enable handover of a mobile station from a 3GPP FDD base station/user equipment
to another base station/user equipment, (3GPP FDD, 3GPP TDD, GSM or E-UTRA) at
a different frequency, transmission and reception of the 3GPP FDD signal must be
interrupted for a short time. During this time, the mobile station changes to the frequency of the new base station, for example to measure the receive level of this station
or read system information.
To transmit a consistently high data volume also in the remaining (shorter) period of
time, the data is compressed. This can be done by halving the spreading factor (SF/2
method) or reducing error protection (puncturing method). In both cases, transmit
power in the ranges concerned is increased to maintain adequate signal quality.
Apart from these two methods, there is also the method of "higher layer scheduling".
With this method, transmission of the data stream is stopped during the transmission
gap. This method is suitable for packet-oriented services; it involves no power increase
(power offset) in the active ranges.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
93
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Compressed Mode
4.11.1 Compressed Mode General Settings
Compressed Mode State
Activates compressed mode.
The compressed mode is configured in Chapter 4.11, "Compressed Mode",
on page 93.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:STATe on page 422
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:STATe on page 454
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
94
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Compressed Mode
Compressed Mode Method - UE
Selects compressed mode method.
"Higher layer
scheduling"
The data is compressed by stopping the transmission of the data
stream during the transmission gap.
"SF/2"
The data is compressed by halving the spreading factor.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:METHod on page 452
Compressed Mode Method - BS
Selects compressed mode method.
"Puncturing"
The data is compressed by reducing error protection.
"Higher layer
scheduling"
The data is compressed by stopping the transmission of the data
stream during the transmission gap.
"SF/2"
The data is compressed by halving the spreading factor.
This method can be demonstrated in the code domain graph. The
graph is split into two windows. The upper window shows the code
domain assignment with non-compressed slots, the lower window
with compressed slots. It can be recognized clearly that the DPCH
bars in the lower window are wider, which is due to the reduction of
the spreading factor of these channels. The other channels (e.g.
CPICH) have the same width in both halves.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:METHod on page 419
DL Frame Structure - BS
Selects frame structure. The frame structure determines the transmission of TPC and
pilot field in the transmission gaps.
For 3GPP FDD radio communication to operate, the mobile station receiver requires
information in the pilot field for synchronization and channel estimation and in the
power control field TPC for control of the mobile station transmit power.
To keep the period during which no channel estimation takes place as short as possible, the pilot is sent in the last slot of each transmission gap.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
95
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Compressed Mode
Optionally, the first TPC field of the transmission gap can be sent in addition.
"Type A (Last
Pilot)"
The pilot field is sent in the last slot of each transmission gap.
"Type B (First
TPC, Last
Pilot)"
The pilot field is sent in the last slot of each transmission gap. The
first TPC field of the transmission gap is sent in addition.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:DLFStructure on page 419
Power Offset Mode
Selects power offset mode.
The compressed slots can be sent with a power offset, i.e. at an increased power level.
"Auto (By Pilot
Bit Ratio)"
The power offset is obtained as the relation between the Number of
pilots bits of non-compressed slots and the Number of pilot bits by
compressed slots.
"User"
The power offset is defined manually. The value is input in entry field
Power offset.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>|MSTation<st>:CMODe:POMode
on page 421
Power Offset
Defines power offset. The entered value is only valid for "Power Offset Mode User".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>|MSTation<st>:CMODe:POFFset
on page 421
4.11.2 Compressed Mode Configuration Graph
The remaining parameters of the compressed mode are set in the configuration graph.
The graph displays the distribution of transmission gaps in a compressed mode signal.
The signal generated can be divided into three subranges.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
96
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Compressed Mode
4.11.2.1
Transmission Gaps
A transmission gap has a maximum length of 14 slots. Since at least eight active slots
must be sent per frame, gaps comprising seven slots and more have to be distributed
over two neighboring frames.
The transmitted signal consists of max. two patterns that are sent alternately. Each
pattern comprises two transmission gaps.
The graph includes all parameters necessary to define the transmission gaps in the
signal.
The settings in the graph are also valid for the compressed mode graph of the user
equipment with the same number. For example, setting a distance of 9 slots for base
station 4 also sets the distance to 9 slots for user equipment 4.
The parameters below are interrelated in many ways. For example, the transmission
gap distance must be selected so that no frame contains more than one gap. In the
event of an invalid entry, the next valid value is automatically set. If the entry is valid
but changes the valid range for another parameter, the setting of the parameter is
adapted.
At Slot:
Transmission gap slot number.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGSN
on page 421
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGSN
on page 453
Gap Len:
Transmission gap lengths.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGL<di>
on page 420
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGL<di>
on page 453
Distance
Transmission gap distance.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGD
on page 420
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGD
on page 452
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
97
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Compressed Mode
Pattern Len:
Transmission gap pattern length. The input range is 1 ... 100 frames for pattern 1 and
0 ... 100 frames for pattern 2. Thus, it is possible to configure transmission gap pattern
with only one pattern.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGPL
on page 420
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGPL
on page 453
4.11.2.2
Compressed Ranges
All slots of a frame that are not blanked are compressed. If the transmission gap is
transmitted within one frame (single-frame method), an envelope as shown by the diagram on Figure 4-5 is obtained:
Figure 4-5: Envelope of compressed mode signal with single-frame method
If the transmission gap is distributed over two neighboring frames, all slots of the two
frames that are not blanked are compressed (see Figure 4-6):
Figure 4-6: Envelope of compressed mode signal with double-frame method
A different slot format, usually with a higher number of pilot bits, is used in the compressed ranges.
The transmit power can be increased ("Power Offset Mode") automatically or manually
by defining a power offset.
4.11.2.3
Non-compressed ranges
Frames containing no transmission gaps are sent with the same slot format and the
same power as in the non-compressed mode.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
98
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA Settings - BS
4.12 HSDPA Settings - BS
Generation modes of the high speed channels
The high speed channels can be generated either continuously as defined in test
model 5, in packet mode or in H-Set mode according to TS 25.101 Annex A.7.
In packet mode, the start of the channel and the distance between the HSDPA packets
can be set. The packet transmissions can start in one of the first five sub-frames (0 to
4). A sub-frame has the same length as a packet and is 3 slots long. A HS-SCCH
starts at the beginning of the selected sub-frame, a HS-PDSCH starts with an offset of
two slots to the selected sub-frame. The active parts of the HS-SCCH and the HSPDSCH for a specific sub-frame setting differ by the slot offset of the HS-PDSCH.
Example:
Setting Sub-frame 1
HS-SCCH: slot 3 to 5 active
HS-PDSCH: slot 5 to 7 active.
Figure 4-7: Timing diagram for the HS-SCCH and the associated HS-PDSCH, Packet Subframe 1
mode and Inter TTI Distance = 3
In H-Set mode, the first packet is sent in the HS-SCCH subframe 0. Up to 15 HSDPA
channels are coupled to be used in the fixed reference channels. The number of coupled channels depends on the selected H-Set. Channel coding is always performed
over a certain number of bits. The resulting packets are distributed evenly over one
subframe of all HS-PDSCH channelization codes. Therefore, the data stream is not
assigned to a defined channel but to all coupled channels.
4.12.1 Enhanced HSDPA Mode Settings
1. To access "Enhanced HSDPA Mode" dialog, select "Baseband > 3GPP FDD >
Link Direction > Downlink / Forward".
2. In the "Basestations" tab, select "Select Basestations > BS 1".
3. In the "Channel Table" tab, select e.g. "Channel Type > HS-PDS, QPSK 16QAM".
4. Select "Enh/HSDPA Settings > Config...".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
99
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA Settings - BS
5. Select "HSDPA-Mode > Subframe 1".
The available settings and indications in this dialog depend on the selected
HSDPA mode and channel type.
HSDPA Mode
Selects the HSDPA mode.
"Continuous"
The high-speed channel is generated continuously. This mode is
used in test model 5 and 6.
"Subframe 0 |
1 | 2 | 3 | 4"
The high-speed channel is generated in packet mode.
The start of the channel is set by selecting the subframe in which the
first packet is sent.
The distance between subsequent packets is set with parameter
"Inter TTI Distance".
"H-Set"
(Available for BS1 and HS-SCCH only.)
The high-speed channel is generated in packet mode. The first
packet is sent in the HS-SCCH subframe 0.
The number of the coupled channel in the H-Set can be changed with
the parameter "Number of HS-PDSCH Channel Codes".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:MODE
on page 410
Burst Mode
Activates/deactivates burst mode. The signal is bursted when on, otherwise dummy
data are sent during transmission brakes.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:BMODe[:
STATe] on page 392
Inter TTI Distance (H-Set)
(Available for "subframe x")
Selects the distance between two packets in HSDPA packet mode.
The distance is set in number of sub-frames (3 slots = 2 ms). An "Inter TTI Distance" of
1 means continuous generation.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
100
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA Settings - BS
Figure 4-8: Example: Inter TTI Distance in HSDPA H-Set Mode
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:
TTIDistance on page 410
Constellation Version Parameter b - BS
(Available for "HS-PDSCH 16QAM" and "64QAM" only)
Switches the order of the constellation points of the 16QAM or 64QAM mapping.
The re-arrangement is done according to 3GPP TS25.212.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:CVPB
on page 392
4.12.2 MIMO Configuration
The parameters in this section are available for instruments equipped with option
R&S SMW-K83, BS1 and Channel Type HS-PDSCH (MIMO) only (see "Diversity /
MIMO" on page 81).
1. To access "Enhanced HSDPA Mode" dialog, select "Baseband > 3GPP FDD >
Link Direction > Downlink / Forward".
2. In the "Basestations" tab, select "Select Basestations > BS 1".
3. In the "Common" tab, select "Diversity / MIMO > Antenna 1/2 of 2".
4. In the "Channel Table" tab, select "Channel Type > HS-PDS MIMO".
5. Select "Enh/HSDPA Settings > Config...".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
101
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA Settings - BS
6. Select "HSDPA-Mode > Subframe 1".
The available settings and indications in this dialog depend on the selected
HSDPA mode and channel type.
Precoding Weight Pattern (w2)
Sets the precoding weight parameter w2 for MIMO precoding.
The values of the weight parameters w1, w3 and w4 are calculated based on the value
for w2 (see Chapter 3.1.15, "MIMO in HSPA+", on page 36.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:MIMO:
PWPattern on page 409
Stream 2 Active Pattern
Enables/disables a temporal deactivation of Stream 2 per TTI in form of sending pattern.
The stream 2 sending pattern is a sequence of max 16 values of "1" (enables Stream 2
for that TTI) and "-" (disabled Stream 2 for that TTI).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:MIMO:
STAPattern on page 409
Modulation Stream 1/2 (HS-PDSCH MIMO)
Sets the modulation for stream 1 and respectively stream 2 to QPSK, 16QAM or
64QAM.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:MIMO:
MODulation<di> on page 409
Constellation Version Parameter b Stream 1/2 - BS
Switches the order of the constellation points of the 16QAM or 64QAM mapping.
The re-arrangement is done according to 3GPP TS25.212.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
102
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:MIMO:
CVPB<di> on page 408
4.13 HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
The Enhanced HSDPA H-Set Mode settings are available for BS1, HS-SCCH and
HSDPA Mode set to H-Set only.
1. To access this dialog, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Downlink"
2. Select "3GPP FDD > Basestations > Select Basestation > BS1"
3. In the "Basestation 1" dialog, select "Channel Table > Preset to HSDPA H-Set"
4. In the "Channel Table", select "Channel#12 HS-SCCH > Enhanced Settings >
Config"
4.13.1 HSDPA H-Set General Setting
Provided are the following settings:
HSDPA Mode
Selects the HSDPA mode.
"Continuous"
The high-speed channel is generated continuously. This mode is
used in test model 5 and 6.
"Subframe 0 |
1 | 2 | 3 | 4"
The high-speed channel is generated in packet mode.
The start of the channel is set by selecting the subframe in which the
first packet is sent.
The distance between subsequent packets is set with parameter
"Inter TTI Distance".
"H-Set"
(Available for BS1 and HS-SCCH only.)
The high-speed channel is generated in packet mode. The first
packet is sent in the HS-SCCH subframe 0.
The number of the coupled channel in the H-Set can be changed with
the parameter "Number of HS-PDSCH Channel Codes".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
103
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:MODE
on page 410
Burst Mode
Activates/deactivates burst mode. The signal is bursted when on, otherwise dummy
data are sent during transmission brakes.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:BMODe[:
STATe] on page 392
4.13.2 H-Set Configuration Common Settings
The parameters in this section are available for BS1 and HSDPA H-Set Mode only.
Predefined H-Set
Selects the H-Set and the modulation according to TS 25.101 Annex A.7 .
Table 4-5: Following combinations are possible:
H-Set
Modulation
1, 2, 3, 6, 10
QPSK 16QAM
4, 5, 7, 12
QPSK
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
104
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
H-Set
Modulation
8
64QAM
9
16QAM (Stream 1) QPSK (Stream 2)
11
64QAM (Stream 1) 16QAM (Stream 2)
User
-
Note: H-Sets 7 - 9 and H-Set 11 are enabled for instruments equipped with option
R&S SMW-K83 only. H-Set 9 and H-Set 11 are available only for enabled two-antenna
system (see "Diversity / MIMO" on page 81).
Several parameters are automatically set, depending on the selection made for the
parameter "H-Set". However, it is also possible to change these parameters. In this
case, the value of the parameter "H-Set" is automatically set to User.
Note: Use the predefined settings to let the instrument generate a signal equal to the
one generated by an instrument equipped with an older firmware.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
PREDefined on page 399
Advanced Mode (requires ARB)
(in Baseband C/D, this function is permanently active)
Activates/deactivates the advanced mode in which the H-Set will be generated by the
ARB. The parameter can be configured only for H-Sets 1 - 5. For H-Sets 6 - 12 and
User, it is always enabled.
For an H-Set calculated in arbitrary waveform mode (enabled "Advanced Mode") it is
critical to set an appropriate "Current ARB Sequence Length" in order to generate a
signal without unwanted artefacts when the pre-calculated sequence is repeated cyclically. In particular, the HARQ cycles have to terminate completely before restarting the
signal.
Assistance in setting an appropriate sequence length is provided by the parameter
"Suggested ARB Sequence Length" and the "Adjust" button. When working in
Advanced Mode, it is recommended to adjust the current ARB sequence length to the
suggested one.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
AMODe on page 393
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
SLENgth? on page 403
Suggested ARB sequence length
Displays the suggested ARB sequence length.
The "Suggested ARB Sequence Length" is the calculated minimum length that
depends on several parameters, like TTI distance, Number of HARQ Processes,
HARQ cycles, HARQ Mode, RV Parameter Sequence, HS-SCCH Type, Precoding
Weight Pattern and Stream 2 Active Pattern.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
105
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
When working in "Advanced Mode", it is recommended to adjust the current ARB
sequence length to the suggested one.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
SLENgth? on page 403
Current ARB sequence length
Displays the current ARB sequence length or the adjusted ARB sequence length, set
after pressing the button "Adjust".
When working in "Advanced Mode", it is recommended to adjust the current ARB
sequence length to the suggested one.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SLENgth on page 354
Adjust
Sets the current ARB sequence length to the suggested value.
When working in "Advanced Mode", it is recommended to adjust the current ARB
sequence length to the suggested one.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
SLENgth:ADJust on page 403
Nominal Average Information Bitrate
Indicates the average data rate on the transport layer. In case of MIMO, the parameter
indicates the Combined Nominal Average Information Bitrate.
The "Nominal Average Information Bitrate" is calculated for the ideal case of infinite
sequence and with regard of the Stream 2 Active Pattern.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
NAIBitrate? on page 399
UE Category
Displays the UE category that is minimum required to receive the selected H-Set (see
also Chapter 3.1.19, "UE Capabilities", on page 46).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
UECategory? on page 407
HS-SCCH Type
Sets the HS-SCCH type.
"Type 1 (normal)"
Normal operation mode.
"Type 2 (HSSCCH less)"
(Available for instruments equipped with option R&S SMW-K83 only)
HS-SCCH Less operation mode (see also Chapter 3.1.13, "HS-SCCH
less operation", on page 34.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
106
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
"Type 3
(MIMO)"
(Available for instruments equipped with option R&S SMW-K83 and
enabled two-antenna system only)
HS-SCCH Type 3 mode is defined for MIMO operation (see also
Chapter 3.1.15.2, "MIMO downlink control channel support",
on page 38.
Enabling this operation mode, enables the parameters in section
"MIMO Settings" and the Stream 2 parameters in sections "HARQ
Simulation, Signal Structure" and "Coding Configuration".
While working in HS-SCCH Type 3 mode and simulating Antenna 2
of one two-antenna system without transmit diversity, no control
channel is sent although the HS-SCCH channel is displayed as active
in the channel table. To prove that there is no control channel transmission consult the "Code Domain Graph".
The HS-SCCH channel is displayed as DTX.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:TYPE
on page 407
4.13.3 MIMO Settings
The parameters in this section are available for instruments equipped with option
R&S SMW-K83, BS1, HSDPA H-Set Mode, and for HS-SCCH Type 3 (MIMO) only.
1. To access this dialog, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Downlink".
2. Select "3GPP FDD > Basestations > Select Basestation > BS1".
3. In the "Basestation 1" dialog, select "Channel Table > Preset to HSDPA H-Set".
4. In the "Common" tab, select "Diversity/MIMO > Antenna 1 of 2".
5. In the "Channel Table" tab, select "Channel#12 HS-SCCH > Enhanced Settings >
Config...".
6. In the "BS1/Enhanced HSDPA Mode" dialog, select "Common > Predefined H-Set
> H-Set 9/H-Set 11".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
107
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
7. Select "MIMO Settings".
The dialog contains the parameters for configuring the MIMO settings in enhanced
HSDPA mode.
Precoding Weight Pattern (w2)
Selects the sequence for the MIMO precoding weight parameter w2.
The values of the weight parameters w1, w3 and w4 are calculated based on the value
for w2 (see Chapter 3.1.15, "MIMO in HSPA+", on page 36.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
PWPattern on page 400
Stream 2 Active Pattern
Enables/disables a temporal deactivation of Stream 2 per TTI in form of sending pattern.
The stream 2 sending pattern is a sequence of max 16 values of "1" (enables Stream 2
for that TTI) and "-" (disabled Stream 2 for that TTI).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
STAPattern on page 404
4.13.4 Global Settings
The parameters in this section are available for BS1 and HSDPA H-Set Mode only.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
108
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
Data Source (HS-DSCH)
Selects the data source for the transport channel.
New data is retrieved from the data source each time an initial transmission is performed within one TTI. An initial transmission is performed in case of "HARQ Mode"
set to Constant ACK or by each new beginning of the "Redundancy Version
Sequence".
The following standard data sources are available:
● "All 0, All 1"
An internally generated sequence containing 0 data or 1 data.
● "PNxx"
An internally generated pseudo-random noise sequence.
● "Pattern"
An internally generated sequence according to a bit pattern.
Use the "Pattern" box to define the bit pattern.
● "Data List/Select DList"
A binary data from a data list, internally or externally generated.
Select "Select DList" to access the standard "Select List" dialog.
– Select the "Select Data List > navigate to the list file *.dm_iqd > Select" to
select an existing data list.
– Use the "New" and "Edit" functions to create internally new data list or to edit
an existing one.
– Use the standard "File Manager" function to transfer external data lists to the
instrument.
See also:
● Section "Modulation Data" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "File and Data Management" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "Data List Editor" in the R&S SMW user manual
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
109
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:DATA
on page 396
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
DATA:PATTern on page 397
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
DATA:DSELect on page 396
UEID (H-RNTI)
Enters the UE identity which is the HS-DSCH Radio Network Identifier (H-RNTI)
defined in 3GPP TS 25.331: "Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol Specification".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:UEID
on page 408
Channelization Code HS-SCCH (SF128)
Sets the channelization code of the HS-SCCH.
Note: To let the instrument generate a signal equal to the one generated by an instrument equipped with an older firmware, set the same "Channelization Codes" as the
codes used for your physical channels.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
HSCCode on page 398
Number of HS-PDSCH Channelization Codes
Sets the number of physical HS-PDSCH data channels assigned to the HS-SCCH.
The maximum number of channels assigned to the H-Set depends on the "HS-SCCH
Type" and the channel number of the first HS-PDSCH channel in the H-Set.
For HS-SCCH Type 2 (less operation) maximum of two channels can be assigned.
For HS-SCCH Type 1 (normal operation) and Type 3 (MIMO) the maximum number of
assigned channels is 15.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
CLENgth on page 395
Start Channelization Code HS-PDSCH (SF16)
Sets the channelization code of the first HS-PDSCH channel in the H-Set.
The channelization codes of the rest of the HS-PDSCHs in this H-Set are set automatically.
Note: To let the instrument generate a signal equal to the one generated by an instrument equipped with an older firmware, set the same "Channelization Codes" as the
codes used for your physical channels.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
110
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
SCCode on page 402
Total HS-PDSCH Power
Sets the total HS-PDSCH power, i.e. sets the total power of all HS-DPSCH channels in
the H-Set.
Note: In the 3GPP test specification, e.g. 3GPP TS34.121-1, the HS-PDSCH power is
typically given as a total power of all HS-PDSCH channels.
Use this parameter to set the HS-PDSCH power level directly as given in the 3GPP
test specification.
There are two possibilities to set the power of a H-Set:
● select "BS1 > Channel Table > HS-PDSCH Channel > Power" and set the power of
the individual channels.
The total power of all HS-PDSCH channels of the H-Set depends on the Number of
HS-PDSCH Channelization Codes and is calculated as follow:
TotalPowerAll HS-PDSCHs = PowerHS-PDSCH Channel + 10*Log10(NumberOfHSPDSCHChannelizationCodes)
The calculated total power is displayed with the parameter "Total HS-PDSCH
Power"
● set directly the total power of the H-Set, i.e set the parameter "Total HS-PDSCH
Power"
The individual power levels of the HS-PDSCHs are calculated automatically and
displayed in the "BS1 > Channel Table > HS-PDSCH Channel > Power".
Example:
Select "BS1 > HSDPA H-Set".
The default H-Set with 5 Channelization Codes ("BS1 > Channel table > HSDPA Settings > Config > Enhanced HSDPA Mode > Number of HS-PDSCH Channelization
Codes") is configured.
The default individual power levels of the HS-PDSCH channels are -20 dB. The "Total
HS-PDSCH Power" is -13.01 dB.
Set the "Total HS-PDSCH Power" to -10 dB. The individual power levels of the HSPDSCH channels are -16.99 dB.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
TPOWer on page 405
4.13.5 Coding Configuration
The parameters in this section are available for BS1 and HSDPA H-Set Mode only.
The parameters for stream 2 are available for instruments equipped with option
R&S SMW-K83 and for HS-SCCH Type 3 only.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
111
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
To access the dialog for the two streams case:
1. Select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Downlink".
2. Select "3GPP FDD > Basestations > Select Basestation > BS1".
3. In the "Basestation 1" dialog, select "Channel Table > Preset to HSDPA H-Set".
4. In the "Common" tab, select "Diversity/MIMO > Antenna 1 of 2".
5. In the "Channel Table" tab, select "Channel#12 HS-SCCH > Enhanced Settings >
Config...".
6. In the "BS1/Enhanced HSDPA Mode" dialog, select "Common > HS-SCCH Type >
Type 3 (MIMO)".
7. Select "Coding".
This dialog contains the parameters required to configure the streams for HSDPA
H-Set mode.
HS-PDSCH Modulation Stream1/2
Sets the HS-PDSCH modulation for stream 1 and stream 2 to QPSK, 16QAM or
64QAM.
Note: The modulation 64QAM is available for instruments equipped with option
R&S SMW-K83 only.
For HS-SCCH Type 2, the available modulation scheme is QPSK only.
For HS-SCCH Type 3 (MIMO), the modulation selected for stream 1 has to be the
higher order one, i.e. combination 16QAM/64QAM is not allowed.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
112
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
MODulation<di> on page 398
UE Supports 64QAM
(Available for BS1, "HSDPA H-Set Mode", "HS-SCCH Type 1" and "16QAM" only)
Enables/disables UE support of 64QAM.
In case this parameter is disabled, i.e. the UE does not support 64QAM, the xccs,7 bit
is used for channelization information.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
S64Qam on page 402
Binary Channel Bits per TTI (Physical Layer) Stream1/2
Displays the coded binary channel bits per TTI and per stream.
The value displayed is calculated upon the values and selections for the parameters
"HS-PDSCH Modulation", "Symbol Rate" and "Number of HS-PDSCH Channel
Codes".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
BCBTti<di>? on page 394
Transport Block Size Table Stream1/2
Selects Table 0 or Table 1 as described in 3GPP TS 25.321.
For "HS-PDSCH Modulation" set to 64QAM, only Table 1 is available.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:TBS:
TABLe<di> on page 406
Transport Block Size Index Stream1/2
Selects the Index ki for the corresponding table and stream, as described in 3GPP
TS 25.321.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:TBS:
INDex<di> on page 405
Transport Block Size Reference Stream1/2
(Available for BS1, HSDPA H-Set Mode and HS-SCCH Type 2 only)
While working in less operation mode, this parameter is signaled instead of the parameter Transport Block Size Index.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
113
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:TBS:
REFerence on page 406
Information Bit Payload (TB-Size) Stream 1/2
Displays the payload of the information bit. This value determines the number of transport layer bits sent in each TTI before coding.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
BPAYload<di>? on page 394
Coding Rate Stream 1/2
Displays the resulting coding rate per stream.
The coding rate is calculated as a relation between the "Information Bit Payload" and
"Binary Channel Bits per TTI".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
CRATe<di>? on page 395
Virtual IR Buffer Size (per HARQ Process) Stream1/2
Sets the size of the Virtual IR Buffer (Number of SMLs per HARQ-Process) per stream.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
VIBSize<di> on page 408
4.13.6 Signal Structure
The parameters in this section are available for BS1 and HSDPA H-Set Mode only.
The parameters for stream 2 are available for instruments equipped with option
R&S SMW-K83 and for HS-SCCH Type 3 only.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
114
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
Inter TTI Distance (H-Set)
(Available for "subframe x")
Selects the distance between two packets in HSDPA packet mode.
The distance is set in number of sub-frames (3 slots = 2 ms). An "Inter TTI Distance" of
1 means continuous generation.
Figure 4-9: Example: Inter TTI Distance in HSDPA H-Set Mode
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:
TTIDistance on page 410
Number of HARQ Processes per Stream
Sets the number of HARQ processes. This value determines the distribution of the
payload in the subframes and depends on the Inter "TTI Distance" (see figure).
A minimum of 6 HARQ Processes are required to achieve continuous data transmission.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
HARQ:LENGth on page 397
Signaling Pattern Stream1/2
Displays the distribution of packets over time. The Signaling Pattern displays a HARQProcess cycle and is a sequence of HARQ-IDs and "-". A HARQ-ID indicates a packet,
a "-" indicates no packet (see figure). The Signaling Pattern is cyclically repeated.
Long signaling patterns with regular repeating groups of HARQ-ID and "-" are not displayed completely. The signaling pattern is shortened and ". . ." is displayed but the
scheduling is performed according to the selected "Inter TTI Distance". Long signaling
patterns with irregularity in the HARQ-ID and "-" groups are displayed completely.
Depending on the selected "Burst Mode", a Dummy - TTI will be sent within the no
packet subframes.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
115
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
SPATtern<di>? on page 404
4.13.7 HARQ Simulation
The parameters in this section are available for BS1 and HSDPA H-Set Mode only.
The parameters for stream 2 are available for instruments equipped with option
R&S SMW-K83 and for HS-SCCH Type 3 only.
Mode (HARQ Simulation)
Sets the HARQ Simulation Mode.
Note: To let the instrument generate a signal equal to the one generated by an instrument equipped with an older firmware, set the "HARQ Mode" to "Constant ACK".
"Constant ACK"
New data is used for each new TTI. This mode is used to simulate
maximum throughput transmission.
"Constant NACK"
(enabled in "Advanced Mode" only)
Enables NACK simulation, i.e. depending on the sequence selected
with parameter "Redundancy Version Parameter Sequence" packets
are retransmitted. This mode is used for testing with varying redundancy version.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
HARQ:MODE on page 398
Redundancy Version Stream1/2
The parameter is enabled for "HARQ Simulation Mode" set to Constant ACK.
Enters the Redundancy Version Parameter per stream. This value determines the processing of the Forward Error Correction and Constellation Arrangement (16/64QAM
modulation), see TS 25.212 4.6.2.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
116
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
For HS-SCCH Type 2 (less operation), the Redundancy Version Parameter is always
0.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
RVParameter<di> on page 400
Redundancy Version Sequence Stream 1/2
The parameter is enabled for "HARQ Simulation Mode" set to Constant NACK.
Enters a sequence of Redundancy Version Parameters per stream. The value of the
RV parameter determines the processing of the Forward Error Correction and Constellation Arrangement (16/64QAM modulation), see TS 25.212 4.6.2.
The sequence has a length of maximum 30 values. The sequence length determines
the maximum number of retransmissions. New data is retrieved from the data source
after reaching the end of the sequence.
For HS-SCCH Type 2 (less operation), the Redundancy Version Parameter Sequence
is always "0,3,4".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
RVPSequence<di> on page 400
4.13.8 Error Insertion
The parameters in this section are available for BS1, HSDPA H-Set Mode and disabled
Advanced Mode only.
In the "Bit Error Insertion" and "Block Error Insertion" sections, errors can be inserted
into the data source and into the CRC checksum, in order, for example, to check the bit
and block error rate testers.
Bit Error State (HSDPA H-Set)
Activates or deactivates bit error generation.
Bit errors are inserted into the data stream of the coupled HS-PDSCHs. It is possible to
select the layer in which the errors are inserted (physical or transport layer).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
117
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
When the data source is read out, individual bits are deliberately inverted at random
points in the data bit stream at the specified error rate in order to simulate an invalid
signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:
DERRor:BIT:STATe on page 446
Bit Error Rate (HSDPA H-Set)
Sets the bit error rate.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:
DERRor:BIT:RATE on page 445
Insert Errors On (HSDPA H-Set)
Selects the layer at which bit errors are inserted.
"Transport layer"
Bit errors are inserted in the transport layer.
"Physical layer"
Bit errors are inserted in the physical layer.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:
DERRor:BIT:LAYer on page 445
Block Error State (HSDPA H-Set)
Activates or deactivates block error generation.
The CRC checksum is determined and then the last bit is inverted at the specified error
probability in order to simulate an invalid signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:
DERRor:BLOCk:STATe on page 446
Block Error Rate (HSDPA H-Set)
Sets the block error rate.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:
DERRor:BLOCk:RATE on page 446
4.13.9 Randomly Varying Modulation And Number Of Codes (Type 3i) Settings
(Available for enabled Advanced Mode, HS-SCCH Type 1 and for instruments equipped with option R&S SMW-K83)
1. To access this dialog, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Downlink".
2. Select "3GPP FDD > Basestations > Select Basestation > BS1".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
118
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSDPA H-Set Mode Settings - BS
3. In the "Basestation 1" dialog, select "Channel Table > Preset to HSDPA H-Set".
4. In the "Channel Table" tab, select "Channel#12 HS-SCCH > Enhanced Settings >
Config...".
5. In the "BS1/Enhanced HSDPA Mode" dialog, select "Common".
6. Select "Advanced Mode > On".
7. Select "HS-SCCH Type > Type 1 (normal)"
8. Select the "Type 3i" tab.
This section comprises the settings necessary to configure the signal of both interferer according to the 3i Enhanced Performance Requirements tests, described in
3GPP TS34.12.-1, chapters 9.2.1L and 9.2.1LA.
The used modulation and number of HS-PDSCH codes in an H-Set is randomly
selected every HSDPA TTI among four options with equal probability (see Table 4-6).
Table 4-6: Used modulation and number of HS-PDSCH codes
Option
Modulation
Number of HS-PDSCH Codes
1
HS-PDSCH Modulation
Alternative Number of HS-PDSCH Channelization
Codes
2
"Alternative HS-PDSCH Modulation" on page 120
Alternative Number of HS-PDSCH Channelization
Codes
3
HS-PDSCH Modulation
Number of HS-PDSCH Channelization Codes
4
"Alternative HS-PDSCH Modulation" on page 120
Number of HS-PDSCH Channelization Codes
Although the number of active HS-PDSCH channels varies over time, the overall
power of the HS-PDSCH channels in the H-Set stays constant, as the power of the
individual HS-PDSCH channels is raised when the number is reduced.
The channel powers displayed in the "BS > Channel Table" are the channel powers
during the TTIs in which the Number of HS-PDSCH Channelization Codes is applied.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
119
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Enhanced Settings for P-CPICH - BS1
The ARB sequence length suggestion (see Suggested ARB sequence length) does not
consider the statistical process of the selection among the four options, it may be necessary to further increase the ARB sequence length to achieve the desired statistical
properties.
To generate a signal without unwanted artefacts, select "3GPP FDD > Filter/
Clipping/ARB Settings" and set the parameter Sequence Length ARB to a multiple of
the suggested length.
The configured Transport Block Size Table and Transport Block Size Index are used in
all TTIs, no matter which of the four options is used. The payload size can vary over
time and can deviate from the value displayed with the parameter Information Bit Payload (TB-Size) Stream 1/2.
Randomly Varying Modulation And Number Of Codes
Enables/disables the random variation of the modulation and codes.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
RVSTate on page 401
Alternative HS-PDSCH Modulation
Sets the alternative modulation (see Table 4-6).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
ALTModulation on page 394
Alternative Number of HS-PDSCH Channelization Codes
Sets the alternative number of HS-PDSCH channelization codes (see Table 4-6).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
ACLength on page 393
Random Seed
Sets the seed for the random process deciding between the four option (see
Table 4-6).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:SEED
on page 402
4.14 Enhanced Settings for P-CPICH - BS1
► To access this dialog, select "3GPP FDD > BS > Channel Table > P-CPICH >
Enhanced Settings > Config".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
120
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Enhanced Settings for P-CCPCH - BS1
P-CPICH Pattern
Sets the P-CPICH pattern (channel 0).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:ENHanced:PCPich:PATTern
on page 427
4.15 Enhanced Settings for P-CCPCH - BS1
► To access this dialog, select "3GPP FDD > BS1 > Channel Table > P-CCPCH >
Enhanced Settings > Config".
The dialog comprises the settings for configuring the enhanced state of this displayed channel and the channel coding settings. Interleaver states 1 and 2 can be
activated separately.
The settings for the enhanced P-CCPCH channel and the enhanced DPCH channels are different (see Chapter 4.16, "Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1",
on page 123.
4.15.1 Channel Number and State
Channel Number (Enhanced P-CCPCH)
Displays the channel number and the channel type.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
121
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Enhanced Settings for P-CCPCH - BS1
Remote command:
n.a.
State (Enhanced P-CCPCH)
Switches the P-CCPCH (Primary Common Control Phys. Channel) to the enhanced
state. The channel signal is generated in realtime.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:STATe on page 427
4.15.2 Channel Coding - Enhanced P-CCPCH BS1
The "Channel Coding" section is where the channel coding settings are made.
The channel-coded P-CCPCH (Broadcast Channel BCH) with System Frame Number
is generated according to the following principle.
Figure 4-10: Generation of a channel coded P-CCPCH/BCH
The data blocks of the BCH at transport-channel level comprise data determined for 20
ms of the PCCPCH (i.e. 2 frames) after channel coding. The first field of such a data
block is an 11bit long field for the system frame number (SFN). The SFN is automatically incremented by 1 (as stipulated in the standard) from transport block to transport
block (equivalent to a step width of 2 frames due to the transport time interval length of
20 ms). After 2048 transport blocks (equivalent to 4096 frames) the SFN is reset and
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
122
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
starts again at 0 (SFN restart). An output trigger indicating the SFN restart can be generated.
The SFN format is defined in the standard; it is MSB-first coded.
The remaining system information (a 235-bit long field per block) is filled from the data
source selected for the P-CCPCH.
A data list can be used to transmit further specific system information in addition to the
SFN. If only the SFN is required, "ALL 0" is recommended as data source for PCCPCH.
The BCH transport blocks are then channel-coded. A coded transport block comprises
the data sequence for two P-CCPCH frames.
Channel Coding State
Activates or deactivates channel coding.
The coding scheme is displayed in the field below.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:CCODing:STATe
on page 438
Channel Coding Type
Displays the coding scheme.
The coding scheme of P-CCPCH (BCH) is specified in the standard. The channel is
generated automatically with the counting system frame number (SFN). The system
information after the SFN field is completed from the selected data source.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:CCODing:TYPE?
on page 438
Interleaver
Activates or deactivates channel coding interleaver states 1 and 2.
Note: The interleaver states do not cause the symbol rate to change
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:CCODing:
INTerleaver<di> on page 438
4.16 Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
The settings for the enhanced P-CCPCH channel (see Chapter 4.15, "Enhanced Settings for P-CCPCH - BS1", on page 121) and the enhanced DPCH channels are different. This section describes the settings for the enhanced DPCH channels (channels#11/12/13). The channels can be configured independently.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
123
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
Use the HSDPA Settings - BS dialog to configure the high-speed channels.
4.16.1 Channel Number and State
► To access these settings, select "3GPP FDD > BS1 > Channel Table > Channel#11/12/13 > DPCH > Enhanced/HSDPA Settings > Config... > Enhanced".
In this tab, you can activate the currently selected channel.
Enhanced State
Switches the DPCH channel to the enhanced state.
In the enhanced state, the modulation signal of the selected channel is generated in
realtime. It is possible to activate channel coding and simulate bit and block errors or
use dynamic power control. Data lists, for example with user data for the transport
layer, can be used as the data source.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
124
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:STATe
on page 426
4.16.2 Channel Coding
► To access the "Channel Coding" settings, select "3GPP FDD > BS1 > Channel
Table > Channel#11/12/13 > DPCH > Enhanced/HSDPA Settings > Config... >
Channel Coding".
The "Channel Coding > General" tab comprises the settings for enabling and configuring the channel coding. The provided settings are devided into general settings
and several sub-tabs, one per transport channel.
To access the channel coding settings of a transport channel, select the corresponding side tab, for example "DTCH1". Refer to Chapter 4.16.3, "Transport
Channel - Enhanced DPCHs BS1", on page 128 for description of the provided
settings.
A downlink reference measurement channel according to 3GPP TS 25.101 is generated when the transport channels DTCH (Dedicated Traffic Channel) and DCCH (Dedicated Control Channel) , which contain the user data, are mapped to a DPCH (Dedicated Physical Channel) with a different data rate after channel coding and multiplexing.
The display below is taken from the standard (TS 25.101) and shows in diagrammatic
form the generation of a 12.2 kbps reference measurement channel from the DTCH
and DCCH transport channels (see standard for figures and tables of other reference
measurement channels).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
125
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
Figure 4-11: Channel coding of the 12.2 kbps reference measurement channel (downlink)
The Table 4-7 shows a summary of the transport channel parameters of the 12.2 kpbs
reference measurement channel
Table 4-7: Transport channel parameters (12.2 kpbs reference measurement channel)
Parameter
DCCH
DTCH
Data Source
All 0
All 0
Transport Block Size
100
244
Transmission Time Interval
40 ms
20 ms
Type of Error Protection
Convolution Coding
Convolution Coding
Coding Rate
1/3
1/3
Rate Matching attribute
256
256
Size of CRC
12
16
Interleaver 1/2
On
On
Channel Coding State
Activates or deactivates channel coding.
Channel-coded measurement channels - so-called "reference measurement channels"
- are required for many test procedures specified by the standard.
When channel coding is activated, (depending on the coding type) the slot format (and
thus the symbol rate, the pilot length and the TFCI state) are predetermined. The corresponding parameters in the channel table are disabled.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
126
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
CCODing:STATe on page 430
Channel Coding Type
Selects channel coding.
The 3GPP specification defines 4 reference measurement channel coding types, which
differ in the input data bit rate bit to be processed (12.2, 64, 144 and 384 ksps). The
additional AMR CODER coding scheme generates the coding of a voice channel.
The BTFD coding types with different data rates are also defined in the 3GPP specification (TS 34.121). They are used for the receiver quality test Blind Transport Format
Detection. DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) bits are included in the data stream
between rate matching and interleaving 1.
User coding can be defined as required in the detailed coding settings menu section
revealed with button "Show Details". They can be stored and loaded in the "User Coding" submenu. Selection User is indicated as soon as a coding parameter is modified
after selecting a predefined coding type.
The input data bits are taken for channel coding from the data source specified in the
"Transport Channel" dialog section. The bits are available with a higher rate at the
channel coding output. The allocations between the measurement input data bit rate
and the output symbol rate are fixed, that is to say, the symbol rate is adjusted automatically.
The following are available for selection:
"RMC 12.2
kbps"
12.2 kbps measurement channel
"RMC 64 kbps" 64 kbps measurement channel
"RMC 144
kbps"
144 kbps measurement channel
"RMC 384
kbps"
384 kbps measurement channel
"AMR 12.2
kbps"
Channel coding for the AMR coder
"BTFD Rate 1
12.2ksps"
Blind Transport Format Detection Rate 1 (12.2 kbps)
"BTFD Rate 2
7.95ksps"
Blind Transport Format Detection Rate 2 (7.95 kbps)
"BTFD Rate 3
1.95ksps"
Blind Transport Format Detection Rate 3 (1.95 kbps)
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
CCODing:TYPE on page 430
User Coding
Provides access to the standard "File Select" function of the instrument. The provided
navigation possibilities in the dialog are self-explanatory.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
127
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
See also, chapter "File and Data Management" in the R&S SMW User Manual.
User coding of BST1 are files with the predefined file extension *.3g_ccod_dl. The
file name and the directory they are stored in are user-definable; the file extension is
assigned automatically.
The complete channel coding settings are saved and recalled.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel:DPCH:CCODing:
USER:CATalog? on page 432
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
CCODing:USER:STORe on page 432
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
CCODing:USER:LOAD on page 432
Slot Format (DPDCH)
Enters the slot format. The slot format (and thus the symbol rate, the pilot length and
the TFCI state) depends on the coding type selected. The User Coding selection
appears as soon as the slot format is changed.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
CCODing:SFORmat on page 429
Symbol Rate (DPDCH)
Displays the symbol rate.
The symbol rate is determined by the slot format set.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
CCODing:SRATe? on page 429
Bits per Frame (DPDCH)
Displays the data bits in the DPDCH component of the DPCH frame at physical level.
The value depends on the slot format.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
CCODing:BPFRame? on page 428
4.16.3 Transport Channel - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
1. To access this dialog, select "3GPP FDD > BS1 > Channel Table > Channel#11/12/13 > DPCH > Enhanced/HSDPA Settings > Config... > Channel Coding".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
128
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
2. To access the channel coding settings of a transport channel, select the corresponding side tab, for example "DTCH1".
The dialog provides access to the settings of up to 7 transport channels (TCHs),
the DTCHs (DTCH1 to 6) and the DCCH.
Transport Channel State
Activates or deactivates the transport channel.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:STATe on page 437
In case of remote control, DCCH corresponds to :TCHannel0, DTCH1 to :
TCHannel1, etc.
Data Source
Selects the data source for the transport channel.
The following standard data sources are available:
● "All 0, All 1"
An internally generated sequence containing 0 data or 1 data.
● "PNxx"
An internally generated pseudo-random noise sequence.
● "Pattern"
An internally generated sequence according to a bit pattern.
Use the "Pattern" box to define the bit pattern.
● "Data List/Select DList"
A binary data from a data list, internally or externally generated.
Select "Select DList" to access the standard "Select List" dialog.
– Select the "Select Data List > navigate to the list file *.dm_iqd > Select" to
select an existing data list.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
129
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
–
–
Use the "New" and "Edit" functions to create internally new data list or to edit
an existing one.
Use the standard "File Manager" function to transfer external data lists to the
instrument.
See also:
● Section "Modulation Data" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "File and Data Management" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "Data List Editor" in the R&S SMW user manual
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:DATA on page 434
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:DATA:PATTern on page 435
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:DATA:DSELect on page 434
Transport Time Interval
Sets the number of frames into which a TCH is divided. This setting also defines the
interleaver depth.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:TTINterval on page 438
Transport Block
Sets the number of transport blocks for the TCH.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:TBCount on page 437
Transport Block Size
Sets the size of the transport block at the channel coding input.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:TBSize on page 437
Size of CRC
Defines the type (length) of the CRC. Checksum determination can also be deactivated
(setting None).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:CRCSize on page 433
Rate Matching Attribute
Sets data rate matching (Rate Matching).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
130
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:RMATtribute on page 436
DTX Indication Bits
Sets the number of DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) bits. These bits are entered in
the data stream between rate matching and interleaver 1. Channel coding of BTFD reference measurement channels Rate 2 and Rate 3 includes DTX267 and DTX644,
respectively (see 3GPP TS 34.121).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:DTX on page 435
Error Protection
Selects error protection.
"None"
No error protection
"Turbo 1/3"
Turbo Coder of rate 1/3 in accordance with the 3GPP specifications.
"Conv 1/2 |
1/3"
Convolution Coder of rate 1/2 or 1/3 with generator polynomials
defined by 3GPP.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:EPRotection on page 435
Interleaver 1 State
Activates or deactivates channel coding interleaver state 1 of the transport channel.
Interleaver state 1 can be set independently in each TCH. Activation does not change
the symbol rate.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:INTerleaver on page 436
Interleaver 2 State
Activates or deactivates channel coding interleaver state 2 of all the transport channels. Interleaver state 2 can only be set for all the TCHs together. Activation does not
change the symbol rate.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
INTerleaver2 on page 433
4.16.4 Error Insertion - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
1. To access this dialog, select "3GPP FDD > BS1 > Channel Table > Channel#11/12/13 > Enhanced/HSDPA Settings > Config...".
2. In the "Basestation /Enhanced Channel" dialog, select one of the following:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
131
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
a) Select "Bit Error Insertion".
b) Select "Block Error Insertion".
The dialogs provide the parameters for inserting errors into the data source and
into the CRC checksum, for example, to check the bit and block error rate testers.
Bit Error State (Enhanced DPCHs)
Activates or deactivates bit error generation.
Bit errors are inserted into the data fields of the enhanced channels. When channel
coding is active, it is possible to select the layer in which the errors are inserted (physical or transport layer).
When the data source is read out, individual bits are deliberately inverted at random
points in the data bit stream at the specified error rate in order to simulate an invalid
signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DERRor:BIT:STATe on page 444
Bit Error Rate
Sets the bit error rate.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DERRor:BIT:RATE on page 443
Insert Errors On
Selects the layer in the coding process at which bit errors are inserted.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
132
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
"Transport
layer"
Bit errors are inserted in the transport layer.
This selection is only available when channel coding is active.
"Physical
layer"
Bit errors are inserted in the physical layer.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DERRor:BIT:LAYer on page 443
Block Error State
Activates or deactivates block error generation.
The CRC checksum is determined and then the last bit is inverted at the specified error
probability in order to simulate an invalid signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DERRor:BLOCk:STATe on page 445
Block Error Rate
Sets block error rate.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DERRor:BLOCk:RATE on page 444
4.16.5 Dynamic Power Control - Enhanced DPCHs BS1
(not supported in Baseband C/D)
The "Dynamic Power Control" section comprises the settings necessary to configure
the power of the selected enhanced channel and to increase or decrease it within the
predefined dynamic range ("Up Range + Down Range") and with the predefined step
size ("Power Step") depending on a control signal.
The control signal can be provided either externally, internally (TPC pattern) or manually (see Mode).
The external control signal has to be supplied at the local T/M 3 or global USER 6 connector, as defined with the parameter "Connector" on page 136.
The "Dynamic Power Control" is suitable for testing of Closed (Inner) Loop Power Control in two test constellations:
●
To test whether the DUT (receiver) correctly performs the SIR (Signal to Interference Ratio) measurement and inserts the corresponding bits into the TPC field of
its transmitting signal.
The TPC control information is provided by an external "Dynamic Power Control"
signal.
●
To test whether the DUT (transmitter) responds with the correct output power to
received TPC bits.
To perform this test, use a data list adapted to the test condition as TPC data
source. The TPC pattern is defined in the channel table.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
133
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
The power change of the channels is performed by a switchover of a mapping table,
controlled by the "Dynamic Power Control" signal which is queried at the beginning of
the pilot field. The limited number of mappings restricts the maximum dynamic range to
30 dB and the step width to min. 0.5 dB. The output power of each channel is thus limited to the dynamic range around the channel-specific start power.
Optaining optimum signal quality
The "Power Up Range" should not be set higher than necessary because the mapping
of the I/Q level in this range must be maintained as a level margin.
Example: Principle of the downlink dynamic power control
"Power Up Range = Power Down Range"
Channel#11/13, "Direction > Up"
Channel#12, "Direction > Down"
External control signal is provided
The Figure 4-12 illustrates the adjustment in the channel power of these 3 enhanced
channels.
Figure 4-12: Dynamic Power Control (Down Link)
1a, 1b, 1c = Start power of the corresponding channel#11/12/13
2a, 2b, 2c = Resulting channel power of channel#11/12/13 at high level of the control signal at the begining
of the pilot field.
The available mappings are shown on the X-axis with MapM being the starting point. In
this point, all channels have the start power as selected in the channel table.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
134
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
At the beginning of the pilot field, the provided control signal is queried in each timeslot. Receiving of a logical "1" results in a switchover to the right mapping MapM+1. This
means an increase of the output power by "Power Step" for all channels with "Power
Control Mode Up". In this example, the power of channel 12 is decreased by the same
value (see Figure 4-12).
Receiving of a logical "0" results in a switchover to the left mapping MapM-1. This
means a reduction of the output power by "Power Step" for all channels with "Power
Control Mode Down". The power of channel 12 is increased by the same value.
How to access the settings
► To access the "Dynamic Power Control" settings, select "3GPP FDD > Channel
Table > DPCH > Enhanced Settings > Dynamic Power Control".
Dynamic Power Control State
Activates or deactivates the "Dynamic Power Control" for the selected enhanced channel.
With activated Dynamic Power Control, the power of the enhanced channel can be
increased or decreased within the predefined dynamic range ("Up Range" + "Down
Range") and with the predefined step size ("Power Step") with an external control signal.
The instrument expects an external control signal at the selected "Connector"
on page 136.
The "Direction" settings determine if the channel power is increased or decreased by a
high level of the control signal.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
135
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DPControl:STATe on page 441
Mode
Selects the control signal for Dynamic Power Control.
"External"
The instrument expects an external control signal at the selected
"Connector" on page 136.
"TPC"
The TPC pattern is used for Dynamic Power Control. This selection
corresponds to selection (Mis) Use TPC for not enhanced DPCHs.
"Manual"
The control signal is manually produced by selecting one of the buttons 0 or 1. Button 1 corresponds to a positive control signal, button 0
to a negative control signal.
The channel power is increased or decreased depending on the
"Direction" setting by the selected power step.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DPControl:MODE on page 441
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DPControl:STEP:MANual on page 442
Connector
Determines the input connector the external control signal is supplied at.
In this firmware version, the "Global" connector is disabled.
See Chapter 3.2, "Routing and enabling an external control signal", on page 52.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DPControl:CONNector on page 440
Direction
Determines whether the channel power is increased or decreased by a high level of
the control signal (see Figure 4-12).
"Up"
A high level of the control signal leads to an increase of channel
power.
"Down"
A high level of the control signal leads to a decrease of channel
power.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DPControl:DIRection on page 440
Power Step
Sets step width by which – with "Dynamic Power Control" being switched on - the
channel power of the selected enhanced channel in the timeslot grid (= 0,667 ms) is
increased or decreased within the set dynamic range ("Up Range + Down Range").
The start power of the channel is set in the "Power" column of the channel table.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
136
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Enhanced Settings for DPCHs - BS1
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DPControl:STEP[:EXTernal] on page 442
Up Range/Down Range
Sets dynamic range by which – with "Dynamic Power Control" switched on – the channel powers of the enhanced channels can be increased. The resulting "Dynamic Power
Control" dynamic range ("Up Range" + "Down Range") depends on the selected
"Power Step" and is as follow:
●
●
For "Power Step" < 1 dB, the dynamic range ("Up Range" + "Down Range") <= 30
dB
For "Power Step" => 1 dB, the dynamic range ("Up Range" + "Down Range") <= 60
dB
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DPControl:RANGe:UP on page 441
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DPControl:RANGe:DOWN on page 441
Power Control Graph
Indicates the deviation of the channel power (delta POW) from the set power start
value of the corresponding enhanced channels.
The graph is automatically displayed with "Dynamic Power Control" switched on.
Note: A realtime update of the display in the timeslot (= 0.667 ms) is not possible and
is performed in a more coarse time interval. The power control graph does not display
fast channel power changes. The settled state of the control loop is however easy to
recognize.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
137
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
S-CCPCH Settings - BS Channel Table
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DPControl[:POWer]? on page 442
4.17 S-CCPCH Settings - BS Channel Table
► To access the "S-CCPCH" settings, select "3GPP FDD > BS > Channel Table >
Channel type > S-CCPCH > DPCCH Settings > Config...".
The selected slot format determines the provided settings. Whenever the "TFCI
State" and PILOT LENGTH settings are changed, the slot format is adjusted
accordingly.
Slot Structure (S-CCPCH)
Displays the slot structure.
The structure of the slot depends on the selected slot format (see also 3GPP TS
25.211, Table 18: Secondary CCPCH fields)
Slot Format (S-CCPCH)
Displays the slot format.
The slot format displayed changes when a change is made to the TFCI and Pilot control field settings.
Remote command:
n.a.
Use TFCI
Activates TFCI field usage.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
138
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Config AICH/AP-AICH - BS Channel Table
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TFCI:
STATe on page 386
The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
TFCI Value
Enters the value of the TFCI field (Transport Format Combination Indicator) . This
value is used to select a combination of 30 bits, which is divided into two groups of 15
successive slots.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TFCI
on page 385
The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
Pilot Length
Sets the length of the pilot fields.
The range of values for this parameter depends on the channel type and the symbol
rate.
To achieve a constant slot length, the data fields are lengthened or shortened depending on the pilot length, as defined in the standard.
Note: The pilot fields of all active power-contrilled DPCHs must be of the same length
if Dynamic Power Control State with external control signal is active.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:PLENgth
on page 384
The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
4.18 Config AICH/AP-AICH - BS Channel Table
► To access the dialog for configuring the fields of the dedicated physical control
channel, select "3GPP FDD > BS > Channel Table > AICH/AP-AICH > DPCCH
Sett > Config...".
The dialog comproises the parameters for configuring the signature pattern and
selecting the slot.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
139
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
DPCCH Settings - BS Channel Table
Signature ACK/NACK Pattern
Enters the 16 bit pattern for the ACK/NACK field.
This field is used by the base station to acknowledge, refuse or ignore requests of up
to 16 user equipments.
""+" = ACK"
The ACK is sent. Transmission was successful and correct.
""-" = NACK"
The NACK is sent. Transmission was not correct.
""0" = DTX"
Nothing is sent. Transmission is interrupted (Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:AICH:SAPattern
on page 380
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:APAIch:
SAPattern on page 381
Access Slot
Selects the slot in which the burst is transmitted.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:AICH:ASLOt
on page 380
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:APAIch:ASLOt
on page 381
4.19 DPCCH Settings - BS Channel Table
The "DPCCH" settings dialog provides the parameters for configuring the fields of the
dedicated physical control channel. The selected slot format determines the available
settings.
4.19.1 Common Slot Structure (DPCCH)
1. To access these settings dialog, select "3GPP FDD > BS > Channel Table > DPCH
> DPCCH Settings > Config...".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
140
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
DPCCH Settings - BS Channel Table
2. Select "Common".
This dialog contains the parameters for configuring the slot format. Whenever you
change the "TFCI State" and "Pilot Length" settings, the slot format is adjusted
accordingly.
The upper section of the dialog shows the structure. It depends on the slot format
selected (see also 3GPP TS 25.211, Table 11: DPDCH and DPCCH fields)
Slot Format (DPCCH)
Displays the slot format.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
141
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
DPCCH Settings - BS Channel Table
The slot format displayed changes when a change is made to the TFCI and Pilot control field settings.
Remote command:
n.a.
Use TFCI
Activates TFCI field usage.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TFCI:
STATe on page 386
The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
TFCI Value
Enters the value of the TFCI field (Transport Format Combination Indicator) . This
value is used to select a combination of 30 bits, which is divided into two groups of 15
successive slots.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TFCI
on page 385
The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
Pilot Length
Sets the length of the pilot fields.
The range of values for this parameter depends on the channel type and the symbol
rate.
To achieve a constant slot length, the data fields are lengthened or shortened depending on the pilot length, as defined in the standard.
Note: The pilot fields of all active power-contrilled DPCHs must be of the same length
if Dynamic Power Control State with external control signal is active.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:PLENgth
on page 384
The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
Multicode State (DPCCH)
Activates multicode transmission.
Multicode transmission can be activated for a group of channels destined for the same
receiver that is to say, belonging to a radio link. The first channel of this group is used
as the master channel.
With multicode transmission, the common components (Pilot, TPC and TCFI) for all the
channels are spread using the spreading code of the master channel.
This parameter is only available for the DPCHs.
Note: The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
142
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
DPCCH Settings - BS Channel Table
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:MCODe
on page 383
4.19.2 TPC Settings
1. To access these settings dialog, select "3GPP FDD > BS > Channel Table > DPCH
> DPCCH Settings > Config...".
2. Select "TPC Settings".
This tab provides the parameters for configuring the TPC data source and read out
mode.
TPC Data Source (DPCCH)
Selects the data source for the TPC field (Transmit Power Control). This field is used to
control the transmit power.
The following standard data sources are available:
● "All 0, All 1"
An internally generated sequence containing 0 data or 1 data.
● "Pattern"
An internally generated sequence according to a bit pattern.
Use the "Pattern" box to define the bit pattern.
● "Data List / Select TPC List"
A binary data from a data list, internally or externally generated.
Select "Select TPC List" to access the standard "Select List" dialog.
– Select the "Select Data List > navigate to the list file *.dm_iqd > Select" to
select an existing data list.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
143
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
DPCCH Settings - BS Channel Table
–
–
Use the standard "File Manager" function to transfer external data lists to the
instrument.
Use the "New" and "Edit" functions to create internally new data list or to edit
an existing one.
See also:
● section "Modulation Data" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● section "File and Data Management" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● section "Data List Editor" in the R&S SMW user manual.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA
on page 386
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:
PATTern on page 387
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:
DSELect on page 387
The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
TPC Read Out Mode (DPCCH)
Defines TPC data usage.
With 3GPP, the TPC bits are used to signal the increase or reduction in transmit power
to the called station. With all read out modes, one bit is taken from the data stream for
the TPC field for each slot and entered into the bit stream several times (depending on
the symbol rate). The difference between the modes lies in the usage of the TPC bits.
These different modes can be used, for example, to deliberately set a base station to a
specific output power (e.g. with the pattern 11111) and then let it oscillate around this
power (with Single + alt. 01 and Single + alt. 10). This then allows power measurements to be carried out at the base station (at a quasi-constant power). Together with
the option (Mis-) Use TPC for output power control (see below), TPC Read Out Mode
can also be used to generate various output power profiles.
"Continuous:"
The TPC bits are used cyclically.
"Single + All 0"
The TPC bits are used once, and then the TPC sequence is continued with 0 bits.
"Single + All 1"
The TPC bits are used once, and then the TPC sequence is continued with 1 bit.
"Single + alt.
01"
The TPC bits are used once and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 0 and 1 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on by the symbol
rate, for example, 00001111).
"Single + alt.
10"
The TPC bits are used once and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 1 and 0 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on by the symbol
rate, for example, 11110000).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:READ
on page 388
The remote-control commands are not valid for multi channel mode.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
144
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
DPCCH Settings - BS Channel Table
Misuse TPC for Output Power Control (DPCCH)
Defines "mis-" use of the TPC data.
With 3GPP, the TPC bits are used to signal the increase or reduction in transmit power
to the called station. If ("Mis-) use TPC for output power control" is activated, the specified pattern is misused; in order to vary the intrinsic transmit power over time. A bit of
this pattern is removed for each slot in order to increase (bit = "1") or reduce (bit = "0")
the channel power by the specified power step ("Power Step"). The upper limit for this
is 0 dB and the lower limit -60 dB. The following envelope is produced at a channel
power of 0 dB, power step 1.0 dB and pattern "001110100000011" and TPC Pattern
ReadOut Mode "Continuous".
Figure 4-13: Dynamic change of channel power (continuous)
Note: The change in power is always carried out (as stipulated in the standard) at the
start of the slot pilot field. Misuse TPC for Output Power Control is not available for
enhanced DPCHs. Power Control via TPC pattern for enhanced channels can be
selected for active Dynamic Power Control (see Chapter 4.16.5, "Dynamic Power Control - Enhanced DPCHs BS1", on page 133).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:
MISuse on page 387
The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
TPC Power Step (DPCCH)
Sets the step width of the power change in dB for (Mis-) use TPC for output power control.
Note: Misuse TPC for Output Power Control is not available for enhanced DPCHs.
Power Control via TPC pattern for enhanced channels can be selected for active
Dynamic Power Control (see Chapter 4.16.5, "Dynamic Power Control - Enhanced
DPCHs BS1", on page 133).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:PSTep
on page 388
The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
145
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
DPCCH Settings - BS Channel Table
4.19.3 DPCCH Power Offset
1. To access these settings dialog, select "3GPP FDD > BS > Channel Table > DPCH
> DPCCH Settings > Config...".
2. Select "DPCCH Power Offset".
This tab provides the parameters for configuring power offsets of the control fields
to the channel power.
Power Offset Pilot (DPCCH)
Sets the power offset of the pilot field to the channel power in dB.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:POFFset:
PILot on page 384
The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
Power Offset TPC (DPCCH)
Sets the power offset of the TPC field to the channel power in dB.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:POFFset:
TPC on page 385
The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
Power Offset TFCI (DPCCH)
Sets the power offset of the TFCI field to the channel power in dB.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:POFFset:
TFCI on page 385
The remote-control command is not valid for multi channel mode.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
146
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Config E-AGCH - BS Channel Table
4.20 Config E-AGCH - BS Channel Table
► To access the dialog for configuring the fields of the HSUPA control channels,
select "3GPP FDD > BS > Channel Table > E-AGCH > DPCCH Settings > Config...".
The dialog provides the parameter required to configure the HSUPA control channels.
E-AGCH Information Field Coding
Enables/disables the information coding. Disabling this parameter corresponds to a
standard operation, i.e. no coding is performed and the data is sent uncoded. Enabling
this parameter allows you to configure the way the data is coded.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:
IFCoding on page 413
E-DCH TTI
Switches between 2 ms and 10 ms. The processing duration also influences the number of used slots.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:
TTIEdch on page 415
Number of Configurable TTIs
Sets the number of configurable TTIs.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
147
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Config E-AGCH - BS Channel Table
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:
TTICount on page 414
UEID (A-GCH)
Sets the UE Id for the selected TTI.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:
TTI<di0>:UEID on page 414
Absolute Grant Value Index
Sets the Index for the selected TTI. According to the TS 25.212 (4.10.1 A.1), there is a
cross-reference between the grant index and the grant value. The TTI configuration of
the table is used cyclically. Depending on the selection made for the parameter "EDCH TTI", each table row corresponds to a 2ms TTI or to a 10ms TTI.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:
TTI<di0>:AGVIndex on page 414
Absolute Grant Scope
Sets the scope of the selected grant. According to the TS 25.321, the impact of each
grant on the UE depends on this parameter.
For E-DCH TTI = 10ms, the "Absolute Grant Scope" is always All HARQ Processes.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
148
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Config E-RGCH/E-HICH - BS Channel Table
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:
TTI<di0>:AGSCope on page 414
4.21 Config E-RGCH/E-HICH - BS Channel Table
► To access the "Config E-RGCH" or "Config E-HICH" dialog for configuring the
fields of the HSUPA control channels, select "3GPP FDD > BS > Channel Table >
E-RGCH/E-HICH > DPCCH Settings > Config...".
The dialogs provide the parameters for configuring the correpsonding HSUPA control channels.
Type of Cell
Switches between Serving Cell and Non Serving Cell. The cell type determines the
number of used slots.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:
CTYPe on page 417
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:
CTYPe on page 415
E-DCH TTI
Switches between 2 ms and 10 ms. The processing duration also influences the number of used slots.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
149
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Config E-RGCH/E-HICH - BS Channel Table
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:
TTIEdch on page 419
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:
TTIEdch on page 417
Signature Hopping Pattern Index – HSUPA BS
Enters a value that identifies the user equipment. The values are defined in TS 25.211.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:
SSINdex on page 418
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:
SSINdex on page 417
Relative Grant Pattern
(This feature is available for E-RGCH only.)
Enters a pattern: 0 = Hold, + = Up, - = Down.
Note: Pattern + is entered using the numeric key 1. Pattern - is entered via the numeric
key +/-.
For Non Serving Cell "1" is not allowed.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:
RGPAttern on page 418
ACK/NACK Pattern
(This feature is available for E-HICH only.)
Enters the pattern for the ACK/NACK field.
For Non Serving Cell only "+" (ACK) and "0" (no signal) is allowed. For Serving Cells
only "+" (ACK) and "-" (NACK) is allowed.
Note: Pattern + is entered using the numeric key 1. Pattern - is entered via the numeric
key +/-.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:
RGPAttern on page 416
Tau DPCH
Enters the offset of the downlink dedicated offset channels.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:
DTAU on page 416
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:
DTAU on page 418
Tau E-RGCH/E-HICH
Displays the offset of the P-CCPCH frame boundary.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
150
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Config F-DPCH - BS Channel Table
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:
ETAU? on page 416
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:
ETAU? on page 418
4.22 Config F-DPCH - BS Channel Table
This section provides the description of the setting parameters for the fractional dedicated physical control channel.
4.22.1 Common Settings
1. To access these settings, select "3GPP FDD > BS > Channel Table > F-DPCCH >
DPCCH Settings > Config...".
2. Select "Common".
The "Common" tab shows the slot structure and format of the F-DPCH channel.
Slot Format (F-DPCH)
Displays the slot format as selected with the parameter "Slot Format" in the Channel
Table.
The corresponding slot structure is displayed above the parameter.
Slot Formats 1 .. 9 are enabled only for instruments equipped with option R&S SMWK83.
The difference between the F-DPCH slot formats is the position of the 2 bits TPC field.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
151
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Config F-DPCH - BS Channel Table
Remote command:
n.a.
4.22.2 TPC Settings
1. To access these settings, select "3GPP FDD > BS > Channel Table > F-DPCCH >
DPCCH Settings > Config...".
2. Select "TPC Settings".
This tab contains the parameters for configuring the TPC data source and read out
mode.
TPC Source
Selects the data source for the F-DPCH channel.
The following standard data sources are available:
● "All 0, All 1"
An internally generated sequence containing 0 data or 1 data.
● "PNxx"
An internally generated pseudo-random noise sequence.
● "Pattern"
An internally generated sequence according to a bit pattern.
Use the "Pattern" box to define the bit pattern.
● "Data List/Select DList"
A binary data from a data list, internally or externally generated.
Select "Select DList" to access the standard "Select List" dialog.
– Select the "Select Data List > navigate to the list file *.dm_iqd > Select" to
select an existing data list.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
152
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Config F-DPCH - BS Channel Table
–
–
Use the "New" and "Edit" functions to create internally new data list or to edit
an existing one.
Use the standard "File Manager" function to transfer external data lists to the
instrument.
See also:
● Section "Modulation Data" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "File and Data Management" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "Data List Editor" in the R&S SMW user manual
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:
TPC:DATA on page 389
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:
TPC:DATA:DSELect on page 390
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:
TPC:DATA:PATTern on page 390
TPC Read Out Mode (F-DPCH)
Defines TPC data usage.
With 3GPP, the TPC bits are used to signal the increase or reduction in transmit power
to the called station. With all read out modes, one bit is taken from the data stream for
the TPC field for each slot and entered into the bit stream several times (depending on
the symbol rate). The difference between the modes lies in the usage of the TPC bits.
These different modes can be used, for example, to deliberately set a base station to a
specific output power (e.g. with the pattern 11111) and then let it oscillate around this
power (with Single + alt. 01 and Single + alt. 10). This then allows power measurements to be carried out at the base station (at a quasi-constant power). Together with
the option (Mis-) Use TPC for output power control TPC Read Out Mode can also be
used to generate various output power profiles.
"Continuous:"
The TPC bits are used cyclically.
Note that, the remote-control commands are not valid for multi channel mode.
"Single + All 0"
The TPC bits are used once, and then the TPC sequence is continued with 0 bits.
"Single + All 1"
The TPC bits are used once, and then the TPC sequence is continued with 1 bit.
"Single + alt.
01"
The TPC bits are used once and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 0 and 1 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on by the symbol
rate, for example, 00001111).
"Single + alt.
10"
The TPC bits are used once and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 1 and 0 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on by the symbol
rate, for example, 11110000).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
153
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Config F-DPCH - BS Channel Table
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:
TPC:READ on page 391
TPC For Output Power Control (Mis-) Use
Defines "mis-" use of the TPC data.
With 3GPP, the TPC bits are used to signal the increase or reduction in transmit power
to the called station. If "(Mis-) use TPC for output power control" is activated, the specified pattern is misused; in order to vary the intrinsic transmit power over time. A bit of
this pattern is removed for each slot in order to increase (bit = "1") or reduce (bit = "0")
the channel power by the specified power step ("Power Step"). The upper limit for this
is 0 dB and the lower limit -60 dB. The following envelope is produced at a channel
power of 0 dB, power step 1.0 dB and pattern "001110100000011" and TPC Pattern
ReadOut Mode "Continuous":
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:
TPC:MISuse on page 391
TPC Power Step (F-DPCH)
Sets the step width of the power change in dB for "(Mis-) use TPC for output power
control".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
154
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Multi Channel Assistant - BS
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:
TPC:PSTep on page 391
4.23 Multi Channel Assistant - BS
► To access this dialog, select "3GPP FDD > BS > Channel Table > Multi Channel
Assistant".
The "Multi Channel Assistant" allows several channels to be set simultaneously
and is only available for the channel types DPCH, HS-SCCH, HS QPSK, HS
16QAM and HS 64QAM.
Enhanced state is automatically deactivated. The channel table is only filled with
new values when the "Accept" button is pressed.
Start Channel Number
Enters the index for the start channel of the channel range that is set jointly.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
155
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Multi Channel Assistant - BS
Remote command:
n.a.
Stop Channel Number
Enters the index for the stop channel of the channel range that is set jointly.
Remote command:
n.a.
Channel Type
Enters the channel type for the channel range that is set jointly. Available for selection
are DPCH, HS-SCCH, HS QPSK, HS 16QAM, or HS 64QAM.
Remote command:
n.a.
Slot Format
Enters the slot format.
For DPCH channels, the slot formats are 0 to 16.
A slot format defines the structure of a slot made of data and control fields and
includes the symbol rate.
The individual parameters of a slot can later be changed, with the slot format being
adjusted, if necessary.
This parameter is not available for high-speed channels.
Note: For the "DPCCH Settings", this value is read-only.
Remote command:
n.a.
Symbol Rate
Sets the symbol rate. The range of values depends on the channel selected.
The symbol rate is determined by the slot format set. A change in the symbol rate
leads automatically to an adjustment of the slot format.
Remote command:
n.a.
Channelization Code
Sets the channelization code for the start channel.
The channel is spread with the specified channelization code (spreading code).
The range of values of the channelization code depends on the symbol rate of the
channel.
The range of values runs from 0 to (chip_rate/symbol_rate) - 1
Remote command:
n.a.
Channelization Code Step
Sets the step width for the channelization code from channel to channel.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
156
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Multi Channel Assistant - BS
The valid range of values for the channelization code of an individual channel must not
be exceeded. If the range of values is exceeded, the channelization code is limited
automatically.
Remote command:
n.a.
Power
Sets the channel power of the start channel in dB.
The power entered is relative to the powers of the other channels and does not initially
relate to the "Level" power display. If Adjust Total Power to 0dB is executed (top level
of the 3GPP dialog), all the power data is relative to 0 dB.
Note: The maximum channel power of 0 dB applies to non-blanked channels (duty
cycle 100%), with blanked channels, the maximum value can be increased (by "Adjust
Total Power") to values greater than 0 dB (to 10*log10(1/duty_cycle)). The Power value
is also the starting power of the channel for Misuse TPC and Dynamic Power Control
.
Remote command:
n.a.
Power Step
Enters the step width for the change of channel power from channel to channel.
The valid range of values must not be exceeded. If the range of values is exceeded,
the power is automatically limited to the permissible of -80 dB to 0 dB.
Remote command:
n.a.
Data Source
Selects data source.
The following standard data sources are available:
● "All 0, All 1"
An internally generated sequence containing 0 data or 1 data.
● "PNxx"
An internally generated pseudo-random noise sequence.
● "Pattern"
An internally generated sequence according to a bit pattern.
Use the "Pattern" box to define the bit pattern.
● "Data List/Select DList"
A binary data from a data list, internally or externally generated.
Select "Select DList" to access the standard "Select List" dialog.
– Select the "Select Data List > navigate to the list file *.dm_iqd > Select" to
select an existing data list.
– Use the "New" and "Edit" functions to create internally new data list or to edit
an existing one.
– Use the standard "File Manager" function to transfer external data lists to the
instrument.
See also:
● Section "Modulation Data" in the R&S SMW user manual.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
157
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Multi Channel Assistant - BS
●
●
Section "File and Data Management" in the R&S SMW user manual.
Section "Data List Editor" in the R&S SMW user manual
Remote command:
n.a.
DPCCH Settings
Accesses the dialog for configuring DPCCH channels, see Chapter 4.19, "DPCCH Settings - BS Channel Table", on page 140.
Remote command:
n.a.
In contrast to setting a single channel, the remote control commands are not available.
Timing Offset
Sets the timing offset for the start channel.
The timing offset determines the shift of the source symbols before interleaving.
The absolute starting time of the frame (slot 0) is shifted relative to the start of the
scrambling code sequence by the timing offset * 256 chips. This means that
whatever the symbol rate, the resolution of the timing offset is always 256 chips.
This procedure is used to reduce the crest factor. A good way to obtain a lower crest
factor is to use an offset of 1 from channel to channel, for example.
Remote command:
n.a.
Timing Offset Step
Sets the step width for the timing offset from channel to channel.
The valid range of values must not be exceeded. If the range of values is exceeded,
the timing offset is automatically limited to the permissible range.
Remote command:
n.a.
Channel State
Activates or deactivates all the channels in the set channel range.
Remote command:
n.a.
Accept
Executes automatic completion of the channel table in accordance with the parameters
set.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
158
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
User Equipment Configuration (UE)
Remote command:
n.a.
4.24 User Equipment Configuration (UE)
1. To access the user equipment settings, select "3GPP FFD > Link Direction >
Uplink".
2. Select "3GPP FDD > User Equipment > UE 1/2/3/4".
The "User Equipment" dialog provides the parameters for configuring the general
settings of mobile terminal equipment, specific user equipment related settngs, as
well as the channel table with graphical display of the structure of the currently
seleced channel.
A user equipment has a maximum of 6 DPDCHs, with parameters largely prescribed
by the 3GPP specification TS 25.211. To simplify operation, the settings are groupped
into three modes with follwoing main differences:
●
With the "DPCCH + DPDCH" mode, the HSDPA channel HS-DPCCH and the
HSUPA channels E-DPCCH and E-DPDCH can be activated.
●
With the "PRACH only" and"PCPCH only" modes, there is also a choice between
"Standard" (all parameters can be set) and "Preamble only" (only the preamble can
be set).
The dialog of each particular mode only displays the parameters that are relevant.
The DPCCH and one DPDCH of user equipment 1 are generated in realtime
(enhanced mode). Depending on the actual configurations, other channels of user
equipment 1 may also be generated in realtime. The PRACH and PCPCH channels
are not generated in realtime.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
159
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
User Equipment Configuration (UE)
4.24.1 General and Common Settings
► Select "Common".
The "General" tab comprises the settings neccessary to select the mode, e.g.
"PRACH Settings" or "DPCCH Settings".
State
Activates or deactivates the selected user equipment. The number of the selected user
equipment is specified in the menu header.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:STATe on page 451
Mode
Selects the mode in which the user equipment is to work. The lower part of the menu
will change in accordance with the mode. The following modes are available:
"PRACH only - Standard"
In this mode, the instrument generates a single physical random
access channel (PRACH). This channel is needed to set up the connection between the user equipment and the base station. All the
PRACH parameters can be set in the PRACH Settings section (see
Chapter 4.36, "PRACH Settings - UE", on page 236).
"PRACH only - Preamble only"
In this mode, the instrument only generates the preamble of a physical random access channel (PRACH). Only the PRACH preamble
parameters can be set in the PRACH Settings section. This mode is
needed for Test Case 8.8 TS 25.141.
"PCPCH only - Standard"
In this mode the instrument generates a single physical common
packet channel (PCPCH). This channel is used to transmit packet-oriented services (e.g. SMS). The specific PCPCH parameters can be
set in the PCPCH Settings section (see Chapter 4.37, "PCPCH Settings - UE", on page 247).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
160
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
User Equipment Configuration (UE)
"PCPCH only - Preamble only"
In this mode, the instrument only generates the preamble of a physical common packet channel (PCPCH). Only the PRACH preamble
parameters can be set in the PCPCH Settings section. This mode is
needed for Test Case 8.9 TS 25.141.
"DPCCH + DPDCH"
In this mode the instrument generates a control channel (DPCCH)
and up to 6 data channels (DPDCH). This mode corresponds to the
standard mode of user equipment during voice and data transmission.
In addition, the HS-DPCCH, E-DPCCH and E-DPDCH channels can
be activated.
Channel-specific parameters can be set in the section of the individual channels.
The DPCCH and one DPDCH of user equipment 1 are generated in
realtime (enhanced mode). Depending on the actual configurations,
other channels of user equipment 1 may also be generated in realtime.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:MODE on page 449
Scrambling Code (hex)
Sets the scrambling code.
The scrambling code is used to distinguish the transmitter (UE) by transmitter-dependent scrambling. Hexadecimal values are entered. Long or short scrambling codes can
be generated (see also Chapter 3.1.1, "Scrambling Code Generator", on page 21).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:SCODe on page 450
Scrambling Mode
Sets the type of scrambling code.
With scrambling code, a distinction is made between Long and Short Scrambling Code
(see also Section Scrambling Code Generator).
"Off"
Disables scrambling code for test purposes.
"Long Scrambling Code"
Sets the long scrambling code.
"Short Scrambling Code"
(only modes "DPCCH + DPDCH" and "PCPCH only")
Sets short scrambling code.
The short scrambling code is only standardized for DPCCH and
DPDCH channels. But it can also be generated for the PCPCH channel for test purposes.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:SCODe:MODE on page 451
Time Delay
Enters the time delay of the signal of the selected user equipment compared to the signal of user equipment 1.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
161
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
User Equipment Configuration (UE)
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:TDELay on page 451
UL-DTX .../ User Scheduling
(for instruments equipped with option R&S SMW-K83, UE 1 and DPCCH+DPDCH
mode only)
Accesses the dialog for configuring an uplink discontinuous transmission (UL-DTX) or
applying user scheduling, see Chapter 4.25, "UL-DTX/User Scheduling - UE",
on page 163.
Remote command:
n.a.
Dynamic Power Control
(for UE 1 and DPCCH+DPDCH mode only)
(not supported in Baseband C/D)
Accesses the dialog for configuring the "Dynamic Power Control" settings, see Chapter 4.26, "Dynamic Power Control - UE", on page 168.
Remote command:
n.a.
Scheduling List
Accesses the dialog displaying the current scheduling per UE, see Chapter 4.27,
"Scheduling List", on page 172.
4.24.2 Code Domain Graph - UE
► To access the graphical display, select "3GPP FDD > User Equipment > UE >
Code Domain"
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
162
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
UL-DTX/User Scheduling - UE
The "Code Domain" dialog enables you to visually check the uplink signal.
Understanding the display information
The "Code Domain" display indicates the assigned code domain. The channelization
code is plotted at the X axis; the colored bars indicate coherent code channels. The
colors are assigned to fixed symbol rates; the allocation is shown below the graph. The
relative power can be taken from the height of the bar. The symbols on so-called I- and
Q-branches are spread independently. The channelization codes are fixed for the
channels.
Use the Code Domain Graph to evaluate whether there is a code domain conflict or
not; a domain conflict arises when the code domains of the active channels intersect. A
code domain conflict is indicated by overlapping bars.
A conflict may occur only when the parameter "Force Channelization Code to I/Q" is
activated.
4.24.3 Channel Settings
The settings and the dialogs of the individal channels are described in the corresponding sections, see:
●
Chapter 4.28, "DPCCH Settings - UE", on page 174
●
Chapter 4.29, "DPDCH Settings - UE", on page 180
●
Chapter 4.30, "HS-DPCCH Settings - UE", on page 185
●
Chapter 4.31, "E-DPCCH Settings - UE", on page 207
●
Chapter 4.33, "E-DPDCH Settings - UE", on page 220
●
Chapter 4.34, "E-DCH Scheduling - UE", on page 224
4.25 UL-DTX/User Scheduling - UE
UL-DTX and User Scheduling settings require option R&S SMW-K83.
1. To access the "UL-DTX" settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink /
Reverse > User Equipments > UE".
2. Select "Mode > DPCCH + DPDCH".
3. Select "UL-DTX / User Scheduling..."
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
163
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
UL-DTX/User Scheduling - UE
4. Select "Mode > UL-DTX".
The "UE /UL-DTX" contains the parameters for adjusting the UL-DTX settings and
selecting a file containing user scheduling information.
The provided UL-DTX functionality is fully compliant with 3GPP TS 25.214. All
dependencies from E-DCH transmissions, HARQ-ACK transmissions or CQI transmissions on the DPCCH are respected.
For the UL-DTX functionality, the dialog provides the settings necessary to configure the start offset, the threshold time for switching to UE-DTX cycle 2 and the
DPCCH activity patterns for both UE-DTX cycle 1 and 2. It is possible to determine
the frequentness of the DPCCH bursts, the DPCCH bursts length (without pre- and
postamble) and to configure the length of the longer preamble for the UE-DTX
cycle 2.
In this instrument, the signal generation starts with UE-DTX cycle 2. To trigger a
switching to a UE-DTX cycle 1, activate the channel(s) E-DPCCH/E-DPDCH and configure the "E-DCH Scheduling" parameters.
To access the User Scheduling settings
The uplink user scheduling is a function that enables you to flexible configure the
scheduling of the uplink transmission.
1. To access the "User Scheduling" dialog, select "3GPP FDD > User Equipment >
UE1 > Mode > DPCCH + DPDCH" and select "UL-DTX/User Scheduling"
2. In the "UL-DTX/User Scheduling", enable "Mode > User Scheduling".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
164
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
UL-DTX/User Scheduling - UE
(not supported in Baseband C/D)
The instrument provides an interface for loading of externally created XML-like files
with predefined file structure.
Use the Scheduling List to display the UL-DTX burst pattern and transmissions of EDCH and HS-DPCCH, as well as the impact on the UL-DPCCH transmissions or the
configured uplink user scheduling.
Detailed Information
For detailed information on the provided functions, like explanation of the UL-DTX principle, description of the user scheduling file format, possible interdependencies, refer
to:
●
Chapter 3.1.20, "Uplink discontinuous transmission (UL DTX)", on page 47
●
Chapter 3.1.21, "Uplink User Scheduling", on page 49
For an example on how to use these functions, refer to:
●
Chapter 5.3, "Configuring UL-DTX Transmission and Visualizing the Scheduling",
on page 267
●
Chapter 5.4, "Configuring and Visualizing the Uplink User Scheduling",
on page 269
UL-DTX... / User Scheduling State
Depending on the selected "Mode", enables/disables:
● uplink discontinuous transmission (UL-DTX), i.e. uplink DPCCH gating
Enabling the UL-DTX deactivates the DPDCH and the HSUPA FRC.
● using the user scheduling settings defined in the selected file.
Enabling the Uplink Scheduling deactivates the HSUPA FRC.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:STATe on page 524
Mode
Selects the UL-DTX or User Scheduling function.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
165
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
UL-DTX/User Scheduling - UE
In Baseband C/D, the parameter is fixed to "UL-DTX".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:MODE on page 524
User Scheduling File
Accesses the standard "File Select" function for selecting of a file containing user
scheduling information. To perform standard file handling functions, e.g. to transfer
externally created files to the instrument, use the "File Manager".
Files with user scheduling information use the predefined file extension *.3g_sch and
follow a predefined file structure, see "File Structure" on page 50.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:USCH:CATalog? on page 527
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:USCH:FSELect on page 528
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:USCH:DELete on page 527
Scheduling
This section comprises the common settings for both UL-DTX cycles.
E-DCH TTI ← Scheduling
Sets the duration of a E-DCH TTI.
By enabled UL-DTX, the value configured with this parameter sets the value for the
parameter "E-DCH TTI" in the "UE1 > E-DCH Scheduling" dialog.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:TTIEdch on page 524
UL-DTX Offset ← Scheduling
Sets the parameter UE_DTX_DRX_Offset and determines the start offset in subframes
of the first uplink DPCCH burst (after the preamble). The offset is applied only for
bursts belonging to the DPCCH burst pattern; HS-DPCCH or E-DCH transmissions are
not affected.
The parameter UE_DTX_DRX_Offset is used to calculate the first subframe in each UL
DPCCH burst pattern.
● for DTX Cycle 1:
(5*CFN-UE_DTX_DRX_Offset+Subframe#) MOD UE_DTX_Cycle_1 = 0
● for DTX Cycle 2:
(5*CFN-UE_DTX_DRX_Offset+Subframe#) MOD UE_DTX_Cycle_2 = 0
The offset is used to shift the DPCCH burst pattern of the different UEs so that they
have the DPCCH transmission phase in their DTX cycles at different times.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:OFFSet on page 525
Inactivity Threshold for Cycle 2 ← Scheduling
Defines the number of consecutive E-DCH TTIs without an E-DCH transmission, after
which the UE shall immediately move from UE-DTX cycle 1 to using UE-DTX cycle 2
(see Figure 5-2).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
166
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
UL-DTX/User Scheduling - UE
Note: In this implementation, the signal generation starts with UE-DTX cycle 2. To trigger a switching to a UE-DTX cycle 1, activate the channel(s) E-DPCCH/E-DPDCH and
configure the "E-DCH Scheduling" parameters.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:ITHReshold on page 525
Long Preamble Length ← Scheduling
Determines the length in slots of the preamble associated with the UE-DTX cycle 2.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:LPLength on page 525
Cycle 1 / Cycle 2 Configuration
Comprises the settings for configuring the frequentness of the DPCCH bursts and the
DPCCH bursts length (without pre- and postamble).
DTX Cycle 1 / DTX Cycle 2 ← Cycle 1 / Cycle 2 Configuration
Sets the offset in subframe between two consecutive DPCCH bursts within the corresponding UE-DTX cycle, i.e. determines how often the DPCCH bursts are transmitted
(see Figure 5-2).
The UE-DTX cycle 2 is an integer multiple of the UE-DTX cycle 1, i.e. has less frequent
DPCCH transmission instants.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:CYCLe<ch> on page 526
DPCCH Burst Length 1 / DPCCH Burst Length 2 ← Cycle 1 / Cycle 2 Configuration
Determines the uplink DPCCH burst length in subframes without the preamble and
postamble, when the corresponding UE-DTX cycle is applied.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
167
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Dynamic Power Control - UE
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:BURSt<ch> on page 526
Preamble Length 1 / Preamble Length 2 ← Cycle 1 / Cycle 2 Configuration
Displays the preamble length in slots, when the corresponding UE-DTX cycle is
applied.
The preamble length is fixed to 2 slots.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:PREamble<ch>? on page 526
Postamble Length 1 / Postamble Length 2 ← Cycle 1 / Cycle 2 Configuration
Displays the postamble length in slots, when the corresponding UE-DTX cycle is
applied.
The postamble length is fixed to 1 slot.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:POSTamble<ch>? on page 527
4.26 Dynamic Power Control - UE
► To access this dialog, select "3GPP FDD > User Equipment > UE > Dynamic
Power Control".
(not supported in Baseband C/D)
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
168
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Dynamic Power Control - UE
In the "Dynamic Power Control" dialog, the power of the enhanced channels can be
increased or decreased within the predefined dynamic range ("Up Range" + "Down
Range") and with the predefined step size ("Power Step") with an external, internal or
manual control signal.
Dynamic Power Control State
Activates or deactivates the "Dynamic Power Control".
With activated "Dynamic Power Control" the power of the enhanced channels can be
increased or decreased within the predefined dynamic range ("Up Range" + "Down
Range") and with the predefined step size ("Power Step") with an external, internal or
manual control signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:STATe
on page 531
Mode
Selects the control signal for "Dynamic Power Control".
"External"
An external control signal is used for Dynamic Power Control.
The external control signal has to be supplied at the local T/M 3 or
global USER 6 connector, as defined with the parameter "Connector"
on page 169.
"By TPC Pattern"
The TPC pattern is used for "Dynamic Power Control". This selection
corresponds to selection "(Mis)Use TPC" for not enhanced channels.
"Manual"
The control signal is manually produced by pushing one of the buttons 0 or 1.
The channel power is increased or decreased depending on the
"Direction" setting by the set power step.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:MODE
on page 530
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:STEP:
MANual on page 531
Connector
Determines the input connector the external control signal is supplied at.
In this firmware version, the "Global" connector is disabled.
See Chapter 3.2, "Routing and enabling an external control signal", on page 52.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:
CONNector on page 530
Direction
Selects the Dynamic Power Control mode.
"Up"
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
A high level of the control signal leads to an increase of channel
power.
169
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Dynamic Power Control - UE
"Down"
A high level of the control signal leads to a decrease of channel
power.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:
DIRection on page 529
Power Step
Sets step width by which – with the "Dynamic Power Control" being switched on - the
channel powers of the enhanced channels in the timeslot grid are increased or
decreased within the set dynamic range ("Up Range" + "Down Range").
The start power of the channel is set in the "Channel Power" entry field of the menu.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:
STEP[:EXTernal] on page 532
Up Range/Down Range
Sets dynamic range by which – with "Dynamic Power Control" switched on – the channel powers of the enhanced channels can be increased. The resulting "Dynamic Power
Control" dynamic range ("Up Range" + "Down Range") depends on the selected
"Power Step" and is as follow:
●
●
For "Power Step" < 1 dB, the dynamic range ("Up Range" + "Down Range") <= 30
dB
For "Power Step" => 1 dB, the dynamic range ("Up Range" + "Down Range") <= 60
dB
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:
RANGe:UP on page 531
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:
RANGe:DOWN on page 531
Power Control Graph
Indicates the deviation of the channel power (delta POW) from the set power start
value of the enhanced channels.
The graph is automatically displayed if "Dynamic Power Control > State > On".
Note: Since a realtime update of the window in the timeslot (= 0.667 ms) is not possible for reasons of speed, an update can be performed in a more coarse time interval.
Fast channel power changes are not displayed but the settled state of the control loop
can be recognized very easily.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl[:
POWer]? on page 530
Assignment Mode for UL-DTX
The parameter is enabled only for activated UL-DTX... / User Scheduling State.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
170
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Dynamic Power Control - UE
The power control recognizes the UL-DPCCH gaps according to 3GPP TS 25.214.
Some of the TPC commands sent to the instrument over the external line or by the
TPC pattern are ignored, whereas others are summed up and applied later. The processing of the TPC commands depends only on whether the BS sends the TPC bits on
the F-DPCH with slot format 0/ slot format 9 (i.e. during the first 512 chips of the downlink slot) or not. It is not necessary to distinguish between the cases „DL-DPCH“ and
„F-DPCH Slot Format different than 9 and 0“, as in both of these cases the downlink
TPC commands would be sent (to a real UE via the air interface) later than in the first
512 chips of the downlink slot, and thus the treatment of the TPC commands by the UE
is identical.
Figure 4-14: Timing Diagram - Power Control with UL-DTX
1
2
3
4
5
=
=
=
=
=
Uplink Pilot
TPC bits via air interface
TPC command via binary feedback
No need to send TPC bits via air interface; UE ignores any TPC bits
No need to send TPC commands via binary feedback line; R&S SMW ignores any TPC commands
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
171
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Scheduling List
The feedback sent to the instrument corresponds to the parameter „TPC_cmd“ defined
in the 3GPP standard. It represents the TPC information of the last (already completed) „TPC command combining period“, even if the TPC information of the ongoing
„TPC command combining period“ is already known by the BS prior to the feedback
transmission over the binary feedback line (see figure).
Note: The provided external binary feedback has to be stable at least between 0.1 ms
before and after the UL DPCCH slot boundary.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:
ASSignment on page 529
Also Control Other UEs
Enables you to dynamically control the power of the enhanced channels of all active
UEs with the settings of UE1.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:AOUE
on page 532
4.27 Scheduling List
Opens a display of the current uplink scheduling per UE.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
172
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Scheduling List
Figure 4-15: Example of Scheduling List (UE1)
1
2
3
4
5
=
=
=
=
=
E-DCH TTI is three slots long, i.e. E-DCH TTI = 2ms
DPCCH shows busts pattern, i.e. UL-DTX is activated
HS-DPCCH is active and the scheduled HARQ-ACK and PCI/CQI messages have different patterns
E-DPCCH and E-DPDCH are active; both channels have the same E-DCH scheduling
ARB Sequence Length = 2 frames
Frame Start
Defines the start frame of the displayed UL scheduling.
Number of Frames
Defines number of frames for that the UL scheduling is displayed.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
173
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
DPCCH Settings - UE
4.28 DPCCH Settings - UE
The "DPCCH" tab provides the parameters for configuring the dedicated physical control channel.
1. To access the DPCCH channel settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction >
Uplink / Reverse"
2. Select "User Equipment > UE > Mode > DPCCH + DPDCH" and select "DPCCH".
The dialog displays the channel structure and the available parameters.
In UE1, the DPCCH is generated in realtime (enhanced).
About the Dedicated Physical Channels
At the physical level, an uplink DPCH consists of the DPDCH (Dedicated Physical Data
Channel) and the DPCCH (Dedicated Physical Control Channel); the channel characteristics are defined by the symbol rate.
The DPDCH transports the user data that is fed directly into the data field. The DPCCH
carries the control fields (Pilot field; TPC = Transmit Power Control, FBI (Feedback
Information) and TFCI = Transport Format Combination Indicator). DPDCH is grouped
with DPCCH I/Q code multiplexing in accordance with 3GPP TS 25.211, see diagram
below. The generation of an uplink reference measurement channel is described in
Chapter 4.35, "Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1", on page 227.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
174
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
DPCCH Settings - UE
Figure 4-16: Structure of an uplink DPCH in the time domain
Channelization Code
Displays the channelization code and the modulation branch (I or Q) of the DPCCH.
The code channel is spread with the set channelization code (spreading code). The
standard assigns a fixed channelization code to the DPCCH.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:CCODe? on page 462
Power
Sets the power of the DPCCH channel.
Test cases defined in the 3GPP standard often use notation "Signaling values for βc
and βd". The quantization of the gain parameters is shown in the following table which
is taken from 3GPP Spec 25.213 (left columns) and supplemented by the instrumentspecific values (right column).
Signaling values for βc and βd
Quantized amplitude ratios βc
and βd
Power to be set / dB
15
1.0
0.0
14
14/15
-0.60
13
13/15
-1.24
12
12/15
-1.94
11
11/15
-2.69
10
10/15
-3.52
9
9/15
-4.44
8
8/15
-5.46
7
7/15
-6.62
6
6/15
-7.96
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
175
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
DPCCH Settings - UE
Signaling values for βc and βd
Quantized amplitude ratios βc
and βd
Power to be set / dB
5
5/15
-9.54
4
4/15
-11.48
3
3/15
-13.99
2
2/15
-17.52
1
1/15
-23.52
0
Switch off
Switch channel off or -80 dB
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:POWer on page 455
DL-UL Timing Offset
Sets the timing offset between the downlink and the uplink.
The timing offset determines the time delay in chips between the downlink signal timing
and transmission of the uplink signal.
Note: The signals of all UEs have the same uplink slot timing. The parameters "DL-UL
Timing Offset" are coupled and by changing this parameter for one of the UEs, the values for the other UEs are automatically adjusted.
"1024 Chips"
The uplink signal is generated according to the 3GPP specification.
The signal is calculated synchronously to the downlink reference timing, i.e. the first uplink frame starts at chip position 1024 of the simulated signal.
"0 Chips"
No timing offset is applied, i.e. there is no timing delay between
receipt of the downlink signal and transmission of the uplink signal.
See also "To generate a continuos uplink signal composed of multiple
separately generated uplink frames" on page 266.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TOFFset on page 457
Slot Format #
Selects the slot format.
The slot format defines the structure of the DPCCH slots and the control fields.
Depending on the selected slot format, the slot structure is displayed.
Slot formats 0 to 4 are available for the DPCCH channel as defined in the 3GPP
Release 7 specification TS 25.211.
Note: The former slot formats 4 and 5 according to 3GPP Release 4 specification TS
25.211 are not supported.
The slot format selection adjusts the DPCCH slot structure according to the 3GPP
specification. However, it is also possible to adjust this structure by configuration of
each of the control fields separately.
The table below gives an overview of the cross-reference between the slot format and
the structure of the DPCCH slot.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
176
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
DPCCH Settings - UE
Slot Format #
NPilot, bits
NTPC, bits (TPC
Mode)
NTFCI, bits
NFBI, bits
(Use TFCI)
(FBI Mode)
0
6
2
2
0
1
8
2
0
0
2
5
2
2
1
3
7
2
0
1
4
6
4
0
0
"Slot format 0"
"FBI Mode" = Off, i.e. no FBI field
"TFCI Mode" = 2 bits
"Use TFCI" = On, i.e. TFCI field = 2 bits
"Slot format 1"
"FBI Mode" = Off, i.e. no FBI field
"TFCI Mode" = 2 bits
"Use TFCI" = Off, i.e. no TFCI field
"Slot format 2"
"FBI Mode" = 1 bit
"TFCI Mode" = 2 bits
"Use TFCI" = On, i.e. TFCI field = 2 bits
"Slot format 3"
"FBI Mode" = 1 bit
"TFCI Mode" = 2 bits
"Use TFCI" = Off, i.e. no TFCI field
"Slot format 4"
(enabled only for instruments equipped with R&S SMW-K83)
"FBI Mode" = Off, i.e. no FBI field
"TFCI Mode" = 4 bits
"Use TFCI" = Off, i.e. no TFCI field
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:SFORmat on page 456
Use TFCI
Activates the TFCI (Transport Format Combination Indicator) field.
The status of the TFCI field is determined by the "Slot Format" set. A change leads
automatically to an adjustment of the slot format.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
177
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
DPCCH Settings - UE
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TFCI:STATe on page 456
TFCI
Enters the value of the TFCI field (Transport Format Combination Indicator) of the
DPCCH channel.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TFCI on page 456
FBI Mode
Selects the FBI (Feed Back Information) mode.
The FBI mode is determined by the "Slot Format" set. A change in the FBI mode leads
automatically to an adjustment of the slot format.
Note: The former 2-bits long FBI Mode according to 3GPP Release 4 specification TS
25.211 is not supported.
"Off"
The FBI field is not in use.
"1 Bit"
The FBI field with a length of 1 bit is used.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:FBI:MODE on page 455
FBI Pattern (bin)
Enters the bit pattern for the FBI field.
The FBI field is filled cyclically with a pattern of up to 32 bits in length.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:FBI:PATTern on page 455
TPC Mode
Selects the TPC (Transmit Power Control) mode.
The TPC mode is determined by the "Slot Format" set. A change in the TPC mode
leads automatically to an adjustment of the slot format.
"2 Bits"
A TPC field with a length of 2 bits is used.
"4 Bits"
(enabled only for instruments equipped with R&S SMW-K83)
A TPC field with a length of 4 bits is used.
A 4 bits long TPC field can be selected, only for Slot Format 4 and
disabled FBI and TFCI fields.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:MODE on page 459
TPC Data Source
Defines the data source for the TPC field of the DPCCH channel.
The following standard data sources are available:
● "All 0, All 1"
An internally generated sequence containing 0 data or 1 data.
● "Pattern"
An internally generated sequence according to a bit pattern.
Use the "Pattern" box to define the bit pattern.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
178
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
DPCCH Settings - UE
●
"Data List / Select TPC Data List"
A binary data from a data list, internally or externally generated.
Select "Select TPC Data List" to access the standard "Select List" dialog.
– Select the "Select Data List > navigate to the list file *.dm_iqd > Select" to
select an existing data list.
– Use the standard "File Manager" function to transfer external data lists to the
instrument.
– Use the "New" and "Edit" functions to create internally new data list or to edit
an existing one.
See also:
● section "Modulation Data" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● section "File and Data Management" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● section "Data List Editor" in the R&S SMW user manual.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA on page 457
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:PATTern
on page 458
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:DSELect
on page 458
TPC Read Out Mode
Defines the TPC data usage.
With 3GPP, the TPC bits are used to signal the increase or reduction in transmit power
to the called station. With all read out modes, one bit is taken from the data stream for
the TPC field for each slot and entered into the bit stream several times (depending on
the symbol rate). The difference between the modes lies in the usage of the TPC bits.
These different modes can be used, for example, to deliberately set a DPCH of a base
station to a specific output power (e.g. with the pattern 11111) and then let it oscillate
around this power (with Single + alt. 01 and Single + alt. 10). This then allows power
measurements to be carried out at the base station (at a quasi-constant power).
Together with the function "(Mis-)Use TPC for output power control" (see below), "TPC
Read Out Mode" can also be used to generate various output power profiles.
"Continuous:"
The TPC bits are used cyclically.
"Single + All 0"
The TPC bits are used once, and then the TPC sequence is continued with 0 bits.
"Single + All 1"
The TPC bits are used once, and then the TPC sequence is continued with 1 bits.
"Single + alt.
01"
The TPC bits are used once and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 0 and 1 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on by the symbol
rate, for example, 00001111).
"Single + alt.
10"
The TPC bits are used once and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 1 and 0 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on by the symbol
rate, for example, 11110000).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
179
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
DPDCH Settings - UE
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:READ on page 460
Misuse TPC for Output Power Control
(available for UE2, UE3 and UE4 only)
Defines "mis-" use of the TPC data.
With 3GPP, the TPC bits are used to signal the increase or reduction in transmit power
to the called station. If "(Mis-) use TPC for output power control" is activated, the specified pattern is misused, in order to vary the intrinsic transmit power over time. A bit of
this pattern is removed for each slot in order to increase (bit = "1") or reduce (bit = "0")
the channel power by the specified power step ("Power Step"). The upper limit for this
is 0 dB and the lower limit -60 dB. The following envelope is produced at a channel
power of 0 dB, power step 1.0 dB and pattern "001110100000011" and TPC Pattern
Read Out Mode Continuous:
Figure 4-17: Dynamic change of channel power (continuous)
Note: Power control works both on the DPCCH and all the active DPDCHs. The
change in power is always carried out (as stipulated in the standard) at the start of the
slot pilot field
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:MISuse on page 458
TPC Power Step
(available for UE2, UE3 and UE4 only)
Sets the step width of the power change in dB for "(Mis-) use TPC for output power
control".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:PSTep on page 459
4.29 DPDCH Settings - UE
1. To access the DPDCH channel settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction >
Uplink / Reverse > User Equipments > UE"
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
180
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
DPDCH Settings - UE
2. Select "DPDCH".
The dialog contains the general parameters required for configuring the channel.
The channel table allows you to configure th individual parameters.
4.29.1 DPDCH Common Settings
State (DPDCH)
Activates or deactivates all the DPDCH channels.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPDCh:STATe on page 482
Channel Power
Sets the channel power in dB.
The power entered is relative to the powers of the other channels and does not initially
relate to the "Level" power display. If Adjust Total Power to 0dB is executed, all the
power data is relative to "Level".
Note: The uplink channels are not blanked in this mode (duty cycle 100%).
Test cases defined in the 3GPP standard often use notation "Signaling values for βc
and βd". The quantization of the gain parameters is shown in the following table which
is taken from 3GPP Spec 25.213 (left columns) and supplemented by the instrumentspecific values (right column).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
181
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
DPDCH Settings - UE
Signaling values for βc and βd
Quantized amplitude ratios βc
and βd
Power to be set / dB
15
1.0
0.0
14
14/15
-0.60
13
13/15
-1.24
12
12/15
-1.94
11
11/15
-2.69
10
10/15
-3.52
9
9/15
-4.44
8
8/15
-5.46
7
7/15
-6.62
6
6/15
-7.96
5
5/15
-9.54
4
4/15
-11.48
3
3/15
-13.99
2
2/15
-17.52
1
1/15
-23.52
0
Switch off
Switch channel off or -80 dB
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPDCh:POWer on page 482
Force Channelization Code To I/0
Sets the channelization code to I/0.
This mode can only be activated if the "Overall Symbol Rate < 2 x 960 kbps".
It is provided for test purposes. Using an oscilloscope, the data bits of the DPDCH are
visible on the I/Q signal for the follwoing settings:
● "Force Channelization Code to I/Q > On"
● "Scrambling Code Mode > Off"
● "DPCCH Channel Power = - 80 dB"
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPDCh:FCIO on page 481
Overall Symbol Rate
Sets the overall symbol rate of all the DPDCH channels.
The structure of the DPDCH channel table depends on this parameter. The overall
symbol rate determines which DPDCHs are active, which symbol rate they have and
which channelization codes they use (see Table A-2).
DPDCHs that are not active by virtue of the overall rate are also disabled for operation.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
182
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
DPDCH Settings - UE
Note: Up to an overall rate of 960 ksps, only DPDCH 1 is active, its symbol rate is the
same as the overall symbol rate and the channelization code is the same as spreading
factor/4 (spreading factor = chip rate / symbol rate).
With an overall symbol rate greater than 960 ksps, all the active DPDCH channels
have the symbol rate 960 ksps.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPDCh:ORATe on page 481
Global Enhanced Channels
Accesses the dialog for configuring all the enhanced channel settings of user equipment UE1, see Chapter 4.35, "Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1",
on page 227.
Remote command:
n.a.
4.29.2 Channel Table
The channel table allows you to configure the individual parameters for the DPDCH
channels. The structure of the currently selected channel is displayed graphically in the
table header.
The number of active channels depends on the selected overall symbol rate. You can
select the data sources for the individual channels. The remaining parameters are only
displayed and their values depend also on the overall symbol rate. See also Table A-2.
Channel Number
Displays the channel number.
Remote command:
n.a.
(the channel is selected by the suffix at keyword CHANnel<n>)
Channel Type
Displays the channel type.
Remote command:
n.a.
Symbol Rate / State
Displays the symbol rate and the state of the DCDCH channel.
The symbol rate and the state of channel 2 to 6 are dependent on the overall symbol
rate set and cannot be modified.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:SRATe?
on page 481
Channelization Code
Displays the channelization code and the modulation branch (I or Q) of the DPDCH
channel.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
183
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
DPDCH Settings - UE
The channelization code is dependent on the overall symbol rate set and cannot be
modified.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:CCODe?
on page 479
DPDCH Data Source
For UE2, UE3 and UE4 and UE1 without channel coding, selects the data source for
the DPDCH channel.
When channel coding is active, the data source for the DTCH1 component in the transport layer is selected here. In this situation, the display reads "DTCH data Source" and
the "DCCH Data" entry field is enabled for selecting the data source of the DCCH
channel. The data sources of the other DTCH channels can be set in the "Global
Enhanced Channel Settings > Transport Channel" dialog, see Chapter 4.35, "Global
Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1", on page 227.
The following standard data sources are available:
● "All 0, All 1"
An internally generated sequence containing 0 data or 1 data.
● "PNxx"
An internally generated pseudo-random noise sequence.
● "Pattern"
An internally generated sequence according to a bit pattern.
Use the "Pattern" box to define the bit pattern.
● "Data List/Select DList"
A binary data from a data list, internally or externally generated.
Select "Select DList" to access the standard "Select List" dialog.
– Select the "Select Data List > navigate to the list file *.dm_iqd > Select" to
select an existing data list.
– Use the "New" and "Edit" functions to create internally new data list or to edit
an existing one.
– Use the standard "File Manager" function to transfer external data lists to the
instrument.
See also:
● Section "Modulation Data" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "File and Data Management" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "Data List Editor" in the R&S SMW user manual
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:DATA
on page 479
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:DATA:
PATTern on page 480
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:
DATA:DSELect on page 505
DCCH Data Source
For UE1 for enhanced channels with active channel coding, selects the data source for
the DCCH component.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
184
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
The following standard data sources are available:
● "All 0, All 1"
An internally generated sequence containing 0 data or 1 data.
● "PNxx"
An internally generated pseudo-random noise sequence.
● "Pattern"
An internally generated sequence according to a bit pattern.
Use the "Pattern" box to define the bit pattern.
● "Data List/Select DList"
A binary data from a data list, internally or externally generated.
Select "Select DList" to access the standard "Select List" dialog.
– Select the "Select Data List > navigate to the list file *.dm_iqd > Select" to
select an existing data list.
– Use the "New" and "Edit" functions to create internally new data list or to edit
an existing one.
– Use the standard "File Manager" function to transfer external data lists to the
instrument.
See also:
● Section "Modulation Data" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "File and Data Management" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "Data List Editor" in the R&S SMW user manual
4.30 HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
1. To access the HS-DPCCH channels settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction >
Uplink / Reverse > User Equipments > UE"
2. Select "HS-DPCCH"
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
185
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
The dialog contains the general parameters required for configuring the channel,
and displays the channel structure.
Real time signal generation
To enable real time signal generation for UE1, select "3GPP FDD > User Equipment >
UE1> HS-DPCCH" and select "Compatibility Mode > Up to Release 7" or "Compatibility Mode > Release 8 and Later RT"
4.30.1 About HS-DPCCH
HS-DPCCH Structure
The HS-DPCCH carries uplink feedback signaling related to the accuracy and quality
of downlink HS-DSCH transmission. Hybrid-ARQ Acknowledgment (HARQ-ACK) is
transmitted in the first subframe slot, Channel-Quality Indication (CQI) and in case of
UE configured in MIMO mode also Precoding Control Indication (PCI) are transmitted
in the second and third subframe slot. Only one HS-DPCCH may be transmitted on
each radio link. The HS-DPCCH can only exist together with an uplink DPCCH.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
186
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
Figure 4-18: Structure of an uplink HS-DPCCH in the time domain
The HS-DPCCH subframe starts 256 ×m chips after the start of an uplink DPCCH slot
with m selected such that the subframe transmission starts within the first 0-255 chips
after 7.5 slots following the end of the received HS-PDSCH sub-frame.
Figure 4-19: Timing offset between the uplink DPCCH, the HS-PDSCH and the HS-DPCCH at the UE
HS-DPCCH Power
According to 3GPP TS 25.214, the uplink HS-DPCCH power shall be estimated for
each HS-DPCCH slot.
In this implementation, the channel power can be set individually for each case of feedback signaling and UE mode as a combination of the CQI Power (parameter "Power")
and the corresponding "Power Offset" (see the tables below). Since the feedback signaling can be configured per slot of TTI that carries HS-DPCCH, the channel power is
also calculated on a slot basis.
Table 4-8: Calculating of the HARQ-ACK power
Mode
HARQ-ACK
Offset Parameter
Resulting Power
Compatibility Mode =
Up to Release 7
Normal ACK/NACK Pattern
Single ACK
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
Power Offset ACK
Power + Power Offset ACK
Power Offset NACK
Power + Power Offset NACK
Power Offset ACK
Power + Power Offset ACK
187
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
Mode
MIMO
HARQ-ACK
Offset Parameter
Resulting Power
Single NACK
Power Offset NACK
Power + Power Offset NACK
TB1: ACK, TB2: ACK
Power Offset ACK/ACK
Power + Power Offset ACK/ACK
TB1: ACK, TB2: NACK
Power Offset ACK/NACK
Power + Power Offset ACK/NACK
TB1: NACK, TB2: ACK
Power Offset NACK/ACK
Power + Power Offset NACK/ACK
TB1: NACK, TB2: NACK
Power Offset NACK/NACK
Power + Power Offset NACK/
NACK
Compatibility Mode =
Release 8 and Later (RT)
all
HARQ-ACK
Power Offset HARQ-ACK
Power + Power Offset HARQ-ACK
Table 4-9: Calculating the PCI/CQI power
Mode
CQI
Type
CQI Parameter
Offset Parameter
Resulting Power
Compatib. Mode= Up to Release 7
Normal
-
MIMO
CQI Type
A
CQI
-
Power
Single TB
CQIs
Power Offset CQI Type
A
Power + Power
Offset CQI Type A
Double
TB
CQI1 and CQI2
Compatib. Mode= Rel. 8 and Later (RT)
Normal
CQI
CQI
DCHSDPA
non
MIMO
Comp. CQI
CQI1 and CQI2
MIMO
Power Offset PCI/CQI
CQI Type
A
Single TB
CQIs
Double
TB
CQI1 and CQI2
Power + Power
Offset PCI/CQI
4.30.2 HS-DPCCH Common Settings
The displayed channel structure depends on whether the UE is working in MIMO mode
or not.
State (HS-DPCCH)
Activates or deactivates the HS-DPCCH channel.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:STATe on page 461
Power (HS-DPCCH)
Sets the power in dB.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
188
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
●
●
In case of "Compatibility Mode > Release 8 and Later"/"Compatibility Mode >
Release 8 and Later RT", this parameter represents the reference power, relative
to that the power used during the HARQ-ACK slot and the power used during the
PCI/CQI slots are calculated.
While working in a "Compatibility Mode > Up to Release 7", this parameter represents the CQI Power of a UE configured in a normal mode or of a UE configured in
MIMO mode and sending CQI Type B report. The CQI Power is the reference
power, relative to that the power used during the HARQ-ACK slot and the power
used during the PCI/CQI slots of a UE configured in MIMO mode and sending CQI
Type A reports are calculated.
The power entered is relative to the powers of the other channels and does not initially
relate to the "Level" power display. If Adjust Total Power to 0dB is executed, all the
power data is relative to the "Level" display.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:POWer on page 461
Compatibility Mode (HS-DPCCH)
Switches between the following modes:
"Up to Release 7"
Switches to the display of the HS-DPCCH settings provided for backwards compatibility.
"Release 8 and Later"
The concept of the graphical user interface for the configuration of
HS-DPCCH has been adapted to support simultaneous DC-HSDPA
and MIMO operation, as required in 3GPP Release 9 onwards.
This mode is disabled, if Dynamic Power Control State is On.
"Release 8 and Later RT"
(not supported in Baseband C/D)
Enables generation of the HS-DPCCH in real-time even for Release
8/9 content. Real-time signals are useful for complex HS-DPCCH
scheduling and are required while using dynamic power control with
the HS-DPCCH.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:COMPatibility
on page 461
Start Delay
Sets the delay between the uplink HS-DPCCH and the frame of uplink DPCH.
Thus, the channel can be synchronized with the associated downlink HS-PDSCH.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
189
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
The delay is entered as a multiple m of 256 chips according to TS 25.211 7.7:
m = (TTX_diff /256 ) + 101
where TTX_diff is the difference in chips (TTX_diff = 0, 256, ....., 38144).
The value range of m is 0 to 250 (2 frames +1024 chips)
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SDELay on page 462
Inter TTI Distance (Interval)
Selects the distance between two HSDPA packets. The distance is set in number of
subframes (3 slots = 2 ms). An "Inter TTI Distance" of 1 means continuous generation.
Regarding the HS-DPCCH uplink transmission, this parameter determines where HSDPCCH transmissions are possible in principle. In order to have actual HS-DPCCH
transmissions, HARQ-ACK and/or PCI/CQI transmissions have to be scheduled as
described in 4.30.3, 4.30.4 and 4.30.5
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:TTIDistance
on page 462
Channelization Code (HS-DPCCH)
Displays the channelization code and the modulation branch (I or Q) of the HSDPCCH.
The code channel is spread with the set channelization code (spreading code). The
channelization code of the high speed channel depends on the number of activated
DPDCHs, i.e. on the overall symbol rate.
For "Secondary Cell Enabled ≥ 4", two HS-DPCCHs, i.e. two channelization codes are
used.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
190
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
Example:
Enable the following settings:
● "DPDCH State = On"
● "DPDCH Overall Symbol Rate = 60 ksps"
● "HS-DPCCH State = On"
● "Secondary Cell Enabled = 0"
The used "HS-DPCCH > Channelization Code" is Q / 64. Open the "User Equipment > Code Domain" dialog
(see Figure 4-20).
● Enable "Secondary Cell Enabled = 4"
Figure 4-20: Impact of "Secondary Cell Enabled ≥ 4" on the used channelization code
1 = The display confirms, that the DPDCH uses a 60 ksps symbol rate and a channelization code on the I
channel. The HS-DPCCH is displayed with a symbol rate of 15 ksps (i.e "Slot Format 0") on the Q channel.
2 = The "Code Domain" dialog displays the two HS-DPCCHs, one on each of the I and Q channels; the used
symbol rate is 30 ksps, i.e the "Slot Format 1" is used.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
191
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:CCODe? on page 462
Slot Format
Displays the used slot format.
The specified slot format for "Secondary Cell Enabled < 2" is "Slot Format 0 (15 ksps)".
With more than 2 secondary cells or with 2 seconrady cells and "MIMO Mode = On",
the "Slot Format 1 (30 ksps)" is required, i.e. slot format with higher symbol rate.
See also Figure 4-20.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SFORmat? on page 472
4.30.3 HS-DPCCH Scheduling Table (Release 8 and Later/Release 8 and
Later RT)
This settings are available for "Compatibility Mode > Release 8 and Later/Release 8
and Later RT".
MIMO settings and DC-HSDPA/4C-HSDPA/8C-HSDPA settings are available for configuration only for instruments equipped with option R&S SMW-K83.
The settings available in this dialog allow you to adjust the HS-DPCCH signal of a UE
configured for normal operation, DC-HSDPA or 4C/8C-HSDPA operation, MIMO mode
or for a simultaneous secondary cells + MIMO operation.
The HS-DPCCH structure can be configured with the parameters "Inter TTI Distance",
"Number of Table Rows", "From/To" and "Repeat After", as well as by configuring the
HARQ-ACK and CQI/PCI information by means of the parameters of the HS-DPCCH
scheduling tables. The scheduling for the HARQ-ACK and PCI/CQI reports can be performed independently; different repetition cycles can be specified.
Example: HS-DPCCH Scheduling
The following is a simple example intended to explain the principle. Configured is an
HS-DPCCH scheduling in "MIMO Mode = Off" and with "Secondary Cell Enabled = 0".
Parameter
Value
Start Delay
101 * 256 Chips
Compatibility Mode (HS-DPCCH)
Release 8 and Later RT
Inter TTI Distance (Interval)
5 Subframes
HARQ-ACK Scheduling
Number of Rows
2
HARQ-ACK Repeat After
4 Intervals
Row#0
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
192
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
Parameter
Value
HARQ-ACK From Interval/ HARQ-ACK To Interval
from HARQ-ACK Interval 0 to 1
HS-DPCCH 1/2, HARQ-ACK 1/2/3/4
A
Row#1
HARQ-ACK From Interval/ HARQ-ACK To Interval
from HARQ-ACK Interval 3 to 3
HS-DPCCH 1/2, HARQ-ACK 1/2/3/4
N
PCI/CQI Scheduling
Number of Rows
2
PCI/CQI Repeat After
3 Intervals
Row#0
PCI-CQI From Interval/ PCI-CQI To Interval
from PCI/CQI Interval 0 to 0
HS-DPCCH 1/2, PCI/CQI 1/2/3/4 Type
DTX
Row#1
PCI-CQI From Interval/ PCI-CQI To Interval
from PCI/CQI Interval 1 to 1
HS-DPCCH 1/2, PCI/CQI 1/2/3/4 Type
CQI
CQI/CQIS/CQI1/CQI2
5
Use the Scheduling List to display the configured scheduling.
Figure 4-21: Example of HS-DPCCH Scheduling
"Inter TTI Distance (Interval)" = 5 subframes
"HARQ-ACK Cycle"
= "Inter TTI Distance (Interval)"*"HARQ-ACK Repeat After = 5*4=20 Intervals"
"CQI Cycle"
= "Inter TTI Distance (Interval)"*"CQI Repeat After = 5*3=15 Intervals"
MIMO Mode
Enables/disables working in MIMO mode for the selected UE.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MMODe on page 472
Secondary Cell Enabled
Enables the selected number of secondary cells for the selected UE. Secondary cells
are used for working in DC-/4C/8C-HSDPA mode.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
193
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
See also Chapter 3.1.16, "Dual Cell HSDPA (DC-HSDPA)", on page 42, Chapter 3.1.17, "HS-DPCCH Extension for 4C-HSDPA and 8C-HSDPA", on page 46 and
Chapter 5.5, "How to Configure the HS-DPCCH Settings for 4C-HSDPA Tests",
on page 271.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SC:ENABled
on page 473
Secondary Cell Active
Sets the number of active secondary cells for the selected UE.
See also Chapter 3.1.16, "Dual Cell HSDPA (DC-HSDPA)", on page 42, Chapter 3.1.17, "HS-DPCCH Extension for 4C-HSDPA and 8C-HSDPA", on page 46 and
Chapter 5.5, "How to Configure the HS-DPCCH Settings for 4C-HSDPA Tests",
on page 271.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SC:ACTive on page 473
HARQ-ACK
Comprises the parameters provided for the independent configuration of the HARQACK scheduling.
Number of Rows ← HARQ-ACK
Determines the number of the rows in the HARQ-ACK scheduling table.
Each row represents one TTI interval, as configured with the parameter Inter TTI Distance (Interval). The parameters set in the table are read out cyclically.
See also Figure 4-21.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:HACK:ROWS on page 473
HARQ-ACK Repeat After ← HARQ-ACK
Defines the cycle length after that the information in the HS-DPCCH scheduling table is
read out again from the beginning.
The parameter together with the parameter Inter TTI Distance (Interval) defines the
repetition cycle of the HARQ-ACK pattern:
HARQ-ACK cycle = Inter TTI Distance (Interval) * HARQ-ACK Repeat After
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:HACK:REPeat
on page 478
HARQ-ACK From Interval/ HARQ-ACK To Interval ← HARQ-ACK
Defines the beginning/end of the HARQ-ACK transmissions inside the HARQ-ACK
cycle (specified by HARQ-ACK Repeat After). The range is specified in multiples of
intervals, determined by Inter TTI Distance (Interval).
See also Figure 4-21.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
194
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:HACK:FROM
on page 474
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:HACK:TO
on page 474
HS-DPCCH 1/2, HARQ-ACK 1/2/3/4 ← HARQ-ACK
Per HS-DPCCHs, sets the information transmitted during the HARQ-ACK slots of the
TTIs during the corresponding specified "HARQ-ACK From/To" range.
Two HS-DPCCHs are transmitted, if "Secondary Cell Enabled > 3".
The number of enabled HARQ-ACKs depends on the combination of enabled and
active secondary cells. In this implementation, the activated cells are mapped from left
to right.
The processing of HS-DPCCH is defined for four different main cases (see
Table 4-10).
Table 4-10: HS-DPCCH processing
Mode
"MIMO
Mode"
"Secondary
Cell
Enabled"
"Secondary
Cell Active"
Comment
Normal operation
Off
0
0
-
MIMO only
On
0
0
see Chapter 3.1.15.5, "MIMO uplink
control channel support", on page 40
DC-HSDPA only
Off
1
0, 1
2 .. 7
2 .. 7
see Chapter 3.1.16.1, "DC-HSDPA
Data Acknowledgement (non MIMO
mode)", on page 43
4C/8C-HSDPA only
see Chapter 3.1.17, "HS-DPCCH
Extension for 4C-HSDPA and 8CHSDPA", on page 46
DC-HSDPA +MIMO
4C/8C-HSDPA +MIMO
On
1
1
2 .. 7
2 .. 7
see Chapter 3.1.16.2, "DC-HSDPA +
MIMO", on page 45
see Chapter 3.1.17, "HS-DPCCH
Extension for 4C-HSDPA and 8CHSDPA", on page 46
Meaning of the used abbreviations:
● A indicates an ACK response; N - an NACK
● D means no transmission (DTX), i.e. no transport block was sent on the corresponding HS-DSCH downlink transmission.
● Single letter, e.g. an A stands for a response to a single scheduled transport block
(TB)
● A letter's couple, e.g. an AA indicates two MIMO streams, i.e. the response on two
TBs
● / is a separation mark between the response to the serving and secondary cells,
where the feedback related to the serving HS-DSCH cell is the one before the
divider sign.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
195
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
Example: Understanding the syntax
For better representation of the principle, the sending of ACK only messages is
assumed.
HARQ-ACK value
Description
A/A/A
MIMO Mode = Off (single letters only)
Three active cells, one serving and two secondary serving cells; one single TB
transmission per cell
AA/A
MIMO Mode = On
Two active cells, one seving with two MIMO streams and one secondary serving
cell with single TB transmission
AA/AA
MIMO Mode = On
Two active cells, each transmitting two MIMO streams
AA/AA, AA/D
MIMO Mode = On
Three active cells, each transmitting two MIMO streams
AA/AA, AA/AA
MIMO Mode = On
Four active cells, each transmitting two MIMO streams
"DTX"
No HARQ-ACK feedback information is sent.
"A, N"
Selects an ACK or NACK response to a single scheduled transport
block.
"AA, AN, NA, NN"
(MIMO Mode On, Secondary Cell Enabled/Active = 0)
Selects the response to two scheduled transport blocks, i.e. feedback
on the primary and secondary stream in a dual stream transmission.
"A/D, N/A, … (different combinations possible)"
(MIMO Mode Off, "Secondary Cell Enabled < 2")
Selects the response to a single scheduled transport block on each of
the serving and secondary serving HS-DSCH cells.
"A/D/D, N/D/D, … (different combinations possible)"
(MIMO Mode Off, "Secondary Cell Enabled = 2")
Selects the response to a single scheduled transport block on each of
the serving and the two secondary serving HS-DSCH cells.
"AN/NN, D/AA, … (different combinations possible)"
(MIMO Mode On, Secondary Cell Active On)
Selects the response to two scheduled transport blocks on each of
the serving and secondary serving HS-DSCH cells.
"PRE, POST"
PRE or POST is sent in the HARQ-ACK slots of the corresponding
TTI.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:HACK<di>
on page 474
Power Offset HARQ-ACK ← HARQ-ACK
Sets the power offset of a HARQ-ACK response relative to the "Power".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
196
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
The power used during all HARQ-ACK slots during the corresponding specified
"HARQ-ACK From/To" range is calculated as:
PHARQ-ACK = Power + Poff_HARQ-ACK
The value range is -10 dB to 10 dB.
The parameter is enabled for HARQ-ACK different than DTX.
While generating the HS-DPCCH signal in real-time, the HARQ-ACK power offsets of
all configured HARQ-ACK responses are set to the same value.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:POHAck
on page 475
PCI / CQI
Comprises the parameters provided for the independent configuration of the PCI/CQI
reports scheduling.
Number of Rows ← PCI / CQI
This parameter determines the number of the rows in the PCI / CQI scheduling table.
Each row represents one TTI interval, as configured with the parameter Inter TTI Distance (Interval). The parameters set in the table are read out cyclically.
See also Figure 4-21.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:PCQI:ROWS on page 473
PCI/CQI Repeat After ← PCI / CQI
Defines the cycle length after that the information in the HS-DPCCH scheduling table is
read out again from the beginning.
The parameter together with the parameter Inter TTI Distance (Interval) defines the
repetition cycle of the PCI/CQI pattern:
PCI/CQI cycle = Inter TTI Distance (Interval) * PCI/CQI Repeat After
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:PCQI:REPeat
on page 478
PCI-CQI From Interval/ PCI-CQI To Interval ← PCI / CQI
Defines the beginning/ end of the PCI/CQI transmissions inside the PCI/CQI cycle
(specified by PCI/CQI Repeat After). The range is specified in multiples of intervals,
defined by Inter TTI Distance (Interval).
See also Figure 4-21.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:PCQI:FROM
on page 476
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:PCQI:TO
on page 476
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
197
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
HS-DPCCH 1/2, PCI/CQI 1/2/3/4 Type ← PCI / CQI
Per HS-DPCCH, selects the type of the PCI/CQI report (see CQI Reports: Type A and
Type B and CQI reports: CQI1 and CQI2).
Two HS-DPCCHs are required, if "Secondary Cell Enabled > 3".
The number of enabled PCI/CQIs depends on the number of required HS-DPCCHs
and the "Slot Format". In this implementation, the activated cells are mapped from left
to right.
The available values depend on the state of the parameters "MIMO Mode", "Secondary
Cell Emabled" and "Secondary Cell Active".
"DTX"
No PCI/CQI feedback information is sent.
"CQI"
Selects CQI report for the normal operation.
"Type A Single TB"
(MIMO Mode On)
Selects CQI Type A report with information that 1 transport block is
preferred.
"Type A Double TB"
(MIMO Mode On)
Selects CQI Type A report with information that 2 transport blocks are
preferred.
"Type B"
"Composite CQI"
(MIMO Mode On)
Selects CQI Type B report.
(MIMO Mode Off, "Secondary Cell Enabled = Secondary Cell Active ≤
2")
Selects a Composite CQI, constructed from the two individual reports
CQI1 and CQI2 of the serving and secondary serving HS-DSCH cell.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:PCQI<di>:
TYPE on page 476
Power Offset PCI/CQI ← PCI / CQI
Sets the power offset Poff_PCI/CQI of all PCI/CQI slots during the corresponding specified
PCI/CQI From/To range relative to the Power.
The power PPCI/CQI used during the PCI/CQI slots is calculated as:
PPCI/CQI = Power + Poff_PCI/CQI
The value range is -10 dB to 10 dB.
While generating the HS-DPCCH signal in real-time, the PCI/CQI power offsets of all
configured PCI/CQI slots are set to the same value.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:POPCqi
on page 477
PCI/CQI 1/2/3/4 Content ← PCI / CQI
Accesses a dialog for configuring the PCI and CQI report. The provided settings
depend on the selected "PCI/CQI Type".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
198
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
CQI/CQIS/CQI1/CQI2 ← PCI/CQI 1/2/3/4 Content ← PCI / CQI
Sets the CQI report transmitted during the PCI/CQI slots of the TTIs during the corresponding specified PCI/CQI From/To range (see Chapter 3.1.15.6, "CQI Reports: Type
A and Type B", on page 41 and "CQI reports: CQI1 and CQI2" on page 45).
"CQI"
Sets the CQI value for CQI Type B report and the CQI in normal
operation.
"CQIS"
Sets the CQI value in case a CQI Type A report when one transport
block is preferred.
"CQI1"
Sets the CQI1 value of CQI Type A report when 2 transport blocks are
preferred or the CQI1 value of a composite CQI report of a dual cell
only operation.
"CQI2"
Sets the CQI2 value of CQI Type A report when 2 transport blocks are
preferred or the CQI2 value of a composite CQI report of a dual cell
only operation.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:PCQI<di>:
CQI<us> on page 477
PCI ← PCI/CQI 1/2/3/4 Content ← PCI / CQI
Selects the PCI value transmitted during the PCI/CQI slots of the TTIs during the corresponding specified PCI/CQI From/To range (see PCI reports).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:PCQI<di>:
PCI on page 477
Suggested / Current ARB Seq. Length (HS-DPCCH)
Displays the suggested and current ARB sequence length, in case the signal is not
generated in real-time.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
199
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
The "Suggested ARB Sequence Length" is the calculated minimum length that
depends on the Inter TTI Distance (Interval), the Number of Rows/Number of Rows,
the HARQ-ACK Repeat After and the PCI/CQI Repeat After. The current ARB
sequence length is adjusted by pressing the button "Adjust ARB Sequence Length".
Example: Effect of the ARB Sequence Length
●
●
Preset the instruments and adjust the settings as described in Example "HSDPCCH Scheduling" on page 192.
Use the Scheduling List to show the HS-DPCCH scheduling (see also Figure 4-21).
Change the Compatibility Mode (HS-DPCCH) to "Release 8 and Later" and compare the displayed HS-DPCCH scheduling in the "Scheduling List".
Real-time signal generation
ARB signal generation with "Current ARB Seq.
Length" < "Suggested ARB Seq. Length"
The channel restarts after 1 frame ("Current ARB
Seq. Length = 1 Frame")
●
The "Suggested / Current ARB Sequence Length" is 12 / 1. Press the Adjust ARB
Sequence Length (HS-DPCCH).
The "Current ARB Seq. Length" is adjusted, the channel restarts after 12 frames
and the "Scheduling List" shows the HS-DPCCH scheduling in all frames as in the
real-time mode.
Tip: To ensure a long enough ARB sequence, select "3GPP FDD > Filter/
Clipping/ARB Settings" and adjust the Sequence Length ARB so that the ARB
sequence length is multiple or equal the scheduling repetition.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
200
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SLENgth? on page 478
Adjust ARB Sequence Length (HS-DPCCH)
Sets the current ARB sequence length to the suggested value (see also Example "Effect of the ARB Sequence Length" on page 200).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SLENgth:ADJust
on page 479
4.30.4 HS-DPCCH Settings for Normal Operation (Up to Release 7)
The R&S SMW supports also the parameters for backward compatibility.
1. To enable these parameters, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink /
Reverse > User Equipments > UE"
2. Select "HS-DPCCH".
3. Select "Compatibility Mode > Up to Release 7".
The dialog contains the parameters that were available up to the selected release.
Power Offset ACK
Sets the power offset Poff_ACK of an ACK response to a single scheduled transport
block relative to the CQI Power PCQI.
The power PACK used during the HARQ-ACK slot is calculated as:
PACK = PCQI + Poff_ACK
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
201
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
The value range is -10 dB to 10 dB.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:POACk on page 463
Power Offset NACK
Sets the power offset Poff_NACK of an NACK response to a single scheduled transport
block relative to the CQI Power PCQI.
The power PNACK used during the HARQ-ACK slot is calculated as:
PNACK = PCQI + Poff_NACK
The value range is -10 dB to 10 dB.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:PONAck on page 463
ACK/NACK Pattern
(available for "MIMO Mode" set to Off only)
Enters the pattern for the HARQ-ACK field (Hybrid-ARQ Acknowledgment).
After receiving a transmission packet, the user equipment returns feedback information
in the HARQ-ACK field that is related to the accuracy of downlink HS-DSCH transmission.
One bit is used per HS-DPCCH packet. The maximum length of the pattern is 32 bits.
""1" = ACK"
The HARQ ACK is sent. Transmission was successful and correct.
""0" = NACK"
The NACK is sent. Transmission was not correct. With an NACK, the
UE requests retransmission of the incorrect data.
""-" = DTX"
Nothing is sent. Transmission is interrupted (Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:HAPattern on page 464
CQI Pattern Length
(available for "MIMO Mode" set to Off only)
Sets the length of the CQI sequence. The values of the CQI sequence are entered in
input fields "CQI Values". The pattern is generated cyclically.
With the CQI (Channel Quality Indicator), the user equipment informs the base station
about the receive quality of the downlink HS-PDSCH.
Thus, the base station can adapt the modulation and coding scheme to improve the
signal quality. The instrument supports the control of the base station HS-PDSCH by
CQI sequences with a length of 1 to 10 values.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:CQI:PLENgth
on page 464
CQI Values
(available for MIMO Mode set to Off only)
Enters the values of the CQI sequence. Value -1 means that no CQI is sent (DTX).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
202
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
The length of the CQI sequence is set at input field CQI Length. The pattern is generated cyclically.
With the CQI (Channel Quality Indicator), the user equipment informs the base station
about the receive quality of the downlink HS-PDSCH. Thus, the base station can adapt
the modulation and coding scheme to improve the signal quality. The instrument supports the control of the base station HS-PDSCH by CQI sequences with a length of 1
to 10 values.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:CQI<ch>[:VALues]
on page 465
MIMO Mode (Up to Release 7)
(enabled for configuration for instruments equipped with option R&S SMW-K83 only)
Enables/disables working in MIMO mode for the selected UE.
When MIMO mode is enabled, the parameters ACK/NACK Pattern, CQI Pattern
Length and CQI Values are not available. Several MIMO specific parameters are
enabled for configuration (see Chapter 4.30.5, "MIMO Settings HS-DPCCH (Up to
Release 7)", on page 203s).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO[:MODE]
on page 465
4.30.5 MIMO Settings HS-DPCCH (Up to Release 7)
MIMO settings are available for configuration only for instruments equipped with option
R&S SMW-K83 and enabled parameter "MIMO Mode".
1. To access these parameters, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink /
Reverse > User Equipments > UE"
2. Select "HS-DPCCH".
3. Select "Compatibility Mode > Up to Release 7".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
203
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
4. Select "MIMO Mode > On".
The available settings allow you to adjust the HS-DPCCH configuration for UE configured in MIMO mode.
The HS-DPCCH structure can be configured with the parameters Inter TTI Distance
and Number of TTIs, as well as by configuring the HARQ-ACK and CQI/PCI information per TTI by means of the parameters of the HS-DPCCH scheduling table. Any combination of single or dual transport block HARQ-ACK, PCI value, CQI Type and corresponding CQI value(s), as well as channel power can be configured.
Power Offset ACK/ACK
Sets the power offset Poff_ACK/ACK of an ACK/ACK response to two scheduled transport
blocks relative to the CQI Power PCQI.
The power PACK/ACK used during the HARQ-ACK slots is calculated as:
PACK/ACK = PCQI + Poff_ACK/ACK
The value range is -10 dB to 10 dB.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:POAAck
on page 465
Power Offset ACK/NACK
Sets the power offset Poff_ACK/NACK of an ACK/NACK response to two scheduled transport blocks relative to the CQI Power PCQI.
The power PACK/NACK used during the HARQ-ACK slots is calculated as:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
204
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
PACK/NACK = PCQI + Poff_ACK/NACK
The value range is -10 dB to 10 dB.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:POANack
on page 466
Power Offset NACK/ACK
Sets the power offset Poff_NACK/ACK of an NACK/ACK response to two scheduled transport blocks relative to the CQI Power PCQI.
The power PNACK/ACK used during the HARQ-ACK slots is calculated as:
PNACK/ACK = PCQI + Poff_NACK/ACK
The value range is -10 dB to 10 dB.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:PONAck
on page 467
Power Offset NACK/NACK
Sets the power offset Poff_NACK/NACK of an NACK/NACK response to two scheduled
transport blocks relative to the CQI Power PCQI.
The power PNACK/NACK used during the HARQ-ACK slots is calculated as:
PNACK/NACK = PCQI + Poff_NACK/NACK
The value range is -10 dB to 10 dB.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:PONNack
on page 467
Power Offset CQI Type A
Sets the power offset Poff_CQI Type A of the PCI/CQI slots in case a CQI Type A report is
sent relative to the CQI Power PCQI.
The power PCQI Type A used during the PCI/CQI slots is calculated as:
PCQI Type A = PCQI + Poff_CQI Type A
Since the CQI Type B reports are used in a single stream transmission (see Chapter 3.1.15.6, "CQI Reports: Type A and Type B", on page 41), the power PCQI Type B =
PCQI.
The value range is -10 dB to 10 dB.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:POCA on page 468
Number of TTIs (Up to Release 7)
Selects the number of configurable TTIs.
This parameter determines the number of the rows in the HS-DPCCH scheduling table.
Each row represents one TTI. The parameters set in the table are read out cyclically.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
205
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HS-DPCCH Settings - UE
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:TTICount
on page 468
HARQ-ACK (Up to Release 7)
Selects the information transmitted during the HARQ-ACK slot of the corresponding
TTI (see Chapter 3.1.15.5, "MIMO uplink control channel support", on page 40).
"DTX"
Selects Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) for the corresponding TTI.
During that TTI no feedback information is sent, i.e. all other parameters in the feedback signaling table are disabled.
"Single TB: ACK/Single TB: NACK"
Selects an ACK or NACK response to a single scheduled transport
block.
"TB1:ACK,TB2:ACK / TB1:ACK,TB2:NACK / TB1:NACK,TB2:ACK /
TB1:NACK,TB2:NACK"
Selects the response to two scheduled transport blocks.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:TTI<ch0>:HACK
on page 469
PCI (Up to Release 7)
Selects the PCI value transmitted during the PCI/CQI slots of the corresponding TTI
(see Chapter 3.1.15.7, "PCI reports", on page 41).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:TTI<ch0>:PCI
on page 469
CQI Type (Up to Release 7)
Selects the type of the CQI report (see Chapter 3.1.15.6, "CQI Reports: Type A and
Type B", on page 41).
"Type A Single TB"
Selects CQI Type A report with information that 1 transport block is
preferred.
"Type A Double TB"
Selects CQI Type A report with information that 2 transport blocks are
preferred.
"Type B"
Selects CQI Type B report.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:TTI<ch0>:
CQIType on page 469
CQI/CQIS/CQI1/CQI2 (Up to Release 7)
Selects the CQI report transmitted during the PCI/CQI slots of the corresponding TTI
(see Chapter 3.1.15.6, "CQI Reports: Type A and Type B", on page 41).
"CQI"
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
Sets the CQI value for CQI Type B report.
206
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
E-DPCCH Settings - UE
"CQIS"
Sets the CQI value in case a CQI Type A report when 1 transport
block is preferred.
"CQI1"
Sets the CQI1 value of CQI Type A report when 2 transport blocks are
preferred.
"CQI2"
Sets the CQI2 value of CQI Type A report when 2 transport blocks are
preferred.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:TTI<ch0>:
CQI<di> on page 470
4.31 E-DPCCH Settings - UE
1. To access the E-DPCCH channel settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction >
Uplink / Reverse > User Equipments > UE".
2. Select "Mode > DPCCH + DPDCH".
3. Select "E-DPCCH".
The dialog displays the channel structure and the available parameters.
State (E-DPCCH)
Activates or deactivates the E-DPCCH channel.
If an FRC is set for the channel, this field is activated automatically.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:STATe
on page 519
Power
Sets the power of the E-DPCCH channel.
The value range is -80 dB to 0 dB.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
207
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:POWer
on page 519
Retransmission Sequence Number
Sets the retransmission sequence number.
The value range is 0 to 3.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:RSNumber
on page 519
Channelization Code
Displays the channelization code and the modulation branch (always I) of the EDPCCH. The code channel is spread with the set channelization code (spreading
code). The standard assigns a fixed channelization code to the E-DPCCH.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:CCODe?
on page 518
E-TFCI Information
Sets the value for the TFCI (Transport Format Combination Indicator) field.
The value range is 0 to 127.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:TFCI
on page 519
Happy Bit
Activating the happy bit. This bit is indicating whether the UE could use more resources (Not Happy/deactivated) or not (Happy/activated).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:HBIT
on page 518
HSUPA FRC…
For UE1, accesses the dialog for configuring the FRC (Fixed Reference Channel), see
Chapter 4.32, "HSUPA FRC Settings - UE", on page 208.
Remote command:
n.a.
4.32 HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
The "UE HSUPA FRC" dialog provides the parameters for configuring the fixed reference channel (FRC) and the settings for the HARQ simulation.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
208
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
For more information, see also Chapter 3.1.12, "HARQ Feedback", on page 32 and
Chapter 3.1.14.4, "16QAM Fixed Reference Channel: FRC 8", on page 36.
4.32.1 FRC General Settings
1. To access these settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink / Reverse >
User Equipments > UE"
2. Select "E-DPCCH > HSUPA FRC..."
The dialog comprises the common settings for the fixed reference channel (FRC).
State (HSUPA FRC)
Activates or deactivates the FRC state for the E-DCH channels.
If FRC is activated, the channels E-DPCCH and E-DPDCH are automatically activated.
The following parameters of these channels are set automatically, depending on the
configured FRC:
● for E-DPCCH:
– "Retransmission Sequence Number" is set to 0
"E-TFCI"
● For E-DPDCH:
– Overall Symbol Rate is set according to the correspondent parameter of FRC.
The "Modulation" is set according to the "Modulation" used for the selected
FRC.
The E-DPDCH Data Source is set according to the Data Source (E-DCH) used
for the selected FRC.
● For E-DCH Scheduling:
– E-DCH TTI is set according to the E-DCH TTI of the selected FRC
If the "HARQ Simulation" is disabled and the state in the DTX mode section is
activated, the "E-DCH Scheduling Table" is configured according to the "DTX
Pattern" specified.
By enabled "HARQ Simulation", the settings in the "E-DCH Scheduling Table"
are configured to ensure a continious E-DCH transmission.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
209
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
Note: HSUPA FRCs are disabled, if UL-DTX... / User Scheduling State or Dynamic
Power Control State are activated.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:STATe
on page 516
Fixed Reference Channel (FRC)
Selects the FRC according to TS 25.141 Annex A.10.
Additionally, user defined FRC can be configured.
FRC8 is available only for instruments equipped with R&S SMW-K83.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:CHANnel
on page 507
Maximum Information Bitrate/kbps
Displays the maximum information bit rate.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:MIBRate?
on page 514
UE Category
Displays the UE category that is minimum required for the selected FRC (see also
Chapter 3.1.19.2, "UL 16QAM UE Capabilities", on page 47).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:
UECategory? on page 518
4.32.2 Coding And Physical Channels Settings
1. To access the coding and physical channel settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link
Direction > Uplink / Reverse > User Equipments > UE"
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
210
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
2. Select "E-DPCCH > HSUPA FRC...> Coding/Physical Channels"
This dialog comprises the parameters required for configuring the physical channel
settings and coding.
Data Source (E-DCH)
Selects the data source for the E-DCH channels, i.e. this paramter affects the corresponding paramter of the E-DPDCH.
The following standard data sources are available:
● "All 0, All 1"
An internally generated sequence containing 0 data or 1 data.
● "PNxx"
An internally generated pseudo-random noise sequence.
● "Pattern"
An internally generated sequence according to a bit pattern.
Use the "Pattern" box to define the bit pattern.
● "Data List/Select DList"
A binary data from a data list, internally or externally generated.
Select "Select DList" to access the standard "Select List" dialog.
– Select the "Select Data List > navigate to the list file *.dm_iqd > Select" to
select an existing data list.
– Use the "New" and "Edit" functions to create internally new data list or to edit
an existing one.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
211
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
–
Use the standard "File Manager" function to transfer external data lists to the
instrument.
See also:
● Section "Modulation Data" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "File and Data Management" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "Data List Editor" in the R&S SMW user manual
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DATA
on page 507
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DATA:
PATTern on page 509
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DATA:
DSELect on page 508
Overall Symbol Rate
Sets the overall symbol rate for the E-DCH channels, i.e. this parameter affects the
corresponding parameter of the E-DPDCH.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:ORATe
on page 515
Modulation
Sets the modulation of the FRC, i.e. this parameter affects the corresponding parameter of the E-DPDCH.
There are two possible modulation schemes specified, BPSK and 4PAM (4 PulseAmplitude Modulation). The latter one is available only for the following Overall Symbol
Rates:
● 2x960 ksps
● 2x1920 ksps
● 2x960 + 2x1920 ksps.
Note: Modulation scheme 4PAM is available only for instruments equipped with the
HSPA+ option R&S SMW-K83.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:
MODulation on page 515
E-DCH TTI
Sets the size of the TTI (Transmission Time Interval) for the E-DCH channels, i.e. this
parameter affects the corresponding parameter of the E-DCH scheduling configuration.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:TTIEdch
on page 518
Number Of HARQ Processes
Displays the number of HARQ (Hybrid-ARQ Acknowledgement) processes. This value
determines the distribution of the payload in the subframes.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
212
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:
HPROcesses? on page 514
Binary Channel Bits / TTI (Nbin)
Displays the number of binary bits per TTI.
Transport Block Size Table
Selects the Transport Block Size Table from 3GPP TS 25.321, Annex B according to
that the transport block size is configured.
The transport block size is determined also by the parameter "Transport Block Size
Index".
The allowed values of this parameter depend on the selected "E-DCH TTI" and "Modulation" scheme.
E-DCH TTI
Modulation
Transport Block Size
Table
Transport Block Size
Index (E-TFCI)
2 ms
BPSK
Table 0
0 .. 127
Table 1
0 .. 125
Table 2
0 .. 127
Table 3
0 .. 124
Table 0
0 .. 127
Table 1
0 .. 120
4PAM
10 ms
-
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:TBS:
TABLe on page 516
Transport Block Size Index (E-TFCI)
Selects the Transport Block Size Index (E-TFCI) for the corresponding table, as described in in 3GPP TS 25.321, Annex B.
The value range of this parameter depends on the selected "Transport Block Size
Table".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:TBS:
INDex on page 516
Information Bit Payload (Ninf)
Displays the payload of the information bit. This value determines the number of transport layer bits sent in each HARQ process.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
213
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:PAYBits?
on page 515
Coding Rate (Ninf/Nbin)
Displays the relation between the information bits to binary channel bits.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:CRATe?
on page 507
4.32.3 DTX Mode Settings
1. To access these settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink / Reverse >
User Equipments > UE"
2. Select "E-DPCCH > HSUPA FRC... > DTX"
This dialog comprises the parameters required for enabling and defining user data.
State (DTX)
Activates or deactivates the DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) mode.
Note: If activated, the "E-DCH Scheduling Table" in the "E-DPCCH Settings" dialog is
configured according to the "DTX Pattern" specified.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DTX:
STATe on page 511
User Data (DTX Pattern)
Sets the user-definable the bit pattern for the DTX. The maximum length is 64 bits.
The following values are allowed:
● 1: Data transmission
● -: DTX
Note: If activated, this setting will overwrite the "E-DCH Scheduling Table" in the "EDPCCH Settings" dialog.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
214
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
Example:
"User Data (DTX Pattern) = 1-11-" sets the E-DCH Scheduling settings as follow:
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DTX:
PATTern on page 510
4.32.4 HARQ Simulation Settings
This section describes the HARQ settings. The provided settings depend on the
selected "HARQ Simulation > Mode".
1. To access these settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink / Reverse >
User Equipments > UE"
2. Select "E-DPCCH > HSUPA FRC... > HARQ Simulation".
3. Select "Mode > Virtual HARQ".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
215
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
4. Select "Mode > HARQ Feedback".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
216
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
For background information, refer to Chapter 3.1.12, "HARQ Feedback", on page 32.
State (HARQ)
Activates or deactivates the HARQ simulation mode.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:
SIMulation[:STATe] on page 514
Mode (HARQ)
Selects the HARQ simulation mode.
"Virtual HARQ" This mode simulates basestation feedback. For every HARQ process
(either 4 or 8), a bit pattern can be defined to simulate ACKs and
NACKs.
"HARQ Feedback"
(not supported in Baseband C/D)
This mode allows you to dynamically control the transmission of the
HSUPA fixed reference channels. An "ACK" from the base station
leads to the transmission of a new packet while a "NACK" forces the
instrument to retransmit the packet with a new channel coding configuration (i.e. new "redundancy version") of the concerned HARQ process.
For further information, see Chapter 3.1.12, "HARQ Feedback",
on page 32.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:
SIMulation:MODE on page 512
Virtual HARQ Mode
Simulates a basestation feedback with the follwoing settings:
Always Use Redundancy Version 0 (HARQ) ← Virtual HARQ Mode
If activated, the same redundancy version is sent, that is, the redundancy version is not
adjusted for the next retransmission in case of a received NACK.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:
SIMulation:RVZero on page 513
HARQ1..8: ACK/NACK ← Virtual HARQ Mode
(HARQ mode Virtual HARQ only)
Enters the pattern for the HARQ (Hybrid-ARQ Acknowledgement).
The maximum length of the pattern is 32 bits.
""1" = ACK"
New data is transmitted and the RSN (Retransmission Sequences
Number) is set to 0.
""0" = NACK"
The data is retransmitted and the RSN is increased with 1.
The maximum value of RSN is 3, i.e. even if more than 3 retransmissions are configured, the RSN remains 3.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
217
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ[:
SIMulation]:PATTern<ch> on page 514
HARQ mode HARQ Feedback
(not supported in Baseband C/D)
Dynamically control the transmission of the HSUPA fixed reference channels wit hthe
following settings:
Always Use Redundancy Version 0 (HARQ) ← HARQ mode HARQ Feedback
If activated, the same redundancy version is sent, that is, the redundancy version is not
adjusted for the next retransmission in case of a received NACK.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:
SIMulation:RVZero on page 513
Maximum Number Of Retransmissions (HARQ) ← HARQ mode HARQ Feedback
Sets the maximum number of retransmissions. After the expiration of this value, the
next packet is sent, regardless of the received feedback.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:
SIMulation:MRETransmissions on page 513
ACK Definition (HARQ) ← HARQ mode HARQ Feedback
Selects whether a high level (TTL) is interpreted as an ACK or a low level.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:
SIMulation:ADEFinition on page 511
Connector (HARQ) ← HARQ mode HARQ Feedback
Selects the connector used by the HARQ Feedback line.
Tip: Assign different connectors to the two basebands to enable two HARQ feedback
lines with different configuration.
In this firmware version, the "Global" connector is disabled.
See Chapter 3.2, "Routing and enabling an external control signal", on page 52.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:
SIMulation:CONNector on page 511
Delay Between HARQ And Feedback (HARQ) ← HARQ mode HARQ Feedback
Displays the time between the start of the HARQ process and the start of the related
feedback.
For further information, see Chapter 3.1.12, "HARQ Feedback", on page 32.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
218
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
HSUPA FRC Settings - UE
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:
SIMulation:DELay:FEEDback? on page 512
Additional User Delay ← HARQ mode HARQ Feedback
Sets an additional delay to adjust the delay between the HARQ and the feedback.
For further information, see Chapter 3.1.12, "HARQ Feedback", on page 32.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:
SIMulation:DELay:AUSer on page 512
4.32.5 Bit and Block Error Insertion Settings
1. To access these settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink / Reverse >
User Equipments > UE"
2. Select "E-DPCCH > HSUPA FRC... > Bit/Block Error Insertion".
The dialogs provide the parameters for inserting errors into the data source and
into the CRC checksum.
Bit Error State
Activates or deactivates bit error generation.
Bit errors are inserted into the data fields of the enhanced channels. It is possible to
select the layer in which the errors are inserted (physical or transport layer).
When the data source is read out, individual bits are deliberately inverted at random
points in the data bit stream at the specified error rate in order to simulate an invalid
signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DERRor:
BIT:STATe on page 509
Bit Error Rate
Sets the bit error rate. The value range is 10E-1 to 10E-7.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
219
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
E-DPDCH Settings - UE
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DERRor:
BIT:RATE on page 509
Insert Errors On
Selects the layer in the coding process at which bit errors are inserted.
"Transport layer"
Bit errors are inserted in the transport layer.
"Physical layer"
Bit errors are inserted in the physical layer.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DERRor:
BIT:LAYer on page 509
Block Error State
Activates or deactivates block error generation.
The CRC checksum is determined and then the last bit is inverted at the specified error
probability in order to simulate an invalid signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DERRor:
BLOCk:STATe on page 510
Block Error Rate
Sets block error rate.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DERRor:
BLOCk:RATE on page 510
4.33 E-DPDCH Settings - UE
1. To access the E-DPDCH channel settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction >
Uplink / Reverse > User Equipments > UE".
2. Select "Mode > DPCCH + DPDCH".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
220
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
E-DPDCH Settings - UE
3. Select "E-DPDCH".
The dialog displays the channel structure and the available parameters.
4.33.1 E-DPDCH Common Settings
State (E-DPDCH)
Activates or deactivates all the E-DPDCH channels.
If an FRC is set for the channel, this field is activated automatically.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:STATe
on page 521
Force Channelization Code To I/0
Sets the channelization code to I/0.
This mode can only be activated if the overall symbol rate is less than 2 x 960 kbps.
It is provided for test purposes. Using an oscilloscope, the data bits of the E-DPDCH
are visible on the I/Q signal if:
● Force Channelization Code to I/0 is On
● Scrambling Code Mode is set to Off.
● DPDCH power is - 80 dB
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:FCIO
on page 520
Overall Symbol Rate
Sets the overall symbol rate of all the E-DPDCH channels.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
221
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
E-DPDCH Settings - UE
The structure of the E-DPDCH channel table depends on this parameter. The overall
symbol rate determines which E-DPDCHs are active, which symbol rate they have and
which channelization codes they use.
E-DPDCHs that are not active by virtue of the overall rate are also disabled for operation.
If an FRC is set for the channel, this field is read-only.
Note: If the Dynamic Power Control State and/or the UL-DTX... / User Scheduling
State is enabled, the E-DPDCH is generated in realtime. Then only the overall symbol
rates with one E-DPDCH channel or those that restrict the E-DPDCHs to the I or Q
branch are enabled for configuration.
To send simultaneously multiple physical E-DPDCH, set the Overall Rate to one of the
predefined two-channel configurations. For some special applications it might be necessary to split up the generation of this channels to two baseband blocks. The instrument provides additionally special non-standard overall symbol rates, that enable the
instrument to generate only the E-DPDCH channels of the I branch or of the Q branch
per baseband block.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:ORATe
on page 520
Modulation
Sets the modulation of the E-DPDCH.
There are two possible modulation schemes specified for this channel, BPSK and
4PAM (4 Pulse-Amplitude Modulation). The latter one is available only for Overall Symbol Rates using two channels, e.g 2x960 ksps and/or 2x1920 ksps.
Note: Modulation scheme 4PAM is available only for instruments equipped with the
HSPA+ option R&S SMW-K83.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:MODulation
on page 520
4.33.2 Channel Table
The channel table allows you to configure the individual parameters for the E-DPDCH
channels. The structure of the currently selected channel is displayed graphically in the
table header.
The number of active channels depends on the selected overall symbol rate. You can
select the data sources for the individual channels. The remaining parameters are only
displayed and their values depend also on the overall symbol rate. See also Table A-3
and Table A-4.
Channel Number
Displays the channel number.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
222
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
E-DPDCH Settings - UE
Remote command:
n.a.
(the channel is selected by the suffix at keyword CHANnel<n>)
Channel Type
Displays the channel type.
Remote command:
n.a.
Symbol Rate / State
Displays the symbol rate and the state of the E-DPDCH channel.
The symbol rate and the state of the channels are dependent on the overall symbol
rate set and cannot be modified.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:
SRATe? on page 506
Channelization Code
Displays the channelization code and the modulation branch (I or Q) of the DPDCH
channel.
The channelization code is dependent on the overall symbol rate set and cannot be
modified.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:
CCODe? on page 504
Channel Power
Sets the power of the selected E-DPDCH channel.
The power entered is relative to the powers of the other channels and does not initially
relate to the "Level" power display. If Adjust Total Power to 0dB is executed, all the
power data is relative to "Level"
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:
POWer on page 506
E-DPDCH Data Source
Selects the data source for the E-DPDCH channel.
The data source for the DPDCH is also entered here for the enhanced channels of
UE1 without channel coding.
The following standard data sources are available:
● "All 0, All 1"
An internally generated sequence containing 0 data or 1 data.
● "PNxx"
An internally generated pseudo-random noise sequence.
● "Pattern"
An internally generated sequence according to a bit pattern.
Use the "Pattern" box to define the bit pattern.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
223
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
E-DCH Scheduling - UE
●
"Data List/Select DList"
A binary data from a data list, internally or externally generated.
Select "Select DList" to access the standard "Select List" dialog.
– Select the "Select Data List > navigate to the list file *.dm_iqd > Select" to
select an existing data list.
– Use the "New" and "Edit" functions to create internally new data list or to edit
an existing one.
– Use the standard "File Manager" function to transfer external data lists to the
instrument.
See also:
● Section "Modulation Data" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "File and Data Management" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "Data List Editor" in the R&S SMW user manual
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:
DATA on page 504
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:
DATA:PATTern on page 506
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:
DATA:DSELect on page 505
4.34 E-DCH Scheduling - UE
(requires option R&S SMW-K83)
1. To access the E-DCH settings, select "3GPP FDD > User Equipment > link Direction > Uplink / Reverse > User Equipments > UE"
2. Select "E-DCH".
This dialog comprises the settings necessary to configure the common time schedule of the E-DPDCH and E-DPCCH. The settings enable you to configure single EDCH packets or "bursts" of variable length consisting of several successive E-DCH
packets and to decide upon the E-DCH packets distribution.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
224
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
E-DCH Scheduling - UE
Use the Scheduling List to display and verify the configured uplink scheduling for every
UE.
Real-time vs. ARB signal generation
The E-DCH channels are generated in real-time or as an ARB signal.
●
If the E-DCH channels are generated as ARB signal, the ARB sequence length has
to be long enough and a multiple or equal the scheduling repetition.
●
The instrument generate the channels in real-time if UL-DTX... / User Scheduling
State and/or Dynamic Power Control State is activated.
–
During generation of E-DCH channels in real-time, channel coding (i.e. activation of FRCs) is disabled. Use pre-channel-coded data list as "Data Source" if
channel coded data on the E-DCH is required.
–
The E-DPDCH can be generated in realtime only for overall symbol rates with
one E-DPDCH channel or those that restrict the E-DPDCHs to the I or Q
branch.
Example: E-DCH Scheduling
To configure an E-DCH transmission in TTIs 3-6, 128-156, 1003-1006, 1128-1156, etc.
perform the settings listed in Table 4-11.
Table 4-11: E-DCH scheduling example
Parameter
Value
Comment
Select "3GPP FDD > Filter/Clipping/ARB
Settings" and adjust the Sequence
Length ARB
200 frames
If the E-DCH channels are generated as
ARB signal, the ARB sequence length has
to be long enough and a multiple or equal
the scheduling repetition.
E-DCH TTI
2 ms
Number of Table Rows
2
two scheduled E-DCH bursts
E-DCH Schedule Repeats After
1000 TTIs
each E-DCH burst is repeated every 1000
TTIs
Row#0
E-DCH burst (4 E-DCH packets)
"E-DCH TTI From"
3
"E-DCH TTI To"
6
Row#1
E-DCH burst (29 E-DCH packets)
"E-DCH TTI From"
128
"E-DCH TTI To"
156
E-DPCCH State
On
Enables E-DPCCH
E-DPDCH State
On
Enables E-DPDCH
Open the Scheduling List to display the E-DCH scheduling.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
225
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
E-DCH Scheduling - UE
E-DCH TTI
Sets the size for the TTI (Transmission Time Interval).
If an FRC is set for the E-DPCCH or UL-DTX... / User Scheduling State is enabled, this
field is read-only.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:EDCH:TTIEdch
on page 521
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:TTIEdch
on page 521
Number of Table Rows
Sets the number of the rows in the scheduling table, i.e. determines the number of the
E-DCH "bursts" enabled for configuration. An E-DCH "burst" is build of several successive E-DCH packets.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
226
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:EDCH:ROWCount
on page 522
E-DCH Schedule Repeats After
Determine the number of TTIs after that the E-DCH scheduling is repeated.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:EDCH:REPeat
on page 522
E-DCH Scheduling Table
Enables the user to flexible configure single E-DCH packets or E-DCH "bursts" of variable length consisting of several successive E-DCH packets
E-DCH TTI From ← E-DCH Scheduling Table
Determines the start TTI of the corresponding E-DCH burst.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:EDCH:ROW<ch0>:FROM
on page 522
E-DCH TTI To ← E-DCH Scheduling Table
Determines the end TTI of the corresponding E-DCH burst.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:EDCH:ROW<ch0>:TO
on page 522
4.35 Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
The "Global Enhanced Channel" settings are only available for user equipment 1
(UE1).
1. To access these settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink / Reverse >
User Equipments > UE 1".
2. Select "DPDCH Settings > Global Enhanced Channels...".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
227
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
4.35.1 Enhanced Channels State
► Select "Enhanced".
In this tab, you can activate the global enhanced settings.
Enhanced Channels State
Displays the enhanced state of the station. As at least the DPCCH of UE1 is always
calculated in realtime, the enhanced state is always on for UE1.
The DPCCH and one DPDCH of user equipment 1 are generated in realtime. Depending on the actual configurations, other channels of user equipment 1 may also be generated in realtime.
It is possible to activate channel coding and simulate bit and block errors. Data lists, for
example with user data for the transport layer, can be used as the data source.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:STATe on page 539
4.35.2 Channel Coding
1. To access these settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink / Reverse >
User Equipments > UE 1".
2. Select "DPDCH Settings > Global Enhanced Channels...".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
228
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
3. Select "Channel Coding"
The "Channel Coding > General" tab comprises the settings for enabling and configuring the channel coding. The provided settings are devided into general settings
and several sub-tabs, one per transport channel.
To access the channel coding settings of a transport channel, select the corresponding side tab, for example "DTCH1". Refer to Chapter 4.35.3, "Transport
Channel", on page 232 for description of the provided settings.
An uplink reference measurement channel according to 3GPP TS 25.141 is generated
when the transport channels DTCH (Dedicated Traffic Channel) and DCCH (Dedicated
Control Channel) , which contain the user data, are mapped to a DPDCH (Dedicated
Physical Data Channel) with a different data rate after channel coding and multiplexing.
The display below is taken from the standard (TS 25.141) and shows in diagrammatic
form the generation of a 12.2 kbps reference measurement channel from the DTCH
and DCCH transport channels.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
229
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
Figure 4-22: Channel coding of the 12.2 kbps reference measurement channels (uplink)
Channel Coding State
Activates or deactivates channel coding.
Note: Annex A.1, 3GPP TS 25.141, lists the recommended DPCCH-settings.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:STATe
on page 534
Coding Type
Selects channel coding.
The 3GPP specification defines 4 reference measurement channel coding types, which
differ in the input data bit rate bit to be processed (12.2, 64, 144 and 384 ksps). The
additional AMR CODER coding scheme generates the coding of a voice channel.
"User" coding can be defined as required in the detailed coding settings menu section
revealed with button "Show Details". They can be stored and loaded in the "User Coding" submenu. Selection "User" is indicated as soon as a coding parameter is modified
after selecting a predefined coding type.
The input data bits are taken from the data source specified for the "Transport Channels" for channel coding. The bits are available with a higher rate at the channel coding
output. The allocations between the measurement input data bit rate and the output
symbol rate are fixed, that is to say, the overall symbol rate is adjusted automatically.
The following are available for selection:
"RMC 12.2
kbps"
12.2 kbps measurement channel
"RMC 64 kbps" 64 kbps measurement channel
"RMC 144
kbps"
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
144 kbps measurement channel
230
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
"RMC 384
kbps"
384 kbps measurement channel
"AMR 12.2
kbps"
Channel coding for the AMR coder
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:TYPE
on page 534
User Coding ...
Accesses files with user codings and the standard "File Select" function.
User coding of UE1 are stored as files with the predefined file extension
*.3g_ccod_ul. The file name and the directory they are stored in are user-definable;
the file extension is assigned automatically.
The complete channel coding settings are saved and recalled.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:USER:
CATalog? on page 535
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:USER:
DELete on page 536
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:USER:LOAD
on page 536
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:USER:
STORe on page 536
Overall Symbol Rate
Sets the overall symbol rate of the DPDCH.
The structure of the DPDCH channel table depends on this parameter. The overall
symbol rate determines which DPDCHs are active, which symbol rate they have and
which channelization codes they use.
DPDCHs that are not active by virtue of the overall rate, are also disabled for operation.
Note: Up to an overall rate of 960 ksps, only DPDCH 1 is active, its symbol rate is the
same as the overall rate and the channelization code is the same as spreading factor/4
(spreading factor = chip rate / symbol rate). With an overall symbol rate greater than
960 ksps, all the active DPDCHs have the symbol rate 960 ksps.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:ORATe on page 539
Bits per Frame (DPDCH)
Displays the data bits in the DPDCH component of the frame at physical level. The
value depends on the overall symbol rate.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
231
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:BPFRame?
on page 533
4.35.3 Transport Channel
1. To access these settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink / Reverse >
User Equipments > UE 1".
2. Select "DPDCH Settings > Global Enhanced Channels... > Channel Coding".
3. Select the corresponding side tab, for example "DTCH1".
The dialog provides an access to the settings of up to 7 transport channels (TCHs),
the DTCHs (DTCH1 to 6) and the DCCH.
Transport Channel State
Activates or deactivates the transport channel.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:
STATe on page 540
In case of remote control, DCCH corresponds to :TCHannel0, DTCH1 to :
TCHannel1, etc.
Data Source
Selects the data source for the transport channel.
The data source for the DCCH and DTCH1 can also be selected in the main dialog in
the channel table.
The following standard data sources are available:
● "All 0, All 1"
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
232
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
●
●
●
An internally generated sequence containing 0 data or 1 data.
"PNxx"
An internally generated pseudo-random noise sequence.
"Pattern"
An internally generated sequence according to a bit pattern.
Use the "Pattern" box to define the bit pattern.
"Data List/Select DList"
A binary data from a data list, internally or externally generated.
Select "Select DList" to access the standard "Select List" dialog.
– Select the "Select Data List > navigate to the list file *.dm_iqd > Select" to
select an existing data list.
– Use the "New" and "Edit" functions to create internally new data list or to edit
an existing one.
– Use the standard "File Manager" function to transfer external data lists to the
instrument.
See also:
● Section "Modulation Data" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "File and Data Management" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "Data List Editor" in the R&S SMW user manual
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:
DATA on page 541
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:
DATA:PATTern on page 543
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:
DATA:DSELect on page 542
Transport Time Interval
Sets the number of frames into which a TCH is divided. This setting also defines the
interleaver depth.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:
TTINterval on page 541
Number of Transport Blocks
Sets the number of transport blocks for the TCH.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:
TBCount on page 540
Transport Block Size
Sets the size of the transport block at the channel coding input.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
233
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:
TBSize on page 541
Size of CRC
Defines the type (length) of the CRC. Checksum determination can also be deactivated
(setting None).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:
CRCSize on page 541
Rate Matching Attribute
Sets data rate matching (Rate Matching).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:
RMATtribute on page 540
Error Protection
Selects error protection.
"None"
No error protection
"Turbo 1/3"
Turbo Coder of rate 1/3 in accordance with the 3GPP specifications.
"Conv 1/2 | 1/3"
Convolution Coder of rate 1/2 or 1/3 with generator polynomials
defined by 3GPP.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:
EPRotection on page 543
Interleaver 1 State
Activates or deactivates channel coding interleaver state 1 of the transport channel.
Interleaver state 1 can be set independently in each TCH. Activation does not change
the symbol rate.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:
INTerleaver on page 543
Interleaver 2 State
Activates or deactivates channel coding interleaver state 2 of all the transport channels. Interleaver state 2 can only be set for all the TCHs together. Activation does not
change the symbol rate.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
234
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Global Enhanced Channel Settings - UE1
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:INTerleaver2
on page 539
4.35.4 Error Insertion
1. To access these settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink / Reverse >
User Equipments > UE 1".
2. Select "DPDCH Settings > Global Enhanced Channels...".
3. Select "Bit Error Insertion / Block Error Insertion"
The dialogs provide the parameters for inserting errors into the data source and
into the CRC checksum, for example, to check the bit and block error rate testers.
Bit Error State
Activates or deactivates bit error generation.
Bit errors are inserted into the data fields of the enhanced channels. When channel
coding is active, it is possible to select the layer in which the errors are inserted (physical or transport layer).
When the data source is read out, individual bits are deliberately inverted at random
points in the data bit stream at the specified error rate in order to simulate an invalid
signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DERRor:BIT:STATe
on page 538
Bit Error Rate TCH1
Sets the bit error rate.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DERRor:BIT:RATE
on page 537
Insert Errors On
Selects the layer at which bit errors are inserted.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
235
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PRACH Settings - UE
"Transport
layer"
Bit errors are inserted in the transport layer.
This layer is only available when channel coding is active.
"Physical
layer"
Bit errors are inserted in the physical layer.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DERRor:BIT:LAYer
on page 537
Block Error State
Activates or deactivates block error generation.
The CRC checksum is determined and then the last bit is inverted at the specified error
probability in order to simulate an invalid signal.
Block error generation is only available when channel coding is active.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DERRor:BIT:STATe
on page 538
Block Error Rate
Sets the block error rate.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DERRor:BLOCk:RATE
on page 538
4.36 PRACH Settings - UE
1. To access the PRACH settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink /
Reverse > User Equipments > UE 1".
2. Select "Mode > PRACH Standard/PRACH Preamble Only".
The PRACH settings are available in two modes:
● In "Standard" mode, the instrument generates a single physical random access
channel (PRACH). This channel is needed to set up the connection between
the user equipment and the base station.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
236
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PRACH Settings - UE
●
In "Preamble only" mode, the instrument only generates the preamble of a
physical random access channel (PRACH). This mode is needed for Test Case
8.8 TS 25.141.
In this mode, only the preamble parameters are available.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
237
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PRACH Settings - UE
3. Select "PRACH Structure".
Figure 4-23: Standard PRACH Structure: Understanding the displayed information
1a
= "Preamble Power Step"; subtract this value from 1b to calculate the power of the other preambles
1b
= "Delta Power (Preamble)", i.e. correction value for the last preamble before the message part
2
= "Delta Power (Message Part)", i.e. correction value for the message part overall
2a, 2b = correction values for the data and control part of the message part
3a
= current "Structure Length"
3b
= user-defined repetition of the PRACH structure, i.e. the smae structure is repeated 3 times
withing the current ARB sequence length
4
= current ARB sequence length (in slots); set with the parameter Sequence Length ARB
The dialog comprises a graphical representation of the PRACH structure, including
the timing parameters, the "Preamble Settings" and "Message Part" sections, comprising respectively the preamble settings for the parameters of the data part of the
channel. Some settings are made directly in the input fields of the graphical display.
In the "Channel Coding" section channel coding can be activated.
Power settings and power calculation
●
Calculating the power of the preamble
The correction value for the last preamble before the message part (indication in
the preamble block) are indicated in the graphical display of the PRACH structure.
The power of the other preambles are calculated by subtracting the selected "Preamble Power Step".
●
Calculating the power of the message part
The correction values for the message part overall and separately for data and
control part (indications in the message part block) are also indicated.
For one active UE and if the "Level Reference" is set to "RMS Power", the RF
power of the message part is calculated as:
Message Part Power = "RF Level" + Delta Power Message Part
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
238
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PRACH Settings - UE
Example: Calculating the power of the message part
●
"3GPP > User Equipment > Level Reference > RMS Power"
●
"Level = 5 dBm"
●
"Delta Power Message Part = 5.79 dB"
The resulting Message Part Power = 5 + 5.79 = 10.79 dBm
4.36.1 Graphical Display
The graphical display shows either the complete PRACH including the message part or
only the preamble depending on the selected mode.
PRACH Standard
1. To access these settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink / Reverse >
User Equipments > UE 1".
2. Select "Mode > PRACH Standard".
3. Select "PRACH Structure".
See Figure 4-23
PRACH Preamble-only
1. In the "General" tab, select "Mode > PRACH Preamble Only"
2. Select "PRACH Structure".
Figure 4-24: PRACH Mode Preamble Only
Some of the parameter values can be input directly in the input fields of the graphical display. The indicated structure length and the power correction values match
the real settings; the number of preambles, however, is shown as an example, to
explain the parameter function.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
239
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PRACH Settings - UE
Use the power correction values to calculate the correct settings for the desired RF
level, see "Power settings and power calculation" on page 238.
Delta Power (Preamble)
Indicates the level correction value for the last preamble before the message part.
The level of the other preambles can be calculated by subtracting the set "Preamble
Power Step".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:DPOWer:
PREamble? on page 501
Delta Power (Message Part)
Indicates the level correction value for the message part, together with the power offsets of the data and control part.
The indication of the total value is important for measurements where just the envelope
of the signal is of interest whereas the separate indication is useful for receiver tests.
See also "Power settings and power calculation" on page 238.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:DPOWer:MPARt?
on page 500
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:DPOWer:MPARt:
DATA? on page 500
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:DPOWer:MPARt:
CONTrol? on page 500
Start Offset #
Enters the start offset of the PRACH in access slots or slots.
The starting time delay in timeslots is then equal to 2*"Start Offset #"
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:SOFFset
on page 501
Time Pre->Pre
Enters the time difference between two successive preambles in access slots.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:TIME:PREPre
on page 502
Time Pre->MP
Enters the time difference between the last preamble and the message part in access
slots.
Two modes are defined in the standard. In mode 0, the preamble to message part difference is 3 access slots, in mode 1 it is 4 access slots.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
240
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PRACH Settings - UE
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:TIME:PREMp
on page 502
Structure Length
Indicates the structure length:
● In "PRACH only - Preamble" mode, the structure length is defined as:
"Structure Length" = "Start Offset (Slots)" + "Preamble Repetition"*"Time Pre->Pre"
Example: Calculating the structure length in PRACH Preamble Only mode
"Start Offset # = 1 Access Slots", i.e. 2 Slots
"Preamble Repetition = 2"
"Time Pre->Pre = 2 Access Slots", i.e. 4 Slots
"Structure Length" = 2 Slots + 2 x 4 Slots = 10 Slots
●
In "PRACH only - Standard" mode, the structure length is defined as:
"Structure Length" = "Start Offset (Slots)" + "Preamble Repetition"*"Time Pre->Pre"
+ "Time Pre->MP" + 15*"Message Part Length (Frames)"
Example: Calculating the structure length in PRACH Standard mode
"Start Offset # = 2 Access Slots", i.e. 4 Slots
"Preamble Repetition = 3"
"Time Pre->Pre = Time Pre->MP = 3 Access Slots", i.e. 6 Slots
"Message Part Length = 2 Frames"
"Structure Length" = 4 Slots + 2 x 6 Slots + 6 Slots + 15 x 2 = 52 Slots
See also "Repeat Structure After ARB Sequence Length" on page 241.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:SPERiod?
on page 501
ARB Sequence Length
Indicates the ARB sequence length.
Note: A caution message is displayed, if the structure length is longer than the
selected ARB sequence length.
The change the ARB sequence length, use the parameter Sequence Length ARB.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SLENgth on page 354
Repeat Structure After ARB Sequence Length
Enables/disables repeating the selected PRACH structure during one ARB sequence.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
241
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PRACH Settings - UE
"On"
Within one ARB sequence, the selected PRACH structure is repeated
once.
Figure 4-25: "Repeat Structure After ARB Sequence Length = On"
"Off"
The selected PRACH structure can be repeated several time,
depending on the structure length and the Repeat Structure After (x
Acc. Slots).
Figure 4-26: "Repeat Structure After ARB Sequence Length = Off"
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:RARB on page 498
Repeat Structure After (x Acc. Slots)
If "Repeat Structure After ARB Sequence Length > Off", sets the number of access
slots after that the selected PRACH structure will be repeated, see Figure 4-26.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:RAFTer on page 497
4.36.2 Preamble Settings
1. To access these settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink / Reverse >
User Equipments > UE 1".
2. Select "Mode > PRACH Standard/PRACH Preamble Only".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
242
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PRACH Settings - UE
3. Select "Preamble".
The dialog comprises the parameters for configuring the PRACH preamble.
Preamble Power
Sets the power of the preamble component of the PRACH channel.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:PPOWer on page 496
Preamble Power Step
Sets the power by which the preamble is increased from repetition to repetition. The
power set with the parameter Preamble Power is the "target power", used during the
last repetition of the preamble.
Example:
"Preamble Power = 0 dB"
"Preamble Repetition = 3"
"Preamble Power Step = 3 dB"
Figure 4-27: Generated power sequence
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:PPOWer:STEP on page 497
Preamble Repetition
Sets the preamble count.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:PREPetition on page 497
Signature
Selects the signature to be used for the PRACH channel.
The signature defines the code domain for the channelization code being used. 16
fixed bit patterns are defined.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
243
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PRACH Settings - UE
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:SIGNature on page 499
4.36.3 Message Part Settings
1. To access these settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink / Reverse >
User Equipments > UE 1".
2. Select "Mode > PRACH Standard".
3. Select "Message Part".
The tab comprises the settings for the data part of the PRACH.
Data Power
Sets the power of the data component of the PRACH channel.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:DPOWer on page 496
Control Power
Sets the power of the control component of the PRACH channel.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:CPOWer on page 494
Message Length
Sets the length of the message component of the PRACH channel in frames.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:MLENgth on page 496
Slot Format
Selects the slot format.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
244
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PRACH Settings - UE
Slot formats 0 to 3 are available for the PRACH channel. The slot format defines the
symbol rate of the message component.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:SFORmat on page 498
Symbol Rate
Sets the symbol rate of the PRACH channel.
The symbol rate is determined by the slot format set. A change in the symbol rate
leads automatically to an adjustment of the slot format.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:SRATe on page 499
TFCI
Enters the value of the TFCI field (Transport Format Combination Indicator) in the control component of the PRACH channel.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TFCI on page 499
Data Source
Selects the data source for the data component of the PRACH channel.
The following standard data sources are available:
● "All 0, All 1"
An internally generated sequence containing 0 data or 1 data.
● "PNxx"
An internally generated pseudo-random noise sequence.
● "Pattern"
An internally generated sequence according to a bit pattern.
Use the "Pattern" box to define the bit pattern.
● "Data List/Select DList"
A binary data from a data list, internally or externally generated.
Select "Select DList" to access the standard "Select List" dialog.
– Select the "Select Data List > navigate to the list file *.dm_iqd > Select" to
select an existing data list.
– Use the "New" and "Edit" functions to create internally new data list or to edit
an existing one.
– Use the standard "File Manager" function to transfer external data lists to the
instrument.
See also:
● Section "Modulation Data" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "File and Data Management" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "Data List Editor" in the R&S SMW user manual
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:DATA on page 495
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:DATA:PATTern on page 496
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:DATA:DSELect on page 495
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
245
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PRACH Settings - UE
4.36.4 Channel Coding State
Channel coding of PRACH is possible for all UEs.
1. To access these settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink / Reverse >
User Equipments > UE 1".
2. Select "Mode > PRACH Standard".
3. Select "Coding".
The tab comprises the parameters defining the coding type and activating the
PRACH channel. The fixed settings for the channel coding parameters are displayed.
Channel Coding State
Activates or deactivates channel coding for the PRACH channel.
When On, the "Message Part Length" automatically is set to 2. It cannot be changed.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:ENHanced:PRACh:CCODing:STATe
on page 544
Channel Coding Type
Selects the predefined reference measurement channel coding types for the PRACH
channel.
"RACH RMC (TB size 168 bit)"
Reference Measurements Channel Coding with transport block size
of 168 bit.
"RACH RMC (TB size 360 bit)"
Reference Measurements Channel Coding with transport block size
of 360 bit.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
246
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PCPCH Settings - UE
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:ENHanced:PRACh:CCODing:TYPE
on page 545
Show Coding
Calls the menu for displaying the channel coding settings. The reference measurement
channel parameters are set to fixed values.
The following parameters are displayed:
"Data Source"
The data source is displayed in the transport channel graphical display.
"Transport Block Size"
Size of the transport block at the channel coding input.
"Transport Block"
Transport block count.
"Transport Time Interval"
Number of frames into which a TCH is divided.
"Size of CRC"
CRC type (length).
"Error Protection"
Error protection.
"Interleaver 1 / 2 State"
Channel coding interleaver state
Remote command:
n.a.
4.37 PCPCH Settings - UE
1. To access the PCPCH settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink /
Reverse > User Equipments > UE 1".
2. Select "Mode > PCPCH Standard/PCPCH Preamble Only".
The PCPCH settings are available in two modes:
● In "PCPCH Standard" mode, the instrument generates a single physical common packet channel (PCPCH). This channel is used to transmit packet-oriented services (e.g. SMS).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
247
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PCPCH Settings - UE
●
In "PCPCH Preamble only" mode, the instrument only generates the preamble
of a physical common packet channel (PCPCH). This mode is needed for Test
Case 8.9 TS 25.141.
In this mode, only the preamble parameters are available.
3. Select "PCPCH Structure".
Figure 4-28: Standard PCPCH Structure: Understanding the displayed information
1a, 1b = "Delta Power (Preamble)", i.e. correction values for the last AICH preamble before the message part and the CD Preamble
1c
= "Preamble Power Step"; subtract this value from 1b to calculate the power of the other preambles
2
= "Delta Power (Message Part)", i.e. correction value for the message part overall
2a, 2b = correction values for the data and control part of the message part
3a
= current "Structure Length = 19 slots"
3b
= user-defined repetition of the PCPCH structure, i.e. the smae structure is repeated 3 times
withing the current ARB sequence length
4
= current ARB sequence length (in slots); set with the parameter Sequence Length ARB
The dialog comprises a graphical display of the PCPCH structure including the timing parameters, the "Preamble Settings" and "Message Part" sections, comprising
respectively the preamble settings and the parameters for the data part of the
channel. Some settings are made directly in the input fields of the graphical display.
The "Channel Coding" settings for activating channel coding are available for UE1.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
248
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PCPCH Settings - UE
Power settings and power calculation
●
Calculating the power of the preamble
The correction value for the last AICH preamble before the message part and the
CD Preamble (indication in the AICH and CD Preamble block) are indicated in the
graphical display of the PCPCH structure. These two values are identical.
The power of the other preambles are calculated by subtracting the selected "Preamble Power Step".
●
Calculating the power of the message part
The power correction value of the message part is indicated in the message part
settings.
For one active UE, the RF power of the message part is calculated as:
Message Part Power = "RF Level" + Delta Power Message Part
For PCPCH, the parameter "Level Reference" is always "RMS Power".
Example: Calculating the power of the message part
●
"Level = 5 dBm"
●
"Delta Power Message Part = 5.58 dB"
The resulting Message Part Power = 5 + 5.58 = 10.58 dBm
4.37.1 Graphical Display
The graphical display shows either the complete PCPCH including the message part or
only the preamble depending on the selected mode.
PCPCH Standard
1. To access these settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink / Reverse >
User Equipments > UE 1".
2. Select "Mode > PCPCH Standard"
3. Select "PCPCH Structure".
See Figure 4-28
PCPCH Preamble-only
1. In the "General" tab, select "Mode > PCPCH Preamble Only"
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
249
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PCPCH Settings - UE
2. Select "PCPCH Structure".
Figure 4-29: PCPCH Structure in "Mode > PCPCH Preamble-only"
Some of the parameter values can be input directly in the input fields of the graphical display. The indicated structure length and the power correction values match
the real settings; the number of preambles, however, is shown as an example, to
explain the parameter function.
Use the power correction values to calculate the correct settings for the desired RF
level (see "Power settings and power calculation" on page 249).
Delta Power (Preamble)
Indication of the level correction value for the last AICH preamble before the message
part. This value is identical to the correction value for the CD preamble.
The level of the other preambles can be calculated by subtracting the set "Preamble
Power Step".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:DPOWer:
PREamble? on page 490
Delta Power (Message Part)
Indicates the level correction value for the message part, together with the power offsets of the data and control part.
See also Example "Calculating the power of the message part" on page 249.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:DPOWer:MPARt?
on page 489
Start Offset #
Enters the start offset of the PCPCH in access slots.
Note: The PCPCH only transmitted once, at the start of the sequence.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
250
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PCPCH Settings - UE
The starting time delay in time slots is calculated according to TS 25 211, Chapter 7.3
PCPCH/AICH timing relation and is 2*"Start Offset #".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:SOFFset
on page 490
Transmission Timing (Preamble)
Enters the time difference between two successive preambles in access slots.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:TIME:PREPre
on page 491
Transmission Timing (Message Part)
Enters the time difference between the last preamble and the message part in access
slots.
Two modes are defined in the standard. In mode AICH transmission timing 0, the preamble to message part difference is 3 access slots, in mode AICH transmission timing
1 it is 4 access slots.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:TIME:PREMp
on page 491
Structure Length
Indicates the structure length:
● In "PCPCH only - Preamble" mode, the structure length is defined as:
"Structure Length" = "Start Offset (Slots)" + "Preamble Repetition"*"Time Pre->Pre"
Example: Calculating the structure length in PCPCH Preamble Only mode
"Start Offset # = 2 access slots", i.e. = 4 slots
"Preamble Repetition = 2"
"Time Pre->Pre = 2 access slots", i.e. = 4 slots
"Structure Length" = 4 slots + 2 x 4 slots = 12 slots
●
In "PCPCH only - Standard" mode, the structure length is defined as:
"Structure Length" = "Start Offset (Slots)" + "Preamble Repetition"*"Time Pre->Pre"
+ "Time Pre->MP" + "Power Control Preamble Length" + 15*"Message Part Length
(Frames)"
In PCPCH mode the CD preamble has to be taken into account. Therefore, Preamble Repetition instead of (Preamble Repetition - 1) is used.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
251
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PCPCH Settings - UE
Example: Calculating the structure length in PCPCH Standard mode
"Start Offset = 2 access slots", i.e. 4 slots
"Preamble Repetition = 3"
"Time Pre - Pre = Time Pre - MP = 3 access slots", i.e. 6 slots
"Power Control Preamble Length = 8 slots"
"Message Part Length = 2 frames"
"Structure Length" = 4 slots + 3 x 6 slots + 6 slots + 8 + 15 x 2 = 66 slots
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:SPERiod?
on page 491
ARB Sequence Length
Indication of the ARB sequence length.
Note: A caution message is displayed, if the structure length is longer than the
selected ARB sequence length.
The change the ARB sequence length, use the parameter Sequence Length ARB.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SLENgth on page 354
Repeat Structure After ARB Sequence Length
Enables/disables repeating the selected PCPCH structure during one ARB sequence.
"On"
Within one ARB sequence, the selected PCPCH structure is repeated
once.
See Figure 4-25 for illustration of the principle.
"Off"
The selected PCPCH structure can be repeated several time,
depending on the structure length and the Repeat Structure After (x
Acc. Slots).
See Figure 4-26 for illustration of the principle.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:RARB on page 488
Repeat Structure After (x Acc. Slots)
If "Repeat Structure After ARB Sequence Length > Off", sets the number of access
slots after that the selected PCPCH structure will be repeated, see Figure 4-26.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:RAFTer on page 488
4.37.2 Preamble Settings
1. To access these settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink / Reverse >
User Equipments > UE 1".
2. Select "Mode > PCPCH Standard/PCPCH Preamble Only".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
252
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PCPCH Settings - UE
3. Select "Preamble".
The dialog comprises the parameters for configuring the PCPCH preamble.
Preamble Power
Sets the power of the preamble component of the PCPCH channel.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:PPOWer on page 487
Preamble Repetition
Sets the preamble count.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:PREPetition on page 487
Preamble Power Step
Sets the power by which the preamble is increased from repetition to repetition. The
power set under Preamble Power is the "target power", used during the last repetition
of the preamble.
Example:
"Preamble Power" = 0 dB
"Preamble Repetition" = 3
"Preamble Power Step" = 3 dB
Figure 4-30: Generated power sequence
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:PPOWer:STEP on page 487
Power Control Preamble Length
Sets the length of the power control preamble in slots.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
253
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PCPCH Settings - UE
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:PLENgth on page 486
Signature
Selects the signature to be used for the PCPCH channel. The signature defines the
code domain for the channelization code being used.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:SIGNature on page 489
4.37.3 Message Part Settings
1. To access these settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink / Reverse >
User Equipments > UE 1".
2. Select "Mode > PCPCH Standard".
3. Select "Message Part".
The tab comprises the settings for the data part of the PCPCH.
Data Power
Sets the power of the data component of the PCPCH channel.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
254
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PCPCH Settings - UE
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:DPOWer on page 485
Control Power
Sets the power of the control component of the PCPCH channel.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:CPOWer on page 483
Message Length
Sets the length of the message component of the PCPCH channel in frames.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:MLENgth on page 486
Slot Format
Selects the slot format of the control component of the PCPCH channel.
Slot formats 0 to 2 are available for the PCPCH channel. The slot format defines the
structure of the control component, the FBI mode.
When channel coding is active, the FBI mode and the slot format are prescribed.
"Slot format 0"
no FBI field
"Slot format 1"
1 FBI field
"Slot format 2"
2 FBI fields
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:CPSFormat on page 483
FBI Mode
Selects the FBI (Feed Back Information) mode.
The FBI mode is determined by the slot format set. A change in the FBI mode leads
automatically to an adjustment of the slot format.
"FBI Off"
The FBI field is not in use.
"FBI On 1 Bit"
The FBI field is used with a length of 1 bit.
"FBI On 2 Bits" The FBI field is used with a length of 2 bits.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:FBI:MODE on page 485
FBI Pattern
Enters the bit pattern for the FBI field in the control part (of the message part) of the
PCPCH.
The FBI field is filled cyclically with a pattern of up to 32 bits in length.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:FBI:PATTern on page 486
Symbol Rate
Sets the symbol rate of the PCPCH channel.
The symbol rate is determined by the slot format set. A change in the symbol rate
leads automatically to an adjustment of the slot format.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
255
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PCPCH Settings - UE
When channel coding is active, the symbol rate is prescribed.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:SRATe on page 489
Data Source
Selects the data source for the data component of the PCPCH channel.
The following standard data sources are available:
● "All 0, All 1"
An internally generated sequence containing 0 data or 1 data.
● "PNxx"
An internally generated pseudo-random noise sequence.
● "Pattern"
An internally generated sequence according to a bit pattern.
Use the "Pattern" box to define the bit pattern.
● "Data List/Select DList"
A binary data from a data list, internally or externally generated.
Select "Select DList" to access the standard "Select List" dialog.
– Select the "Select Data List > navigate to the list file *.dm_iqd > Select" to
select an existing data list.
– Use the "New" and "Edit" functions to create internally new data list or to edit
an existing one.
– Use the standard "File Manager" function to transfer external data lists to the
instrument.
See also:
● Section "Modulation Data" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "File and Data Management" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● Section "Data List Editor" in the R&S SMW user manual
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:DATA on page 484
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:DATA:PATTern on page 485
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:DATA:DSELect on page 484
TFCI
Enters the value of the TFCI field (Transport Format Combination Indicator) in the control component of the PCPCH channel.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TFCI on page 489
TPC Data Source
Defines the data source for the TPC field of the PCPCH channel.
The following standard data sources are available:
● "All 0, All 1"
An internally generated sequence containing 0 data or 1 data.
● "Pattern"
An internally generated sequence according to a bit pattern.
Use the "Pattern" box to define the bit pattern.
● "Data List/Select TPC Data List"
A binary data from a data list, internally or externally generated.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
256
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PCPCH Settings - UE
Select "Select DList" to access the standard "Select List" dialog.
– Select the "Select Data List > navigate to the list file *.dm_iqd > Select" to
select an existing data list.
– Use the "New" and "Edit" functions to create internally new data list or to edit
an existing one.
– Use the standard "File Manager" function to transfer external data lists to the
instrument.
See also:
● section "Modulation Data" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● section "File and Data Management" in the R&S SMW user manual.
● section "Data List Editor" in the R&S SMW user manual.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TPC:DATA on page 492
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TPC:DATA:DSELect
on page 492
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TPC:DATA:PATTern
on page 493
Read Out Mode
Defines the TPC data usage.
With 3GPP, the TPC bits are used to signal the increase or reduction in transmit power
to the called station. With all read out modes, one bit is taken from the data stream for
the TPC field for each slot and entered into the bit stream several times (depending on
the symbol rate). The difference between the modes lies in the usage of the TPC bits.
"Continuous"
The TPC bits are used cyclically.
"Single + All 0"
The TPC bits are used once, and then the TPC sequence is continued with 0 bits.
"Single + All 1"
The TPC bits are used once, and then the TPC sequence is continued with 1 bits.
"Single + alt. 01"
The TPC bits are used once and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 0 and 1 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on by the symbol
rate, for example, 00001111).
"Single + alt. 10"
The TPC bits are used once and then the TPC sequence is continued
with 1 and 0 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on by the symbol
rate, for example, 11110000).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TPC:READ on page 493
4.37.4 Channel Coding Settings
1. To access these settings, select "3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink / Reverse >
User Equipments > UE 1".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
257
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
PCPCH Settings - UE
2. Select "Mode > PCPCH Standard".
3. Select "Coding".
The tab comprises the parameters defining the coding type and activating the
PCPCH channel. The fixed settings for the channel coding parameters are displayed.
Channel Coding State
Activates or deactivates channel coding for the PCPCH channel.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:PCPCh:CCODing:STATe
on page 544
Channel Coding Type
Selects the predefined reference measurement channel coding types for the PCPCH
channel.
"CPCH RMC (TB size 168 bit)"
Reference Measurements Channel Coding with transport block size
of 168 bit.
"CPCH RMC (TB size 360 bit)"
Reference Measurements Channel Coding with transport block size
of 360 bit.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:PCPCh:CCODing:TYPE
on page 544
Show Coding
Calls the menu for displaying channel coding. The reference measurement channel
parameters are set to fixed values.
The following parameters are displayed:
"Data Source"
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
The data source is displayed in the transport channel graphical display.
258
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Filtering, Clipping, ARB Settings
"Transport Block Size"
Size of the transport block at the channel coding input.
"Transport Block"
Transport blocks count.
"Transport Time Interval"
Number of frames into which a TCH is divided.
"Size of CRC"
CRC type (length).
"Error Protection"
Error protection.
"Interleaver 1 / 2 State"
Channel coding interleaver state
Remote command:
n.a.
4.38 Filtering, Clipping, ARB Settings
► To access this dialog, select "3GPP FDD > General > Filter/Clipping/ARB Settings".
The dialog comprises the settings, necessary to configure the baseband filter, to
enable clipping and adjust the sequence length of the arbitrary waveform component.
4.38.1 Filter Settings
Provided are the follwoing settings for configuring the baseband filter:
Filter
Selects the baseband filter.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
259
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Filtering, Clipping, ARB Settings
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:TYPE on page 362
Roll Off Factor or BxT
Sets the filter parameter.
The filter parameter offered ("Roll Off Factor" or "BxT") depends on the currently
selected filter type. This parameter is preset to the default for each of the predefined
filters.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:APCO25 on page 360
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:COSine on page 360
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:GAUSs on page 361
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:RCOSine on page 361
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:SPHase on page 362
Cut Off Frequency Factor
Sets the value for the cut off frequency factor. The cut off frequency of the filter can be
adjusted to reach spectrum mask requirements.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:LPASs on page 361
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:LPASSEVM on page 361
Chip Rate Variation
Enters the chip rate. The default settings for the chip rate is 3.84 Mcps.
The chip rate entry changes the output clock and the modulation bandwidth, as well as
the synchronization signals that are output. It does not affect the calculated chip
sequence.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
260
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Filtering, Clipping, ARB Settings
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CRATe:VARiation on page 360
4.38.2 Clipping Settings
Provided are the follwoing settings:
Clipping State
Switches baseband clipping on and off.
Baseband clipping is a very simple and effective way of reducing the crest factor of the
WCDMA signal.
WCDMA signals may have very high crest factors particularly with many channels and
unfavorable timing offsets. High crest factors entail two basic problems:
● The nonlinearity of the power amplifier (compression) causes intermodulation
which expands the spectrum (spectral regrowth).
● Since the level in the D/A converter is relative to the maximum value, the average
value is converted with a relatively low resolution. This results in a high quantization noise.
Both effects increase the adjacent-channel power.
With baseband clipping, all the levels are limited to a settable value ("Clipping Level").
This level is specified as a percentage of the highest peak value. Since clipping is done
prior to filtering, the procedure does not influence the spectrum. The EVM however
increases.
Since clipping the signal not only changes the peak value but also the average value,
the effect on the crest factor is unpredictable. The following example shows the effect
of the "Clipping" on the crest factor for typical scenarios.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
261
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Filtering, Clipping, ARB Settings
Example: Clipping effect on the crest factor
The Table 4-12 shows changing the crest factor by clipping (vector mode |I+q|) for signal configurations with different output crest factors.
100% clipping levels mean that clipping does not take place.
Table 4-12: Crest factor values as function of the vector clipping
Clipping level
Downlink: 10
DPCHs "Minimum
Crest" 30 ksps
Downlink: 10
DPCHs "Worst
Crest" 30 ksps
Downlink: 10
DPCHs "Average
Crest" 30 ksps
Downlink: 128
DPCHs "Average
Crest" 30 ksps
100%
9.89 dB
14.7 dB
10.9 dB
21.7 dB
80%
8.86 dB
12.9 dB
9.39 dB
20.2 dB
50%
7.50 dB
10.1 dB
8.29 dB
16.9 dB
20%
5.50 dB
6.47 dB
6.23 dB
12.5 dB
10%
5.34 dB
6.06 dB
5.80 dB
9.57 dB
5%
5.34 dB
6.06 dB
5.80 dB
8.17 dB
The pictures in the following table demonstrate the effect of clipping with vector mode
(|I+q|), using a signal configuration with 4 DPCH as an example.
The arrows and the circle in the upper illustration show how the levels are mapped during subsequent clipping in vector mode (|I+q|).
Constellation diagram of the signal without clipping, shows the level mapping for vector mode
Constellation diagram with clipping level 50 %,
vector mode (|I+q|)
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLIPping:STATe on page 359
Clipping Level
Sets the limit for clipping.
This value indicates at what point the signal is clipped. It is specified as a percentage,
relative to the highest level. 100% indicates that clipping does not take place.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
262
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
3GPP FDD Configuration and Settings
Filtering, Clipping, ARB Settings
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLIPping:LEVel on page 358
Clipping Mode
Selects the clipping method. A graphic illustration of the way in which these two methods work is given in the dialog.
●
●
"Vector | i + jq |"
The limit is related to the amplitude | i + q |. The I and Q components are mapped
together, the angle is retained.
"Scalar | i | , | q |"
The limit is related to the absolute maximum of all the I and Q values | i | + | q |.
The I and Q components are mapped separately, the angle changes.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLIPping:MODE on page 359
4.38.3 ARB Settings
Provided are the follwoing settings:
Sequence Length ARB
Changes the sequence length of the arbitrary waveform component of the signal. This
component is calculated in advance and output in the arbitrary waveform generator. It
is added to the realtime signal components.
The maximum number of frames is calculated as follows:
Max. No. of Frames = Arbitrary waveform memory size/(3.84 Mcps x 10 ms).
Tip: In pure amplifier tests with several channels and no enhanced channels, it is possible to improve the statistical properties of the signal by increasing the sequence
length.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SLENgth on page 354
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
263
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
How to Work with the 3GPP FDD Option
Resolving Domain Conflicts
5 How to Work with the 3GPP FDD Option
The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to perform some signal generation tasks with the 3GPP FDD option.
5.1 Resolving Domain Conflicts
To resolve code domain conflicts
1. A downlink domain conflict can be recognized by one of the following methods:
a) Select "3GPP FDD > Basestation > Channel Table"
A warning symbol in the tab name indicates a domain conflict.
In the channel table, a code domain conflict with an overlying channel (with a
lower index) is indicated in column "Dom Conf" on the far right of the table by a
conflict symbol and an orange-colored column.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
264
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
How to Work with the 3GPP FDD Option
Resolving Domain Conflicts
b) Select "3GPP FDD > Basestation > Code Domain"
A code domain conflict is indicated by overlapping bars.
2. The instrument helps you to resolve code domain conflicts by automatically adapting the channelization code of the channels involved.
To access the required function, in the "3GPP FDD > Basestation > Channel
Table" select the conflict symbol and trigger "Resolve Domain Conflicts".
Note: The HSUPA control channels E-RGCH and E-HICH may use the same
channelization code as long as they use different signature sequence hopping
index that identifies the user equipment. The F-DPCH channels may also use the
same channelization code as long as they use a different timing offset (TOffs) or
slot format.
The code domain conflict is resolved by changing the channelization codes of the
affected channels.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
265
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
How to Work with the 3GPP FDD Option
Using the DL-UL Timing Offset Settings
The graphs immediately display the change
5.2 Using the DL-UL Timing Offset Settings
To generate a continuos uplink signal composed of multiple separately generated uplink frames
1. Adjust the uplink settings as required and set "User Equipment > UE > DPCCH >
DL-UL Timing Offset = 0 Chips".
2. Enable generation of the 3GPP FDD signal, i.e "3GPP FDD > State > On"
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
266
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
How to Work with the 3GPP FDD Option
Configuring UL-DTX Transmission and Visualizing the Scheduling
3. Use the Generate Waveform function to save the current signal as an ARB signal
in a waveform file.
4. Re-configure the uplink settings and save the signal as an ARB file.
5. Use the "Baseband > ARB > Multi Segment" function to assemble a common signal from the several uplink signals.
6. If required, re-adjust the "Marker" settings. A sequence list can be additionally
applied to configure the order the waveforms are processed and how many times
each of them is repeated.
5.3 Configuring UL-DTX Transmission and Visualizing
the Scheduling
To configure the instrument to generate an UL DPCCH DTX signal
1. Enable "Baseband > 3GPP FDD > Transmission Direction > Uplink".
2. Select "User Equipment > UE1 > UL-DTX", enable "Mode > UL-DTX" and configure the following settings:
Table 5-1: UL-DTX Settings
Parameter
Value
E-DCH TTI
2 ms
UL-DTX Offset
2 Subframes
Inactivity Threshold for Cycle 2
8 TTIs
Long Preamble Length
4 Slots
DTX Cycle 1 / DTX Cycle 2
4 Subframes and 8 Subframes respectively
DPCCH Burst Length 1 / DPCCH Burst Length 2
1 Subframes (3 Slots)
UL-DTX... / User Scheduling State
On
The figure below shows the generated UL DPCCH DTX bursts pattern.
3. Use the Scheduling List to display the configured bust pattern.
Figure 5-1: Example for UL DPCCH DTX burst pattern as generated by the R&S SMW (E-DCH
TTI=2ms, beginning at CFN0, UE_DTX_DRX_Offset=2, DTX Cycle 2=8 subframes)
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
267
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
How to Work with the 3GPP FDD Option
Configuring UL-DTX Transmission and Visualizing the Scheduling
Note: In this implementation the signal generation starts with UE-DTX cycle 2. The
UL DPCCH DTX burst pattern is offset with 2 subframes, the burst are 6 slots long
(2 slots Preamble + 3 slots DPCCH Burst Length 2 + 1 slot postamble) and are
generated every 8 subframe.
4. Select "User Equipment > UE1 > E-DCH Scheduling Settings" and configure the
settings as follow:
Table 5-2: E-DCH Scheduling Settings
Parameter
Value
Number of Table Rows
1
E-DCH Schedule Repeats After
24 TTIs
E-DCH TTI From
10
E-DCH TTI To
10
5. Select "UE1 > E-DPDCH Settings > State > On" to enable the generation of EDPDCH.
The "UE1 > Scheduling List" shows the updated UL DPCCH DTX bursts pattern
(see also figure below).
Figure 5-2: Example for UL DPCCH DTX burst pattern in case of E-DCH transmission
1 = Cycle 2 to Cycle 1 switch after E-DCH transmission
2 = Cycle 1 to Cycle 2 switch when the inactivity timer expires
*) = In the R&S Signal Generator, the signal generation starts with UE-DTX cycle 2.
6. Configure the "UE1 > HS-DPCCH Settings" as follow:
Table 5-3: HS-DPCCH Settings
Parameter
Value
Compatibility Mode (HS-DPCCH)
Release 8 and Later RT
Inter TTI Distance (Interval)
1 subframe
Number of Rows
1
HARQ-ACK Repeat After
40 intervals
HARQ-ACK From Interval/ HARQ-ACK To Interval
20 / 20
HS-DPCCH 1/2, HARQ-ACK 1/2/3/4
A
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
268
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
How to Work with the 3GPP FDD Option
Configuring and Visualizing the Uplink User Scheduling
Parameter
Value
Number of Rows
1
PCI/CQI Repeat After
40 intervals
PCI-CQI From Interval/ PCI-CQI To Interval
2 /2
HS-DPCCH 1/2, PCI/CQI 1/2/3/4 Type
CQI
CQI/CQIS/CQI1/CQI2
5
7. Select "UE1 > HS-DPCCH Settings > State > On" to enable the transmission of
control signaling.
The figure below shows the generated UL DPCCH DTX bursts pattern.
Figure 5-3: Example for UL DPCCH DTX burst pattern in case of E-DCH and HS-DPCCH transmissions
A = DPCCH burst caused by the transmission of a CQI report
B = DPCCH burst caused by the transmission of a HARQ-ACK message
Although there is an HS-DPCCH transmission, the UE does not switch from UEDTX cycle 2 to UE-DTX cycle 1.
5.4 Configuring and Visualizing the Uplink User Scheduling
To configure an uplink user scheduling
Consider the exemplary scheduling file. The file content is suitable as a basis for further customization.
1. Enable "Baseband > 3GPP FDD > Transmission Direction > Uplink".
2. Select "User Equipment > UE1" and enable the channels DPDCH and E-DCH;
enable "Dynamic Power Control".
3. Select "User Equipment > UE1 > UL-DTX/User Scheduling", enable "Mode > User
Scheduling".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
269
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
How to Work with the 3GPP FDD Option
Configuring and Visualizing the Uplink User Scheduling
4. Use the example scheduling file to generate an user scheduling according to your
testing needs.
5. Open the "UE1 > Scheduling List" to visualize the configured transmission.
Figure 5-4: Example: Scheduling List display of the User Scheduling configuration
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<SMxScheduling>
<head type="3GPP FDD" subtype="Uplink User Scheduling" version="1" />
<command slot="0" action="DPCCH_OFF" />
<command slot="0" action="DPDCH_OFF" />
<command slot="0" action="EDCH_OFF" />
<command slot="0" action="DYNPC_OFF" />
<command slot="15" action="DPCCH_ON" />
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
270
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
How to Work with the 3GPP FDD Option
How to Configure the HS-DPCCH Settings for 4C-HSDPA Tests
<command slot="15" action="EDCH_ON" />
<command slot="15" action="EDCH_TTIS" ttis="2" />
<command slot="15" action="EDCH_ETFCI" etfci="5" />
<command slot="15" action="DPCCH_OFF" />
<command slot="15" action="EDCH_OFF" />
<command slot="45" action="DYNPC_ON" />
<command slot="45" action="DPCCH_ON" />
<command slot="45" action="DPDCH_ON" />
<command slot="45" action="EDCH_ON" />
<command slot="45" action="EDCH_TTIS" ttis="10" />
<command slot="45" action="EDCH_ETFCI" etfci="20" />
<command slot="60" action="DPCCH_OFF" />
<command slot="60" action="DPDCH_OFF" />
<command slot="60" action="EDCH_OFF" />
<command slot="60" action="DYNPC_OFF" />
<command slot="150" action="REPEAT" />
</SMxScheduling>
Interpretation of the scheduling
●
The instrument will transmit the following channels:
–
DPCCH and E-DCH during the second frame (frame # 1, from slot # 15 to slot
# 29), where a TTI size of 2 ms and an E-TFCI of 5 is used for the E-DCH
–
DPCCH, DPDCH and E-DCH during the fourth frame (frame # 3, from slot # 45
to slot # 59), where a TTI size of 10 ms and an E-TFCI of 20 is used for the EDCH.
●
External dynamic power control commands are considered during the second
transmission block of the example. The instrument ignores any power control commands during the first transmission block and during all prior signal gaps, between
and after the two transmission blocks.
●
The scheduling is looped at slot 150, i.e a transmission of DPCCH and E-DCH
starts from slot 165 on, a (power controlled) transmission of DPCCH/DPDCH/EDCH starts from slot 195 on, etc.
The displayed information in the "Scheduling List" confirms the expected scheduling of
the channels as well as the changes in the E-DCH E-TFCI and TTI size. Refer to
Chapter 4.27, "Scheduling List", on page 172 for detailed explanation on how to understand the displayed information.
5.5 How to Configure the HS-DPCCH Settings for 4CHSDPA Tests
The following is an example on how to use the provided settings to configure the
instrument to send ACK only messages, as required in the ACK mis-detection test for
4C-HSDPA, according to 3GPP TS 25.141, section 8.11A.3 and 8.11A.4.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
271
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
How to Work with the 3GPP FDD Option
How to Configure the HS-DPCCH Settings for 4C-HSDPA Tests
The example is based on the test configuration specified in 3GPP TS 25.141, Annex A.
9A.
Table 5-4: Required test configurations (excerpt)
Test Configuration
4/4/4
4/2/2
3/3/3
3/2/1
3/3/0
HS-DPCCH Spreading Factor
128
128
128
128
256
Secondary Cell
Enabled
3
3
2
2
2
Secondary Cell Active
3
1
2
1
2
Number of MIMO carriers
4
2
3
1
0
To configure the 4C-HSDPA HS-DPCCH Reference Measurement Channel
The example lists only the related setting and is based on Test Configuration = 3/3/3,
see Table 5-4.
1. Enable "Baseband > 3GPP FDD > Link Direction > Uplink".
2. Select "User Equipment > UE1" and enable the "HS-DPCCH > State > On".
3. Select "HS-DPCCH > MIMO Mode > On".
4. Select "HS-DPCCH > Secondary Cell Enabled > 2".
5. Select "HS-DPCCH > Secondary Cell Active > 2".
6. Use the default values "HS-DPCCH > HARQ-ACK Scheduling > Number of Rows
> 1" and "HS-DPCCH > HARQ-ACK Scheduling > HARQ-ACK Repeat After > 1".
7. Select "HS-DPCCH > HARQ-ACK Scheduling > HS-DPCCH 1 HARQ-ACK 1 > AA/
AA".
8. Select "HS-DPCCH > HARQ-ACK Scheduling > HS-DPCCH 1 HARQ-ACK 2 >
AA/D".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
272
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Application Sheets
Uplink Dual Cell HSDPA Test Signal Generation
6 Application Sheets
Application sheets describe short application examples for selected issues and provide
related background information.
6.1 Uplink Dual Cell HSDPA Test Signal Generation
The R&S SMW supports the generation of feedback messages for HSDPA data
acknowledgment and channel quality indication as defined in the 3GPP TS 25.212
release 8 and release 9.
This application sheet describes how to configure the R&S SMW to generate an uplink
test signal for basic tests on Dual Cell HSDPA (DC-HSDPA) operation.
6.1.1 Options and Equipment Required
The following equipment is required:
●
Vector Signal Generator R&S SMW, equipped with:
–
Latest firmware version recommended
–
one of the baseband options, e.g. R&S SMW-B10
–
one of the frequency options, e.g. R&S SMW-B103
●
Option R&S SMW-K42, "Digital Standard 3GPP FDD"
●
Option R&S SMW-K83, "3GPP FDD enhanced incl. MS/BS tests, HSPA, HSPA+"
6.1.2 Test Setup
Figure 6-1: Test Setup
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
273
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Application Sheets
Uplink Dual Cell HSDPA Test Signal Generation
6.1.3 Generating an uplink DC-HSDPA Test Signal (Non MIMO Mode)
To generate an uplink test signal corresponding to the signal of a UE configured to
work in DC-HSDPA non MIMO mode, configure the uplink HS-DPCCH as follows:
1. Preset the R&S SMW to ensure a defined instrument state.
2. Open the 3GPP FDD dialog (e.g. "Baseband Block > 3GPP FDD") and select "Link
Direction > Uplink".
3. In the "3GPP FDD" dialog, select "User Equipment > UE1".
4. Set the "Scrambling Code" as required.
5. In the "User Equipment" dialog, select the "HS-DPCCH" tab and perform the following:
a) Ensure that the "Compatibility Mode" is set to "Release 8 and Later".
b) Select the "Secondary Cell Enabled = 1" and "Secondary Cell Active = 1" to
configure dual cell HSDPA mode for the selected UE.
c) Configure the HS-DPCCH structure with the parameters "Inter TTI Distance"
and "Number of HARQ-ACK or PCI/CQI Rows", as well as by configuring the
HARQ-ACK and CQI/PCI information per interval by means of the parameters
in the table.
d) Set the parameter "HS-DPCCH 1 HARQ-ACK 1" as required to adjust the information transmitted during the HARQ-ACK slot of the corresponding TTI.
For example, an A/N feedback means that an ACK is sent to the serving cell
and a NACK to the secondary serving cell.
e) To include composite CQI messages in the signal as specified in 3GPP TS
25.212:
●
●
Select "HS-DPCCH 1 PCI/CQI Type > Composite CQI"
Select "PCI/CQI 1 Content > Config" and adjust the values of the parameters "CQI1" and "CQI2"
f) Adjust the power settings as required.
g) Execute "Adjust ARB Sequence Length".
h) Set the "HS-DPCCH > State > On" and close the dialog.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
274
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Application Sheets
Uplink Dual Cell HSDPA Test Signal Generation
6. In the "3GPP FDD" dialog, select "Trigger" and adjust the settings as required.
For example, to synchronize the R&S SMW to the frame timing of the DUT:
a) feed the frame marker signal of the DUT (if available) to the "USER 3" connector of the instrument
b) enable "Trigger > Mode > Armed Auto"
c) select "Trigger > Source > External Global Trigger 1"
d) select "Trigger > Global Trigger Settings" and confirm that the global connector
"USER3" is configured for "Direction > Input" and "Signal > Global Trigger 1".
7. In the "3GPP FDD" dialog, set the "State > On" to enable the generation of the
3GPP FDD uplink (UL) signal.
8. In the "RF > RF Frequency > Reference Frequency" dialog, adjust the settings as
required.
For example, if a common reference signal is used or if the DUT provides the reference frequency, connect the reference signal source to the R&S SMW, select
"Source External" and adjust the "External Reference Frequency".
9. Press the FREQ key and select the desired RF frequency, e.g. 1950 MHz.
10. Adjust the output signal level as required and press the RF ON/OFF key to activate
the RF output.
6.1.4 Generating an Uplink Test Signal for Simultaneous Dual Cell and
MIMO Operation
► Perform the steps described above and enable the parameter "3GPP FDD > UE1 >
HS-DPCCH Settings > MIMO Mode".
You are enabled to configure the HARQ-ACK feedback messages for up to four
simultaneously transmitted downlink transport blocks.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
275
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Application Sheets
Uplink Dual Cell HSDPA Test Signal Generation
For background information about the dual cell operation and processing of HARQACK feedback messages, refer to Chapter 3.1.16, "Dual Cell HSDPA (DC-HSDPA)",
on page 42.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
276
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Introduction
7 Performing Base Stations Tests According
to TS 25.141
This section describes the "Test Case Wizard", provided for tests on Base Stations in
Conformance with the 3G Standard 3GPP FDD.
7.1 Introduction
The Test Case Wizard supports tests on base stations in conformance with the 3G
Standard 3GPP-FDD. It offers a selection of predefined settings according to Test
Cases in TS 25.141.
The basic equipment layout for the test is the same as for the 3GPP FDD signal generation. It includes the options Baseband Main Module (B13), Baseband Generator (B10/
B11) and Digital Standard 3GPP FDD (K42). However, some of the tests require further options. An overview of the available test cases is given is in "Test Case"
on page 281.
The Test Case Wizard has effect on frequency and level settings, link direction, trigger,
baseband clock source, marker settings and base station or user equipment configuration. Besides the 3GPP required settings also interfering signals (AWGN, CW interferer, co-located modulation signals) or fading profiles are set.
The degree of freedom in setting the parameters can be determined. The "According to
Standard" edit mode allows only settings in compliance with TS 25.141. The "User
Definable" edit mode allows a wider range of settings.
1. To access the dialog for setting the 3GPP FDD digital standard, select "Baseband
> 3GPP FDD".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
277
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Introduction
2. Select "General > Test Case Wizard"
This dialog comprises the settings necessary to select and configure a test case.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
278
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Introduction
The "Test Wizard" dialog is divided into several sections:
●
At the top of the panel, the test case is selected. In the "General Settings" section
the edit mode and the general signal generator parameters are set.
●
The base station parameters are input in the "Basestation Configuration" section.
●
The graph in the right upper section symbolizes the interference scenario defined
by power level and frequency offset.
●
The middle section depends on the selected test case. It displays the input/output
parameters of the wanted and the interfering signals and further configuration
entries besides the default settings.
●
Button "Apply Settings" activates the preset settings for the selected test case. Further modification of the generator settings is still possible. Signal generation starts
with the first trigger event.
General workflow for creating complex test scenarios
With the "Test Case Wizard", you can create highly complex test scenarios with just a
few keystrokes, see the following example:
1. Preset the signal generator
2. Open the "Baseband > 3GPP FDD > Test Case Wizard" dialog
3. Select one of the provided test cases
4. Enter the specific settings for the selected test case , e.g. frequency, level, …
5. Execute "Apply Settings" to activate the selected configuration
6. Enable the RF output and further refine the generator settings if required
7. Start signal generation by a trigger from the base station at connector USER3
(default configuration).
7.1.1 General Considerations
Test Frequencies
For 3GPP-FDD, several paired frequency bands are used. The following table shows
start and stop frequencies of both uplink (UE transmit, node B receive) and downlink
(node B transmit, UE receive) frequency bands according to 3GPP.
Operating band
Uplink frequencies UE transmit, Downlink frequencies UE
node B receive
receive, node B transmit
I
1920 MHz to 1980 MHz
2110 MHz to 2170 MHz
II
1850 MHz to 1910 MHz
1930 MHz to 1990 MHz
III
1710 MHz to 1785 MHz
1805 MHz to 1880 MHz
IV
1710 MHz to 1755 MHz
2110 MHz to 2155 MHz
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
279
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Introduction
Operating band
Uplink frequencies UE transmit, Downlink frequencies UE
node B receive
receive, node B transmit
V
824 MHz to 849MHz
869 MHz to 894MHz
VI
830 MHz to 840 MHz
875 MHz to 885 MHz
The measurements that have to be performed according to 3GPP in order to verify
proper operation of FDD systems apply to appropriate frequencies in the bottom, middle and top of the operating frequency band of the base station (BS). These frequencies are denoted as RF channels B (bottom), M (middle) and T (top).
Reference Frequency
When building up the measurement setups according to TS 25.141 it might be useful
that all the instruments share a common reference clock. However, after "Preset" the
signal generator uses its internal clock reference. In order to feed in the clock of an
external clock the RF module configuration should be switched to external reference
frequency.
In the external reference mode an external signal with selectable frequency and
defined level must be input at the REF IN connector . This signal is output at the REF
OUT connector. The reference frequency setting is effective for both paths. For very
good reference sources of high spectral purity a wideband setting is provided.
Trigger Signal
For test cases with channel coded signal, e.g. an activated RMC, the base station that
triggers the signal generation must emit an 'SFN (System Frame Number) mod 4' periodic trigger. A simple SFN periodic trigger probably will disturb the channel coding
scheme.
Baseband Clock
The clock source is automatically switched to internal when the test case settings are
activated.
Improvement of signal quality
Improvement of signal quality is possible via several settings:
●
Use the "I/Q Mod > I/Q Modulator > Internal Baseband > Baseband Gain > 2dB"
parameter to select a improved ACLR performance.
●
In the "Automatic Level Control Settings" menu the RF output level can be recalibrated with "Search Once" in "Sample&Hold" mode. This is recommended if in CW
mode the signal/intermodulation ratio is to be improved for multi-transmitter measurements. With setting "Auto", the level control is automatically adapted to the
operating conditions, it may cause increased intermodulations, however.
●
In the "User Correction" menu a list of correction values can be created and subsequently activated. Thus, the frequency response of the test setup can be taken into
account .
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
280
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Introduction
●
In order to compensate cable loss and additionally inserted attenuators, the RF
level can directly be adjusted in the "Level" input field.
7.1.2 General Settings
In the General Settings section the edit mode and the general signal generator parameters are set.
Test Case
Selects the test case.
The following table gives an overview of the available test cases, the type of signal
transmitted by the signal generator and the required additional options besides the
basic configuration. An equipment layout as required for 3GPP FDD signal generation
for one-path instruments is assumed to be the basic configuration.
Table 7-1: Transmitter Tests
TS 25.141 chapter
Test case
Generator Signal
Additional options
6.4.2
Power control steps:
Output power dynamics
Uplink
-
6.6
Transmit intermodulation
Interferer (downlink)
-
TS 24.141 chapter
Test case
Generator Signal
Additional signal generator options
7.2
Reference sensitivity
level
Uplink
-
7.3
Dynamic range
Uplink,
R&S SMW-K62
Table 7-2: Receiver Tests
AWGN
7.4
Adjacent Channel Selectivity (ACS)
Uplink,
R&S SMW-B20x
Interferer
R&S SMW-B13T
2xR&S SMW-B10
2xR&S SMW-K42
7.5
Blocking characteristics
Uplink,
R&S SMW-B20x
Interferer
R&S SMW-B13T
2xR&S SMW-B10
2xR&S SMW-K42
7.6
Intermodulation characteristics
Uplink,
R&S SMW-B20x
2 x Interferer
R&S SMW-B13T
2xR&S SMW-B10
2xR&S SMW-K42
R&S SMW-K62
7.8
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
Verification of the internal BER calculation
Uplink
-
281
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Introduction
TS 24.141 chapter
Test case
Generator Signal
Additional signal generator options
8.2.1
Performance requirement -
Uplink,
R&S SMW-B20x
AWGN
R&S SMW-B13T
Demodulation in static
propagation conditions:
2xR&S SMW-K62
Demodulation of DCH
8.3.1
Performance requirement -
Uplink,
R&S SMW-B20x
AWGN
R&S SMW-B13T
Demodulation of DCH in
multipath fading conditions:
Fading
2xR&S SMW-K62
R&S SMW-B14/K71
Multipath fading case 1
8.3.2
Performance requirement -
Uplink,
R&S SMW-B20x
AWGN
R&S SMW-B13T
Demodulation of DCH in
multipath fading conditions:
Fading
2xR&S SMW-K62
R&S SMW-B14/K71
Multipath fading case 2
8.3.3
Performance requirement -
Uplink
R&S SMW-B20x
AWGN
R&S SMW-B13T
Demodulation of DCH in
multipath fading conditions:
Fading
2xR&S SMW-K62
R&S SMW-B14/K71
Multipath fading case 3
8.3.4
Performance requirement -
Uplink
R&S SMW-B20x
AWGN
R&S SMW-B13T
Demodulation of DCH in
multipath fading conditions:
Fading
2xR&S SMW-K62
R&S SMW-B14/K71
Multipath fading case 4
8.4
Demodulation of DCH in
moving propagation conditions
Uplink
R&S SMW-B20x
AWGN
R&S SMW-B13T
Fading
2xR&S SMW-K62
R&S SMW-B14/K71
8.5
Demodulation of DCH in
birth/death propagation
conditions
Uplink
R&S SMW-B20x
AWGN
R&S SMW-B13T
Fading
2xR&S SMW-K62
R&S SMW-B14/K71
8.6
8.8.1
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
Verification of the internal BLER calculation
Uplink
R&S SMW-B20x
RACH performance:
Uplink
R&S SMW-B20x
RACH preamble detection in static propagation
conditions
AWGN
R&S SMW-B13T
R&S SMW-B13T
2xR&S SMW-K62
282
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Introduction
TS 24.141 chapter
Test case
Generator Signal
Additional signal generator options
8.8.2
RACH performance:
Uplink
R&S SMW-B20x
RACH preamble detection in multipath fading
case 3
AWGN
R&S SMW-B13T
Fading
2xR&S SMW-K62
RACH performance:
Uplink
R&S SMW-B20x
Demodulation of RACH
message in static propagation conditions
AWGN
R&S SMW-B13T
RACH performance:
Uplink
B20x, RF path B
Demodulation of RACH
message in multipath
fading case 3
AWGN
R&S SMW-B20x
Fading
R&S SMW-B13T
8.8.3
8.8.4
R&S SMW-B14/K71
2xR&S SMW-K62
2xR&S SMW-K62
R&S SMW-B14/K71
8.9.1
8.9.2
8.9.3
8.9.4
CPCH performance:
Uplink
R&S SMW-B20x
CPCH access preamble
and collision detection,
preamble detection in
static propagation conditions
AWGN
R&S SMW-B13T
CPCH performance:
Uplink
R&S SMW-B20x
CPCH access preamble
and collision detection,
preamble detection in
multipath fading case 3
AWGN
R&S SMW-B13T
Fading
2xR&S SMW-K62
CPCH performance:
Uplink
R&S SMW-B20x
Demodulation of CPCH
message in static propagation conditions
AWGN
R&S SMW-B13T
CPCH performance:
Uplink
R&S SMW-B20x
Demodulation of CPCH
message in multipath
fading case 3
AWGN
R&S SMW-B13T
Fading
2xR&S SMW-K62
2xR&S SMW-K62
R&S SMW-B14/K71
2xR&S SMW-K62
R&S SMW-B14/K71
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:TCASe on page 557
Edit Mode
Selects the edit mode.
"According to Standard"
Only settings in compliance with TS 25.141 are possible in the wizard
panel.
"User Definable"
A wider range of settings is possible in the wizard panel.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
283
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Introduction
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:EMODe on page 550
Trigger Configuration
Selects the trigger configuration. The trigger is used to synchronize the signal generator to the other equipment.
"Auto"
The trigger settings are customized for the selected test case. In most
cases trigger setting "Armed Auto" with external trigger source "External Trigger 1" is used. Unless otherwise noted the trigger delay is set
equal to zero. Thus, the base station frame timing is able to synchronize the signal generator by a SFN (System Frame Number)
periodic trigger. If the signal generator offers a channel coded signal
(as all the Reference Measurements Channels require) the base station must emit a 'SFN mod 4' periodic trigger.
"Unchanged"
The current trigger settings of the signal generator are retained
unchanged.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:TRIGger on page 558
Marker Configuration
Selects the marker configuration. The marker can be used to synchronize the measuring equipment to the signal generator.
"Auto"
The marker settings are customized for the selected test case. In
most cases "Radio Frame" markers are output. Unless otherwise
noted the marker delays are set equal to zero.
"Unchanged"
The current marker settings of the signal generator are retained
unchanged.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:TRIGger:OUTPut on page 558
Diversity
Selects the signal routing according to the base station's diversity processing capability.
"ON"
The test signal is routed to both RF outputs.
"Off"
The test signal is routed to the selected RF output.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:RXDiversity on page 556
Baseband A Signal Routing
Selects the signal routing for baseband A signal which in most test cases represents
the wanted signal (exception test case 6.6).
"A"
The baseband signal A is routed to RF output A.
"B"
The baseband signal A is routed to RF output B.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
284
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Introduction
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:ROUTe on page 556
7.1.3 Basestation Configuration
The base station parameters are input in the "Basestation Configuration" section.
Scrambling Code (hex)
Enters the scrambling code.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:SCODe on page 557
Scrambling Mode
Sets the type of scrambling code.
With scrambling code, a distinction is made between "Long" and "Short Scrambling
Code" for uplink signals. For downlink signals (test case 6.6) the scrambling code generator can be switched on and off.
"On "
(downlink only)
Enables scrambling code generator.
"Off"
Disables scrambling code generator for test purposes.
"Long Scrambling Code"
(uplink only)
Sets the long scrambling code.
"Short Scrambling Code"
(uplink only)
Sets short scrambling code.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:SCODe:MODE on page 557
Power Class
Enters the base station power class. The selected power class determines the output
level of the signal generator. The output level is indicated in the "Wanted Signal" section of the Wizard panel.
For edit mode "User Definable", the output level can be set in the "Wanted Signal" section of the Wizard panel.
"Wide Area BS"
Enables power class wider area BS
"Medium Range BS"
Enables power class medium range BS
"Local Area BS"
Enables power class local area BS
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
285
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:BSPClass on page 549
7.1.4 Apply
Apply Settings
Activates the current settings of the test case wizard.
Initialization of the signal generator with the test case settings is performed by a partial
reset that includes only the baseband, fading and AWGN module and the RF frequency and RF level settings. Other settings of the signal generator are not altered.
Before triggering the signal generator the user still can change these other settings.
This is particularly useful when compensating for cable loss and additionally inserted
attenuators by adjusting the RF power levels is required.
Signal generation is started at the first trigger received by the generator. The RF output
is not activated /deactivated by the test case wizard, so care has to be taken that RF
State is On at the beginning of the measurement.
Note: For safety reasons the RF is not active unless the button RF ON has been
pressed.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:TCASe:EXECute on page 558
7.2 Receiver Tests
7.2.1 Overview
7.2.1.1
Basic Configuration
The test cases for receiver tests require at least the following equipment layout for the
signal generator:
●
Digital Standard 3GPP FDD (R&S SMW-K42)
●
Arbitrary Waveform Generator (R&S SMW-B10),
●
Baseband Main module (R&S SMW-B13),
●
Frequency option (R&S SMW-B10x).
If the test case requires further options they are listed together with the description of
the test case.
Receiver test can be performed with the signal generator only, i.e. without additional
measuring equipment.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
286
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
7.2.1.2
Test Setups - Receiver Tests
The tests can be performed using the standard test setup according to TS 25.141. Test
setups beside the two standard test setups described below are specified at the Test
Case description.
Standard Test Setup - One Path
In case of two-path instruments, signal routing to path A is assumed. RF port A outputs
the wanted signal (with or without fading and/or interference) and is connected to the
Rx port of the base station. The signal generator will start signal generation at the first
received BS frame trigger.
Figure 7-1: Standard Test Setup (One Path)
For two-path instruments it is also possible to route baseband signal A to RF output B
and connect RF output B to the Rx port of the base station.
Standard Test Setup - Two Paths
For two-paths measurements, the test cases always require option second RF path, a
option Baseband Main Module (R&S SMW-B13T) and at least one option to generate
the interfering signal in addition to the basic configuration. The signal routing can be
selected, the wanted signal can be provided either at output RF A or at output RF B.
The signal generator outputs the reference measurement channel signal (= wanted signal) at output RF A and the interfering signal(s) at output RF B. After combining the
two(three) signals the sum signal is fed into the base station Rx port. The signal generator will start signal generation at the first received BS frame trigger.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
287
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Figure 7-2: Standard Test Setup (Two Paths)
Standard Test Setup - Diversity Measurements
For diversity measurements, the test cases always require at option R&S SMW-B20x
and R&S SMW-B13T in addition to the basic configuration. The signal routing is fixed.
RF output A and RF output B transmit the corrupted reference measurement channel
signal (wanted signal) and are connected to the Rx ports of the base station for diversity reception. The signal generator will start signal generation at the first received BS
frame trigger.
Figure 7-3: Standard Test Setup (Diversity Measurements)
As signal routing takes place at the output of the baseband block, the interference settings of the two paths are identical for diversity measurments.
7.2.1.3
Carrying Out a Receiver Test Measurement
The following instructions lists the general steps for performing a receiver test. Specific
requirements are described together with the individual test case.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
288
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
1. Set the base station to the basic state
a)
b)
c)
d)
Initialize the base station,
Set the scrambling scheme,
Set the frequency
Set the base station to receive the Reference Measurement Channel (for most
test cases),
2. Set the signal generator to the basic state
a) reset the signal generator.
3. Set the test case wizard
a) Open the 3GPP FDD dialog in the baseband block
b) Open the Test Case Wizard and select Test Case
The General Settings parameters are preset according to TS 25.141
c) Enter scrambling code and scrambling mode according to the base station
scrambling scheme.
d) Enter additional required parameters, e.g. power class of base station.
e) Enter the test frequency (e.g. M). It must be the same as the base station has
been set to.
f) Activate the settings with the "Apply Settings" button.
The signal generator is now ready to start signal generation
4. Switch on RF output
5. If required, make additional settings (e.g. in the "I/Q Mod" or "RF" block) or change
test case settings (e.g. in the "Fading" block)
6. Start the measurement
a) Send a start trigger impulse (e.g. SFN modulo 4) from the base station to the
signal generator.
The signal generator will start signal generation.
7. Calculate the result
The base station internally calculates the BER, BLER or Pd depending on the test
case. This value is compared to the required value.
7.2.1.4
General Wanted Signal Parameters
The following parameters are available for all receiver tests. Specific parameters are
listed together with the Test Case description.
Wanted Signal State - Receiver Tests
Enables/disables the signal generation of the wanted 3GPP signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to "On".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
289
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:STATe on page 565
RMC - Receiver Tests
Sets the reference measurement channel.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the selection of the reference measurement
channel is restricted.
In edit mode "User definable", all following reference measurement channels are available for selection:
"RMC 12.2 kbps"
12.2 kbps measurement channel
"RMC 64 kbps" 64 kbps measurement channel
"RMC 144 kbps"
144 kbps measurement channel
"RMC 384 kbps"
384 kbps measurement channel
"AMR 12.2 kbps"
channel coding for the AMR coder
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:CCODing:TYPE on page 562
Wanted Signal Frequency - Receiver Tests
Sets the RF frequency of the wanted signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:FREQuency on page 564
Wanted Signal Level - Receiver Tests
Sets the RF level in edit mode "User Definable".
In edit mode "According to Standard" the RF level is determined by the selected
"Power Class".
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:POWer on page 565
7.2.2 Receiver Characteristics
7.2.2.1
Test Case 7.2 - Reference Sensitivity Level
The test case requires the basic configuration and is performed using the standard test
setup for one path. The signal generator outputs a reference measurement channel
signal.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
290
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Table 7-3: The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value
Frequency
B, M and T
RMC
12.2 kbps
Scrambling code
Any
TPC function
OFF
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.2
The test case verifies that a BS receiver has the capability to correctly demodulate the
signal sent by the signal generator at the specified (low) reference sensitivity power
level.
The test is passed when the resulting BER (calculated internally by the BS) is below a
0.001 at the test frequencies B, M, and T. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for
Statistical Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions
are defined.
Quotation from TS 25.141:
The reference sensitivity level is the minimum mean power received at the antenna
connector at which the BER shall not exceed the specific value indicated in subclause
7.2.2. The test is set up according to Figure B.7 and performed without interfering signal power applied to the BS antenna connector. For duplex operation, the measurement configuration principle is indicated for one duplex branch in Figure B.7. For internal BER calculation an example of the test connection is as shown in figure B.7. The
reference point for signal power is at the input of the receiver (antenna connector).
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
291
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
The settings of the wanted signal are described in Chapter 7.2.1.4, "General Wanted
Signal Parameters", on page 289.
7.2.2.2
Test Case 7.3 - Dynamic Range
The test case is performed using the standard test setup for one path.
It requires option K62 - Additional White Gaussian Noise (AWGN) in addition to the
basic configuration.
The signal generator outputs a reference measurement channel signal disturbed by an
interfering AWGN signal.
The following table lists the settings on the base station:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
292
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Parameter
Value
Frequency
B, M and T
RMC
12.2 kbps
Scrambling code
Any
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.3
The test case verifies that a BS receiver has the capability to demodulate the useful
signal sent by the signal generator even when it is superimposed by a heavy AWGN
(Additive White Gaussian Noise) signal.
The test is passed when the resulting BER (calculated internally by the BS) is below
0.001 at the test frequencies B, M, and T. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for
Statistical Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions
are defined.
Quotation from TS 25.141
Receiver dynamic range is the receiver ability to handle a rise of interference in the
reception frequency channel. The receiver shall fulfil a specified BER requirement for a
specified sensitivity degradation of the wanted signal in the presence of an interfering
AWGN signal in the same reception frequency channel.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
293
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Besides the settings described for all receiver tests, AWGN configuration is possible in
edit mode "User Definable". In edit mode "According to Standard" the AWGN settings
are preset:
AWGN State - Test Case 7.3
Enables/disables the generation of the AWGN signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to "On".
C/N - Test Case 7.3
Sets the carrier/noise ratio.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to -16.8 dB.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:CNRatio on page 547
Power Level - Test Case 7.3
Sets the AWGN level in edit mode "User Definable".
In edit mode "According to Standard" the AWGN level is determined by the selected
"Power Class".
●
●
●
-73 dB for Wide Area BS
-63 dB for Medium Range BS
-59 dB for Local Area BS
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
294
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:POWer:NOISe on page 548
7.2.2.3
Test Case 7.4 - Adjacent Channel Selectivity
In addition to the standard configuration, this test case requires:
●
option R&S SMW-B20x
●
option R&S SMW-B13T
●
option R&S SMW-K42
It is performed using the standard test setup for two paths.
The signal generator outputs the reference measurement channel signal (= wanted signal) at output RF A(B) and the adjacent channel interfering signal at output RF B(A).
After combining the two signals the sum signal is fed into the base station Rx port. The
signal generator will start signal generation at the first received BS frame trigger.
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T.
The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value
Frequency
B, M and T
RMC
12.2 kbps
Scrambling code
Any
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.4
The test case verifies that a BS receiver has the capability to demodulate a signal that
is sent by the signal generator but superimposed by a heavy WCDMA signal in the
adjacent channel.
The test is passed when the resulting BER (calculated internally by the BS) is below
0.001 at the test frequencies B, M, and T. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for
Statistical Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions
are defined.
Quotation from TS 25.141:
Adjacent channel selectivity (ACS) is a measure of the receiver ability to receive a
wanted signal at is assigned channel frequency in the presence of an adjacent channel
signal at a given frequency offset from the center frequency of the assigned channel.
ACS is the ratio of the receiver filter attenuation on the assigned channel frequency to
the receive filter attenuation on the adjacent channel(s).
The interference signal is offset from the wanted signal by the frequency offset Fuw.
The interference signal shall be a W-CDMA signal as specified in Annex I.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
295
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Besides the settings described for all receiver test, interferer configuration is possible
in edit mode "User Definable". In edit mode "According to Standard" the settings are
preset.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
296
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Interferer State - Test Case 7.4
Enables/disables the signal generation of the interfering uplink signal in the second
path.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to "On".
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:STATe on page 555
Frequency Offset - Test Case 7.4
Enters the frequency offset of the interfering signal versus the wanted signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the choice is limited to +/- 5 MHz.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:FOFFset on page 552
C to I - Test Case 7.4
Enters the ratio of wanted signal level to interfering signal level.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the value is fixed to - 63 dB:
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CNRatio on page 551
Interferer Modulation - Test Case 7.4
Selects the type of modulation for the interfering uplink signal in the second path.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the modulation is fixed to "W-CDMA (3GPP
FDD)".
"W-CDMA (3GPP FDD)"
A 3GPP FDD uplink signal with the following characteristic is generated for path B.
● DPCCH + DPDCH mode
● DPDCH with 240 ksps, 0 dB relative power, PRBS23 data source
● DPCCH with -5.46 dB relative power and slot format 2
● Same scrambling code as the wanted signal
("3GPP FDD" dialog)
"QPSK (3.84 MHz, Root Cosine 0.22)"
A QPSK signal (3.84 MHz bandwidth, root cosine filter 0.22, PRBS9
data source) is generated for path B ("Custom Dig Mod" dialog).
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:TYPE on page 556
7.2.2.4
Test Case 7.5 - Blocking Characteristics
In addition to the standard configuration, this test case requires:
●
option R&S SMW-B20x
●
option R&S SMW-B10
●
option R&S SMW-B13T
●
option R&S SMW-K42
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
297
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
It is performed using the standard test setup for two paths.
The signal generator provides the reference measurement channel signal (= wanted
signal) at output RF A and the interfering signal with a selectable frequency offset at
output RF B. After combining the two signals the sum signal is fed into the base station
Rx port. The signal generator will start signal generation at the first received BS frame
trigger sent.
The measurement must be made at the frequency M.
The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value
Frequency
M
RMC
12.2 kbps
Scrambling code
Any
In comparison with test case 7.4 this test case requires very large offset frequencies
for the interfering signal. Therefore, a second RF output is always required. Due to the
maximum frequency range of 6 GHz (option B106), the test case can not be performed
at all frequency offsets required by the standard (1 MHz to 12.75 GHz).
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.5
The test case verifies that a BS receiver has the capability to demodulate a signal that
is sent by the signal generator but superimposed by a heavy interfering signal in the
not adjacent channel.
The test is passed when the resulting BER (calculated internally by the BS) is below
0.001 at the test frequency M. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for Statistical
Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions are defined.
Quotation from TS 25.141:
The blocking characteristics is a measure of the receiver ability to receive a wanted
signal at its assigned channel frequency in the presence of an unwanted interferer on
frequencies other than those of the adjacent channels. The blocking performance
requirement applies as specified in tables 7.4A to 7.4J.
The requirements shall apply to the indicated base station class, depending on which
frequency band is used. The requirements in Tables 7.4D to 7.4J may be applied for
the protection of FDD BS receivers when GSM900, DCS1800, PCS1900, GSM850
and/or FDD BS operating in Bands I to VI are co-located with a UTRA FDD BS.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
298
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Besides the settings described for all receiver test, the following settings are possible
in edit mode "User Definable". In edit mode "According to Standard" most settings are
preset.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
299
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Additional settings in the "Wanted Signal" section:
Blocking Scenario - Test Case 7.5
Selects the type of blocking scenario in edit mode "According to Standard".
The type of blocking scenario presets the selected "Interferer Modulation" and the
"Power Level".
"Wideband Blocking"
The interferer signal for wide band blocking depends on the set
"Operating Band" and "RF Frequency":
● As long as the interferer "RF frequency" lies within or close to the
selected "Operating Band", a "3GPP FDD" uplink signal with a
defined power level (depending on the selected Power Class and
RMC) is generated for path B.
● When the interferer "RF Frequency" lies outside the selected
"Operating Band", a "CW carrier" interfering signal with a defined
power level (depending on the selected Power Class and RMC) is
generated for path B.
"Collocated BS Blocking"
A CW carrier interfering signal with a defined power level (depending
on the selected Power Class and RMC) is generated for path B ("RF"
block)
"Narrowband Blocking"
A GMSK (270.833 kHz) interfering signal with a defined power level
(depending on the selected Power Class and RMC) is generated for
path B ("Custom Dig Mod" dialog).
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:BTYPe on page 559
Operating Band - Test Case 7.5
Selects the operating band of the base station for "Wideband Blocking". The operating
band is required for the calculation of power levels and interferer modulation.
●
●
●
●
●
●
Operating band I: (1920 – 1980 MHz)
Operating band II: (1850 – 1910 MHz)
Operating band III: (1710 – 1785 MHz)
Operating band IV: (1710 – 1755 MHz)
Operating band V: (824 – 849 MHz)
Operating band VI: (830 – 840 MHz)
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:OBANd on page 564
Interferer Signal
Settings in the "Interferer Signal" section:
Interferer State - Test Case 7.5
Enables/disables the signal generation of the interfering signal in the second path.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to "On".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
300
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:STATe on page 555
Frequency Offset - Test Case 7.5
Enters the frequency offset of the interfering signal versus the wanted signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:FOFFset on page 552
Power Level - Test Case 7.5
Enters the level of the interfering signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the value is fixed to a value determined by the
selected "Blocking Scenario", the "RF frequency "and "Frequency Offset" and the base
station "Power Class".
For blocking scenario "Colocated BS Blocking" several power settings are permitted by
the standard. The following table show the blocking requirements for Medium Range
and Local Area BS when co-located with BS in other bands.
For blocking performance requirement tables see "Blocking performance requirements" on page 302.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:POWer on page 555
Interferer Modulation - Test Case 7.5
Selects the type of modulation for the adjacent channel interfering signal at output RF
B.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the modulation is determined by the selected
"Blocking Scenario".
"W-CDMA (3GPP FDD)"
A 3GPP FDD uplink signal with the following characteristic is generated for path B.
● DPCCH + DPDCH mode
● DPDCH with 240 ksps, 0 dB relative power, PRBS23 data source
● DPCCH with -5.46 dB relative power and slot format 2
● Same scrambling code as the wanted signal ("3GPP FDD" dialog)
"QPSK (3.84 MHz, Root Cosine 0.22)"
A QPSK signal (3.84 MHz bandwidth, root cosine filter 0.22, PRBS9
data source) is generated for path B ("Custom Dig Mod" dialog).
"CW Carrier"
A carrier-only signal is generated for path B; the frequency and level
of the CW signal are determined by the parameters "Frequency Offset" and "Power Level".
"GMSK (270.833 kHz)"
A GMSK signal (270.833 kHz bandwidth, PRBS9 data source) is generated for path B ("Custom Dig Mod" dialog).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
301
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:TYPE on page 556
Blocking performance requirements
The following tables are taken from TS25141 (V6.6.0), chapter 7.5.5.
Blocking performance requirement for Medium Range BS when co-located with
BS in other bands
Co-located BS type
Center Frequency of Interfering Signal
Interfering Signal mean
power
Micro GSM850
869 – 894 MHz
-3 dBm
MR UTRA-FDD Band V
869 – 894 MHz
+8 dBm
MR UTRA-FDD Band III
1805 – 1880 MHz
+8 dBm
Micro DCS1800
1805 – 1880 MHz
+5 dBm
Micro PCS1900
1930 – 1990 MHz
+5 dBm
MR UTRA-FDD Band II
1930 – 1990 MHz
+8 dBm
Blocking performance requirement for Local Area BS when co-located with BS in
other bands
Co-located BS type
Center Frequency of Interfering Signal
Interfering Signal mean
power
LA UTRA-FDD Band V
869 – 894 MHz
-6 dBm
Pico GSM850
869 – 894 MHz
-7 dBm
LA UTRA-FDD Band III
1805 – 1880 MHz
-6 dBm
Pico DCS1800
1805 – 1880 MHz
-4 dBm
LA UTRA-FDD Band II
1930 – 1990 MHz
-6 dBm
Pico PCS1900
1930 – 1990 MHz
-4 dBm
Blocking characteristics for Wide Area BS
Operating
Band
Center Frequency of
Interfering Signal
Interfering Sig- Wanted Signal
nal mean
mean power
power
Minimum Offset of Interfering Signal
Type of Interfering Signal
I
1920 - 1980 MHz
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
1900 - 1920 MHz
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
-15 dBm
-115 dBm
1980 - 2000 MHz
1 MHz -1900 MHz
CW carrier
2000 MHz - 12750 MHz
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
302
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Operating
Band
Center Frequency of
Interfering Signal
Interfering Sig- Wanted Signal
nal mean
mean power
power
Minimum Offset of Interfering Signal
Type of Interfering Signal
II
1850 - 1910 MHz
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
1830 - 1850 MHz
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
-15 dBm
-115 dBm
1710- 1785 MHz
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
1690 - 1710 MHz
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
-15 dBm
-115 dBm
1710- 1755 MHz
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
1690 - 1710 MHz
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
-15 dBm
-115 dBm
824-849 MHz
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
804-824 MHz
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
10 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
-15 dBm
-115 dBm
-40 dBm
-115 dBm
-15 dBm
-115 dBm
1910 - 1930 MHz
1 MHz - 1830 MHz
CW carrier
1930 MHz - 12750 MHz
III
1785- 1805 MHz
1 MHz - 1690 MHz
CW carrier
1805 MHz - 12750 MHz
IV
1755- 1775 MHz
1 MHz - 1690 MHz
CW carrier
1775 MHz - 12750 MHz
V
849-869 MHz
1 MHz- 804 MHz
CW carrier
869 MHz - 12750 MHz
VI
810- 830 MHz
10 MHz
840- 860 MHz
1 MHz- 810 MHz
WCDMA signal
*
CW carrier
860 MHz- 12750 MHz
*: The characteristics of the W-CDMA interference signal are specified in Annex I of TS
25.141.
Blocking performance requirement for Wide Area BS when co-located with BS in
other bands.
Co-located BS
type
Center Frequency of Interfering Signal
Interfering Signal mean power
Wanted Signal
mean power
Type of Interfering Signal
Macro GSM900
921- 960 MHz
+16 dBm
-115 dBm
CW carrier
Macro DCS1800
1805- 1880 MHz
+16 dBm
-115 dBm
CW carrier
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
303
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Co-located BS
type
Center Frequency of Interfering Signal
Interfering Signal mean power
Wanted Signal
mean power
Type of Interfering Signal
Macro PCS1900
1930- 1990 MHz
+16 dBm
-115 dBm
CW carrier
Macro GSM850
869- 894 MHz
+16 dBm
-115 dBm
CW carrier
WA UTRA-FDD
Band I
2110- 2170 MHz
+16 dBm
-115 dBm
CW carrier
WA UTRA-FDD
Band II
1930- 1990 MHz
+16 dBm
-115 dBm
CW carrier
WA UTRA-FDD
Band III
1805- 1880 MHz
+16 dBm
-115 dBm
CW carrier
WA UTRA-FDD
Band IV
2110- 2155 MHz
+16 dBm
-115 dBm
CW carrier
WA UTRA-FDD
Band V
869- 894 MHz
+16 dBm
-115 dBm
CW carrier
WA UTRA-FDD
Band VI
875- 885 MHz
+16 dBm
-115 dBm
CW carrier
Blocking performance requirement for Medium Range BS when co-located with
BS in other bands.
Co-located BS
type
Center Frequency of Interfering Signal
Interfering Signal mean power
Wanted Signal
mean power
Type of Interfering Signal
Micro GSM900
921- 960 MHz
-3 dBm
-105 dBm
CW carrier
Micro DCS1800
1805- 1880 MHz
+5 dBm
-105 dBm
CW carrier
Micro PCS1900
1930- 1990 MHz
+5 dBm
-105 dBm
CW carrier
Micro GSM850
869- 894 MHz
-3 dBm
-105 dBm
CW carrier
MR UTRA-FDD
Band I
2110- 2170 MHz
+8 dBm
-105 dBm
CW carrier
MR UTRA-FDD
Band II
1930- 1990 MHz
+8 dBm
-105 dBm
CW carrier
MR UTRA-FDD
Band III
1805- 1880 MHz
+8 dBm
-105 dBm
CW carrier
MR UTRA-FDD
Band IV
2110- 2155 MHz
+8 dBm
-105 dBm
CW carrier
MR UTRA-FDD
Band V
869- 894 MHz
+8 dBm
-105 dBm
CW carrier
MR UTRA-FDD
Band VI
875- 885 MHz
+8 dBm
-105 dBm
CW carrier
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
304
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Blocking performance requirement for Local Area BS when co-located with BS in
other bands.
Co-located BS
type
Center Frequency of Interfering Signal
Interfering Signal mean power
Wanted Signal
mean power
Type of Interfering Signal
Pico GSM900
921- 960 MHz
-7 dBm
-101 dBm
CW carrier
Pico DCS1800
1805- 1880 MHz
-4 dBm
-101 dBm
CW carrier
Pico PCS1900
1930- 1990 MHz
-4 dBm
-101 dBm
CW carrier
Pico GSM850
869- 894 MHz
-7 dBm
-101 dBm
CW carrier
LA UTRA-FDD
Band I
2110- 2170 MHz
-6 dBm
-101 dBm
CW carrier
LA UTRA-FDD
Band II
1930- 1990 MHz
-6 dBm
-101 dBm
CW carrier
LA UTRA-FDD
Band III
1805- 1880 MHz
-6 dBm
-101 dBm
CW carrier
LA UTRA-FDD
Band IV
2110- 2155 MHz
-6 dBm
-101 dBm
CW carrier
LA UTRA-FDD
Band V
869- 894 MHz
-6 dBm
-101 dBm
CW carrier
LA UTRA-FDD
Band VI
875- 885 MHz
-6 dBm
-101 dBm
CW carrier
Blocking performance requirement (narrowband) for Wide Area BS
Operating
Band
Center Frequency of
Interfering Signal
Interfering
Signal mean
power
Wanted Signal mean
power
Minimum Off- Type of
set of Interfer- Interfering
ing Signal
Signal
II
1850 - 1910 MHz
- 47 dBm
-115 dBm
2.7 MHz
GMSK
modulated*
III
1710- 1785 MHz
- 47 dBm
-115 dBm
2.8 MHz
GMSK
modulated*
IV
1710- 1755 MHz
- 47 dBm
-115 dBm
2.7 MHz
GMSK
modulated*
V
824- 849 MHz
- 47 dBm
-115 dBm
2.7 MHz
GMSK
modulated*
* GMSK modulation as defined in TS 45.004.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
305
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Blocking performance requirement (narrowband) for Medium Range BS
Operating
Band
Center Frequency of
Interfering Signal
Interfering
Signal mean
power
Wanted Signal mean
power
Minimum Off- Type of
set of Interfer- Interfering
ing Signal
Signal
II
1850 - 1910 MHz
- 42 dBm
-105 dBm
2.7 MHz
GMSK
modulated*
III
1710- 1785 MHz
- 42 dBm
-105 dBm
2.8 MHz
GMSK
modulated*
IV
1710- 1755 MHz
- 42 dBm
-105 dBm
2.7 MHz
GMSK
modulated*
V
824- 849 MHz
- 42 dBm
-105 dBm
2.7 MHz
GMSK
modulated*
* GMSK modulation as defined in TS 45.004 [12]
Blocking performance requirement (narrowband) for Local Area BS
Operating
Band
Center Frequency of
Interfering Signal
Interfering
Signal mean
power
Wanted Signal mean
power
Minimum Off- Type of
set of Interfer- Interfering
ing Signal
Signal
II
1850 - 1910 MHz
- 37 dBm
-101 dBm
2.7 MHz
GMSK
modulated*
III
1710- 1785 MHz
- 37 dBm
-101 dBm
2.8 MHz
GMSK
modulated*
IV
1710- 1755 MHz
- 37 dBm
-101 dBm
2.7 MHz
GMSK
modulated*
V
824- 849 MHz
- 37 dBm
-101 dBm
2.7 MHz
GMSK
modulated*
* GMSK modulation as defined in TS 45.004.
7.2.2.5
Test Case 7.6 - Intermodulation Characteristics
In addition to the standard configuration, this test case requires:
●
option R&S SMW-B20x
●
option R&S SMW-B10
●
option R&S SMW-B13T
●
option R&S SMW-K62
●
option R&S SMW-K42
It is performed using the standard test setup for two paths.
The signal generator outputs the reference measurement channel signal (= wanted signal) at output RF A and both interfering signals (CW interferer and the WCDMA or
GMSK modulated interferer) at output RF B. After combining the signals the sum signal
is fed into the base station Rx port. The signal generator will start signal generation at
the first received BS frame trigger.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
306
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
The measurement must be made at frequency M.
In order to generate both interfering signals with the desired frequency offset, a frequency offset is introduced for baseband B. This baseband frequency offset has to be
added to the RF frequency B.
The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value
Frequency
M
RMC
12.2 kbps
Scrambling code
Any
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.6
The test case verifies that a BS receiver has the capability to demodulate a signal that
is sent by the signal generator but superimposed by two heavy interfering signals in the
adjacent channels, where the receiver intermodulation products disturb the wanted signal.
The test is passed when the resulting BER (calculated internally by the BS) is below
0.001 at the test frequency M. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for Statistical
Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions are defined.
Quotation from TS 25.141:
Third and higher order mixing of the two interfering RF signals can produce an interfering signal in the band of the desired channel. Intermodulation response rejection is a
measure of the capability of the receiver to receiver a wanted signal on its assigned
channel frequency in the presence of two or more interfering signals which have a specific frequency relationship to the wanted signal.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
307
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
308
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Besides the settings described for all receiver tests, interferer 1 and 2 configuration is
possible in edit mode "User Definable". In edit mode "According to Standard" most of
the settings are preset.
Interferer Bandwidth Type - Test Case 7.6
Selects the interferer scenario.
"Wideband"
A 3GPP FDD uplink interfering signal with the following characteristic
is generated for path B.
● DPCCH + DPDCH mode
● DPDCH with 240 ksps, 0 dB relative power, PRBS23 data source
● DPCCH with -5.46 dB relative power and slot format 2
● Same scrambling code as the wanted signal ("3GPP FDD" dialog)
The 3GPP FDD uplink interfering signal is superimposed by a CW
interfering signal with a frequency of 10 MHz and a level of -48 dBm
("AWGN" dialog).
"Narrowband"
GMSK interfering signal (270.833 kHz bandwidth, PRBS9 data
source) is generated for path B ("Custom Dig Mod" dialog).
The GMSK interfering signal is superimposed by a CW interfering signal with a frequency of 3.5 MHz and a level of -47 dBm ("AWGN" dialog).
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:BWIDth on page 550
Interferer 1 and 2 State - Test Case 7.6
Enables/disables the signal generation of the CW and modulation interfering signal in
the second path.
In edit mode "According to Standard" both states are fixed to "On".
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CW:STATe on page 552
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:MODulated:STATe on page 554
Interferer 1 and 2 Frequency Offset - Test Case 7.6
Enters the frequency offset of the interfering signals versus the wanted signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the value is fixed to a value determined by the
selected "Interferer Bandwidth".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
309
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CW:FOFFset on page 551
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:MODulated:FOFFset on page 553
Interferer 1 and 2 Power Level - Test Case 7.6
Enters the level of the interfering signals..
In edit mode "According to Standard" the value is fixed to a value determined by the
selected "Interferer Bandwidth Type".
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CW:POWer on page 552
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:MODulated:POWer on page 553
Interferer 2 Modulation - Test Case 7.6
Selects the type of modulation for the interfering modulation signal in the second path.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the value is fixed to a value determined by the
selected "Interferer Bandwidth".
"W-CDMA (3GPP FDD)"
A 3GPP FDD uplink signal with the following characteristic is generated for path B.
● DPCCH + DPDCH mode
● DPDCH with 240 ksps, 0 dB relative power, PRBS23 data source
● DPCCH with -5.46 dB relative power and slot format 2
● Same scrambling code as the wanted signal ("3GPP FDD" dialog)
"GMSK (270833 kHz)"
A GMSK signal (270.833 kHz bandwidth, PRBS9 data source) is generated for path B ("Custom Dig Mod" dialog).
"QPSK (3.84 MHz, Root Cosine 0.22)"
A QPSK signal (3.84 MHz bandwidth, root cosine filter 0.22, PRBS9
data source) is generated for path B ("Custom Dig Mod" dialog).
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:MODulated:TYPE on page 554
7.2.2.6
Test Case 7.8 - Verification of Internal BER
The test case requires the basic configuration and is performed using the standard test
setup for one path.
The signal generator outputs a corrupted reference measurement channel signal (=
wanted signal) at output RF A. The signal is fed into the base station Rx port.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first received BS frame trigger.
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T.
The following table lists the settings on the base station:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
310
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Parameter
Value
Frequency
B, M and T
RMC
12.2 kbps
Scrambling code
Any
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 7.8
The test case verifies that a BS receiver has the capability to calculate the BER of a
signal where erroneous bits are inserted in the data stream by the signal generator.
The test is passed when the calculated BER is within ±10% of the BER simulated by
the signal generator the test frequencies B, M and T. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for Statistical Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and
test conditions are defined.
Quotation from TS 25.141:
Base Station System with internal BER calculation can synchronize it's receiver to
known pseudo-random data sequence and calculates bit error ratio from the received
data. This test is performed only if Base Station System has this kind of feature. This
test is performed by feeding measurement signal with known BER to the input of the
receiver. Locations of the erroneous bits shall be randomly distributed within a frame.
Erroneous bits shall be inserted to the data bit stream as shown in the following figure.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
311
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Besides the settings described for all receiver test, Bit Error Rate and Block Error Rate
selection is possible in edit mode "User Definable". In edit mode "According to Standard" only the Bit Error Rate setting is possible.
Bit Error Rate - Test Case 7.8
Sets the bit error rate. In edit mode "According to Standard" only values 0.00 (no bit
errors are inserted) and 0.01 (1 percent bit errors are inserted) are available.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
312
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:DERRor:BIT:RATE
on page 563
Block Error Rate - Test Case 7.8
Sets the block error rate in edit mode "User Definable".
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:DERRor:BLOCk:RATE
on page 563
7.2.3 Performance Requirements
7.2.3.1
Test Case 8.2.1 - Demodulation of DCH in Static Propagation Conditions
For non-diversity measurements, the test case requires Additional White Gaussian
Noise (AWGN) (K62) in addition to the basic configuration.
The measurement is performed using the standard test setup for one path.
The signal generator outputs a reference measurement channel signal (= wanted signal) that is superimposed by a AWGN signal at output RF A. The signal is fed into the
base station Rx port.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first received BS frame trigger.
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The RMC data
rates are 12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps and 384 kbps.
For diversity measurements, in addition to the standard configuration, this test case
requires:
●
option R&S SMW-B20x
●
option R&S SMW-B10
●
option R&S SMW-B13T
●
option R&S SMW-K62
●
option R&S SMW-K42
It is performed using the standard test setup for diversity measurement.
The signal generator outputs the reference measurement channel signal (= wanted signal) at output RF A and output RF B. The wanted signal is superimposed by a AWGN
signal. The signals are fed into the base station Rx ports.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to
input Trigger 1.
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The RMC data
rates are 12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps and 384 kbps.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
313
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Table 7-4: The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value(s)
Frequency
B, M and T
RMC
12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps, 384 kbps
Scrambling code
Any
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.2.1
The test case shall verify that a BS receiver has the capability to demodulate a signal
that is sent by the signal generator and is superimposed by a heavy AWGN signal.
The test is passed when the resulting BLER (calculated internally by the BS) does not
exceed the required BLER settings. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for Statistical Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions are
defined.
Quotation from TS 25.141:
The performance requirement of DCH in static propagation conditions is determined by
the maximum Block Error Ratio (BLER ) allowed when the receiver input signal is at a
specified Eb/N0 limit. The BLER is calculated for each of the measurement channels
supported by the base station.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
314
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Besides the settings described for all receiver test, AWGN Configuration is possible in
edit mode "User Definable". In edit mode "According to Standard" only the Required
BLER setting is possible. Fading is always off.
AWGN State - Test Case 8.x
Enables/disables the generation of the AWGN signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to "On".
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:STATe on page 549
Required BLER - Test Case 8.x
Sets the required Block Error Rate in edit mode "According to Standard".
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:RBLock:RATE on page 548
Power Level - Test Case 8.x
Sets the AWGN level in edit mode "User Definable".
In edit mode "According to Standard" the AWGN level is determined by the selected
"Power Class" .
● "-84 dBm" for "Wide Area BS"
● "-74 dBm" for "Medium Range BS"
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
315
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
●
"-70 dBm" for "Local Area BS"
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:POWer:NOISe on page 548
Eb to N0 - Test Case 8.x
Sets the ratio of bit energy to noise power density.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the value depends on the Eb/N0 test requirements (see Table 7-5).
Table 7-5: Eb/N0 test requirements in AWGN channel
Measurement channel
Received Eb to N0 for
BS with Rx diversity
Received Eb to N0 for
BS without Rx diversity
Required BLER
12.2 kbps
n.a. (5.5 dB)
n.a. (8.7 dB)
< 10-1
5.5 dB
8.7 dB
< 10-2
1.9 dB
5.1 dB
< 10-1
2.1 dB
5.2 dB
< 10-2
1.2 dB
4.2 dB
< 10-1
1.3 dB
4.4 dB
< 10-2
1.3 dB
4.4 dB
< 10-1
1.4 dB
4.5 dB
< 10-2
64 kbps
144 kbps
384 kbps
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:ENRatio on page 547
Fading State - Test Case 8.2.1
Indicates the state of the Fader.
The state is fixed to 'Off'.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:FSIMulator:STATe on page 550
7.2.3.2
Test Case 8.3.1 - Demodulation of DCH in Multipath Fading Case 1 Conditions
For non-diversity measurements, in addition to the standard configuration, this test
case requires:
●
option R&S SMW-K62
●
option R&S SMW-B14/K71
The measurement is performed using the standard test setup for one path.
The signal generator outputs a reference measurement channel signal (= wanted signal) that is disturbed by an AWGN signal and multipath fading effects at output RF
A(B). The signal is fed into the base station Rx port.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first received BS frame trigger.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
316
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The RMC data
rates are 12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps and 384 kbps.
For diversity measurements, in addition to the standard configuration, this test case
requires:
●
option R&S SMW-B20x
●
option R&S SMW-B13T
●
option R&S SMW-K62
●
option R&S SMW-B14/K71
It is performed using the standard test setup for diversity measurement.
The signal generator outputs the reference measurement channel signal (= wanted signal) that is disturbed by an AWGN signal and multipath fading effects at output RF A
and output RF B. The signals are fed into the base station Rx ports.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first received BS frame trigger.
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The RMC data
rates are 12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps and 384 kbps.
The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value(s)
Frequency
B, M and T
RMC
12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps, 384 kbps
Scrambling code
Any
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.3.1
The test case shall verify that a BS receiver has the capability to demodulate a signal
that is sent by the signal generator but superimposed by a heavy AWGN signal and
disturbed by multipath fading effects.
The test is passed when the resulting BLER (calculated internally by the BS) does not
exceed the required BLER settings. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for Statistical Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions are
defined.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
317
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
318
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
This test case settings are identical to test case 8.2.1 except from the channel simulation that is set to "Multipath Fading Case 1" ("Fading > Standard > 3GPP Case 1
UE/BS" and the specific Eb/N0 test requirements (see Table 7-6).
Table 7-6: Eb/N0 Test requirements in multipath Case 1 channel
Measurement channel
12.2 kbps
64 kbps
144 kbps
384 kbps
Received Eb/N0
Received Eb/N0
Required BLER
for BS with Rx diversity
for BS without Rx
diversity
n.a. (12.5 dB)
n.a. (19.7 dB)
< 10-1
12.5 dB
19.7 dB
< 10-2
6.8 dB
12.2 dB
< 10-1
9.8 dB
16.5 dB
< 10-2
6.0 dB
11.4 dB
< 10-1
9.0 dB
15.6 dB
< 10-2
6.4 dB
11.8 dB
< 10-1
9.4 dB
16.1 dB
< 10-2
Fading State - Test Case 8.x
Indicates the state of the Fader.
The state is fixed to "On". The "Fading" dialog is preset with the required settings for
the test case.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:FSIMulator:STATe on page 550
7.2.3.3
Test Case 8.3.2 - Demodulation of DCH in Multipath Fading Case 2 Conditions
This test case is identical to test case 8.3.1 except from the channel simulation that is
set to "Multipath Fading Case 2" ("Fading" dialog: Standard = 3GPP Case 2 UE/BS)
and the Eb/N0 test requirements (see Table 7-7).
Table 7-7: Eb/N0 Test requirements in Multipath Case 2 channel
Measurement channel
Received Eb to N0 for BS with
Rx diversity
Received Eb to
N0 for BS without Rx diversity
Required BLER
12.2 kbps
n.a. (9.6 dB)
n.a. (15.6 dB)
< 10-1
9.6 dB
15.6 dB
< 10-2
4.9 dB
9.8 dB
< 10-1
7.0 dB
12.9 dB
< 10-2
4.3 dB
8.8 dB
< 10-1
6.2 dB
12.1 dB
< 10-2
64 kbps
144 kbps
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
319
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
7.2.3.4
Measurement channel
Received Eb to N0 for BS with
Rx diversity
Received Eb to
N0 for BS without Rx diversity
Required BLER
384 kbps
4.7 dB
9.3 dB
< 10-1
6.7 dB
12.7dB
< 10-2
Test Case 8.3.3 - Demodulation of DCH in Multipath Fading Case 3 Conditions
This test case is identical to test case 8.3.1 except from the channel simulation that is
set to 'Multipath Fading Case 3' ("> 3GPP Case 3 UE/BS") and the Eb/N0 test requirements (see Table 7-8).
Table 7-8: Eb/N0 Test requirements in multipath Case 3 channel
Measurement channel
Received Eb to N0 for
BS with Rx diversity
Received Eb to N0 for
BS without Rx diversity
Required BLER
12.2 kbps
n.a. (7.8 dB)
n.a. (11.4 dB)
< 10-1
7.8 dB
11.4 dB
< 10-2
8.6 dB
12.3 dB
< 10-3
4.0 dB
7.7 dB
< 10-1
4.4 dB
8.3 dB
< 10-2
4.7 dB
9.1 dB
< 10-3
3.4 dB
6.6 dB
< 10-1
3.8 dB
7.3 dB
< 10-2
4.2 dB
7.8 dB
< 10-3
3.8 dB
7.1 dB
< 10-1
4.2 dB
7.8 dB
< 10-2
4.8 dB
8.5 dB
< 10-3
64 kbps
144 kbps
384 kbps
7.2.3.5
Test Case 8.3.4 - Demodulation of DCH in Multipath Fading Case 4 Conditions
This test case is identical to test case 8.3.1 except from the channel simulation that is
set to "Multipath Fading Case 4" ("Fading > Standard > 3GPP Case 4 UE") and the
Eb/N0 test requirements (see following table).
Table 7-9: Eb/N0 Test requirements in multipath Case 4 channel
Measurement channel
Received Eb to N0 for
BS with Rx diversity
Received Eb to N0 for
Required BLER
BS without Rx diversity
12.2 kbps
n.a. (10.8 dB)
n.a. (14.4 dB)
< 10-1
10.8 dB
14.4 dB
< 10-2
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
320
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Measurement channel
64 kbps
144 kbps
384 kbps
Received Eb to N0 for
BS with Rx diversity
Received Eb to N0 for
Required BLER
BS without Rx diversity
11.6 dB
15.3 dB
< 10-3
7.0 dB
10.7 dB
< 10-1
7.4 dB
11.3 dB
< 10-2
7.7 dB
12.1 dB
< 10-3
6.4 dB
9.6 dB
< 10-1
6.8 dB
10.3 dB
< 10-2
7.2 dB
10.8 dB
< 10-3
6.8 dB
10.1 dB
< 10-1
7.2 dB
10.8 dB
< 10-2
7.8 dB
11.5 dB
< 10-3
Table 7-10: Eb/N0 Test requirements in multipath Case 4 channel
Measurement channel
Received Eb to N0 for
BS with Rx diversity
Received Eb to N0 for
BS without Rx diversity
Required BLER
12.2 kbps
n.a. (10.8 dB)
n.a. (14.4 dB)
< 10-1
10.8 dB
14.4 dB
< 10-2
11.6 dB
15.3 dB
< 10-3
7.0 dB
10.7 dB
< 10-1
7.4 dB
11.3 dB
< 10-2
7.7 dB
12.1 dB
< 10-3
6.4 dB
9.6 dB
< 10-1
6.8 dB
10.3 dB
< 10-2
7.2 dB
10.8 dB
< 10-3
6.8 dB
10.1 dB
< 10-1
7.2 dB
10.8 dB
< 10-2
7.8 dB
11.5 dB
< 10-3
64 kbps
144 kbps
384 kbps
Table 7-11: Eb/N0 Test requirements in multipath Case 4 channel
Measurement channel
Received Eb to N0 for
BS with Rx diversity
Received Eb to N0 for
BS without Rx diversity
Required BLER
12.2 kbps
n.a. (10.8 dB)
n.a. (14.4 dB)
< 10-1
10.8 dB
14.4 dB
< 10-2
11.6 dB
15.3 dB
< 10-3
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
321
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Measurement channel
Received Eb to N0 for
BS with Rx diversity
Received Eb to N0 for
BS without Rx diversity
Required BLER
64 kbps
7.0 dB
10.7 dB
< 10-1
7.4 dB
11.3 dB
< 10-2
7.7 dB
12.1 dB
< 10-3
6.4 dB
9.6 dB
< 10-1
6.8 dB
10.3 dB
< 10-2
7.2 dB
10.8 dB
< 10-3
6.8 dB
10.1 dB
7.2 dB
10.8 dB
< 10-2
7.8 dB
11.5 dB
< 10-3
144 kbps
384 kbps
7.2.3.6
Test Case 8.4 - Demodulation of DCH in Moving Propagation Conditions
This test case is identical to test case 8.3.1 except from the channel simulation that is
set to "Moving Propagation" ("Fading > Standard > Moving Propagation") and the
Eb/N0 test requirements.
Table 7-12: Eb/N0 Test requirements in moving channel
Measurement channel
Received Eb to N0 for
BS with Rx diversity
Received Eb to N0 for
BS without Rx diversity
Required BLER
12.2 kbps
n.a. (6.3 dB)
n.a. (9.3 dB)
< 10-1
6.3 dB
9.3 dB
< 10-2
2.7 dB
5.9 dB
< 10-1
2.8 dB
6.1 dB
< 10-2
64 kbps
7.2.3.7
Test Case 8.5 - Demodulation of DCH in Birth/Death Propagation Conditions
This test case is identical to test case 8.3.1 except from the channel simulation that is
set to B"irth/Death Propagation" ("Fading > Standard > Birth/Death Propagation") and
the Eb/N0test requirements.
Measurement channel
Received Eb to N0 for
BS with Rx diversity
Received Eb to N0 for
BS without Rx diversity
Required BLER
12.2 kbps
n.a. (8.3 dB)
n.a. (11.4 dB)
< 10-1
8.3 dB
11.4 dB
< 10-2
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
322
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
7.2.3.8
Measurement channel
Received Eb to N0 for
BS with Rx diversity
Received Eb to N0 for
BS without Rx diversity
Required BLER
64 kbps
4.7 dB
8.0 dB
< 10-1
4.8 dB
8.1 dB
< 10-2
Test Case 8.6 - Verification of Internal BLER
For non-diversity measurements, the test case requires the basic configuration and
is performed using the standard test setup for one path.
The signal generator outputs a corrupted reference measurement channel signal (=
wanted signal) at output RF A. The signal is fed into the base station Rx port.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first received BS frame trigger.
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The RMC data
rates are 12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps and 384 kbps.
For diversity measurements, the test case requires option Second RF path (B20x)
and a second option Baseband Main Module (B13) in addition to the basic configuration.
For diversity measurements, in addition to the standard configuration, this test case
requires:
●
option R&S SMW-B20x
●
option R&S SMW-B13T
It is performed using the standard test setup for diversity measurement.
The signal generator outputs the corrupted reference measurement channel signal (=
wanted signal) at output RF A and output RF B. The signals are fed into the base station Rx ports.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first received BS frame trigger.
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The RMC data
rates are 12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps and 384 kbps.
The following table lists the settings on the base station
Parameter
Value
Frequency
B, M and T
RMC
12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps, 384 kbps
Scrambling code
Any
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.6
The test case verifies that a BS receiver has the capability to calculate the BLER of a
signal where erroneous blocks are inserted in the data stream by the signal generator.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
323
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
The test is passed when the calculated BLER is within ±10% of the BLER simulated by
the signal generator the test frequencies B, M and T. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for Statistical Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and
test conditions are defined.
Quotation from TS 25.141:
Base Station System with internal BLER calculates block error rate from the CRC
blocks of the received. This test is performed only if Base Station System has this kind
of feature. All data rates which are used in clause 8 Performance requirement testing
shall be used in verification testing. This test is performed by feeding measurement
signal with known BLER to the input of the receiver. Locations of the erroneous blocks
shall be randomly distributed within a frame. Erroneous blocks shall be inserted into
the UL signal as shown in the following figure.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
324
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Besides the settings described for all receiver test, Bit Error Rate and Block Error Rate
selection is possible in edit mode "User Definable". In edit mode "According to Standard" only the Block Error Rate setting is possible.
Table 7-13: UL signal levels for different data rates
Data rate
Signal level for
Wide Area BS
Signal level for
Medium Range
BS
Signal level for
Local Area BS
Unit
12,2 kbps
-111
-101
-97
dBm/3.84 MHz
64 kbps
-107
-97
-93
dBm/3.84 MHz
144 kbps
-104
-94
-90
dBm/3.84 MHz
384 kbps
-100
-90
-86
dBm/3.84 MHz
Block Error Rate - Test Case 8.6
Sets the block error rate. In edit mode "According to Standard" only values 0.00 (no
block errors are inserted) and 0.01 (1 percent block errors are inserted) are available.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:DERRor:BLOCk:RATE
on page 563
Bit Error Rate - Test Case 8.6
Sets the bit error rate in edit mode "User Definable".
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:DERRor:BIT:RATE
on page 563
7.2.3.9
Test Case 8.8.1 - RACH Preamble Detection in Static Propagation Conditions
For non-diversity measurements, the test case requires option K62 - Additional
White Gaussian Noise (AWGN) in addition to the basic configuration.
The measurement is performed using the standard test setup for one path.
The signal generator outputs a continuous sequence of preambles (wanted signal) that
is superimposed by a AWGN signal at output RF A(B). The signal is fed into the base
station Rx port.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to
input "Trigger 1".
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
325
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
For diversity measurements, in addition to the standard configuration, this test case
requires:
●
option R&S SMW-B20x
●
option R&S SMW-B13T
●
2xoption R&S SMW-K62
It is performed using the standard test setup for diversity measurement.
The signal generator outputs a continuous sequence of preambles (wanted signal) that
is superimposed by a AWGN signal at output RF A and output RF B. The signals are
fed into the base station Rx ports.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first received BS frame trigger.
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T.
The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value(s)
Frequency
B, M and T
RMC
RACH
Scrambling code
Any
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.8.1
The test case verifies that a BS receiver has the capability to detect the RACH preamble that is sent by the signal generator and is superimposed by a heavy AWGN signal.
The test is passed when internally calculated Pd is equal or above the required Pd settings at the test frequencies B, M and T. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for
Statistical Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions
are defined.
Quotation from TS 25.141:
The performance requirement of RACH for preamble detection in static propagation
conditions is determined by the two parameters probability of false detection of the
preaEc/N0mble (Pfa) and the probability of detection of preamble (Pd). The performance is measured by the required at probability of detection, Pd of 0.99 and 0.999. Pfa
is defined as a conditional probability of erroneous detection of the preamble when
input is only noise (+interference). Pd is defined as conditional probability of detection
of the preamble when the signal is present. Pfa shall be 10-3 or less. Only one signature is used and it is known by the receiver.
The Probability of false detection of the preamble (Pfa) test is not supported.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
326
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
327
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Besides the settings described for all receiver test, AWGN and Fading Configuration is
possible in edit mode "User Definable". In edit mode "According to Standard "only the
"Required Pd" setting is possible.
AWGN State - Test Case 8.x
Enables/disables the generation of the AWGN signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to "On".
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:STATe on page 549
Required Pd - Test Case 8.x
Sets the Required Probability of Detection of Preamble (Required Pd) in edit mode
"According to Standard":
● >= 0.99
● >= 0.999
This figure determines the ratio Ec/N0 according to the following table of Ec/N0 test
requirements.
Table 7-14: Preamble detection test requirements in AWGN channel
Ec/N0 for required Pd ( 0.99
Ec/N0 for required Pd ( 0.999
"BS with Rx Diversity"
-20.1 dB
-19.7 dB
"BS without Rx Diversity"
-17.2 dB
-16.4 dB
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:RPDetection:RATE on page 548
Power Level - Test Case 8.x
Sets the AWGN level in edit mode "User Definable".
In edit mode "According to Standard" the AWGN level is determined by the selected
"Power Class" .
●
●
●
"-84 dBm" for "Wide Area BS"
"-74 dBm" for "Medium Range BS"
"-70 dBm" for "Local Area BS"
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:POWer:NOISe on page 548
Eb/N0 - Test Case 8.x
Sets the ratio of bit energy to noise power density.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the value depends on the selected "Required
Pd".
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:ENRatio on page 547
Fading State - Test Case 8.x.1
Indicates the state of the Fader.
The state is fixed to "Off".
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
328
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:FSIMulator:STATe on page 550
7.2.3.10
Test Case 8.8.2 - RACH Preamble Detection in Multipath Fading Case 3
For non-diversity measurements, in addition to the standard configuration, this test
case requires:
●
option R&S SMW-K62
●
option R&S SMW-B14/K71
The measurement is performed using the standard test setup for one path.
The signal generator outputs a continuous sequence of preambles (= wanted signal)
that is disturbed by an AWGN signal and multipath fading effects at output RF A(B).
The signal is fed into the base station Rx port.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to
input "Trigger 1".
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The RMC data
rates are 12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps and 384 kbps.
For diversity measurements, in addition to the standard configuration, this test case
requires:
●
option R&S SMW-B20x
●
option R&S SMW-B13T
●
option R&S SMW-K62
●
option R&S SMW-B14/K71
It is performed using the standard test setup for diversity measurement.
The signal generator outputs a continuous sequence of preambles (= wanted signal)
that is disturbed by an AWGN signal and multipath fading effects at output RF A and
output RF B. The signals are fed into the base station Rx ports.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first received BS frame trigger.
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The RMC data
rates are 12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps and 384 kbps.
The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value(s)
Frequency
B, M and T
RMC
12.2 kbps, 64 kbps, 144 kbps, 384 kbps
Scrambling code
Any
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.8.2
The test case shall verify that a BS receiver has the capability to detect the RACH preamble that is sent by the signal generator and is superimposed by a heavy AWGN signal and disturbed by multipath fading effects.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
329
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
The test is passed when internally calculated Pd is equal or above the required Pd settings at the test frequencies B, M and T. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for
Statistical Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions
are defined.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
330
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
This test case is identical to test case 8.8.1 except from the channel simulation that is
set to "Multipath Fading Case 3" ("Fading > Standard = 3GPP Case 3 UE/BS") by
default and the specific EC/N0 ratio requirements (see following table).
Ec/N0 for required Pd ( 0.99
Ec/N0 for required Pd ( 0.999
"BS with Rx Diversity"
-14.9 dB
-12.8 dB
"BS without Rx Diversity"
-8.8 dB
-5.8 dB
Fading State - Test Case 8.x
Indicates the state of the Fader.
The state is fixed to "On". The "Fading" dialog is preset with the required settings for
the test case.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:FSIMulator:STATe on page 550
7.2.3.11
Test Case 8.8.3 - RACH Demodulation of Message Part in Static Propagation
Conditions
For non-diversity measurements, the test case requires option K62 - Additional White
Gaussian Noise (AWGN) in addition to the basic configuration.
The measurement is performed using the standard test setup for one path.
The signal generator outputs a RACH message signal (= wanted signal) that is superimposed by a AWGN signal at output RF A(B). The signal is fed into the base station
Rx port.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to
input "Trigger 1".
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The Transport
Block Sizes are 168 bits and 360 bits.
For diversity measurements, in addition to the standard configuration, this test case
requires:
●
option R&S SMW-B20x
●
option R&S SMW-B13T
●
2x option R&S SMW-K62
It is performed using the standard test setup for diversity measurement.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
331
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
The signal generator outputs the RACH message signal (= wanted signal) that is
superimposed by a AWGN signal at output RF A and output RF B. The signals are fed
into the base station Rx ports.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first received BS frame trigger.
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The Transport
Block Sizes are 168 bits and 360 bits.
The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value(s)
Frequency
B, M and T
Transport Block Size
168 bits, 360 bits
RMC
RACH
Scrambling code
Any
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.8.3
The test case shall verify that a BS receiver has the capability to demodulate the
RACH message sent by the signal generator but superimposed by AWGN.
The test is passed when the resulting BLER (calculated internally by the BS) does not
exceed the required BLER settings. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for Statistical Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions are
defined.
Quotation from TS 25.141:
The performance requirement of RACH in static propagation conditions is determined
by the maximum Block Error Ratio (BLER) allowed when the receiver input signal is at
a specified Eb/N0 limit. The BLER is calculated for each of the measurement channels
supported by the base station.
The preamble threshold factor is chosen to fulfil the requirements on Pfa and Pd in
subclauses 8.8.1 and 8.8.2. Only one signature is used and it is known by the receiver.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
332
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
333
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Besides the settings described for all receiver test, selection of "Transport Block Size"
of the wanted signal and AWGN Configuration is possible in edit mode "According to
Standard".
Transport Block Size - Test Case 8.8.x
Sets the Transport Block Size:
● 168 bits
● 360 bits
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:PRACh:CCODing:TYPE on page 565
AWGN State - Test Case 8.8.3
Enables/disables the generation of the AWGN signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to "On".
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:STATe on page 549
Required BLER - Test Case 8.x
Sets the required Block Error Rate in edit mode "According to Standard".
● < 0.1
● < 0.01
This figure determines the ratio Eb/N0 according to the list of Eb/N0 test requirements
(see following table).
Eb/N0 requirements in AWGN channel
Table 7-15: Transport Block size TB and TTI in frames: 168 bits, TTI = 20 ms / 360 bits, TTI = 20 ms
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-1
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-2
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-1
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-2
"BS with Rx Diversity"
4.5 dB
5.4 dB
4.3 dB
5.2 dB
"BS without Rx
Diversity"
7.6 dB
8.5 dB
7.3 dB
8.2 dB
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:RBLock:RATE on page 548
Power Level - Test Case 8.8.3
Sets the AWGN level in edit mode "User Definable".
In edit mode "According to Standard" the AWGN level is determined by the selected
"Power Class" .
"-84 dBm" for "Wide Area BS"
"-74 dBm" for "Medium Range BS"
"-70 dBm" for "Local Area BS"
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
334
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:POWer:NOISe on page 548
Eb/N0- Test Case 8.8.3
Sets the ratio of bit energy to noise power density.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the value depends on the selected "Required
BLER".
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:ENRatio on page 547
Fading State - Test Case 8.8.3
Indicates the state of the Fader.
The state is fixed to "Off".
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:FSIMulator:STATe on page 550
7.2.3.12
Test Case 8.8.4 - RACH Demodulation of Message Part in Multipath Fading Case
3
For non-diversity measurements, in addition to the standard configuration, this test
case requires:
●
option R&S SMW-K62
●
option R&S SMW-B14/K71
The measurement is performed using the standard test setup for one path.
The signal generator outputs a RACH message signal (= wanted signal) that is disturbed by an AWGN signal and multipath fading effects at output RF A. The signal is fed
into the base station Rx port.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first BS frame trigger sent to
input "Trigger 1".
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The Transport
Block Sizes are 168 bits and 360 bits.
For diversity measurements, in addition to the standard configuration, this test case
requires:
●
option R&S SMW-B20x
●
option R&S SMW-B13T
●
option R&S SMW-K62
●
option R&S SMW-B14/K71
It is performed using the standard test setup for diversity measurement.
The signal generator outputs a RACH message signal (= wanted signal) that is disturbed by an AWGN signal and multipath fading effects at output RF A and output RF B.
The signals are fed into the base station Rx ports.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first received BS frame trigger.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
335
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
The measurement must be made at the three frequencies B, M and T. The Transport
Block Sizes are 168 bits and 360 bits.
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 8.8.4
The test case shall verify that a BS receiver has the capability to demodulate the
RACH message sent by the signal generator but superimposed by AWGN and disturbed by multipath fading effects.
The test is passed when the resulting BLER (calculated internally by the BS) does not
exceed the required BLER settings. Note TS 25.141 Annex C: General Rules for Statistical Testing, where test conditions in terms of test methods and test conditions are
defined.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
336
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Receiver Tests
This test case is identical to test case 8.8.3 except from the channel simulation that is
set to "Multipath Fading Case 3" ("Fading > Standard > 3GPP Case 3 UE/BS") and the
specific Eb/N0 ratio requirements.
Eb/N0 test requirements in fading case 3 channel
Transport Block size TB and TTI in frames: 168 bits, TTI = 20 ms / 360 bits, TTI =
20 ms
7.2.3.13
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-1
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-2
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-1
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-2
"BS with Rx Diversity"
8.0 dB
9.1 dB
7.9 dB
8.9 dB
"BS without Rx
Diversity"
11.7 dB
13.0 dB
11.6 dB
12.7 dB
Test Case 8.9.1 - CPCH Access Preamble and Collision Detection Preamble
Detection in Static Propagation Conditions
This test case is identical to test case 8.8.1 except that the CPCH Preamble is used
instead of the RACH preamble.
7.2.3.14
Test Case 8.9.2 - CPCH Access Preamble and Collision Detection Preamble
Detection in Multipath Fading Case 3
This test case is identical to test case 8.8.2 except that the CPCH Preamble is used
instead of the RACH preamble.
7.2.3.15
Test Case 8.9.3 - Demodulation of CPCH Message in Static Propagation Conditions
This test case is identical to test case 8.8.3 except from differing Eb/N0 ratio requirements and the demodulation of CPCH Message instead of the RACH Message.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
337
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Transmitter Tests
Test requirements in AWGN channel
Transport Block size TB and TTI in frames: 168 bits, TTI = 20 ms / 360 bits, TTI =
20 ms
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-1
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-2
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-1
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-2
"BS with Rx Diversity"
4.5 dB
5.4 dB
4.3 dB
5.2 dB
"BS without Rx
Diversity"
7.5 dB
8.4 dB
7.3 dB
8.2 dB
Transport Block Size (TB) - Test Case 8.9.3
Sets the Transport Block Size:
168 bits
360 bits
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:PCPCh:CCODing:TYPE on page 564
7.2.3.16
Test Case 8.9.4 - Demodulation of CPCH Message in Multipath Fading Case 3
This test case is identical to test case 8.8.4 except from differing Eb/N0 ratio requirements and the demodulation of the CPCH Message instead of the RACH Message.
Test requirements in fading case 3 channel
Transport Block size TB and TTI in frames: 168 bits, TTI = 20 ms / 360 bits, TTI =
20 ms
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-1
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-2
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-1
Eb/N0 for required
BLER < 10-2
"BS with Rx Diversity"
8.1 dB
9.1 dB
7.9 dB
8.7 dB
"BS without Rx
Diversity"
11.4 dB
12.6 dB
11.3 dB
12.3 dB
7.3 Transmitter Tests
7.3.1 Basic Configuration
The test cases for transmitter tests require at least the following equipment layout for
the signal generator:
●
Digital Standard 3GPP FDD (R&S SMW-K42)
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
338
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Transmitter Tests
●
Arbitrary Waveform Generator (R&S SMW-B10),
●
Baseband Main module (R&S SMW-B13),
●
Frequency option (R&S SMWB10x).
Transmitter tests always require a separate measuring equipment to perform the tests,
e.g. the Vector Signal Analyzer R&S FSQ.
Test cases where the signal generator hardware equipment is not sufficient are shown
in grey color but are not selectable. RF power and frequency limitations of the hardware equipment restrict the setting ranges.
7.3.2 Test Case 6.4.2 - Power Control Steps
The test case requires the basic configuration.
It can be performed using the standard test setup according to TS 25.141. A vector signal analyzer is required, e.g. the Vector Signal Analyzer R&S FSQ.
For the signal generator, in case of two-path instruments signal routing to path A is
assumed.
Output RF A of the signal generator is connected to the Rx port of the base station.
The Tx signal of the base station is connected to the RF input of the analyzer via an
attenuator.
The signal generator will start signal generation at the first received BS frame trigger.
The analyzer is triggered by a marker signal ("Marker 1") of the generator.
The signal generator provides an uplink link signal with a precisely defined TPC bit
sequence. The base station responds to the TPC bits by controlling the transmitted
power of the data channel which is checked by the analyzer.
The analyzer measures the base station transmit power in the code domain to verify
the transmitter power control step tolerance and aggregated power control step range.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
339
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Transmitter Tests
7.3.2.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 6.4.2
The test case verifies that a BS receiver has the capability to adjust its transmit power
in response to the uplink TPC pattern. The cumulative power change as a result of ten
successive (identical) TPC bits is also checked (aggregated transmit power).
The test is passed when the single or aggregated power control steps are within tolerance throughout the total dynamic range at the test frequencies B, M, and T.
Quotation from TS 25.141
The power control step is the required step change in the code domain power of a
code channel in response to the corresponding power control command. The combined output power change is the required total change in the DL transmitter output
power of a code channel in response to multiple consecutive power control commands
corresponding to that code channel.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
340
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Transmitter Tests
Wanted Signal State - Test Case 6.4.2
Enables/disables the signal generation of the wanted 3GPP signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to On.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:STATe on page 565
Wanted Signal Frequency - Test Case 6.4.2
Sets the RF frequency of the wanted signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:FREQuency on page 564
Wanted Signal Level - Test Case 6.4.2
Sets the RF level in edit mode "User Definable".
In edit mode "According to Standard" the RF level is determined by the selected
"Power Class".
It is always 10 dBm above the reference sensitivity:
● "-120.3 dB + 10 dBm" when "Wide Area BS"
● "-110.3 dB + 10 dBm" when "Medium Range BS"
● "-106.3 dB + 10 dBm" when "Local Area BS"
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:POWer on page 565
Slot Format DPCCH - Test Case 6.4.2
Selects the slot format.
Slot formats 0 to 5 are available for the DPCCH channel. The slot format defines the
FBI mode and the TFCI status.
"Slot format 0"
no FBI field / TFCI on
"Slot format 1"
no FBI field / TFCI off
"Slot format 2"
1 FBI field / TFCI on
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
341
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Transmitter Tests
"Slot format 3"
1 FBI field / TFCI off
"Slot format 4"
2 FBI field / TFCI off
"Slot format 5"
2 FBI field / TFCI on
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:SFORmat on page 559
Overall Symbol Rate - Test Case 6.4.2
Sets the overall symbol rate of all the DPDCH channels.
The structure of the DPDCH channel table depends on this parameter. The overall
symbol rate determines which DPDCHs are active, which symbol rate they have and
which channelization codes they use.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:ORATe on page 563
Power Ratio DPCCH to DPDCH - Test Case 6.4.2
Sets the channel power ratio of DPCCH to DPDCH.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DCRatio on page 559
Propagation Delay - Test Case 6.4.2
Sets an additional propagation delay besides the fixed DL-UL timing offset of 1024 chip
periods.
Note: The additional propagation delay is achieved by charging the start trigger
impulse with the respective delay (= entering the value as an "External Delay" in the
3GPP "Trigger /Marker" dialog).
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:TRIGger[:EXTernal]:DELay
on page 566
TPC Start Pattern - Test Case 6.4.2
Sets the TPC pattern for initialization of the base stations power level in edit mode
"User Definable". The TPC start pattern is sent before the TPC repeat pattern.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the pattern is fixed to "Maximum Power Less n
Steps".
Note: In edit mode "According to Standard", the TPC bits are read out of predefined
data lists.
The TPC start pattern ensures that the base station responds reliably to the TPC bits
from the generator. It sets the base station to a defined initial state for the actual
recording of the measurement data. The analyzer is only triggered after the generation
of the start pattern using marker 1 of the generator.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
342
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Transmitter Tests
"Maximum Power Less n Steps"
A sequence of power up steps (TPC bits "1") is followed by a number
of power down steps (TPC bits "0").
A sufficiently long sequence of TPC bits "1" ('power up' commands)
forces the base station to maximum transmit power. By the n 'power
down' commands the base station is set to a defined number of n
power steps (e.g. 1 dB or 0.5 dB) below its maximum transmit power
at the beginning of the measurement.
"Data List"
The TPC start pattern is taken from a user defined data list. When
"Data List" is selected, a button appears for calling the "File Select"
window.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:SDATa on page 561
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:SDATa:DSELect
on page 562
TPC Power Up Steps - Test Case 6.4.2
If "TPC Start Pattern > Max. Pow. Less N Steps", sets the number of power up bits
("1") in the TPC start pattern. The total TPC start pattern length is the number of 'power
up' bits plus the number of n 'power down' bits.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:SDATa:PUSTeps
on page 562
TPC Power Down Steps - Test Case 6.4.2
If "TPC Start Pattern > Max. Pow. Less N Steps", sets the number of power down bits
('0') in the TPC start pattern. The total TPC start pattern length is the number of 'power
up' ('1') bits plus the number of n 'power down' ('0') bits.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:SDATa:PDSTeps
on page 562
TPC Repeat Pattern - Test Case 6.4.2
Sets the TPC pattern for verification of the base stations power control steps.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the selection is limited.
"Single Power Steps"
A 01 pattern is sent periodically for measurement of the transmitter
power control step tolerance.
"Aggregated Power Steps"
A 00000000001111111111 pattern is sent periodically for measurement of the transmitter aggregated power control step range. The
power of the base station is measured after 10 consecutive equal
TPC bits ('1' or '0').
"(All 1) Maximum Power"
A all 1 pattern is sent continuously. The base station is forced to maximum power. This selection is only available in edit mode "User Definable"
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
343
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Transmitter Tests
"(All 0) Minimum Power"
A all 0 pattern is sent continuously. The base station is forced to minimum power. This selection is only available in edit mode "User Definable"
"User Defined Pattern"
The TPC repeat pattern can be input. When "User Defined Pattern" is
selected, an input field appears for entering the pattern. The maximum bit pattern length is 64 bits. This selection is only available in
edit mode "User Definable"
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:RDATa:PATTern
on page 561
"Data List"
The TPC repeat pattern is taken from a data list. When "Data List" is
selected, a button appears for calling the "File Select" window.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:RDATa:DSELect
on page 560
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:RDATa on page 560
7.3.2.2
Carrying Out the Test Case 6.4.2 Measurement
For the preset Marker Configuration "Auto", Marker 1 starts delayed by the TPC start
pattern length.
Each slot takes 0.625 ms and consists of 2560 chips. Depending on the slot format 1
or 2 TPC bits are sent for each slot.
Table 7-16: The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value
Frequency
B, M and T
Test Model
2
Transmit power
Any
Scrambling Code
Any
1. Set the base station to the basic state
a)
b)
c)
d)
Initialize the base station,
Set the scrambling scheme,
Set the base station to test model 2,
Set the frequency
2. Set the signal generator to the basic state
a) Preset the signal generator unless some settings (e.g. in terms of I/Q and RF
blocks) have to be kept.
3. Set the analyzer to the basic state
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
344
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Transmitter Tests
a) Set the test case wizard
b) Open the 3GPP FDD menu in the baseband block
c) Open the Test Case Wizard and select Test Case 6.4.2.
The General Settings parameters are preset according to TS 25.141
d) Enter scrambling code and scrambling mode according to the base station
scrambling scheme.
e) Enter the power class of the base station under test. The RF level is automatically adjusted to the selected power class.
f) Enter the test frequency (e.g. M). It must be the same as the base station has
been set to.
g) Enter the Wanted Signal parameters.
h) Activate the settings with the "Apply Settings" button.
The signal generator is now ready to start signal generation
4. Set the analyzer to the measurement frequency
5. Switch on RF output
6. Start the measurement
a) Send a start trigger impulse from the base station to the signal generator and to
the analyzer.
Signal generation and measurement procedures are started.
7. Calculate the result
The analyzer calculates the resulting code domain power of the BS downlink channel.
7.3.3 Test Case 6.6 - Transmit Intermodulation
The test case requires the basic configuration.
It can be performed using the standard test setup according to TS 25.141. A vector signal analyzer is required, e.g. the Vector Signal Analyzer R&S FSQ.
For the signal generator, in case of two-path instruments signal routing to path A is
assumed.
RF port A is connected to the RF input of the analyzer via a circulator and an external
attenuator. The Tx Signal of the base station is connected to the RF input of the analyzer via a circulator.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
345
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Transmitter Tests
The signal generator outputs the test model interfering signal with different frequency
offsets in relation to the BS carrier frequency and provides the trigger for the analyzer
("Marker 1").
7.3.3.1
Test Purpose and Test Settings - Test Case 6.6
The test case verifies that a BS transmitter has the capability to inhibit intermodulation
products of non linear elements caused by the presence of an interfering signal at the
adjacent frequency channels from the signal generator.
The test is passed when the transmit intermodulation level is below an upper out of
band emission and spurious emission threshold at the test frequencies B, M, and T.
Quotation from TS 25.141
The transmit intermodulation performance is a measure of the capability of the transmitter to inhibit the generation of signals in its non linear elements caused by presence
of the wanted signal and an interfering signal reaching the transmitter via the antenna
The transmit intermodulation level is the power of the intermodulation products when a
WCDMA modulated interference signal is injected into an antenna connector at a
mean power level of 30 dB lower than that of the mean power of the wanted signal.
The frequency of the interference signal shall be 5 MHz, 10 MHz and 15 MHz offset
from the subject signal carrier frequency, but exclude interference frequencies that are
outside of the allocated frequency band for UTRA-FDD downlink specified in subclause
3.4.1.
The requirements are applicable for single carrier.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
346
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Transmitter Tests
BS Frequency - Test Case 6.6
Enters the RF frequency of the base station.
Note: In this test case the signal generator generates no wanted signal, but just the
interfering signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:BSSignal:FREQuency on page 549
BS RF Power - Test Case 6.6
Enters the RF power of the base station.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
347
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Transmitter Tests
Note: In this test case the signal generator generates no wanted signal, but just the
interfering signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:BSSignal:POWer on page 549
Interferer State - Test Case 6.6
Enables/disables the signal generation of the interfering 3GPP signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the state is fixed to "On".
NoteIn this test case the signal generator generates no wanted signal, but just the
interfering signal .
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:STATe on page 555
Interferer Mode - Test Case 6.6
Selects the interfering signal from a list of test models in accordance with TS 25.141.
All test models refer to the predefined downlink configurations. In edit mode "According
to Standard" Test Model 1, 64 DPCHs is fixed.
The following test models are available for selection in edit mode "User Definable":
● Test Model 1; 64 DPCHs
● Test Model 1; 16 Channels
● Test Model 1; 32 Channels
● Test Model 2
● Test Model 3; 16 Channels
● Test Model 3; 32 Channels
● Test Model 4
● Test Model 5; 38 Channels
● Test Model 5; 28 Channels
● Test Model 5; 8 Channels
Remote-control command: TM164
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:SETTing:TMODel:BSTation
on page 555
Frequency Offset - Test Case 6.6
Enters the frequency offset of the interfering signal versus the wanted signal.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the choice is limited to values between +/15 MHz in 5 MHz steps:
Remote-control command: -15 MHz
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:FOFFset on page 552
Interferer Level to Signal Level - Test Case 6.6
Enters the ratio of interfering signal level versus wanted signal level.
In edit mode "According to Standard" the value is fixed to - 30 dB:
Remote-control command: -30
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
348
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Transmitter Tests
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CNRatio on page 551
7.3.3.2
Carrying Out a Test Case 6.6 Measurement
The signal generator outputs the test model interfering signal.
Table 7-17: The following table lists the settings on the base station:
Parameter
Value
Frequency
B, M and T
Test Model
1
Transmit power
Maximum
Scrambling Code
any
1. Set the base station to the basic state
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Initialize the base station,
Set the scrambling scheme,
Set the base station to test model 1,
Set maximum transmit power,
Set the frequency
2. Set the signal generator to the basic state
a) Preset the signal generator unless some settings (e.g. in terms of I/Q and RF
blocks) have to be kept.
3. Set the analyzer to the basic state
4. Set the test case wizard
a) Open the 3GPP FDD menu in the baseband block
b) Open the Test Case Wizard and select Test Case 6.6.
The "General Settings" parameters are preset according to TS 25.141
c) Enter scrambling code and scrambling mode according to the base station
scrambling scheme.
d) Enter the power class of the base station under test. The RF level is automatically adjusted to the selected power class.
e) Enter the test frequency (e.g. M). It must be the same as the base station has
been set to.
f) Enter the Interfering Signal parameters.
g) Activate the settings with the "Apply Settings" button.
The signal generator is now ready to start signal generation
5. Set the analyzer to the measurement frequency
6. Switch on RF output
7. Start the measurement
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
349
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Performing Base Stations Tests According to TS 25.141
Transmitter Tests
a) Send a start trigger impulse from the base station to the signal generator and to
the analyzer.
Signal generation and measurement procedures are started.
8. Calculate the result
The analyzer calculates the out of band emission and the spurious emission.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
350
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
8 Remote-Control Commands
The following commands are required to perform signal generation with the 3GPP FDD
options in a remote environment. We assume that the R&S SMW has already been set
up for remote operation in a network as described in the R&S SMW documentation.
Knowledge about the remote control operation and the SCPI command syntax are
assumed.
Conventions used in SCPI command descriptions
For a description of the conventions used in the remote command descriptions, see
section "Remote Control Commands" in the R&S SMW user manual.
Common Suffixes
The following common suffixes are used in remote commands:
Suffix
Value range
Description
ENTity<ch>
1 .. 4
entity in a multiple entity configuration with separate basebad sources
ENTity3|4 require option R&S SMW-K76
SOURce<hw>
[1]|4
available baseband signals
only SOURce1 possible, if the keyword ENTity is used
OUTPut<ch>
1 .. 3
available markers
BSTation<st>
1 .. 4
Base station
If the suffix is omitted, BS1 is selected.
CHANnel<ch>
0 .. 138
channel
If the suffix is omitted, Channel1 is selected.
MSTation<st>
1 .. 4
user equipment.
If the suffix is omitted, MS1 is selected.
Using SCPI command aliases for advanced mode with multiple entities
You can address multiple entities configurations by using the SCPI commands starting
with the keyword SOURce or the alias commands starting with the keyword ENTity.
Note that the meaning of the keyword SOURce<hw> changes in the second case.
For details, see section "SCPI Command Aliases for Advanced Mode with Multiple
Entities" in the R&S SMW user manual.
The commands in the SOURce:BB:W3GPp subsystem are described in several sections, separated into general remote commands, commands for base station settings
and commands for user equipment settings.
This subsystem contains commands for the primary and general settings of the 3GPP
FDD standard. These settings concern activation and deactivation of the standard, set-
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
351
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
General Commands
ting the transmission direction, filter, clock, trigger and clipping settings, defining the
chip rate and the sequence length, as well as the preset and power adjust setting.
The commands for setting the base station and the user equipment, the enhanced
channels of the base and user equipment, as well as the commands for selecting the
test models and the test setups, are described in separate sections. The commands
are divided up in this way to make the extremely comprehensive SOURce:BB:W3GPp
subsystem clearer.
The following commands specific to the 3GPP FDD options are described here:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
General Commands.............................................................................................. 352
Filter/Clipping Settings.......................................................................................... 358
Trigger Settings.....................................................................................................362
Marker Settings..................................................................................................... 369
Clock Settings....................................................................................................... 372
Test Models and Predefined Settings................................................................... 373
Setting Base Stations............................................................................................378
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1................................................................. 426
User Equipment Settings...................................................................................... 447
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment......................................................... 532
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141.....................................................545
8.1 General Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PRESet............................................................................... 352
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:CATalog?...............................................................353
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:DELete.................................................................. 353
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:LOAD.................................................................... 353
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:STORe.................................................................. 354
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SLENgth..............................................................................354
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:STATe................................................................................ 354
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:WAVeform:CREate...............................................................355
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:GPP3:VERSion?.......................................................................... 355
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:PRESet.................................................................355
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:COPY:COFFset................................................................... 355
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:COPY:DESTination.............................................................. 356
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:COPY:EXECute................................................................... 356
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:COPY:SOURce....................................................................357
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:LINK................................................................................... 357
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:POWer:ADJust.....................................................................357
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:POWer[:TOTal]?.................................................................. 358
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PRESet
Sets the parameters of the digital standard to their default values (*RST values specified for the commands).
Not affected is the state set with the command SOURce<hw>:BB:W3GPp:STATe.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
352
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
General Commands
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:PRESet
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Set to default" on page 55
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:CATalog?
This command reads out the files with 3GPP FDD settings in the default directory. The
default directory is set using command MMEM:CDIRectory. Only files with the file
extension *.3g will be listed.
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
Example:
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/3gpp
sets the default directory.
BB:W3GP:SETT:CAT?
reads out all the files with 3GPP FDD settings in the default
directory.
Response: UPLINK,DOWNLINK
the files UPLINK and DOWNLINK are available.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Save/Recall" on page 55
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:DELete <Filename>
This command deletes the selected file with 3GPP FDD settings The directory is set
using command MMEM:CDIRectory. A path can also be specified, in which case the
files in the specified directory are read. The file extension may be omitted. Only files
with the file extension *.3g will be deleted.
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
<file_name>
Example:
BB:W3GP:SETT:DEL 'UPLINK'
deletes file UPLINK.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation:
See "Save/Recall" on page 55
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:LOAD <Filename>
This command loads the selected file with 3GPP FDD settings The directory is set
using command MMEM:CDIRectory. A path can also be specified, in which case the
files in the specified directory are read. The file extension may be omitted. Only files
with the file extension *.3g will be loaded.
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
<file_name>
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
353
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
General Commands
Example:
BB:W3GP:SETT:LOAD 'UPLINK'
loads file UPLINK.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation:
See "Save/Recall" on page 55
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:STORe <Filename>
This command stores the current 3GPP FDD settings into the selected file. The directory is set using command MMEM:CDIRectory. A path can also be specified, in which
case the files in the specified directory are read. Only the file name has to be entered.
3GPP FDD settings are stored as files with the specific file extensions *.3g.
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
string
Example:
BB:W3GP:SETT:STOR 'UPLINK'
stores the current 3GPP FDD settings into file UPLINK.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation:
See "Save/Recall" on page 55
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SLENgth <SLength>
Defines the sequence length of the arbitrary waveform component of the 3GPP signal
in the number of frames. This component is calculated in advance and output in the
arbitrary waveform generator. It is added to the realtime signal components (Enhanced
Channels).
When working in Advanced Mode (W3GP:BST1:CHAN:HSDP:HSET:AMOD ON), it is
recommended to adjust the current ARB sequence length to the suggested one.
Parameters:
<SLength>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to Max. No. of Frames = Arbitrary waveform
memory size/(3.84 Mcps x 10 ms).
1
Example:
BB:W3GP:SLEN 10
sets the sequence length to 10 frames.
Manual operation:
See "Current ARB sequence length" on page 106
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:STATe <State>
Activates the standard and deactivates all the other digital standards and digital modulation modes in the same path.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
0
354
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
General Commands
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:STATe ON
Manual operation:
See "State" on page 54
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:WAVeform:CREate <Filename>
This command creates a waveform using the current settings of the 3GPP FDD menu.
The file name is entered with the command. The file is stored with the predefined file
extension *.wv. The file name and the directory it is stored in are user-definable.
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
<file_name>
Example:
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/waveform'
sets the default directory to /var/user/temp/waveform.
BB:W3GP:WAV:CRE 'gpp3_bs'
creates the waveform file gpp3_bs.wv in the default directory.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation:
See "Generate Waveform" on page 55
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:GPP3:VERSion?
The command queries the version of the 3GPP standard underlying the definitions.
Return values:
<Version>
string
Example:
BB:W3GP:GPP3:VERS?
queries the 3GPP version.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "3GPP Version" on page 56
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:PRESet
The command produces a standardized default for all the base stations. The settings
correspond to the *RST values specified for the commands.
All base station settings are preset.
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:PRES
resets all the base station settings to default values.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Reset all Base Stations" on page 67
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:COPY:COFFset <COffset>
Sets the offset for the channelization code in the destination base station.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
355
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
General Commands
Parameters:
<COffset>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 511
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:COPY:COFF 10
the channelization code is shifted by 10 when the source base
station is copied to the destination base station.
Manual operation:
See "Copy Basestation/Copy User Equipment..." on page 68
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:COPY:DESTination <Destination>
The command selects the station to which data is to be copied. Whether the data is
copied to a base station or a user equipment depends on which transmission direction
is selected (command W3GPp:LINK UP | DOWN).
Parameters:
<Destination>
1|2|3|4
Range:
*RST:
1 to 4
2
Example:
BB:W3GP:LINK DOWN
selects the downlink transmit direction (base station to user
equipment).
BB:W3GP:COPY:SOUR 1
selects base station 1 as the source.
BB:W3GP:COPY:DEST 4
selects base station 4 as the destination.
BB:W3GP:COPY:EXEC
starts copying the parameter set of base station 1 to base station 4.
Manual operation:
See "Copy Basestation/Copy User Equipment..." on page 68
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:COPY:EXECute
The command starts the copy process. The dataset of the source station is copied to
the destination station. Whether the data is copied to a base station or a user equipment depends on which transmission direction is selected (command W3GPp:LINK
UP | DOWN).
Example:
BB:W3GP:COPY:EXEC
starts copying the parameter set of the selected source station
to the selected destination station.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Copy Basestation/Copy User Equipment..." on page 68
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
356
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
General Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:COPY:SOURce <Source>
The command selects the station that has data to be copied. Whether the station copied is a base or user equipment depends on which transmission direction is selected
(command W3GPp:LINK UP | DOWN).
Parameters:
<Source>
1|2|3|4
Range:
*RST:
1 to 4
1
Example:
BB:W3GP:LINK UP
selects the uplink transmit direction (user equipment to base station).
BB:W3GP:COPY:SOUR 1
selects user equipment 1 as the source.
BB:W3GP:COPY:DEST 4
selects user equipment 4 as the destination.
BB:W3GP:COPY:EXEC
starts copying the parameter set of user equipment 1 to user
equipment 4.
Manual operation:
See "Copy Basestation/Copy User Equipment..." on page 68
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:LINK <Link>
The command defines the transmission direction. The signal either corresponds to that
of a base station (FORWard|DOWN) or that of a user equipment (REVerse|UP).
Parameters:
<Link>
DOWN | UP | FORWard | REVerse
*RST:
FORWard|DOWN
Example:
BB:W3GP:LINK DOWN
the transmission direction selected is base station to user equipment. The signal corresponds to that of a base station.
Manual operation:
See "Link Direction" on page 56
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:POWer:ADJust
The command sets the power of the active channels in such a way that the total power
of the active channels is 0 dB. This will not change the power ratio among the individual channels.
Example:
BB:W3GP:POW:ADJ
the total power of the active channels is set to 0 dB, the power
ratio among the individual channels is unchanged.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Adjust Total Power to 0dB" on page 70
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
357
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:POWer[:TOTal]?
The command queries the total power of the active channels. After "Power Adjust", this
power corresponds to 0 dB.
Return values:
<Total>
float
Example:
BB:W3GP:POW?
queries the total power of the active channels.
Response: -22.5
the total power is -25 dB.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Total Power" on page 70
8.2 Filter/Clipping Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLIPping:LEVel....................................................................358
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLIPping:MODE...................................................................359
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLIPping:STATe.................................................................. 359
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CRATe?.............................................................................. 359
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CRATe:VARiation.................................................................360
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:APCO25..................................................360
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:COSine................................................... 360
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:GAUSs....................................................361
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:LPASs.................................................... 361
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:LPASSEVM............................................. 361
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:RCOSine.................................................361
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:SPHase...................................................362
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:TYPE........................................................................362
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLIPping:LEVel <Level>
The command sets the limit for level clipping (Clipping). This value indicates at what
point the signal is clipped. It is specified as a percentage, relative to the highest level.
100% indicates that clipping does not take place.
Level clipping is activated with the command SOUR:BB:W3GP:CLIP:STAT ON
Parameters:
<Level>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 100
100
Example:
BB:W3GP:CLIP:LEV 80PCT
sets the limit for level clipping to 80% of the maximum level.
BB:W3GP:CLIP:STAT ON
activates level clipping.
Manual operation:
See "Clipping Level" on page 262
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
358
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLIPping:MODE <Mode>
The command sets the method for level clipping (Clipping).
Parameters:
<Mode>
VECTor | SCALar
VECTor
The reference level is the amplitude | i+jq |
SCALar
The reference level is the absolute maximum of the I and Q values.
*RST:
VECTor
Example:
BB:W3GP:CLIP:MODE SCAL
selects the absolute maximum of all the I and Q values as the
reference level.
BB:W3GP:CLIP:LEV 80PCT
sets the limit for level clipping to 80% of this maximum level.
BB:W3GP:CLIP:STAT ON
activates level clipping.
Manual operation:
See "Clipping Mode" on page 263
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLIPping:STATe <State>
The command activates level clipping (Clipping). The value is defined with the command BB:W3GPp:CLIPping:LEVel, the mode of calculation with the command
BB:W3GPp:CLIPping:MODE.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:CLIP:STAT ON
activates level clipping.
Manual operation:
See "Clipping State" on page 261
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CRATe?
The command queries the set system chip rate. The output chip rate can be set with
the command SOUR:BB:W3GP:CRAT:VAR.
Return values:
<CRate>
R3M8
*RST:
Example:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
R3M8
BB:W3GP:CRAT?
queries the system chip rate.
Response: R3M8
the system chip rate is 3.8 Mcps.
359
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping Settings
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Chip Rate" on page 56
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CRATe:VARiation <Variation>
Sets the output chip rate.
The chip rate entry changes the output clock and the modulation bandwidth, as well as
the synchronization signals that are output. It does not affect the calculated chip
sequence.
Parameters:
<Variation>
float
Range:
400 to 5E6
Increment: 0.001
*RST:
3.84 MCps
Example:
BB:W3GP:CRAT:VAR 4086001
sets the chip rate to 4.08 Mcps.
Manual operation:
See "Chip Rate Variation" on page 260
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:APCO25 <Apco25>
The command sets the roll-off factor for filter type APCO25.
Parameters:
<Apco25>
float
Range:
0.05 to 0.99
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0.2
Example:
BB:W3GP:FILT:PAR:APCO25 0.2
sets the roll-off factor to 0.2 for filter type APCO25.
Manual operation:
See "Roll Off Factor or BxT" on page 260
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:COSine <Cosine>
The command sets the roll-off factor for the Cosine filter type.
Parameters:
<Cosine>
float
Range:
0 to 1
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0.35
Example:
BB:W3GP:FILT:PAR:COS 0.35
sets the roll-off factor to 0.35 for filter type Cosine.
Manual operation:
See "Roll Off Factor or BxT" on page 260
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
360
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:GAUSs <Gauss>
The command sets the roll-off factor for the Gauss filter type.
Parameters:
<Gauss>
float
Range:
0.15 to 2.5
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0.5
Example:
BB:W3GP:FILT:PAR:GAUS 0.5
sets B x T to 0.5 for the Gauss filter type.
Manual operation:
See "Roll Off Factor or BxT" on page 260
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:LPASs <LPass>
Sets the cut off frequency factor for the Lowpass (ACP opt.) filter type. The minimum/
maximum values depend on the current symbol rate:
Parameters:
<LPass>
float
Range:
0.05 to 2
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0.5
Example:
BB:W3GP:FILT:PAR:LPAS 0.5
the cut of frequency factor is set to 0.5.
Manual operation:
See "Cut Off Frequency Factor" on page 260
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:LPASSEVM <LPassEvm>
Sets the cut off frequency factor for the Lowpass (EVM opt.) filter type.
Parameters:
<LPassEvm>
float
Range:
0.05 to 2
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0.5
Example:
BB:W3GP:FILT:PAR:LPASSEVM 0.5
the cut of frequency factor is set to 0.5.
Manual operation:
See "Cut Off Frequency Factor" on page 260
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:RCOSine <RCosine>
The command sets the roll-off factor for the Root Cosine filter type.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
361
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Trigger Settings
Parameters:
<RCosine>
float
Range:
0 to 1.0
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0.22
Example:
BB:W3GP:FILT:PAR:RCOS 0.22
sets the roll-off factor to 0. 22 for filter type Root Cosine.
Manual operation:
See "Roll Off Factor or BxT" on page 260
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:PARameter:SPHase <SPhase>
The command sets B x T for the Split Phase filter type.
Parameters:
<SPhase>
float
Range:
0.15 to 2.5
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
2
Example:
BB:W3GP:FILT:PAR:SPH 0.5
sets B x T to 0.5 for the Split Phase filter type.
Manual operation:
See "Roll Off Factor or BxT" on page 260
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:FILTer:TYPE <Type>
The command selects the filter type.
Parameters:
<Type>
RCOSine | COSine | GAUSs | LGAuss | CONE | COF705 |
COEQualizer | COFequalizer | C2K3x | APCO25 | SPHase |
RECTangle | LPASs | DIRac | ENPShape | EWPShape |
LPASSEVM | PGAuss
*RST:
RCOSine
Example:
BB:W3GP:FILT:TYPE COS
sets the filter type COSine.
Manual operation:
See "Filter" on page 259
8.3 Trigger Settings
This section lists the remote control commands, necessary to configure the trigger.
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:ARM:EXECute........................................................363
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:EXECute................................................................363
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:EXTernal:SYNChronize:OUTPut...............................363
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OBASeband:DELay.................................................364
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OBASeband:INHibit.................................................364
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
362
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Trigger Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:RMODe?................................................................365
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:SLENgth................................................................ 365
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:SLUNit................................................................... 366
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:SOURce................................................................ 366
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger[:EXTernal]:DELay................................................... 367
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger[:EXTernal]:INHibit................................................... 368
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp[:TRIGger]:SEQuence............................................................368
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:ARM:EXECute
The command stops signal generation for trigger modes Armed_Auto and Armed_Retrigger. A subsequent internal or external trigger event restart signal generation.
Example:
BB:W3GP:TRIG:SOUR INT
sets internal triggering.
BB:W3GP:TRIG:SEQ ARET
sets Armed_Retrigger mode, i.e. every trigger event causes signal generation to restart.
BB:W3GP:TRIG:EXEC
executes a trigger, signal generation is started.
BB:W3GP:TRIG:ARM:EXEC
signal generation is stopped.
BB:W3GP:TRIG:EXEC
executes a trigger, signal generation is started again.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Arm" on page 59
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:EXECute
The command executes a trigger. The internal trigger source must be selected using
the command BB:W3GP:TRIG:SOUR INT and a trigger mode other than AUTO must
be selected using the command :BB:W3GP:TRIG:SEQ.
Example:
BB:W3GP:TRIG:SOUR INT
sets internal triggering.
BB:W3GP:TRIG:SEQ RETR
sets Retrigger mode, i.e. every trigger event causes signal generation to restart.
BB:W3GP:TRIG:EXEC
executes a trigger.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Execute Trigger" on page 59
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:EXTernal:SYNChronize:OUTPut <Output>
Enables/disables output of the signal synchronous to the external trigger event.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
363
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Trigger Settings
Parameters:
<Output>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
BB:W3GPp:TRIG:SOUR EXT
sets external triggering.
BB:W3GPp:TRIG:EXT:SYNC:OUTP ON
enables synchrounous output to external trigger
Manual operation:
See "Sync. Output to External Trigger" on page 59
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OBASeband:DELay <Delay>
Specifies the trigger delay (expressed as a number of samples) for triggering by the
trigger signal from the second path.
Parameters:
<Delay>
float
Range:
0 to 16777215
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:TRIG:SOUR OBAS
sets for path A the internal trigger executed by the trigger signal
from the second path (path B).
BB:W3GP:TRIG:OBAS:DEL 50
sets a delay of 50 symbols for the trigger.
Manual operation:
See "Trigger Delay" on page 61
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OBASeband:INHibit <Inhibit>
Specifies the number of chips by which a restart is to be inhibited following a trigger
event. This command applies only for triggering by the second path (two-path instruments only).
Parameters:
<Inhibit>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 67108863
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:TRIG:SOUR OBAS
sets for path A the internal trigger executed by the trigger signal
from the second path (path B).
BB:W3GP:TRIG:INH 200
sets a restart inhibit for 200 chips following a trigger event.
Manual operation:
See "External Trigger Inhibit" on page 60
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
364
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Trigger Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:RMODe?
The command queries the current status of signal generation for all trigger modes with
3GPP FDD modulation on.
Return values:
<RMode>
STOP | RUN
STOP
the signal is not generated. A trigger event did not occur in the
triggered modes, or signal generation was stopped by the command :BB:W3GP:TRIG:ARM:EXECute (armed trigger modes
only).
RUN
the signal is generated. A trigger event occurred in the triggered
mode.
*RST:
STOP
Example:
BB:W3GP:TRIG:SOUR EXT
sets external triggering.
BB:W3GP:TRIG:MODE ARET
selects the Armed_Retrigger mode.
BB:W3GP:TRIG:RMOD?
queries the current status of signal generation.
Response: RUN
the signal is generated, an external trigger was executed.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Running/Stopped" on page 58
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:SLENgth <SLength>
Defines the length of the signal sequence to be output in the Single trigger mode.
Parameters:
<SLength>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 4293120000
1
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:SEQuence SINGle
sets trigger mode Single.
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:SLUNit CHIP
sets unit chips for the entry of sequence length.
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:SLENgth 200
sets a sequence length of 200 chips. The first 200 chips of the
current frame will be output after the next trigger event.
Manual operation:
See "Trigger Signal Duration" on page 58
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
365
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Trigger Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:SLUNit <SLunit>
The command defines the unit for the entry of the length of the signal sequence
(SOUR:BB:W3GPp:TRIG:SLEN) to be output in the Single trigger mode
(SOUR:BB:W3GPp:SEQ SING).
Parameters:
<SLunit>
CHIP | FRAMe | SLOT | SEQuence
*RST:
SEQuence
Example:
BB:W3GP:SEQ SING
sets trigger mode Single.
BB:W3GP:TRIG:SLUN FRAM
sets unit frames for the entry of sequence length.
BB:W3GP:TRIG:SLEN 2
sets a sequence length of 2 frames. The current frame will be
output twice after the next trigger event.
Manual operation:
See "Signal Duration Unit" on page 58
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:SOURce <Source>
Selects the trigger signal source and determines the way the triggering is executed.
Provided are internal triggering by means of a command, external trigger singnal via
one of the provided local or global connectors and and triggering by a signal from the
other paths.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
366
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Trigger Settings
Parameters:
<Source>
INTB | INTernal | OBASeband | EGT1 | EGT2 | EGC1 | EGC2 |
ELTRigger | INTA | ELCLock | BEXTernal | EXTernal
INTernal
Internal
INTA | INTB
Internal trigger from the other baseband
EGT1 | EGT2
External global trigger
EGC1 | EGC2
External global clock
ELTRigger
External local trigger
ELCLock
External local clock
OBASeband|BEXTernal|EXTernal
Provided only for backward compatibility with other R&S signal
generators.
The R&S SMW accepts these values und maps them automatically as follow:
EXTernal = EGT1, BEXTernal = EGT2, OBASeband = INTA or
INTB (depending on the current baseband)
*RST:
INTernal
Example:
BB:W3GP:TRIG:SOUR INT
selects an internal trigger source
Manual operation:
See "Trigger Source" on page 59
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger[:EXTernal]:DELay <Delay>
Sets the trigger delay.
Parameters:
<Delay>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0 to 16777215
0.01
0
samples
Example:
BB:W3GP:TRIG:SOUR EXT
sets an external trigger.
BB:W3GP:TRIG:EXT:DEL 50
sets a delay of 50 symbols for the trigger.
Manual operation:
See "Trigger Delay" on page 61
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
367
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Trigger Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger[:EXTernal]:INHibit <Inhibit>
Specifies the number of samples by which a restart is to be inhibited following an external trigger event.
Parameters:
<Inhibit>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 21.47*chipRate
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:TRIG:SOUR EXT
selects an external trigger.
BB:W3GP:TRIG:EXT:INH 200
sets a restart inhibit for 200 samples following a trigger event.
Manual operation:
See "External Trigger Inhibit" on page 60
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp[:TRIGger]:SEQuence <Sequence>
The command selects the trigger mode.
Parameters:
<Sequence>
AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger | SINGle
AUTO
The modulation signal is generated continuously.
RETRigger
The modulation signal is generated continuously. A trigger event
(internal or external) causes a restart.
AAUTo
The modulation signal is generated only when a trigger event
occurs. After the trigger event the signal is generated continuously. Signal generation is stopped with command
SOUR:BB:W3GP:TRIG:ARM:EXEC and started again when a
trigger event occurs.
ARETrigger
The modulation signal is generated only when a trigger event
occurs. The device automatically toggles to RETRIG mode.
Every subsequent trigger event causes a restart.
Signal generation is stopped with command
SOUR:BB:W3GP:TRIG:ARM:EXEC and started again when a
trigger event occurs.
SINGle
The modulation signal is generated only when a trigger event
occurs. Then the signal is generated once to the length specified
with command SOUR:BB:W3GP:TRIG:SLEN. Every subsequent
trigger event causes a restart.
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
AUTO
368
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Marker Settings
Example:
BB:W3GP:SEQ AAUT
sets the Armed_auto trigger mode; the device waits for the first
trigger (e.g. with *TRG) and then generates the signal continuously.
Manual operation:
See "Trigger Mode" on page 58
8.4 Marker Settings
This section lists the remote control commands, necessary to configure the markers.
OUTPut<ch>
The numeric suffix to OUTPut distinguishes between the available markers.
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut:DELay:FIXed............................................. 369
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay................................................369
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MAXimum?.............................. 370
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MINimum?............................... 370
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:MODE................................................371
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:ONTime............................................. 371
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:OFFTime............................................371
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:PERiod.............................................. 372
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut:DELay:FIXed <Fixed>
The command restricts the marker delay setting range to the dynamic range. In this
range the delay can be set without restarting the marker and signal. If a delay is
entered in setting ON but is outside this range, the maximum possible delay is set and
an error message is generated.
The numeric suffix in OUTPut has no significance for this command, since the setting
always affects every marker.
Parameters:
<Fixed>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
Example:
BB:W3GP:TRIG:OUTP:DEL:FIX ON
restricts the marker signal delay setting range to the dynamic
range.
Manual operation:
See "Marker x Delay" on page 63
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay <Delay>
Defines the delay between the signal on the marker outputs and the start of the signal,
expressed in terms of chips.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
369
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Marker Settings
Parameters:
<Delay>
float
Range:
0 to 16777215
Increment: 1E-3
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:TRIG:OUTP2:DEL 16000
sets a delay of 16000 chips for the corresponding marker signal.
Manual operation:
See "Marker x Delay" on page 63
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MAXimum?
The command queries the maximum marker delay for setting :BB:W3GPp:TRIG:OUTP:DEL:FIX ON.
Return values:
<Maximum>
float
Increment: 0.001
Example:
BB:W3GP:TRIG:OUTP:DEL:FIX ON
restricts the marker signal delay setting range to the dynamic
range.
BB:W3GP:TRIG:OUTP:DEL:MAX
queries the maximum of the dynamic range.
Response: 20000
the maximum for the marker delay setting is 20000 chips.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Marker x Delay" on page 63
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MINimum?
The command queries the minimum marker delay for setting :BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut:DELay:FIXed ON.
Return values:
<Minimum>
float
Increment: 0.001
Example:
BB:W3GP:TRIG:OUTP:DEL:FIX ON
restricts the marker signal delay setting range to the dynamic
range.
BB:W3GP:TRIG:OUTP:DEL:MIN
queries the minimum of the dynamic range.
Response: 0
the minimum for the marker delay setting is 0 chips.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Marker x Delay" on page 63
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
370
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Marker Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:MODE <Mode>
Defines the signal for the selected marker output.
Parameters:
<Mode>
SLOT | RFRame | CSPeriod | SFNR | RATio | USER
SLOT
A marker signal is generated at the start of each slot (every
2560 chips or 0.667 ms).
RFRame
A marker signal is generated at the start of each frame (every
38400 chips or 10 ms).
CSPeriod
A marker signal is generated at the start of every arbitrary waveform sequence (depending on the selected arbitrary waveform
sequence length, see [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SLENgth).
If the signal does not contain an arbitrary waveform component,
a radio frame trigger is generated.
SFNR
A marker signal is generated at the start of every SFN period
(every 4096 frames).
RATio
A marker signal corresponding to the Time Off / Time On specifications in the commands [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:
TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:OFFTime and [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:ONTime is generated.
USER
A marker signal is generated at the beginning of every userdefined period. The period is defined with command [:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:PERiod.
*RST:
RFRame
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut2:MODE SLOT
selects the slot marker for the corresponding marker signal.
Manual operation:
See "Marker Mode" on page 62
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:ONTime <OnTime>
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:OFFTime <OffTime>
Sets the number of chips in a period (ON time + OFF time) during which the marker
signal in setting SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut:MODE RATio on the marker
outputs is OFF.
Parameters:
<OffTime>
integer
Range:
1 to 16777215
*RST:
1
Default unit: chip
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
371
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Clock Settings
Example:
BB:W3GP:TRIG:OUTP2:OFFT 2000
sets an OFF time of 2000 chips for marker signal 2.
Manual operation:
See "Marker Mode" on page 62
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:PERiod <Period>
For user marker, sets the repetition rate for the signal at the marker outputs, expressed
in terms of chips.
Parameters:
<Period>
integer
Range:
2 to 2^32-1 chips
Increment: 1 chip
*RST:
1 Frame (38 400 Chips)
Example:
BB:W3GP:TRIG:OUTP2:MODE USER
selects the user marker for the corresponding marker signal
BB:W3GP:TRIG:OUTP2:PER 1600
sets a period of 1600 chips, i.e. the marker signal is repeated
every 1600th chip.
Manual operation:
See "Marker Mode" on page 62
8.5 Clock Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:MODE <Mode>
Sets the type of externally supplied clock.
Parameters:
<Mode>
CHIP | MCHip
*RST:
CHIP
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:MODE CHIP
selects clock type Chip, i.e. the supplied clock is a chip clock.
Manual operation:
See "Clock Mode" on page 65
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:MULTiplier <Multiplier>
Sets the multiplier for clock type Multiplied.
Parameters:
<Multiplier>
integer
Range:
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
1 to 64
4
372
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Test Models and Predefined Settings
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:SOURce EGC1
selects the external clock source.
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:MODE MCHip
selects clock type multiplied, i.e. the supplied clock has a rate
which is a multiple of the chip rate.
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:MULTiplier 12
the multiplier for the external clock rate is 12.
Manual operation:
See "Chip Clock Multiplier" on page 65
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:SOURce <Source>
Selects the clock source.
Parameters:
<Source>
INTernal | EGC1 | EGC2 | ELCLock | EXTernal
INTernal
The instrument uses its internal clock reference
EGC1|EGC2
External global clock
ELCLock
External local clock
EXTernal
EXTernal = EGC1
Setting only; provided for backward compatibility with other R&S
signal generators.
*RST:
INTernal
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:CLOCk:SOURce INTernal
selects an internal clock reference.
Manual operation:
See "Clock Source" on page 65
8.6 Test Models and Predefined Settings
The provided commands gives you the opportunity to generate standardized or predefined test settings:
●
●
Test Models:
–
selection of test models for the downlink in accordance with 3GPP standard
25.141.
–
Selection of non-standardized test models for the uplink.
Predefined Settings:
Definition of Predefined Settings for base station 1 which enable the creation of
highly complex scenarios for the downlink by presetting the channel table of base
station 1. The settings take effect only after execution of command
BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:EXECute.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
373
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Test Models and Predefined Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:CRESt.............................................................374
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:DPCH:COUNt.................................................. 375
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:DPCH:SRATe.................................................. 375
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:EXECute......................................................... 375
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:SCCPch:SRATe............................................... 375
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:SCCPch:STATe............................................... 376
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:SCHannels...................................................... 376
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel:BSTation...................................................376
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel:BSTation:CATalog?................................... 377
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel:MSTation.................................................. 377
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel:MSTation:CATalog?...................................378
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:CRESt <Crest>
This commands selects the desired range for the crest factor of the test scenario. The
crest factor of the signal is kept in the desired range by automatically setting appropriate channelization codes and timing offsets.
The setting takes effect only after execution of command
BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:EXECute.
The settings of commands
●
BB:W3GP:BST<n>:CHAN<n>:CCODe and
●
BB:W3GP:BST<n>:CHAN<n>:TOFFset
are adjusted according to the selection.
Parameters:
<Crest>
MINimum | AVERage | WORSt
MINimum
The crest factor is minimized. The channelization codes are distributed uniformly over the code domain. The timing offsets are
increased by 3 per channel.
AVERage
An average crest factor is set. The channelization codes are distributed uniformly over the code domain. The timing offsets are
all set to 0.
WORSt
The crest factor is set to an unfavorable value (i.e. maximum).
The channelization codes are assigned in ascending order. The
timing offsets are all set to 0.
*RST:
MINimum
Example:
BB:W3GP:PPAR:CRES WORS
sets the crest factor to an unfavorable value.
Manual operation:
See "Crest Factor" on page 77
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
374
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Test Models and Predefined Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:DPCH:COUNt <Count>
Sets the number of activated DPCHs. The maximum number is the ratio of the chip
rate and the symbol rate (maximum 512 at the lowest symbol rate of 7.5 ksps).
Parameters:
<Count>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 512 (Max depends on other settings)
10
Example:
BB:W3GP:PPAR:DPCH:COUN 21
the predefined signal contains 21 DPCHs.
BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:EXECute
Manual operation:
See "Number of DPCH" on page 77
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:DPCH:SRATe <SRate>
This command sets the symbol rate of DPCHs.
The setting takes effect only after execution of command
BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:EXECute.
Parameters:
<SRate>
D7K5 | D15K | D30K | D60K | D120k | D240k | D480k | D960k
*RST:
D30K
Example:
BB:W3GP:PPAR:DPCH:SRAT D240K
sets the symbol rate of the DPCHs to 240ksps.
Manual operation:
See "Symbol Rate DPCH" on page 77
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:EXECute
This command presets the channel table of base station 1 with the parameters defined
by the PPARameter commands.
Example:
BB:W3GP:PPAR:EXEC
configures the signal sequence as defined by the :PPARameter
commands.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Accept" on page 77
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:SCCPch:SRATe <SRate>
The command sets the symbol rate of S-CCPCH.
The setting takes effect only after execution of command
BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:EXECute.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
375
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Test Models and Predefined Settings
Parameters:
<SRate>
D15K | D30K | D60K | D120k | D240k | D480k | D960k
*RST:
D30K
Example:
BB:W3GP:PPAR:SCCP:SRAT D240K
'sets the SCCPCH to 240 ksps.
Manual operation:
See "Symbol Rate S-CCPCH" on page 77
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:SCCPch:STATe <State>
Activates/deactivates the S-CCPCH.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:PPAR:SCCP:STAT ON
S-CCPCH is activated.
BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:EXECute
Manual operation:
See "Use S-CCPCH" on page 77
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:SCHannels <SChannels>
The command activates/deactivates the PCPICH, PSCH, SSCH and PCCPCH. These
"special channels" are required by a user equipment for synchronization.
The setting takes effect only after execution of command
BB:W3GPp:PPARameter:EXECute.
Parameters:
<SChannels>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
Manual operation:
0
See "Use Channels" on page 76
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel:BSTation <BStation>
Selects a standard test model for the downlink.
Parameters:
<BStation>
Example:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
string
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel:BSTation:
CATalog?
queries the list of available test models for the downlink transmission direction.
Response: Test_Model_1_16channels,...
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel:BSTation:
"Test_Model_1_64channels"
selects the test model Measurement: Spectrum emission mask
ACLR; 64 Channels.
376
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Test Models and Predefined Settings
Manual operation:
See "Test Models Downlink" on page 72
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel:BSTation:CATalog?
Queries the list of test models defined by the standard for the downlink.
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
Example:
see [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel:
BSTation on page 376
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Test Models Downlink" on page 72
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel:MSTation <MStation>
he command selects a test model that is not defined by the standard for the uplink.
Parameters:
<MStation>
string
DPCCH_DPDCH_60ksps
Preset, Uplink, UE1 on, DPDCH + DPCCH, Overall symbol rate
60 ksps.
DPCCH_DPDCH960ksps
Preset, Uplink, UE1 on, DPDCH + DPCCH, Overall symbol rate
960 ksps
TS34121_R6_Table_C_10_1_4_Subtest4
Uplink test model according to 3GPP TS 34.121 Release 6,
Table C.10.1.4.
TS34121_R8_Table_C_10_1_4_Subtest3
Uplink test models for transmitter characteristics tests with HSDPCCH according to 3GPP TS 34.121 Release 8, Table C.
10.1.4.
TS34121_R8_Table_C_11_1_3_Subtest2
Uplink test models for transmitter characteristics tests with HSDPCCH and E-DCH according to 3GPP TS 34.121 Release 8,
Table C.11.1.3.
TS34121_R8_Table_C_11_1_4_Subtest1
Uplink test model for transmitter characteristics tests with HSDPCCH and E-DCH with 16QAM according to 3GPP TS 34.121
Release 8, Table C.11.1.4.
Example:
BB:W3GP:SETT:TMOD:MST 'DPCCH_DPDCH960ksps'
selects the test model with a symbol rate of 960 ksps.
Manual operation:
See "Test Models Uplink" on page 74
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
377
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:SETTing:TMODel:MSTation:CATalog?
The command queries the list of non-standardized test models for the uplink.
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
Example:
BB:W3GP:SETT:TMOD:MST:CAT?
queries the list of available test models
Response: DPCCH_DPDCH960ksps,DPCCH_DPDCH_60ksps
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Test Models Uplink" on page 74
8.7 Setting Base Stations
The SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BSTation system contains commands for setting base stations. The commands of this system only take effect if the 3GPP FDD standard is activated, the DOWN transmission direction is selected and the particular base station is
enabled:
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:STATe ON
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:LINK DOWN
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BSTation2:STATe ON
BSTation<st>
The numeric suffix to BSTation determines the base station. The value range is 1 .. 4.
If the suffix is omitted, BS1 is selected.
CHANnel<ch>
In case of remote control, suffix counting for channels corresponds to the suffix counting with 3GPP FDD (channel 0 to channel 138). SCPI prescribes that suffix 1 is the
default state and used when no specific suffix is specified. Therefore, channel 1 (and
not channel 0) is selected when no suffix is specified.
The commands for setting the enhanced channels of base station 1 are described in
Chapter 8.8, "Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1", on page 426.
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:OCNS:STATe <State>
The command activates OCNS channels, as defined in the standard.
Four different OCNS scenarios are defined in the standard; one standard scenario, two
scenarios for testing HSDPA channels and one for enhanced performance type 3i
tests. The required scenario can be selected with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
W3GPp:BSTation:OCNS:MODE.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
378
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:OCNS:MODE STAN
selects the standard scenario.
BB:W3GP:BST:OCNS:STAT ON
activates the OCNS channels with the settings defined in the
standard.
Manual operation:
See "OCNS On" on page 82
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:OCNS:MODE <Mode>
The command selects the scenario for setting the OCNS channels.
Four different OCNS scenarios are defined in the standard; one standard scenario, two
scenarios for testing HSDPA channels and one for enhanced performance type 3i
tests.
Parameters:
<Mode>
STANdard | HSDPa | HSDP2 | M3I
*RST:
STANdard
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:OCNS:MODE HSDP
selects the scenario for testing the high-speed channels.
BB:W3GP:BST:OCNS:STAT ON
activates the OCNS channels with the settings defined in the
standard.
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "OCNS Mode" on page 82
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:OCNS:SEED <Seed>
In "3i" OCNS mode, sets the seed for both the random processes, the power control
simulation process and the process controlling the switch over of the channelization
codes.
Parameters:
<Seed>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 65535
dynamic
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "OCNS Seed" on page 83
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel:HSDPa:HSET:PRESet
Sets the default settings of the channel table for the HSDPA H-Set mode. Channels 12
to 17 are preset for HSDPA H-Set 1.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
379
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel12:HSDPa:MODE
HSET
selects H-Set mode.
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel12:HSDPa:
HSET:PRES
presets the H-Set.
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel12:TYPE?
Response: HSSC
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel12:HSDPa:
HSET:PREDefined?
Response: P1QPSK
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Preset HSDPA H-Set" on page 84
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel:PRESet
The command calls the default settings of the channel table.
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:CHAN:PRES
presets all channels of the base station.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Reset All Channels" on page 84
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:AICH:ASLOt <ASlot>
Selects the slot in which the burst is transmitted.
Suffix:
<ch0>
.
7..7
Parameters:
<ASlot>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 15
0
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel7:AICH:ASLOt
5
defines the slot to transmit the burst.
Manual operation:
See "Access Slot" on page 140
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:AICH:SAPattern
<SaPattern>
Enters the 16 bit pattern for the ACK/NACK field.
Parameters:
<SaPattern>
<16 bit pattern>
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
+000000000000
380
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel<ch0>:AICH:
SAPattern "+000000000000"
sets the bit pattern to "+000000000000" (ACK).
Manual operation:
See "Signature ACK/NACK Pattern" on page 140
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:APAIch:ASLOt
<ASlot>
Selects the slot in which the burst is transmitted.
Suffix:
<ch0>
.
8..8
Parameters:
<ASlot>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 15
0
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel8:APAIch:
ASLOt 5
defines the slot to transmit the burst.
Manual operation:
See "Access Slot" on page 140
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:APAIch:SAPattern
<SaPattern>
Enters the 16 bit pattern for the ACK/NACK field.
This field is used by the base station to acknowledge, refuse or ignore requests of up
to 16 user equipments.
Parameters:
<SaPattern>
<16 bit pattern>
*RST:
"+000000000000"
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN8:APAI:SAP
"+000000000000"
sets the bit pattern to "+" (ACK).
Manual operation:
See "Signature ACK/NACK Pattern" on page 140
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:CCODe <CCode>
The command sets the channelization code (formerly the spreading code number).
The range of values of the channelization code depends on the symbol rate of the
channel. The standard assigns a fixed channelization code to some channels (PCPICH, for example, always uses channelization code 0).
[chip-rate(=3.84Mcps) / symbol_rate] - 1
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
381
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
The slot format determines the symbol rate (and thus the range of values for the channelization code), the TFCI state and the pilot length. If the value of any one of the four
parameters is changed, all the other parameters will be adapted as necessary.
In the case of enhanced channels with active channel coding, the selected channel
coding also affects the slot format and thus the remaining parameters. If these parameters are changed, the channel coding type is set to user.
Parameters:
<CCode>
integer
Range:
0 to 511
Increment: 1
*RST:
depends on channel type
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN15:CCOD 123
sets channelization code 123 for channel 15 of base station 1.
Manual operation:
See "Channelization Code" on page 86
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DATA <Data>
The command determines the data source for the data fields of the specified channel.
For enhanced channels with channel coding, the data source is set with the command
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:DATA on page 434.
Parameters:
<Data>
PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt |
ZERO | ONE | PATTern
PNxx
The pseudo-random sequence generator is used as the data
source. Different random sequence lengths can be selected.
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command :BB:W3GPp:BST:CHANnel:DATA:DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used The bit pattern for the data is defined by the
command :BB:W3GPp:BST:CHANnel:DATA:PATTern.
*RST:
PN9
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CHAN13:DATA PATT
selects as the data source for the data fields of channel 13 of
base station 2, the bit pattern defined with the following command.
BB:W3GP:BST2:CHAN13:DATA:PATT #H3F,8
defines the bit pattern.
Manual operation:
See "Data" on page 87
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
382
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DATA:DSELect
<DSelect>
The command selects the data list for the DLISt data source selection.
The lists are stored as files with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the following commands is defined with the
command MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give
the file name, without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<DSelect>
string
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CHAN13:DATA DLIS
selects the Data Lists data source.
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/IqData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:W3GP:BST2:CHAN13:DATA:DSEL '3gpp_list1'
selects file '3gpp_list1' as the data source. This file must be
in the directory /var/user/temp/IqData and have the file
extension *.dm_iqd.
Manual operation:
See "Data" on page 87
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DATA:PATTern
<Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the PATTern selection. The maximum
length is 64 bits.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
64 bits
*RST:
#H0,1
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CHAN13:DATA:PATT #H3F,8
defines the bit pattern.
Manual operation:
See "Data" on page 87
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:MCODe
<MCode>
The command activates multicode transmission for the selected channel (ON) or deactivates it (OFF). The multicode channels are destined for the same receiver, that is to
say, are part of a radio link. The first channel of this group is used as the master channel. The common components (Pilot, TPC and TCFI) for all the channels are then
spread using the spreading code of the master channel.
Parameters:
<MCode>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
0
383
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CHAN12:DPCC:MCOD ON
activates the simulation in multicode mode for channel 12 of
base station 2.
BB:W3GP:BST2:CHAN13:DPCC:MCOD ON
activates the simulation in multicode mode for channel 13 of
base station 2. Channel 12 is the master channel.
Manual operation:
See "Multicode State (DPCCH)" on page 142
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:PLENgth
<PLength>
Sets the length of the pilot fields.
The range of values for this parameter depends on the channel type and the symbol
rate. The slot format determines the symbol rate (and thus the range of values for the
channelization code), the TFCI state and the pilot length. If the value of any one of the
four parameters is changed, all the other parameters will be adapted as necessary.
In the case of enhanced channels with active channel coding, the selected channel
coding also affects the slot format and thus the remaining parameters. If these parameters are changed, the channel coding type is set to user.
Parameters:
<PLength>
BIT2 | BIT4 | BIT8 | BIT16 | BIT0
*RST:
BIT4, bei S-CCPCH 0
Example:
SOURce1:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel12:DPCCh:PLENgth
BIT8
sets the length of the pilot fields for channel 12 of base station 1.
Manual operation:
See "Pilot Length" on page 139
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:POFFset:
PILot <Pilot>
Sets an offset to the set channel power for the pilot field.
Parameters:
<Pilot>
float
Range:
-10 to 10
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CHAN12:DPCC:POFF:PIL -2 dB
in the pilot field, sets an offset of -2 dB relative to the channel
power.
Manual operation:
See "Power Offset Pilot (DPCCH)" on page 146
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
384
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:POFFset:TFCI
<Tfci>
The command sets an offset to the set channel power for the TFCI field.
Parameters:
<Tfci>
float
Range:
-10 to 10
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CHAN12:DPCC:POFF:PIL -2 dB
in the TFCI field, sets an offset of -2 dB relative to the channel
power.
Manual operation:
See "Power Offset TFCI (DPCCH)" on page 146
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:POFFset:TPC
<Tpc>
The command sets an offset to the set channel power for the TPC field.
This setting is only valid for the DPCHs.
Parameters:
<Tpc>
float
Range:
-10 to 10
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CHAN12:DPCC:POFF:TPC -2 dB
in the TPC field, sets an offset of -2 dB relative to the channel
power.
Manual operation:
See "Power Offset TPC (DPCCH)" on page 146
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TFCI <Tfci>
The command enters the value of the TFCI field (Transport Format Combination Indicator) for the selected channel of the specified base station. The TFCI field is always
filled with exactly 10 bits with leading zeros.
Parameters:
<Tfci>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 1023
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CHAN12:DPCC:TFCI 22
sets the value 22 for the TFCI field of channel 12 of base station
2.
Manual operation:
See "TFCI Value" on page 139
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
385
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TFCI:STATe
<State>
The command activates the TFCI field (Transport Format Combination Identifier) for
the selected channel of the specified base station.
The slot format determines the symbol rate (and thus the range of values for the channelization code), the TFCI state and the pilot length. If the value of any one of the four
parameters is changed, all the other parameters will be adapted as necessary.
In the case of enhanced channels with active channel coding, the selected channel
coding also affects the slot format and thus the remaining parameters. If these parameters are changed, the channel coding type is set to user.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CHAN12:DPCC:TFCI:STAT OFF
sets that the TFCI field of channel 12 of base station 2 is not
used.
Manual operation:
See "Use TFCI" on page 138
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA
<Data>
Determines the data source for the TPC field of the channel.
Parameters:
<Data>
ZERO | ONE | PATTern | DLISt
DLISt
A data list is used. Use the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:
DSELect to define the data list file.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used. Use the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:
PATTern to define the bit battern.
*RST:
Example:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
ZERO
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation2:CHANnel13:DPCCh:TPC:
DATA PATTern
selects as the data source for the TPC field of channel 13 of
base station 2
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation2:CHANnel13:DPCCh:TPC:
DATA:PATTern #H3F,8
defines the bit pattern.
386
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation2:CHANnel13:DPCCh:TPC:
DATA DLIS
selects the data source.
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/IqData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation2:CHANnel13:DPCCh:TPC:
DATA:DSELect 'tpc_ch4'
selects the file tpc_ch4 as the data source.
Manual operation:
See "TPC Data Source (DPCCH)" on page 143
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:
DSELect <DSelect>
Selects the data list for the DLISt data source selection.
The lists are stored as files with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory is defined with the command MMEMory:CDIR. To access
the files in this directory, you only have to give the file name, without the path and the
file extension.
Parameters:
<DSelect>
<data list name>
Example:
see [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:
CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA on page 386
Manual operation:
See "TPC Data Source (DPCCH)" on page 143
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:
PATTern <Pattern>
Determines the bit pattern.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
64 bits
*RST:
#H0,1
Example:
see [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:
CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA on page 386
Manual operation:
See "TPC Data Source (DPCCH)" on page 143
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:MISuse
<MisUse>
The command activates "mis-" use of the TPC field (Transmit Power Control) of the
selected channel for controlling the channel powers of these channels of the specified
base station.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
387
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
The bit pattern (see commands :W3GPp:BSTation<n>:CHANnel<n>:DPCCh:
TPC...) of the TPC field of each channel is used to control the channel power. A "1"
leads to an increase of channel powers, a "0" to a reduction of channel powers. Channel power is limited to the range 0 dB to -60 dB. The step width of the change is
defined with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:
CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:PSTep.
Parameters:
<MisUse>
ON | OFF
*RST:
Manual operation:
0
See "Misuse TPC for Output Power Control (DPCCH)"
on page 145
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:PSTep
<PowerStep>
The command defines the step width for the change of channel powers in the case of
"mis-" use of the TPC field.
Parameters:
<PowerStep>
float
Range:
-10 to 10
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CHAN13:DPCC:TPC:PST 1 dB
sets the step width for the change of channel powers for channel
13 of base station 2 to 1 dB.
Manual operation:
See "TPC Power Step (DPCCH)" on page 145
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:READ
<Read>
The command sets the read out mode for the bit pattern of the TPC field.
The bit pattern is defined with the commands :BB:W3GPp:BST<i>:CHANnel<n>:DPCCh:TPC... .
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
388
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<Read>
CONTinuous | S0A | S1A | S01A | S10A
CONTinuous
The bit pattern is used cyclically.
S0A
The bit pattern is used once, then the TPC sequence continues
with 0 bits.
S1A
The bit pattern is used once, then the TPC sequence continues
with 1 bits.
S01A
The bit pattern is used once and then the TPC sequence is continued with 0 and 1 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on
by the symbol rate, for example, 00001111).
S10A
The bit pattern is used once and then the TPC sequence is continued with 1 and 0 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on
by the symbol rate, for example, 11110000).
*RST:
CONTinuous
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CHAN13:DPCC:TPC:READ S0A
the bit pattern is used once, after which a 0 sequence is generated (applies to channel 13 of base station 2).
Manual operation:
See "TPC Read Out Mode (DPCCH)" on page 144
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:
DATA <Data>
The command determines the data source for the TPC field of the channel.
Parameters:
<Data>
DLISt | ZERO | ONE | PATTern
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:
CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:DSELect
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used. The bit pattern for the data is defined by
the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:
CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:PATTern.
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
PATTern
389
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN11:FDPC:DPCC:TPC:DATA PATT
selects as the data source for the TPC field of channel 11 of
base station 1, the bit pattern defined with the following command:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN11:FDPC:DPCC:TPC:DATA:PATT
#H3F,8
defines the bit pattern.
Manual operation:
See "TPC Source" on page 152
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:
DATA:DSELect <DSelect>
The command selects the data list for the DLISt data source selection.
The lists are stored as files with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the following commands is defined with the
command MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give
the file name, without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<DSelect>
<data list name>
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN11:FDPC:DPCC:TPC:DATA DLIS
selects the "Data Lists" data source.
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/IqData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN11:FDPC:DPCC:TPC:DATA:DSEL
'tpc_ch4'
selects the file 'tpc_ch4' as the data source. This file must be in
the directory /var/user/temp/IqData and have the file
extension *.dm_iqd.
Manual operation:
See "TPC Source" on page 152
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:
DATA:PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the PATTern selection. The maximum bit
pattern length is 32 bits.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
64 bits
*RST:
#H0,1
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN11:FDPC:DPCC:TPC:DATA:PATT
#H3F, 8
defines the bit pattern for the TPC field of channel 11 of base
station 1.
Manual operation:
See "TPC Source" on page 152
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
390
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:
MISuse <Misuse>
The command activates "mis-" use of the TPC field (Transmit Power Control) of the
selected channel for controlling the channel powers of these channels of the specified
base station.
The bit pattern (see command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:
CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:PATTern) of the TPC field of each channel is used to control the channel power. A "1" leads to an increase of channel powers,
a "0" to a reduction of channel powers. Channel power is limited to the range 0 dB to
-60 dB. The step width of the change is defined with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:
BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:PSTep.
Parameters:
<Misuse>
ON | OFF
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN11:FDPC:DPCC:TPC:MIS ON
activates regulation of channel power for channel 11 of base station 1 via the bit pattern of the associated TPC field.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN11:FDPC:DPCC:TPC:PST 1dB
sets the step width for the change of channel powers for channel
11 of base station 1 to 1 dB.
Manual operation:
See "TPC For Output Power Control (Mis-) Use" on page 154
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:
PSTep <PStep>
The command defines the step width for the change of channel powers in the case of
"mis-" use of the TPC field.
Suffix:
<ch0>
.
11..138
Parameters:
<PStep>
float
Range:
-10.0 dB to 10.0 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN11:FDPC:DPCC:TPC:PST 1.5dB
sets the step width for the change of channel powers for channel
11 of base station 1 to 1.5 dB.
Manual operation:
See "TPC Power Step (F-DPCH)" on page 154
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:
READ <Read>
The command sets the read out mode for the bit pattern of the TPC field.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
391
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<Read>
CONTinuous | S0A | S1A | S01A | S10A
CONTinuous
The bit pattern is used cyclically.
S0A
The bit pattern is used once, then the TPC sequence continues
with 0 bits.
S1A
The bit pattern is used once, then the TPC sequence continues
with 1 bits.
S01A
The bit pattern is used once and then the TPC sequence is continued with 0 and 1 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on
by the symbol rate, for example, 00001111).
S10A
The bit pattern is used once and then the TPC sequence is continued with 1 and 0 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on
by the symbol rate, for example, 11110000).
*RST:
CONTinuous
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN11:FDPC:DPCC:TPC:READ S0A
the bit pattern is used once, after which a 0 sequence is generated (applies to channel 11 of base station 1).
Manual operation:
See "TPC Read Out Mode (F-DPCH)" on page 153
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:BMODe[:
STATe] <State>
The command activates/deactivates burst mode. The signal is bursted when on, otherwise dummy data are sent during transmission brakes.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
1
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:BMOD OFF
deactivates burst mode, dummy data are sent during the transmission brakes.
Manual operation:
See "Burst Mode" on page 100
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:CVPB <Cvpb>
The command switches the order of the constellation points of the 16QAM and 64QAM
mapping. The re-arrengement is done according to 3GPP TS25.212.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
392
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<Cvpb>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 3
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:CVPB 1
selects interchange of MSBs with LSBs.
Manual operation:
See "Constellation Version Parameter b - BS" on page 101
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:AMODe
<AMode>
Activates/deactivates the advanced mode in which the H-Set will be generated by the
ARB.
The parameter can be configured only for H-Sets 1 - 5.
For H-Sets 6 - 12 and User it is always enabled.
Parameters:
<AMode>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF (H-Sets 1..5); ON (H-Sets 6..12, User);
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:PRED P1QAM16
selects H-Set 1 (16QAM).
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:AMOD ON
enables advanced mode for the selected H-Set.
Manual operation:
See "Advanced Mode (requires ARB)" on page 105
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
ACLength <AcLength>
Sets the alternative number of HS-PDSCH channelization codes (see Chapter 4.13.9,
"Randomly Varying Modulation And Number Of Codes (Type 3i) Settings",
on page 118).
Parameters:
<AcLength>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 15 (max depends on other values)
5
Example:
SOURce:BB:W3GP:BST1:CHANnel12:HSDPa:HSET:
CLENgth 8
SOURce:BB:W3GP:BST1:CHANnel12:HSDPa:HSET:
ACLength 8
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Alternative Number of HS-PDSCH Channelization Codes"
on page 120
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
393
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
ALTModulation <ALTModulation>
Sets the alternative modulation (see Chapter 4.13.9, "Randomly Varying Modulation
And Number Of Codes (Type 3i) Settings", on page 118).
Parameters:
<ALTModulation>
QPSK | QAM16 | QAM64
*RST:
QAM16
Example:
:SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel12:HSDPa:
HSET:ALTModulation QPSK
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Alternative HS-PDSCH Modulation" on page 120
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
BCBTti<di>?
Displays the binary channel bits per TTI and per stream.
The value displayed is calculated upon the values sets with the commands:
●
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
MODulation<di>,
●
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:SRATe and
●
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
HSCCode.
Return values:
<Bcbtti>
float
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:TYPE MIMO
sets the H-set type.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:BCBT2?
queries the binary channel bits per TTI for stream 2.
Response: "4800"
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Binary Channel Bits per TTI (Physical Layer) Stream1/2"
on page 113
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
BPAYload<di>?
The command queries the payload of the information bit. This value determines the
number of transport layer bits sent in each subframe.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
394
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Return values:
<BPayload>
float
Range:
1 to 5000
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:BPAY2?
queries the payload of the information bit.
Response: "256"
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Information Bit Payload (TB-Size) Stream 1/2" on page 114
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
CLENgth <CLength>
The command queries the number of physical HS-PDSCH data channels assigned to
the HS-SCCH.
Parameters:
<CLength>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 15
5
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:CLEN?
queries the number of physical HS-PDSCH data channels
assigned to the HS-SCCH.
Response: "4"
Manual operation:
See "Number of HS-PDSCH Channelization Codes"
on page 110
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
CRATe<di>?
Queries the resulting coding rate per stream.
The coding rate is calculated as a relation between the "Information Bit Payload" and
"Binary Channel Bits per TTI".
Return values:
<CRate>
float
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:CRAT2?
queries the coding rate of stream 2.
Response: "0.658"
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
395
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Manual operation:
See "Coding Rate Stream 1/2" on page 114
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:DATA
<Data>
Selects the data source for the transport channel.
Parameters:
<Data>
ZERO | ONE | PATTern | PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 |
PN21 | PN23 | DLISt
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used. Use the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
DATA:PATTern to set the pattern.
DLISt
A data list is used. Use the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
DATA:DSELect to select the data list file.
*RST:
PN9
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN11:HSDP:HSET:DATA PATT
selects as the data source for the transport channel
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN11:HSDP:HSET:DATA:PATT #H3F,8
defines the bit pattern.
Manual operation:
See "Data Source (HS-DSCH)" on page 109
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:DATA:
DSELect <DSelect>
The command selects the data list for the DLISt data source selection.
The lists are stored as files with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the following commands is defined with the
command MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give
the file name, without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<DSelect>
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
string
396
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN11:HSDP:HSET:DATA DLIS
selects the Data Lists data source.
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/H-Sets'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN11:HSDP:HSET:DATA:DSEL
'hset_ch11'
selects the file hset_ch11 as the data source. This file must be
in the directory /var/user/temp/H-Sets and have the file
extension *.dm_iqd.
Manual operation:
See "Data Source (HS-DSCH)" on page 109
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:DATA:
PATTern <Pattern>
Determines the bit pattern for the PATTern selection.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
64 bits
*RST:
#H0,1
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN11:HSDP:HSET:DATA PATT
selects as the data source for the H-set
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN11:HSDP:HSET:DATA:PATT #H3F, 8
defines the bit pattern for the H-set.
Manual operation:
See "Data Source (HS-DSCH)" on page 109
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:HARQ:
LENGth <Length>
Sets the number of HARQ processes. This value determines the distribution of the
payload in the subframes.
Parameters:
<Length>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 6
0
Example:
SOURce1:BB:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel12:HSDPa:
HSET:HARQ:MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
SOURce1:BB:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel12:HSDPa:
HSET:HARQ:LENGth?
queries the number of HARQ processes.
Response:2
Manual operation:
See "Number of HARQ Processes per Stream" on page 115
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
397
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:HARQ:
MODE <Mode>
Sets the HARQ Simulation Mode.
Parameters:
<Mode>
CACK | CNACk
CACK
New data is used for each new TTI.
CNACk
Enables NACK simulation, i.e. depending on the sequence
selected for the parameter Redundancy Version Parameter
Sequence packets are retransmitted.
*RST:
CACK
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:AMOD ON
enables advanced mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:HARQ:MODE CNAC
sets Constant NACK HARQ Mode.
Manual operation:
See "Mode (HARQ Simulation)" on page 116
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
HSCCode <HsCCode>
Sets the channelization code of the HS-SCCH.
Parameters:
<HsCCode>
float
Range:
0 to 127
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:HSCC 10
sets channalization code 10 for the HS-SCCH.
Manual operation:
See "Channelization Code HS-SCCH (SF128)" on page 110
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
MODulation<di> <Modulation>
Sets the modulation for stream 1 and stream 2 to QPSK, 16QAM or 64QAM.
The modulation 64QAM is available for instruments equipped with option R&S SMWK83 only.
For HS-SCCH Type 2, the available modulation scheme is QPSK only.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
398
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<Modulation>
QPSK | QAM16 | QAM64
*RST:
QPSK
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:TYPE MIMO
sets MIMO operation mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:MOD1 QAM64
sets the modulation of stream 2 to 64QAM
Manual operation:
See "HS-PDSCH Modulation Stream1/2" on page 112
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
NAIBitrate?
Queries the average data rate on the transport layer (Nominal Average Information
Bitrate).
Return values:
<NaiBitrate>
float
Range:
1 to 5000
Increment: 0.1
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:NAIB?
queries the average data rate on the transport layer.
Response:"455"
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Nominal Average Information Bitrate" on page 106
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
PREDefined <Predefined>
The command selects the H-Set and the modulation according to TS 25.101 Annex A.
7.
Parameters:
<Predefined>
P1QPSK | P1QAM16 | P2QPSK | P2QAM16 | P3QPSK |
P3QAM16 | P4QPSK | P5QPSK | P6QPSK | P6QAM16 |
P7QPSK | P8QAM64 | P9QAM16QPSK | P10QPSK |
P10QAM16 | P11QAM64QAM16 | P12QPSK | USER
*RST:
P1QPSK
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:PRED P3QPSK
selects H-Set 3 (QPSK).
Manual operation:
See "Predefined H-Set" on page 104
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
399
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
PWPattern <PwPattern>
Sets the precoding weight parameter w2 for MIMO precoding.
The values of the weight parameters w1, w3 and w4 are calculated based on the value
for w2 (see Chapter 3.1.15, "MIMO in HSPA+", on page 36).
Parameters:
<PwPattern>
string
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:PWP "0,1,3"
selects the pattern.
Manual operation:
See "Precoding Weight Pattern (w2)" on page 108
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
RVParameter<di> <RvParameter>
The parameter is enabled for "HARQ Simulation Mode" set to Constant ACK.
The command sets the Redundancy Version Parameter. This value determines the
processing of the Forward Error Correction and Constellation Arrangement (QAM16
and 64QAM modulation), see TS 25.212 4.6.2.
For HS-SCCH Type 2 (less operation), the Redundancy Version Parameter is always
0.
Parameters:
<RvParameter>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 7
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:HARQ:MODE CACK
sets Constant ACK HARQ Mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:RVP 7
sets the Redundancy Version Parameter to 7.
BB:W3GP:BST1:TDIV ANT1
enables transmit diversity
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:TYPE MIMO
selects HS-SCCH Type 3 (MIMO).
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:RVP2 4
sets the Redundancy Version Parameter of stream 2.
Manual operation:
See "Redundancy Version Stream1/2" on page 116
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
RVPSequence<di> <RvpSequence>
The parameter is enabled for "HARQ Simulation Mode" set to Constant NACK.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
400
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Enters a sequence of Redundancy Version Parameters per stream. The value of the
RV parameter determines the processing of the Forward Error Correction and Constellation Arrangement (16/64QAM modulation), see TS 25.212 4.6.2.
The sequence has a length of maximum 30 values. The sequence length determines
the maximum number of retransmissions. New data is used after reaching the end of
the sequence.
For HS-SCCH Type 2 (less operation), the Redundancy Version Parameter Sequence
is a read-only parameter.
Parameters:
<RvpSequence>
string
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:AMOD ON
enables advanced mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:HARQ:MODE CNAC
sets Constant NACK HARQ Mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:TDIV ANT1
enables transmit diversity
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:TYPE MIMO
selects HS-SCCH Type 3 (MIMO).
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:RVPS2
'0,1,3,2,0,1,2,3'
sets the Redundancy Version Parameter sequence of stream 2.
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:TYPE LOP
selects HS-SCCH Type 2 (less operation).
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:RVPS?
queries the Redundancy Version Parameter sequence.
Response: 0,3,4
Manual operation:
See "Redundancy Version Sequence Stream 1/2" on page 117
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
RVSTate <RvState>
Enables/disables the random variation of the modulation and number of codes (see
Chapter 4.13.9, "Randomly Varying Modulation And Number Of Codes (Type 3i) Settings", on page 118).
Parameters:
<RvState>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BST1:CHAN12:HSDPa:HSET:RVSTate
ON
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Randomly Varying Modulation And Number Of Codes"
on page 120
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
401
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:SEED
<Seed>
Sets the seed for the random process deciding between the four option (see Chapter 4.13.9, "Randomly Varying Modulation And Number Of Codes (Type 3i) Settings",
on page 118).
Parameters:
<Seed>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 65535
0 for path A, 1 for path B
Example:
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BST1:CHANnel12:HSDPa:HSET:SEED
5
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Random Seed" on page 120
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
S64Qam <S64qam>
Enables/disables UE support of 64QAM.
This command is enabled only for HS-SCCH Type 1 (normal operation) and 16QAM
modulation.
In case this parameter is disabled, i.e. the UE does not support 64QAM, the xccs,7 bit
is used for channelization information.
Parameters:
<S64qam>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:TYPE NORM
selects HS-SCCH Type 1 (normal operation).
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:MOD QAM16
sets 16QAM modulation.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:S64Q ON
enables UE to support 64QAM
Manual operation:
See "UE Supports 64QAM" on page 113
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:SCCode
<SCcode>
Sets the channelization code of the first HS-PDSCH channel in the H-Set. The channelization codes of the rest of the HS-PDSCHs in this H-Set are set automatically.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
402
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Note: To let the instrument generate a signal equal to the one generated by an instrument equipped with an older firmware, set the same Channelization Codes as the
codes used for your physical channels.
Parameters:
<SCcode>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 15
8
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:SCC 10
sets channelization code of the first HS-PDSCH.
Manual operation:
See "Start Channelization Code HS-PDSCH (SF16)"
on page 110
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
SLENgth?
Queries the suggested ARB sequence length.
Return values:
<SLength>
integer
Range:
1 to max
Example:
see [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:
CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:SLENgth:ADJust
on page 403
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Advanced Mode (requires ARB)" on page 105
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
SLENgth:ADJust
Sets the ARB sequence length to the suggested value.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
403
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:AMOD ON
enables advanced mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:SLEN?
queries the suggested ABR sequence length.
Response: 21
BB:W3GP:SLEN?
queries the current ABR sequence length.
Response: 12
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:SLEN:ADJ
sets the ARB sequence length to the suggested value.
BB:W3GP:SLEN?
queries the current ABR sequence length.
Response: 21
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Adjust" on page 106
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
SPATtern<di>?
Queries the distribution of packets over time. A "-" indicates no packet
Return values:
<SPattern>
string
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN15:HSDP:TTID 3
sets the TTI
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:HARQ:LENG 2
sets the number of HARQ processes
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:SPAT1?
queries the signaling pattern for stream 1
Response: 0,-,-1,-,-
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Signaling Pattern Stream1/2" on page 115
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
STAPattern <StaPattern>
Enables/disables a temporal deactivation of Stream 2 per TTI in form of sending pattern.
The stream 2 sending pattern is a sequence of max 16 values of "1" (enables Stream 2
for that TTI) and "-" (disabled Stream 2 for that TTI).
Parameters:
<StaPattern>
string
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
1
404
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:STAP "11-"
selects the pattern.
Manual operation:
See "Stream 2 Active Pattern" on page 108
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:TPOWer
<Tpower>
Sets the total power of the HS-PDSCH channels in the H-Set.
The individual power levels of the HS-PDSCHs are calculated automatically and can
be queried with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:
CHANnel<ch0>:POWer.
Parameters:
<Tpower>
float
The min/max values depend on the number of HS-PDSCH
channelization codes ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:
BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:CLENgth)
and are calculated as follow:
min = -80 dB + 10*log10(NumberOfHS-PDSCHChannelizationCodes)
max = 0 dB + 10*log10(NumberOfHS-PDSCHChannelizationCodes)
Range:
dynamic to dynamic
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
-13.01
Example:
:SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BST1:CHAN12:HSDPa:MODE HSET
:SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BST1:CHAN12:HSDPa:HSET:
CLENgth?
Response: 5
:SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BST1:CHAN13:POWer -10
:SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BST1:CHAN12:HSDPa:HSET:TPOWer?
Response: -3.01029995663981 dB
:SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BST1:CHAN12:HSDPa:HSET:TPOWer
-5
:SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BST1:CHAN13:POWer?
Response: -11.9897000433602 dB
Manual operation:
See "Total HS-PDSCH Power" on page 111
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:TBS:
INDex<di> <Index>
Selects the Index ki for the corresponding table and stream, as described in in 3GPP
TS 25.321.
Parameters:
<Index>
integer
Range:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
0 to 62
405
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:TBS:TABL2 TAB0
selects Table 0 for stream 2.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:TBS:IND2 25
sets the Index ki
Manual operation:
See "Transport Block Size Index Stream1/2" on page 113
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:TBS:
REFerence <Reference>
While working in less operation mode, this command is signaled instead of the command BB:W3GP:BST:CHAN:HSDP:HSET:TBS:IND.
Parameters:
<Reference>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 3
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:TYPE LOP
selects less operation mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:TBS:TABL2 TAB0
selects Table 0 for stream 2.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:TBS:REF 2
sets the reference.
Manual operation:
See "Transport Block Size Reference Stream1/2" on page 113
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:TBS:
TABLe<di> <Table>
Selects Table 0 or Table 1 as described in in 3GPP TS 25.321.
For HS-PDSCH Modulation set to 64QAM, only Table 1 is available.
Parameters:
<Table>
TAB0 | TAB1
*RST:
TAB0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:TBS:TABL2 TAB0
selects Table 0 for stream 2.
Manual operation:
See "Transport Block Size Table Stream1/2" on page 113
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
406
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:TYPE
<Type>
Sets the HS-SCCH type.
Parameters:
<Type>
NORMal | LOPeration | MIMO
NORMal
Normal operation mode.
LOPeration
HS-SCCH less operation mode.
MIMO
HS-SCCH Type 3 mode is defined for MIMO operation.
Enabling this operation mode, enables the MIMO parameters [:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:
HSDPa:MIMO:CVPB<di>, [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:
BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:MIMO:
MODulation<di>, [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:
BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:MIMO:PWPattern
and [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:
CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:MIMO:STAPattern and all Stream 2
parameters.
*RST:
NORMal
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:TDIV ANT1
enables transmit diversity and antenna 1.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:TYPE MIMO
sets MIMO operation mode.
Manual operation:
See "HS-SCCH Type" on page 106
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
UECategory?
Queries the UE category number.
Return values:
<UeCategory>
integer
Range:
0 to 5000
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:PRED P3QPSK
selects H-Set 3 (QPSK).
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:UEC?
queries the UE Category.
Response: 5
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "UE Category" on page 106
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
407
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:UEID
<Ueid>
The command sets the UE identity which is the HS-DSCH Radio Network Identifier (HRNTI) defined in 3GPP TS 25.331: "Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol Specification".
Parameters:
<Ueid>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 65535
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MODE HSET
selects H-Set mode.
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:HSET:UEID 256
sets the UE identity.
Manual operation:
See "UEID (H-RNTI)" on page 110
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:
VIBSize<di> <VibSize>
Sets the size of the Virtual IR Buffer (Number of SMLs per HARQ-Process) per stream.
Parameters:
<VibSize>
integer
Range:
800 to 304000
Increment: 800
*RST:
9600
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:TDIV ANT1
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel12:HSDPa:
HSET:TYPE MIMO
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel12:HSDPa:
HSET:VIBSize1?
Response: 9600
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel12:HSDPa:
HSET:VIBSize1 300000
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel12:HSDPa:
HSET:VIBSize2 300000
Manual operation:
See "Virtual IR Buffer Size (per HARQ Process) Stream1/2"
on page 114
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:MIMO:
CVPB<di> <Cvpb>
The command switches the order of the constellation points of the 16QAM and 64QAM
mapping.
The re-arrengement is done according to 3GPP TS25.212.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
408
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<Cvpb>
0|1|2|3
Range:
*RST:
0 to 3
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MIMO:CVPB2 1
selects interchange of MSBs with LSBs for stream 2.
Manual operation:
See "Constellation Version Parameter b Stream 1/2 - BS"
on page 102
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:MIMO:
MODulation<di> <Modulation>
Sets the modulation for stream 1 and stream 2 to QPSK, 16QAM or 64QAM.
The modulation 64QAM is available for instruments equipped with option R&S SMWK83 only.
Parameters:
<Modulation>
QPSK | QAM16 | QAM64
*RST:
HSQP
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MIMO:MOD1 HS64Q
sets the modulation of stream 2 to 64QAM
Manual operation:
See "Modulation Stream 1/2 (HS-PDSCH MIMO)" on page 102
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:MIMO:
PWPattern <PwPattern>
Sets the precoding weight parameter w2 for MIMO precoding.
The values of the weight parameters w1, w3 and w4 are calculated based on the value
for w2 (see Chapter 3.1.15, "MIMO in HSPA+", on page 36).
Parameters:
<PwPattern>
string
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MIMO:PWP "0,1,3
selects the pattern.
Manual operation:
See "Precoding Weight Pattern (w2)" on page 102
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:MIMO:
STAPattern <StaPattern>
Enables/disables a temporal deactivation of Stream 2 per TTI in form of sending pattern.
The stream 2 sending pattern is a sequence of max 16 values of "1" (enables Stream 2
for that TTI) and "-" (disabled Stream 2 for that TTI).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
409
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<StaPattern>
string
*RST:
1
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MIMO:STAP "11-"
selects the pattern.
Manual operation:
See "Stream 2 Active Pattern" on page 102
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:MODE <Mode>
The command selects the HSDPA mode.
Parameters:
<Mode>
CONTinuous | PSF0 | PSF1 | PSF2 | PSF3 | PSF4 | HSET
CONTinuous
The high speed channel is generated continuously. This mode is
defined in test model 5.
PSFx
The high speed channel is generated in packet mode. The start
of the channel is set by selecting the subframe in which the first
packet is sent.
HSET
The high speed channels are preset according to TS 25.1401
Annex A.7, H-Set.
*RST:
CONTinuous
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:MODE PSF1
selects packet mode for channel 12. The first packet is sent in
packet subframe 1 (PSF1).
Manual operation:
See "HSDPA Mode" on page 100
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:TTIDistance
<TtiDistance>
The command selects the distance between two packets in HSDPA packet mode. The
distance is set in number of sub-frames (3 slots = 2 ms). An "Inter TTI Distance" of 1
means continuous generation.
Parameters:
<TtiDistance>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 16
5
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSDP:TTID 2
selects an Inter TTI Distance of 2 subframes.
Manual operation:
See "Inter TTI Distance (H-Set)" on page 100
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
410
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:POWer <Power>
Sets the channel power relative to the powers of the other channels. This setting also
determines the starting power of the channel for Misuse TPC, Dynamic Power Control
and the power control sequence simulation of OCNS mode 3i channels.
With the command SOURce:BB:W3GPp:POWer:ADJust, the power of all the activated channels is adapted so that the total power corresponds to 0 dB. This will not
change the power ratio among the individual channels.
Parameters:
<Power>
float
Range:
-80 to 0
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
depends on channel
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CHAN12:POW -10dB
sets the channel power of channel 12 of base station 2 to -10 dB
relative to the power of the other channels.
Manual operation:
See "Power" on page 86
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:SFORmat <SFormat>
The command sets the slot format of the selected channel. The value range depends
on the selected channel.
The slot format determines the symbol rate (and thus the range of values for the channelization code), the TFCI state and the pilot length. If the value of any one of the four
parameters is changed, all the other parameters will be adapted as necessary.
In the case of enhanced channels with active channel coding, the selected channel
coding also affects the slot format and thus the remaining parameters. If these parameters are changed, the channel coding type is set to user.
Parameters:
<SFormat>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to dynamic
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CHAN12:SFOR 8
selects slot format 8 for channel 12 of base station 2.
Manual operation:
See "Slot Format" on page 86
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:SRATe <SRate>
The command sets the symbol rate of the selected channel. The value range depends
on the selected channel and the selected slot format.
The slot format determines the symbol rate (and thus the range of values for the channelization code), the TFCI state and the pilot length. If the value of any one of the four
parameters is changed, all the other parameters will be adapted as necessary.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
411
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
In the case of enhanced channels with active channel coding, the selected channel
coding also affects the slot format and thus the remaining parameters. If these parameters are changed, the channel coding type is set to user.
Parameters:
<SRate>
D7K5 | D15K | D30K | D60K | D120k | D240k | D480k | D960k
*RST:
DPCHs D30K; CHAN1..10 D15K; DL-DPCCH
(CHAN11) D7K5;
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CHAN12:SRAT D120K
sets the symbol rate for channel 12 of base station 2 to 120
ksps.
Manual operation:
See "Symbol Rate" on page 86
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:STATe <State>
The command activates the selected channel.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CHAN12:STAT OFF
deactivates channel 12 of base station 2.
Manual operation:
See "Channel State" on page 88
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:TOFFset <TOffset>
Sets the timing offset.
Parameters:
<TOffset>
integer
For F-DPCH channels, the value range is 0 to 9.
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CHAN12:TOFF 20
defines a frame shift relative to the scrambling code sequence of
20*256 chips.
Manual operation:
See "Timing Offset" on page 87
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:TYPE <Type>
Sets the channel type.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
412
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<Type>
PCPich | SCPich | PSCH | SSCH | PCCPch | SCCPch | PICH |
APAich | AICH | PDSCh | DPCCh | DPCH | HSSCch | HSQPsk |
HSQam | HS64Qam | HSMimo | EAGCh | ERGCh | EHICh |
FDPCh | HS16Qam
The channels types of CHANnel0 to CHANnel8 are predefined.
For the remaining channels, you can select a channel type from
the relevant standard channels and the high-speed channels
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel12:TYPE
HSQPsk
selects channel type HS-PDS, QPSK for channel 12
Manual operation:
See "Channel Type" on page 85
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:
IFCoding <IfCoding>
Enables/disables the information coding.
Parameters:
<IfCoding>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
0|OFF
corresponds to a standard operation; no coding is performed
and the data is sent uncoded.
1|ON
you can configure the way the data is coded
*RST:
0
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel9:HSUPa:
EAGCh:IFCoding 1
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel9:HSUPa:
EAGCh:TTIEdch 2
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel9:HSUPa:
EAGCh:TTICount 2
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel9:HSUPa:
EAGCh:TTI0:UEID 100
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel9:HSUPa:
EAGCh:TTI0:AGVIndex 20
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel9:HSUPa:
EAGCh:TTI0:AGSCope PER
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel9:HSUPa:
EAGCh:TTI1:UEID 10000
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel9:HSUPa:
EAGCh:TTI1:AGVIndex 1
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel9:HSUPa:
EAGCh:TTI1:AGSCope ALL
Manual operation:
See "E-AGCH Information Field Coding" on page 147
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
413
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:
TTI<di0>:AGSCope <AGScope>
Sets the scope of the selected grant. According to the TS 25.321, the impact of each
grant on the UE depends on this parameter.
For E-DCH TTI = 10ms, the absolute grant scope is always ALL (All HARQ Processes).
Parameters:
<AGScope>
ALL | PER
Example:
see [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:
CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:IFCoding on page 413
Manual operation:
See "Absolute Grant Scope" on page 148
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:
TTI<di0>:AGVIndex <AgvIndex>
Sets the Index for the selected TTI. According to the TS 25.212 (4.10.1A.1), there is a
cross-reference between the grant's index and the grant value.
Parameters:
<AgvIndex>
integer
Range:
0 to 31
Example:
see [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:
CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:IFCoding on page 413
Manual operation:
See "Absolute Grant Value Index" on page 148
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:
TTI<di0>:UEID <Ueid>
Sets the UE Id for the selected TTI.
Parameters:
<Ueid>
integer
Range:
0 to 65535
Example:
see [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:
CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:IFCoding on page 413
Manual operation:
See "UEID (A-GCH)" on page 148
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:
TTICount <TtiCount>
Sets the number of configurable TTIs.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
414
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<TtiCount>
integer
Range:
1 to 10
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel9:TYPE EAGCh
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel9:HSUPa:
EAGCh:TTICount 5
Manual operation:
See "Number of Configurable TTIs" on page 147
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:
TTIEdch <Ttiedch>
Sets the processing duration.
Parameters:
<Ttiedch>
2ms | 10ms
*RST:
2ms
Example:
see [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:
CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:IFCoding on page 413
Manual operation:
See "E-DCH TTI" on page 147
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:
CTYPe <CType>
Sets the cell type.
Parameters:
<CType>
SERVing | NOSERVing
*RST:
Example:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
SERVing
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel9:TYPE EHICh
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel9:HSUPa:
EHICh:CTYPe SERVing
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel9:HSUPa:
EHICh:TTIEdch 2ms
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel9:HSUPa:
EHICh:SSINdex 2
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel9:HSUPa:
EHICh:DTAU 2
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel9:HSUPa:
EHICh:ETAU?
Response: 5
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel9:HSUPa:
EHICh:RGPAttern "+-+-"
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel9:HSUPa:
EHICh:CTYPe NOSERVing
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation1:CHANnel9:HSUPa:
EHICh:RGPAttern "+0+0"
415
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Manual operation:
See "Type of Cell" on page 149
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:DTAU
<Dtau>
Sets the offset of the downlink dedicated offset channels.
Suffix:
<ch0>
.
9..138
Parameters:
<Dtau>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 149
0
Example:
see [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:
CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:CTYPe on page 415
Manual operation:
See "Tau DPCH" on page 150
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:
ETAU?
Queries the offset of the P-CCPCH frame boundary.
Return values:
<Etau>
integer
Range:
0 to 149
Example:
see [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:
CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:CTYPe on page 415
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Tau E-RGCH/E-HICH" on page 150
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:
RGPAttern <RgPattern>
Sets the bit pattern for the ACK/NACK field.
Parameters:
<RgPattern>
<32-bit long pattern>
"+" (ACK) and "0" (no signal)
For the non serving cell
"+" (ACK) and "-" (NACK)
For the serving cell
*RST:
Example:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
+
see [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:
CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:CTYPe on page 415
416
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Manual operation:
See "ACK/NACK Pattern" on page 150
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:
SSINdex <SsIndex>
Sets the value that identifies the user equipment. The values are defined in TS 25.211.
Suffix:
<ch0>
.
9..138
Parameters:
<SsIndex>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 39
0
Example:
see [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:
CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:CTYPe on page 415
Manual operation:
See "Signature Hopping Pattern Index – HSUPA BS"
on page 150
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:
TTIEdch <Ttiedch>
Sets the processing duration.
Parameters:
<Ttiedch>
2ms | 10ms
*RST:
2ms
Example:
see [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:
CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:CTYPe on page 415
Manual operation:
See "E-DCH TTI" on page 149
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:
CTYPe <CType>
The command selects the cell type.
Parameters:
<CType>
SERVing | NOSERVing
*RST:
SERVing
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN9:HSUP:ERGC:CTYP SERV
selects the serving cell type.
Manual operation:
See "Type of Cell" on page 149
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
417
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:
DTAU <Dtau>
The command sets the offset of the downlink dedicated offset channels.
Parameters:
<Dtau>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 149
0
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSUP:ERGC:DTAU 5
sets the offset of the downlink dedicated offset channels.
Manual operation:
See "Tau DPCH" on page 150
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:
ETAU?
The command queries the offset of the P-CCPCH frame boundary.
Return values:
<Etau>
integer
Range:
0 to 149
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN12:HSUP:ERGC:ETAU?
queries the offset of the P-CCPCH frame boundary.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Tau E-RGCH/E-HICH" on page 150
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:
RGPAttern <RgPattern>
The command sets the bit pattern for the Relative Grant Pattern field.
Parameters:
<RgPattern>
string
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN10:HSUP:ERGC:RGPA "-"
sets the bit pattern to "-" (Down).
Manual operation:
See "Relative Grant Pattern" on page 150
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:
SSINdex <SsIndex>
The command sets the value that identifies the user equipment. The values are
defined in TS 25.211.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
418
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<SsIndex>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 39
0
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN9:HSUP:ERGC:SSIN 0
sets the value to identify the user equipment.
Manual operation:
See "Signature Hopping Pattern Index – HSUPA BS"
on page 150
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:
TTIEdch <Ttiedch>
The command sets processing duration.
Parameters:
<Ttiedch>
2ms | 10ms
*RST:
2ms
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN10:HSUP:ERGC:TTIE 2ms
sets the processing duration to 2 ms.
Manual operation:
See "E-DCH TTI" on page 149
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:DLFStructure <DlfStructure>
The command selects the frame structure. The frame structure determines the transmission of TPC and pilot field in the transmission gaps.
Parameters:
<DlfStructure>
A|B
A
Type A, the pilot field is sent in the last slot of each transmission
gap.
B
Type B, the pilot field is sent in the last slot of each transmission
gap. The first TPC field of the transmission gap is sent in addition.
*RST:
A
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CMOD:DLFS A
selects frame structure of type A.
Manual operation:
See "DL Frame Structure - BS" on page 95
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:METHod <Method>
The command selects compressed mode method.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
419
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<Method>
PUNCturing | HLSCheduling | SF2
PUNCturing
The data is compressed by reducing error protection.
HLSCheduling
The data is compressed by stopping the transmission of the data
stream during the transmission gap.
SF2
The data is compressed by halving the spreading factor.
*RST:
SF2
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CMOD:METH HLSC
selects compressed mode method High Layer Scheduling.
Manual operation:
See "Compressed Mode Method - BS" on page 95
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGD <Tgd>
Sets the transmission gap distances.
Parameters:
<Tgd>
integer
Range:
*RST:
3 to 100
15
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CMOD:PATT2:TGD 7
sets transmission gap distance of pattern 2 to 7 slots.
Manual operation:
See "Distance" on page 97
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGL<di> <Tgl>
Sets the transmission gap lengths.
Parameters:
<Tgl>
integer
Range:
*RST:
3 to 14
3
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CMOD:PATT2:TGL1 4
sets transmission gap length of gap 1 of pattern 2 to 4 slots.
Manual operation:
See "Gap Len:" on page 97
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGPL <Tgpl>
The command sets the transmission gap pattern lengths. Setting 0 is available only for
pattern 2.
The transmission gap pattern length of the user equipment with the same suffix as the
selected base station is set to the same value.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
420
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<Tgpl>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 100
2
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CMOD:PATT2:TGPL 7
sets transmission gap pattern length of pattern 2 to 7 frames.
Manual operation:
See "Pattern Len:" on page 98
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGSN <Tgsn>
Sets the transmission gap slot number of pattern 1.
Parameters:
<Tgsn>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 14
7
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CMOD:PATT:TGSN 4
sets slot number of pattern 1 to slot 4.
Manual operation:
See "At Slot:" on page 97
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>|MSTation<st>:CMODe:POFFset
<POffset>
The command sets the power offset for mode USER.
Parameters:
<POffset>
float
Range:
0 dB to 10 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2|UE2:CMOD:POFF 4
sets the power offset value to 4 dB.
BB:W3GP:BST2|UE2:CMOD:POM USER
selects power offset mode USER
Manual operation:
See "Power Offset" on page 96
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>|MSTation<st>:CMODe:POMode
<PoMode>
The command selects the power offset mode.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
421
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Parameters:
<PoMode>
AUTO | USER
AUTO
The power offset is obtained by pilot bit ratio as follows:
Number of pilots bits of non-compressed slots / Number of pilot
bits by compressed slots.
USER
The power offset is defined by command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
W3GPp:BSTation<st>|MSTation<st>:CMODe:POFFset.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2|UE2:CMOD:POFF 4
sets the power offset value to 4 dB.
BB:W3GP:BST2|UE2:CMOD:POM USER
selects power offset mode USER.
Manual operation:
See "Power Offset Mode" on page 96
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:STATe <State>
The command activates/deactivates the compressed mode.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:CMOD:STAT ON
activates compressed mode for base station 2.
Manual operation:
See "Compressed Mode State" on page 94
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:DCONflict:RESolve
The command resolves existing domain conflicts by modifying the Channelization
Codes of the affected channels.
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:DCON:STAT?
queries whether a code domain conflict exists for base station 2.
Response: 1
there is a conflict.
BB:W3GP:BST2:DCON:RES
resolves the code domain error by modifying the Channelization
codes of the affected channels.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Domain Conflict, Resolving Domain Conflicts" on page 89
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
422
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:DCONflict[:STATe]?
The command queries whether there is (response 1) or is not (response 0) a conflict
(overlap) in the hierarchically-structured channelization codes. The cause of a possible
domain conflict can be ascertained by manual operation in the "BS > Code Domain"
dialog.
Return values:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:DCON:STAT?
queries whether a code domain conflict exists for base station 2.
Response: 0
there is no conflict.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Domain Conflict, Resolving Domain Conflicts" on page 89
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:OLTDiversity <OltDiversity>
Activates/deactivates open loop transmit diversity.
The antenna whose signal is to be simulated is selected with the command [:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:TDIVersity.
Parameters:
<OltDiversity>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:TDIV ANT2
calculates and applies the output signal for antenna 2 of one
two-antenna system.
BB:W3GP:BST2:OLTD ON
enables open loop transmit diversity.
Manual operation:
See "Open Loop Transmit Diversity" on page 81
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:PINDicator:COUNt <Count>
The command sets the number of page indicators (PI) per frame in the page indicator
channel (PICH).
Parameters:
<Count>
D18 | D36 | D72 | D144
*RST:
D18
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:PIND:COUN D36
sets the number of page indicators (PI) per frame in the page
indicator channel (PICH) to 36.
Manual operation:
See "Page Indicators/Frame" on page 80
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
423
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:SCODe <SCode>
Sets the identification for the base station. This value is simultaneously the initial value
of the scrambling code generator.
Parameters:
<SCode>
integer
Range:
*RST:
#H0 to #H5FFF
#H0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:SCOD #H1FFF
sets the scrambling code
Manual operation:
See "Scrambling Code" on page 80
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:SCODe:STATe <State>
The command makes it possible to deactivate base station scrambling for test purposes.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
ON
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:SCOD:STAT OFF
deactivates scrambling for base station 2.
Manual operation:
See "Scrambling Code" on page 80
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:SCPich:PREFerence[:STATe] <State>
The command activates or deactivates the use of S-CPICH as reference phase.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:SCP:PREF ON
activates the use of S-CPICH as reference phase for base station 2.
Manual operation:
See "S-CPICH as Phase Reference" on page 81
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:SSCG?
The command queries the secondary synchronization code group. This parameter is
specified in the table defined by the 3GPP standard "Allocation of SSCs for secondary
SCH". This table assigns a specific spreading code to the synchronization code symbol
for every slot in the frame. The value is calculated from the scrambling code.
Return values:
<Sscg>
integer
Range:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
0 to 63
424
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting Base Stations
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:SSCG?
queries the 2nd search code group for base station 2.
Response: 24
the base station is part of second search group 24.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "2nd Search Code Group" on page 80
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:STATe <State>
Activates and deactivates the specified base station.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1 (BSTation1), 0 (all other)
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:STAT OFF
deactivates base station 2.
Manual operation:
See "Select Basestation/User Equipment" on page 69
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:TDELay <Tdelay>
The command sets the time shift of the selected base station compared to base station
1 in chips.
Parameters:
<Tdelay>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 chips to 38400 chips
0 chips
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:TDEL 256
shifts base station 2 by 256 chips compared to base station 1.
Manual operation:
See "Time Delay" on page 81
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:TDIVersity <TDiversity>
Selects the antenna and the antenna configuration to be simulated.
To simulate transmit diversity, a two-antenna system has to be selected and Open
Loop Transmit Diversity has to be activated (command BB:W3GP:BST:OLTD ON).
Parameters:
<TDiversity>
SANT | ANT1 | ANT2 | OFF
SANT = single-antenna system
*RST:
SANT
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:TDIV ANT2
the signal of antenna 2 of one two-antenna system is simulated.
Manual operation:
See "Diversity / MIMO" on page 81
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
425
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
8.8 Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
The SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced subsystem contains the commands
for setting the enhanced channels of base station 1. The commands of this system
only take effect when the 3GPP FDD standard is activated, the downlink transmission
direction is selected, base station 1 is enabled and enhanced channels are activated:
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:STATe ON
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:LINK DOWN
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BST1:STATe ON
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BST:ENHanced:CHANnel<11...13>:DPCH:STATe ON
or
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BST:ENHanced:PCCPch:STATe ON
BSTation<st>
The numeric suffix to BSTation determines the base station. Enhanced channels are
enabled for base station 1 only.
CHANnel<ch0>
The value range is CHANnel<11|12|13> for enhanced DPCHs and CHANnel<4> for
P-CCPCH.
TCHannel<di>
The transport channel designations for remote control are TCHannel0 for DCCH,
TCHannel1 to TCHannel6 for DTCH1 to DTCH6.
8.8.1 General Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:STATe................ 426
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:STATe.................................... 427
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:ENHanced:PCPich:PATTern.............................427
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:STATe
<State>
The command switches the selected channel to the enhanced state.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:STAT ON
switches DPCH 13 to Enhanced State.
Manual operation:
See "Enhanced State" on page 124
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
426
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:STATe <State>
The command activates or deactivates the enhanced state of the P-CCPCH (BCH).
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:PCCP:STAT ON
switches the P-CCPCH to Enhanced State.
Manual operation:
See "State (Enhanced P-CCPCH)" on page 122
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:ENHanced:PCPich:PATTern <Pattern>
Sets the P-CPICh pattern (channel 0).
Parameters:
<Pattern>
ANT1 | ANT2
*RST:
ANT1
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST2:ENH:PCP:PATT ANT2
sets the P-CPICH Pattern to Antenna 2.
Manual operation:
See "P-CPICH Pattern " on page 121
8.8.2 Channel Coding
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel:DPCH:CCODing:USER:
DELete............................................................................................................... 428
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:
BPFRame?......................................................................................................... 428
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:
SFORmat............................................................................................................429
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:
SRATe?..............................................................................................................429
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:STATe. 430
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:TYPE... 430
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel:DPCH:CCODing:USER:
CATalog?............................................................................................................432
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:
USER:LOAD....................................................................................................... 432
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:
USER:STORe..................................................................................................... 432
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:INTerleaver2....... 433
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:CRCSize..................................................................................... 433
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:DATA..........................................................................................434
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:DATA:DSELect............................................................................ 434
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
427
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:DATA:PATTern............................................................................ 435
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:DTX............................................................................................ 435
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:EPRotection................................................................................ 435
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:INTerleaver..................................................................................436
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:RMATtribute................................................................................ 436
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:STATe........................................................................................ 437
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:TBCount......................................................................................437
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:TBSize........................................................................................ 437
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:TTINterval................................................................................... 438
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:CCODing:INTerleaver<di>........ 438
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:CCODing:STATe......................438
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:CCODing:TYPE?..................... 438
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel:DPCH:CCODing:
USER:DELete <Filename>
Deletes the specified files with stored user channel codings.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.3g_ccod_dl in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file
name, without the path and the file extension.
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
string
Example:
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/CcodDpchUser'
selects the directory for the user channel coding files.
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN:DPCH:CCOD:USER:DEL
'user_cc1'
deletes the specified file with user coding.
Usage:
Setting only
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
CCODing:BPFRame?
Queries the number of data bits in the DPDCH component of the frame at the physical
layer.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
428
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
Return values:
<BpFrame>
integer
Range:
*RST:
30 to 20000
510
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:CCOD:BPFR?
queries the number of data bits.
Response: 1
the number of data bits is 1.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Bits per Frame (DPDCH)" on page 128
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
CCODing:SFORmat <SFormat>
The command sets the slot format for the selected enhanced DPCH of base station 1.
The slot format is fixed for channel-coded measurement channels conforming to the
standard - "Reference Measurement Channel". Changing the slot format automatically
activates User coding (W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN<11...13>:DPCH:CCOD:TYPE USER).
The slot format also fixes the symbol rate, bits per frame, pilot length and TFCI state
parameters.
When a channel coding type conforming to the standard is selected ([:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
CCODing:TYPE) and channel coding is activated, the slot format is ([:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
CCODing:STATe) automatically set to the associated value.
Changing the slot format automatically activates User coding
(W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN<11...13>:DPCH:CCOD:TYPE USER).
The command sets the symbol rate (W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN:DPCH:CCOD:SRAT), the
bits per frame (W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN:DPCH:CCOD:BPFR), the pilot length
(W3GP:BST1:CHAN:DPCC:PLEN), and the TFCI state (W3GP:BST1:CHAN:DPCC:
TFCI STAT) to the associated values.
Parameters:
<SFormat>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to dynamic
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:CCOD:SFOR 4
sets slot format 4 for Enhanced DPCH13.
Manual operation:
See "Slot Format (DPDCH)" on page 128
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
CCODing:SRATe?
The command queries the symbol rate.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
429
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
The symbol rate depends on the selected slot format ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:
BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:SFORmat), and if the slot
format changes, this changes automatically as well.
Return values:
<SRate>
D7K5 | D15K | D30K | D60K | D120k | D240k | D480k | D960k |
D1920k | D2880k | D3840k | D4800k | D5760k | D2X1920K |
D2X960K2X1920K
*RST:
D30K
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:CCOD:SRAT?
queries the symbol rate.
Response: 'D30K'
the symbol rate of Enhanced DPCH 13 is 30 ksps.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Symbol Rate (DPDCH)" on page 128
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
CCODing:STATe <State>
The command activates or deactivates channel coding for the selected enhanced
DPCH.
When channel coding is activated and a channel coding type conforming to the standard is selected, (BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN:DPCH:CCOD:TYPE) the slot format,
(BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN:DPCH:CCOD:SFOR) and thus the symbol rate,
(BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN:DPCH:CCOD:SRAT) the bits per frame,
(BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN:DPCH:CCOD:BPFR), the pilot length
(BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN:DPCC:PLEN) and the TFCI state
(BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN:DPCC:TFCI STAT) are set to the associated values.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:CCOD:TYPE M12K2
selects channel coding type RMC 12.2 kbps for Enhanced
DPCH 13.
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:CCOD:STAT ON
activates channel coding.
Manual operation:
See "Channel Coding State" on page 126
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
CCODing:TYPE <Type>
The command selects the channel coding scheme in accordance with the 3GPP specification.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
430
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
The 3GPP specification defines 4 reference measurement channel coding types, which
differ in the input data bit rate to be processed (12.2, 64, 144 and 384 ksps). The additional AMR CODER coding scheme generates the coding of a voice channel. The
BTFD coding types with different data rates are also defined in the 3GPP specification
(TS 34.121). They are used for the receiver quality test Blind Transport Format Detection.
When a channel coding type conforms to the standard and channel coding is activated,
(:BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN<n>:DPCH:CCOD:STAT) the slot format
(:BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN<n>:DPCH:CCOD:SFOR) and thus the symbol rate
(:BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN<n>:DPCH:CCOD:SRAT), the bits per frame,
(:BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN<n>:DPCH:CCOD:BPFR), the pilot length
(:BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN<n>:DPCC:PLEN) and the TFCI state
(:BB:W3GP:BST1:CHAN<n>:DPCC:TFCI:STAT) are set to the associated values.
Parameters:
<Type>
M12K2 | M64K | M144k | M384k | AMR | BTFD1 | BTFD2 |
BTFD3
M12K2
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of 12.2 ksps.
M64K
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of 64 ksps.
M144k
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of 144 ksps.
M384k
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of 384 ksps.
AMR
Channel coding for the AMR Coder (coding a voice channel).
USER
This parameter cannot be set. USER is returned whenever a
user-defined channel coding is active, that is to say, after a
channel coding parameter has been changed or a user coding
file has been loaded. The file is loaded by the command [:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:
CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:USER:LOAD.
BTFD1
Blind Transport Format Detection Rate 1 (12.2 kbps).
BTFD2
Blind Transport Format Detection Rate 2 (7.95 kbps).
BTFD3
Blind Transport Format Detection Rate 3 (1.95 kbps).
*RST:
M12K2
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:CCOD:TYPE M144
selects channel coding scheme RMC 144 kbps.
Manual operation:
See "Channel Coding Type" on page 127
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
431
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel:DPCH:CCODing:
USER:CATalog?
Queries existing files with stored user channel codings.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.3g_ccod_dl in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR.
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
Example:
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/CcodDpchUser'
selects the directory for the user channel coding files.
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN:DPCH:CCOD:USER:CAT?
queries the existing files with user coding.
Response: user_cc1
there is one file with user coding.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "User Coding" on page 127
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
CCODing:USER:LOAD <Filename>
The command loads the specified files with stored user channel codings.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.3g_ccod_dl in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file
name, without the path and the file extension.
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
<user_coding>
Example:
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/CcodDpchUser'
selects the directory for the user channel coding files.
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:CCOD:USER:LOAD
'user_cc1'
loads the specified file with user coding.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation:
See "User Coding" on page 127
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
CCODing:USER:STORe <Filename>
The command saves the current settings for channel coding as user channel coding in
the specified file.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
432
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.3g_ccod_dl in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory in which the file is stored is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. To store the files in this directory, you only have to give the file name,
without the path and the file extension.
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
string
Example:
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/CcodDpchUser'
selects the directory for the user channel coding files.
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:CCOD:USER:STOR
'user_cc1'
saves the current channel coding setting in file user_cc1 in
directory /var/user/temp/CcodDpchUser.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation:
See "User Coding" on page 127
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
INTerleaver2 <Interleaver2>
The command activates or deactivates channel coding interleaver state 2 for the
selected channel.
Interleaver state 2 is activated or deactivated for all the transport channels together.
Interleaver state 1 can be activated and deactivated for each transport channel individually (command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:
CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di0>:INTerleaver).
Note: The interleaver states do not cause the symbol rate to change.
Parameters:
<Interleaver2>
ON | OFF
*RST:
ON
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:INT OFF
deactivates channel coding interleaver state 2 for all the TCHs of
DPCH13.
Manual operation:
See "Interleaver 2 State" on page 131
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:CRCSize <CrcSize>
The command defines the CRC length for the selected transport channel. It is also
possible to deactivate checksum determination.
Parameters:
<CrcSize>
NONE | 8 | 12 | 16 | 24
*RST:
Example:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
16
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:TCH0:CRCS NONE
deactivates checksum determination for the DCCH of DPCH13.
433
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
Manual operation:
See "Size of CRC" on page 130
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:DATA <Data>
The command determines the data source for the data fields of enhanced channels
with channel coding. If channel coding is not active, the DPCH data source is used
(:SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BST:CHANnel:DATA).
Parameters:
<Data>
PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt |
ZERO | ONE | PATTern |
PNxx
The pseudo-random sequence generator is used as the data
source. Different random sequence lengths can be selected.
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:
CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di0>:DATA:DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used The bit pattern for the data is defined with
the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:
ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di0>:DATA:
PATTern.
*RST:
PN9
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:TCH1:DATA PATT
selects the Pattern data source for the data fields of DTCH1 of
DPCH13. The bit pattern is defined with the following command.
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:TCH1:DATA:PATT
#H3F,8
defines the bit pattern.
Manual operation:
See "Data Source" on page 129
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:DATA:DSELect <DSelect>
The command selects the data list for enhanced channels for the DLISt selection.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file name,
without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<DSelect>
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
string
434
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:TCH1:DATA DLIS
selects the Data Lists data source for DTCH1 of DPCH13.
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:TCH1:DATA:DSEL
'bts_tch'
selects the file bts_tch as the data source.
Manual operation:
See "Data Source" on page 129
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:DATA:PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the PATTern selection. The maximum
length is 64 bits.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
64 bits
*RST:
#H0,1
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:TCH1:DATA:PATT
#H3F, 8
defines the bit pattern.
Manual operation:
See "Data Source" on page 129
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:DTX <Dtx>
The command sets the number of DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) bits. These bits
are entered in the data stream between rate matching and interleaver 1 and used for
the BTFD reference measurement channels rate 2 and rate 3.
Parameters:
<Dtx>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 1024
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:TCH1:DTX 257
257 bits are entered in the data stream between rate matching
and interleaver 1.
Manual operation:
See "DTX Indication Bits" on page 131
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:EPRotection <EProtection>
The command determines the error protection.
Note:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
435
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
The transport channel designations for remote control are TCHannel0 for DCCH,
TCHannel1 to TCHannel6 for DTCH1 to DTCH6.
Parameters:
<EProtection>
NONE | TURBo3 | CON2 | CON3
NONE
No error protection
TURBo3
Turbo Coder of rate 1/3 in accordance with the 3GPP specifications.
CON2 | CON3
Convolution Coder of rate ½ or 1/3 with generator polynomials
defined by 3GPP.
*RST:
CON3
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:TCH1:EPR NONE
error protection for transp⅓ort channel DTCH1 of DPCH13 is
deactivated.
Manual operation:
See "Error Protection" on page 131
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:INTerleaver <Interleaver>
The command activates or deactivates channel coding interleaver state 1 for the
selected channel.
Interleaver state 1 can be activated and deactivated for each transport channel individually. The channel is selected via the suffix at TCHannel.
Interleaver state 2 can only be activated or deactivated for all the transport channels
together ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:
DPCH:INTerleaver2).
Note: The interleaver states do not cause the symbol rate to change.
Parameters:
<Interleaver>
ON | OFF
*RST:
Manual operation:
ON
See "Interleaver 1 State" on page 131
The transport channel designations for remote control are TCHannel0 for DCCH,
TCHannel1 to TCHannel6 for DTCH1 to DTCH6.
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:RMATtribute <RmAttribute>
Sets data rate matching.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
436
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
Parameters:
<RmAttribute>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 1024
256
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:TCH1:RMAT 1024
sets the rate matching attribute for DTCH1 of DPCH13 to 1024.
Manual operation:
See "Rate Matching Attribute" on page 130
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:STATe <State>
The command activates/deactivates the selected transport channel.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:TCH1:STAT ON
activates DTCH1 of DPCH13.
Manual operation:
See "Transport Channel State" on page 129
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:TBCount <TbCount>
Defines the number of blocks used for the selected transport channel.
Parameters:
<TbCount>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 24
1
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:TCH:TBC 4
sets 4 transport blocks for DTCH1 of DPCH13.
Manual operation:
See "Transport Block" on page 130
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:TBSize <TbSize>
Sets the size of the data blocks.
Parameters:
<TbSize>
integer
Range:
0 to 4096
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:TCH:TBS 1024
sets the length of the transport blocks for DTCH1 of DPCH13 to
1024.
Manual operation:
See "Transport Block Size" on page 130
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
437
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
TCHannel<di0>:TTINterval <TtInterval>
Sets the number of frames into which a TCH is divided. This setting also defines the
interleaver depth.
Parameters:
<TtInterval>
10MS | 20MS | 40MS
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel13:
DPCH:TCHannel1:TTINterval 20ms
sets that DTCH1 of DPCH13 is divided into 2 frames.
Manual operation:
See "Transport Time Interval" on page 130
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:CCODing:
INTerleaver<di> <Interleaver>
The command activates or deactivates channel coding interleaver state 1 or 2 for the
P-CCPCH.
Note: The interleaver states do not cause the symbol rate to change.
Parameters:
<Interleaver>
ON | OFF
*RST:
ON
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:PCCP:CCOD:INT1 OFF
deactivates channel coding interleaver state 1 for the P-CCPCH.
Manual operation:
See "Interleaver" on page 123
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:CCODing:STATe
<State>
The command activates or deactivates channel coding for the enhanced P-CCPCH.
The coding scheme of the P-CCPCH (BCH) is defined in the standard.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:PCCP:CCOD:STAT ON
activates channel coding for the enhanced P-CCPCH.
Manual operation:
See "Channel Coding State" on page 123
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:CCODing:TYPE?
The command queries the channel coding scheme in accordance with the 3GPP specification. The coding scheme of the P-CCPCH (BCH) is defined in the standard. The
channel is generated automatically with the counting system frame number (SFN). The
system information after the SFN field is completed from the selected data source.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
438
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
Return values:
<Type>
BCHSfn
*RST:
BCHSfn
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:PCCP:CCOD:TYPE?
queries the channel coding scheme of the P-CCPCH.
Response: 'BCHS'
the channel coding scheme with SFN is used.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Channel Coding Type" on page 123
8.8.3 Dynamic Power Control Settings
(not supported in Baseband C/D)
Suffixes
SOURce<hw>: value range [1]|2
Example: Configuring the Dynamic Power Control Settings
The following is a simple programing example with the purpose to show all commands
for this task. In real application, some of the commands may be ommited.
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHAN11:DPCH:DPControl:DIRection UP
// selects direction up, a high level of the control signals
// leads to an increase of the channel power
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHAN11:DPCH:DPControl:STEP 1 dB
// selects a step width of 1 dB.
// A high level of the control signal leads to
// an increase of 1 dB of the channel power,
// a low level to a decrease of 1 dB.
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHAN11:DPCH:DPControl:RANGe:DOWN 10 dB
// selects a dynamic range of 10 dB for ranging up the channel power
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHAN11:DPCH:DPControl:RANGe:UP 50 dB
// selects a dynamic range of 50 dB for ranging up the channel power
// The overall increase and decrease of channel power,
// i.e. the dynamic range is limited to 60 dB
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHAN11:DPCH:DPControl:MODE TPC
// selects the source of the power control signal
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHAN11:DPCH:DPControl:STATe ON
// activates Dynamic Power Control for DPCH 11
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHAN11:DPCH:DPControl:POWer?
// queries the deviation of the channel power of DPCH 11
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:
DIRection............................................................................................................440
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:
CONNector......................................................................................................... 440
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:MODE.441
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
439
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DPControl:RANGe:UP..........................................................................................441
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:
RANGe:DOWN....................................................................................................441
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:
STATe................................................................................................................ 441
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:
STEP:MANual..................................................................................................... 442
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:
STEP[:EXTernal]................................................................................................. 442
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl[:
POWer]?.............................................................................................................442
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DPControl:DIRection <Direction>
The command selects the Dynamic Power Control direction. The selected mode determines if the channel power is increased (UP) or decreased (DOWN) by a control signal
with high level.
Parameters:
<Direction>
UP | DOWN
*RST:
UP
Example:
see Example "Configuring the Dynamic Power Control Settings"
on page 439
Manual operation:
See "Direction" on page 136
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DPControl:CONNector <Connector>
Determines the input connector at that the instrument expects the external control signal.
Parameters:
<Connector>
LOCal | GLOBal
*RST:
LOCal
Example:
External control signal at the local TM3 connector of Baseband
A.
SOURce1:INPut:TM3:DIRection INPut
SOURce1:INPut:TM3:SIGNal FEEDback
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel12:
DPCH:DPControl:CONNector LOCal
Example:
External control signal at the global USER6 connector.
SOURce:INPut:USER6:DIRection INPut
SOURce:INPut:USER6:SIGNal FEEDback
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel12:
DPCH:DPControl:CONNector GLOBal
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
440
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
Manual operation:
See "Connector" on page 136
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DPControl:MODE <Mode>
The command selects the control signal source for Dynamic Power Control.
Parameters:
<Mode>
TPC | MANual
*RST:
TPC
Example:
see Example "Configuring the Dynamic Power Control Settings"
on page 439
Manual operation:
See "Mode" on page 136
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DPControl:RANGe:UP <Up>
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DPControl:RANGe:DOWN <Down>
The command selects the dynamic range for ranging down the channel power.
Parameters:
<Down>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0 to 60
0.01
10
dB
Example:
see Example "Configuring the Dynamic Power Control Settings"
on page 439
Manual operation:
See "Up Range/Down Range" on page 137
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DPControl:STATe <State>
The command activates/deactivates Dynamic Power Control.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
see Example "Configuring the Dynamic Power Control Settings"
on page 439
Manual operation:
See "Dynamic Power Control State" on page 135
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
441
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DPControl:STEP:MANual <Manual>
This command provides the control signal for manual mode of Dynamic Power Control.
Setting parameters:
<Manual>
MAN0 | MAN1
*RST:
MAN0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN11:DPCH:DPC:MODE MAN
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN11:DPCH:DPC:STEP 0.5 dB
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN11:DPCH:DPC:STAT ON
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN11:DPCH:DPC:STEP:MAN MAN0
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation:
See "Mode" on page 136
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DPControl:STEP[:EXTernal] <External>
This command sets step width by which – with Dynamic Power Control being switched
on - the channel power of the selected enhanced channel is increased or decreased.
Parameters:
<External>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0.5 to 6
0.01
1
dB
Example:
see Example "Configuring the Dynamic Power Control Settings"
on page 439
Manual operation:
See "Power Step" on page 136
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:
DPControl[:POWer]?
The command queries the deviation of the channel power (delta POW) from the set
power start value of the corresponding enhanced channels.
Return values:
<Power>
float
Range:
-60 to 60
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
Example:
see Example "Configuring the Dynamic Power Control Settings"
on page 439
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Power Control Graph" on page 137
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
442
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
8.8.4 Error Insertion
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:BIT:
LAYer................................................................................................................. 443
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:BIT:
RATE................................................................................................................. 443
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:BIT:
STATe................................................................................................................ 444
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:
BLOCk:RATE...................................................................................................... 444
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:
BLOCk:STATe.....................................................................................................445
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:DERRor:
BIT:LAYer........................................................................................................... 445
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:DERRor:
BIT:RATE........................................................................................................... 445
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:DERRor:
BIT:STATe.......................................................................................................... 446
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:DERRor:
BLOCk:RATE...................................................................................................... 446
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:DERRor:
BLOCk:STATe.....................................................................................................446
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:
BIT:LAYer <Layer>
The command selects the layer in the coding process in which bit errors are inserted.
Parameters:
<Layer>
TRANsport | PHYSical
TRANsport
Transport Layer (Layer 2). This layer is only available when
channel coding is active.
PHYSical
Physical layer (Layer 1).
*RST:
PHYSical
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:DERR:BIT:LAY PHYS
selects layer 1 for entering bit errors.
Manual operation:
See "Insert Errors On" on page 132
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:
BIT:RATE <Rate>
The command sets the bit error rate.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
443
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
Parameters:
<Rate>
float
Range:
1E-7 to 0.5
Increment: 1E-7
*RST:
0.001
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:DERR:BIT:RATE 1E-4
sets a bit error rate of 0.0001.
Manual operation:
See "Bit Error Rate" on page 132
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:
BIT:STATe <State>
The command activates bit error generation or deactivates it.
Bit errors are inserted into the data fields of the enhanced channels. When channel
coding is active, it is possible to select the layer in which to insert the errors (the physical or the transport layer, [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:
CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:BIT:LAYer). When the data source is read out, individual bits are deliberately inverted at random points in the data bit stream at the specified error rate in order to simulate an invalid signal.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:DERR:BIT:STAT ON
activates bit error generation.
Manual operation:
See "Bit Error State (Enhanced DPCHs)" on page 132
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:
BLOCk:RATE <Rate>
Sets the block error rate.
Parameters:
<Rate>
float
Range:
1E-4 to 0.5
Increment: 1E-4
*RST:
0.1
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:DERR:BLOC:RATE 1E-2
sets the block error rate to 0.01.
Manual operation:
See "Block Error Rate" on page 133
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
444
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:
BLOCk:STATe <State>
The command activates or deactivates block error generation. Block error generation is
only possible when channel coding is activated.
During block error generation, the CRC checksum is determined and then the last bit is
inverted at the specified error probability in order to simulate a defective signal.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:CCOD:STAT ON
activates channel coding.
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:DERR:BLOC:RATE 5E-1
sets the block error rate to 0.1.
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN13:DPCH:DERR:BLOC:STAT ON
activates block error generation.
Manual operation:
See "Block Error State" on page 133
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:
DERRor:BIT:LAYer <Layer>
The command selects the layer in the coding process in which bit errors are inserted.
Parameters:
<Layer>
TRANsport | PHYSical
TRANsport
Transport Layer (Layer 2)
PHYSical
Physical layer (Layer 1)
*RST:
PHYSical
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN12:HSDP:DERR:BIT:LAY PHYS
selects layer 1 for entering bit errors.
Manual operation:
See "Insert Errors On (HSDPA H-Set)" on page 118
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:
DERRor:BIT:RATE <Rate>
Sets the bit error rate.
Parameters:
<Rate>
float
*RST:
1E-3
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN12:HSDP:DERR:BIT:RATE 1E-4
sets a bit error rate of 0.0001.
Manual operation:
See "Bit Error Rate (HSDPA H-Set)" on page 118
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
445
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of Base Station 1
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:
DERRor:BIT:STATe <State>
The command activates bit error generation or deactivates it.
Bit errors are inserted into the data stream of the coupled HS-PDSCHs. It is possible to
select the layer in which the errors are inserted (physical or transport layer). When the
data source is read out, individual bits are deliberately inverted at random points in the
data bit stream at the specified error rate in order to simulate an invalid signal.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN12:HSDP:DERR:BIT:STAT ON
activates bit error generation.
Manual operation:
See "Bit Error State (HSDPA H-Set)" on page 117
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:
DERRor:BLOCk:RATE <Rate>
The command sets the block error rate.
Parameters:
<Rate>
float
Range:
*RST:
1E-4 to 5E-1
5E-1
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN12:HSDP:DERR:BLOC:RATE 1E-2
sets the block error rate to 0.01.
Manual operation:
See "Block Error Rate (HSDPA H-Set)" on page 118
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:
DERRor:BLOCk:STATe <State>
The command activates or deactivates block error generation. During block error generation, the CRC checksum is determined and then the last bit is inverted at the specified error probability in order to simulate a defective signal.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN12:HSDP:DERR:BLOC:RATE 5E-1
sets the block error rate to 0.1.
BB:W3GP:BST:ENH:CHAN12:HSDP:DERR:BLOC:STAT ON
activates block error generation.
Manual operation:
See "Block Error State (HSDPA H-Set)" on page 118
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
446
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
8.9 User Equipment Settings
The SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation system contains commands for setting the user
equipment. The commands of this system only take effect when the 3GPP FDD standard is activated, the UP transmission direction is selected and the particular user
equipment is enabled:
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:STATe ON
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:LINK UP
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation2:STATe ON
MSTation<st>
The numeric suffix to MSTation determines the user equipment. The value range is
1 .. 4. If the suffix is ommited, MS1 is selected.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
General Settings................................................................................................... 447
Compressed Mode Settings..................................................................................452
DPCCH Settings................................................................................................... 454
HS-DPCCH Settings............................................................................................. 461
DPDCH Settings................................................................................................... 479
PCPCH Settings....................................................................................................483
PRACH Settings....................................................................................................494
HSUPA Settings....................................................................................................502
UL-DTX and Uplink Scheduling Settings.............................................................. 523
Dynamic Power Control Settings.......................................................................... 528
8.9.1 General Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:COUNt................................................. 447
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:POWer:OFFSet.....................................448
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:SCODe:STEP....................................... 448
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:STATe................................................. 449
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:TDELay:STEP...................................... 449
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:PRESet................................................................ 449
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:MODE............................................................449
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:SCODe.......................................................... 450
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:SCODe:MODE................................................451
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:STATe........................................................... 451
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:TDELay..........................................................451
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:LREFerence........................................................................ 452
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:COUNt <Count>
The command sets the number of additional user equipment.
Up to 128 additional user equipment can be simulated - corresponding to a receive signal for a base station with high capacity utilization. The fourth user equipment (UE4)
serves as a template for all other stations. The only parameters of the additional user
equipment to be modified are the scrambling code and the power.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
447
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Count>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 128
4
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ADD:COUN 20
sets 20 additional user equipment.
BB:W3GP:MST:ADD:POW:OFFS -3.0
sets the power offset to -3 dB.
BB:W3GP:MST:ADD:SCOD:STEP 1
sets the step width for increasing the scrambling code to 1.
BB:W3GP:MST:ADD:STAT ON
connects the 20 user equipment to the 3GPP FDD signal.
Manual operation:
See "Number of Additional UE" on page 78
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:POWer:OFFSet <Offset>
Sets the power offset of the active channels of the additional user equipment relative to
the power of the active channels of the reference station UE4.
The offset applies to all the additional user equipment. The resultant overall power
must fall within the range 0 ... - 80 dB. If the value is above or below this range, it is
limited automatically.
Parameters:
<Offset>
float
Range:
-80 to 0
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ADD:POW:OFFS -3.0
sets the offset to -3 dB.
Manual operation:
See "Power Offset" on page 79
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:SCODe:STEP <Step>
Sets the step width for increasing the scrambling code of the additional user equipment. The start value is the scrambling code of UE4.
Parameters:
<Step>
integer
Range:
0 to #HFFFFFF
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ADD:SCOD:STEP #H55
sets the step width for increasing the scrambling code to #H55.
Manual operation:
See "Scrambling Code Step" on page 79
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
448
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:STATe <State>
Activates additional user equipment.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:STATe ON
connects the additional user equipment to the 3GPP FDD signal.
Manual operation:
See "State" on page 78
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ADDitional:TDELay:STEP <Step>
The command sets the step width for the time delay of the additional user equipment to
one another. The start value is the time delay of UE4. Entry is made in chips and can
be a maximum of 1 frame.
Parameters:
<Step>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 38400
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ADD:TDEL:STEP 256
shifts each of the user equipment 256 chips apart, starting from
the time delay of UE4.
Manual operation:
See "Time Delay Step" on page 79
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:PRESet
The command produces a standardized default for all the user equipment. The settings
correspond to the *RST values specified for the commands.
All user equipment settings are preset.
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:PRES
resets all the user equipment settings to default values.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Reset User Equipment" on page 67
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:MODE <Mode>
The command selects the operating mode for the user equipment.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
449
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Mode>
PRACh | PCPCh | DPCDch | PPRach | PPCPch
PRACh
The user equipment only generates a signal with a physical random access channel (PRACH). This channel is used to set up
the user equipment connection with the base station. The channel-specific parameters of the PRACH can be set with the commands :SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<n>:PRACh:....
PPRAch
The user equipment only generates a signal with the preamble
component of a physical random access channel (PRACH). The
parameters of the PRACH preamble can be set with the commands :SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<n>:PRACh:....
PCPCh
The user equipment only generates a signal with a physical
common packet channel (PCPCH). This channel is used to
transmit packet-oriented services (e.g. SMS). The channel-specific parameters of the PCPCH can be set with the commands :SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<n>:PCPCh:....
PPCPch
The user equipment only generates a signal with the preamble
component of a physical common packet channel (PCPCH). The
parameters of the PCPCH preamble can be set with the commands :SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<n>:PCPCh:....
DPCDch
The user equipment generates a signal with a dedicated physical control channel (DPCCH), up to 6 dedicated physical data
channels (DPDCH), up to one HS-DPCCH channel, up to one EDPCCH channel and up to four E-DPDCH channels. This signal
is used for voice and data transmission.
*RST:
DPCDch
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:MODE DPCD
switches the user equipment to standard mode - transmission of
voice and data.
Manual operation:
See "Mode" on page 160
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:SCODe <SCode>
The command sets the scrambling code. Long or short scrambling codes can be generated (command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:SCODe:MODE).
Parameters:
<SCode>
integer
Range:
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
#H0 to #HFFFFFF
#H0
450
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST2:SCOD #H12
sets scrambling code #12.
Manual operation:
See "Scrambling Code (hex)" on page 161
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:SCODe:MODE <Mode>
The command sets the type for the scrambling code. The scrambling code generator
can also be deactivated for test purposes.
SHORt is only standardized for the selection :BB:W3GP:MST:MODE DPCDh
and :BB:W3GP:MST:MODE PCPCh. But it can also be generated for the PCPCH for
test purposes.
Parameters:
<Mode>
LONG | SHORt | OFF
*RST:
LONG
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST2:SCOD:MODE OFF
deactivates the scrambling code generator.
Manual operation:
See "Scrambling Mode" on page 161
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:STATe <State>
The command activates and deactivates the specified user equipment.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
ON
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST2:STAT OFF
deactivates user equipment 2.
Manual operation:
See "Select Basestation/User Equipment" on page 69
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:TDELay <TDelay>
The command sets the time shift of the selected user equipment compared to user
equipment 1 in chips.
Parameters:
<TDelay>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 38400
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST2:TDEL 256
shifts user equipment 2 by 256 chips compared to user equipment 1.
Manual operation:
See "Time Delay" on page 161
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
451
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:LREFerence <Reference>
Determines the power reference for the calculation of the output signal power in uplink
direction.
Parameters:
<Reference>
RMS | DPCC | PMP | LPP | EDCH | HACK | PCQI
RMS = RMS Power, DPCC = First DPCCH, PMP = PRACH Message Part, LPP = Last PRACH Preamble, EDCH = First E-DCH,
HACK = First HARQ-ACK, PCQI = First PCI/CQI
*RST:
RMS
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:LREFerence RMS
Manual operation:
See "Power Reference" on page 70
8.9.2 Compressed Mode Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:METHod............................................ 452
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGD............................. 452
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGL<di>....................... 453
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGPL........................... 453
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGSN...........................453
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:STATe...............................................454
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:METHod <Method>
The command selects compressed mode method.
Parameters:
<Method>
HLSCheduling | SF2
SF2
The data is compressed by halving the spreading factor.
HLSCheduling
The data is compressed by stopping the transmission of the data
stream during the transmission gap.
*RST:
SF2
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST2:CMOD:METH HLSC
selects compressed mode method High Layer Scheduling.
Manual operation:
See "Compressed Mode Method - UE" on page 95
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGD <Tgd>
Sets the transmission gap distances.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
452
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Tgd>
integer
Range:
*RST:
3 to 100
15
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST2:CMOD:PATT2:TGD 7
sets transmission gap distance of pattern 2 to 7 slots.
Manual operation:
See "Distance" on page 97
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGL<di> <Tgl>
Sets the transmission gap lengths.
Parameters:
<Tgl>
integer
Range:
*RST:
3 to 14
3
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST2:CMOD:PATT2:TGL1 4
sets transmission gap length of gap 1 of pattern 2 to 4 slots.
Manual operation:
See "Gap Len:" on page 97
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGPL <Tgpl>
The command sets the transmission gap pattern lengths. Setting 0 is available only for
pattern 2.
The transmission gap pattern lengths of the base station with the same suffix as the
selected user equipment is set to the same value.
Parameters:
<Tgpl>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 100
2
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST2:CMOD:PATT2:TGPL 7
sets transmission gap pattern length of pattern 2 to 7 frames.
Manual operation:
See "Pattern Len:" on page 98
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGSN <Tgsn>
Sets the transmission gap slot number of pattern 1.
Parameters:
<Tgsn>
integer
Range:
*RST:
Example:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
0 to 14
7
BB:W3GP:MST2:CMOD:PATT:TGSN 4
sets slot number of pattern 1 to slot 4.
453
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Manual operation:
See "At Slot:" on page 97
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CMODe:STATe <State>
The command activates/deactivates the compressed mode.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST2:CMOD:STAT ON
activates compressed mode for user equipment 2.
Manual operation:
See "Compressed Mode State" on page 94
8.9.3 DPCCH Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:CCODe?............................................ 454
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:FBI:MODE..........................................455
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:FBI:PATTern.......................................455
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:POWer............................................... 455
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:SFORmat........................................... 456
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TFCI.................................................. 456
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TFCI:STATe....................................... 456
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TOFFset.............................................457
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA..........................................457
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:DSELect............................458
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:PATTern............................458
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:MISuse....................................... 458
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:MODE........................................ 459
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:PSTep........................................ 459
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:READ......................................... 460
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:CCODe?
Queries the channelization code and the modulation branch of the specified channel.
The value is fixed.
Return values:
<CCode>
integer
Range:
0 to max
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:CCOD?
queries the channelization code for DPCCH of user equipment
1.
Response: Q,64
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
454
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:FBI:MODE <Mode>
The command sets the number of bits for the FBI field. With OFF, the FBI field is not
used.
Note: The former 2-bits long FBI Mode "D2B" according to 3GPP Release 4 specification TS 25.211 is not supported any more.
The command sets the slot format ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:
DPCCh:SFORmat) in conjunction with the set TFCI status ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TFCI:STATe) and the TPC Mode ([:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:MODE) to the associated
values.
Parameters:
<Mode>
OFF | D1B
*RST:
OFF
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:FBI:MODE OFF
an FBl field is not used.
Manual operation:
See "FBI Mode" on page 178
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:FBI:PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern when the PATTern data source is selected
for the FBI field.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
32 bits
The first parameter determines the bit pattern (choice of hexadecimal, octal or binary notation), the second specifies the number of bits to use.
*RST:
#H0,1
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:FBI:PATT #H3F,8
defines the bit pattern of the data for the FBI field.
Manual operation:
See "FBI Pattern (bin)" on page 178
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:POWer <Power>
The command defines the channel power for the DPCCH.
Parameters:
<Power>
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:POW -10 dB
sets the channel power to -10 dB.
455
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Manual operation:
See "Power" on page 175
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:SFORmat <SFormat>
The command sets the slot format for the DPCCH. The slot format defines the structure of the DPCCH slots and the control fields.
Slot Format # 4 is available only for instruments equipped with R&S SMW-K83.
Slot formats 0 to 4 are available for the DPCCH channel as defined in the 3GPP
Release 7 specification TS 25.211.
Note:
The former slot formats 4 and 5 according to 3GPP Release 4 specification TS 25.211
are not supported any more.
The command sets the FBI mode ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:
DPCCh:FBI:MODE), the TFCI status ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:
DPCCh:TFCI:STATe) and the TPC Mode ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:
MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:MODE) to the associated values.
Parameters:
<SFormat>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 4
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST2:DPCC:SFOR 3
selects slot format 3 for the DPCCH of user equipment 2.
Manual operation:
See "Slot Format #" on page 176
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TFCI <Tfci>
Sets the value of the TFCI (Transport Format Combination Indicator) field. This value
selects a combination of 30 bits, which are divided into two groups of 15 successive
slots.
Parameters:
<Tfci>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 1023
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:TFCI 21
sets the TFCI value to 21.
Manual operation:
See "TFCI" on page 178
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TFCI:STATe <State>
The command activates the TFCI (Transport Format Combination Indicator) field for
the DPCCH.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
456
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
The command sets the slot format ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:
DPCCh:SFORmat) in conjunction with the set FBI mode ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:FBI:MODE) and the TPC Mode ([:SOURce<hw>]:
BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:MODE) to the associated values.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
1
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:TFCI:STAT ON
activates the TFCI field.
Manual operation:
See "Use TFCI" on page 177
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TOFFset <TOffset>
Sets the timing offset.
Parameters:
<TOffset>
integer
Range:
0 to 1024
Increment: 1024
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:TOFF?
queries the timing offset.
Manual operation:
See "DL-UL Timing Offset" on page 176
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA <Data>
The command determines the data source for the TPC field of the DPCCH.
Parameters:
<Data>
DLISt | ZERO | ONE | PATTern |
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:
DATA:DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used. The bit pattern for the data is defined by
the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:
DPCCh:TPC:DATA:PATTern. The maximum length is 64 bits.
*RST:
Example:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
ZERO
BB:W3GP:MST2:DPCC:TPC:DATA PATT
selects as the data source for the TPC field of user equipment 2
the bit pattern defined with the following command.
BB:W3GP:MST2:DPCC:TPC:DATA:PATT #H48D0,16
defines the bit pattern.
457
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Manual operation:
See "TPC Data Source" on page 178
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:DSELect
<DSelect>
The command selects the data list when the DLISt data source is selected for the TPC
field of the DPCCH.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file
name, without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<DSelect>
string
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:TPC:DATA DLIS
selects the Data Lists data source.
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:TPC:DATA:DSEL 'dpcch_tpc_1'
selects the data list dpcch_tpc1.
Manual operation:
See "TPC Data Source" on page 178
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the PATTern data source selection. The
maximum length of the bit pattern is 64 bits.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
64 bits
*RST:
#H0,1
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:TPC:DATA:PATT #B11110000,8
defines the bit pattern of the data for the TPC field.
Manual operation:
See "TPC Data Source" on page 178
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:MISuse <MisUse>
The command activates "mis-" use of the TPC field (Transmit Power Control) for controlling the channel power of the user equipment.
The bit pattern (see commands :SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:DPCCh:TPC:DATA... ) of the TPC field of
the DPCCH is used to control the channel power. A "1" leads to an increase of channel
powers, a "0" to a reduction of channel powers. Channel power is limited to the range 0
dB to -60 dB. The step width for the change is defined by the command [:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:PSTep.
Note: "Mis-"using the TPC field is available for UE2, UE3,UE4 only.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
458
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<MisUse>
ON | OFF
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST2:DPCC:TPC:MIS ON
activates regulation of the channel power via the bit pattern of
the TPC field.
BB:W3GP:MST2:DPCC:TPC:PST 1 dB
sets the step width for the change of channel power to 1 dB.
Manual operation:
See "Misuse TPC for Output Power Control" on page 180
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:MODE <Mode>
Selects the TPC (Transmit Power Control) mode.
The command sets the slot format ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:
DPCCh:SFORmat) in conjunction with the set TFCI status ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TFCI:STATe) and the FBI Mode ([:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:FBI:MODE) to the associated
values.
Parameters:
<Mode>
D2B | D4B
D2B
A TPC field with a length of 2 bits is used.
D4B
(enabled only for instruments equipped with R&S SMW-K83)
A TPC field with a length of 4 bits is used.
A 4 bits long TPC field can be selected, only for Slot Format 4
and disabled FBI and TFCI fields.
*RST:
D2B
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:TPC:MODE D2B
an TPC field with a length of 2 bits is used.
Manual operation:
See "TPC Mode" on page 178
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:PSTep <PStep>
The command sets the level of the power step in dB for controlling the transmit power
via the data of the TPC field.
Parameters:
<PStep>
float
Range:
-10 to 10
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
459
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:DPCC:TPC:MIS ON
activates regulation of the channel power via the bit pattern of
the TPC field.
BB:W3GP:MST:DPCC:TPC:PST 1 dB
sets the step width for the change of channel power to 1 dB.
Manual operation:
See "TPC Power Step" on page 180
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:TPC:READ <Read>
The command sets the read out mode for the bit pattern of the TPC field of the
DPCCH.
The bit pattern is selected with the command
SOUR:BB:W3GPp:MST:DPCC:TPC:DATA:PATT.
Parameters:
<Read>
CONTinuous | S0A | S1A | S01A | S10A
CONTinuous
The bit pattern is used cyclically.
S0A
The bit pattern is used once, then the TPC sequence continues
with 0 bits.
S1A
The bit pattern is used once, then the TPC sequence continues
with 1 bits.
S01A
The bit pattern is used once and then the TPC sequence is continued with 0 and 1 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on
by the symbol rate, for example, 00001111).
S10A
The bit pattern is used once and then the TPC sequence is continued with 1 and 0 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on
by the symbol rate, for example, 11110000).
*RST:
CONTinuous
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST2:DPCC:TPC:READ CONT
the selected bit pattern is repeated continuously for the TPC
sequence.
Manual operation:
See "TPC Read Out Mode" on page 179
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
460
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
8.9.4 HS-DPCCH Settings
8.9.4.1
Common Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:STATe.......................................... 461
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:POWer..........................................461
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:COMPatibility.................................461
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:CCODe?....................................... 462
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SDELay........................................ 462
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:TTIDistance...................................462
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:STATe <State>
This command activates or deactivates the HS-DPCCH.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:STAT ON
activates HS-DPCCH.
Manual operation:
See "State (HS-DPCCH)" on page 188
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:POWer <Power>
The command sets the channel power in dB. The power entered is relative to the powers of the other channels. If "Adjust Total Power to 0 dB" is executed ([:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:POWer:ADJust), the power is normalized to a total power
for all channels of 0 dB. The power ratios of the individual channels remains
unchanged.
Parameters:
<Power>
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:POW -30
sets the channel power to -30 dB.
Manual operation:
See "Power (HS-DPCCH)" on page 188
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:COMPatibility
<Compatibility>
The concept of the graphical user interface for the configuration of HS-DPCCH has
been adapted to support simultaneous DC-HSDPA and MIMO operation, as required in
3GPP Release 9 onwards.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
461
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
This command enables the configuration of the HS-DPCCH settings provided for backwards compatibility ("Up to Release 7").
Parameters:
<Compatibility>
REL7 | REL8 | REL8RT
*RST:
REL8
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:COMP REL8
sets the compatibility mode to Release 8 and Later.
Manual operation:
See "Compatibility Mode (HS-DPCCH)" on page 189
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:CCODe?
Queries the channelization code and the modulation branch of the HS-DPCCH.
Return values:
<CCode>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 64
64
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:CCOD?
queries the channelization code.
Response: Q,32
the channelization code is 32 and the modulation branch is Q.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Channelization Code" on page 175
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SDELay <SDelay>
Sets the delay between the uplink HS-DPCCH and the frame of uplink DPCH.
Parameters:
<SDelay>
integer
a multiple m of 256 chips according to TS 25.211 7.7
Range:
0 to 250
*RST:
101
Default unit: * 256 Chips
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:SDEL 101
sets a start delay of 101 x 256 chips.
Manual operation:
See "Start Delay" on page 189
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:TTIDistance <TtiDistance>
Selects the distance between two packets in HSDPA packet mode.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
462
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<TtiDistance>
integer
Range:
*RST:
8.9.4.2
1 to 16
5
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:TTID 4
selects an Inter TTI Distance of 4 subframes.
Manual operation:
See "Inter TTI Distance (Interval)" on page 190
Up to Release 7 Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:POACk......................................... 463
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:PONAck........................................463
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:HAPattern..................................... 464
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:CQI:PLENgth.................................464
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:CQI<ch>[:VALues]......................... 465
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO[:MODE]............................... 465
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:POAAck.............................. 465
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:POANack............................ 466
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:PONAck.............................. 467
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:PONNack............................ 467
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:POCA................................. 468
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:TTICount............................. 468
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:TTI<ch0>:HACK...................469
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:TTI<ch0>:PCI...................... 469
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:TTI<ch0>:CQIType...............469
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:TTI<ch0>:CQI<di>................470
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:POACk <Poack>
(Up to Release 7)
The command sets the channel power part of the ACK in dB.
Parameters:
<Poack>
float
Range:
-10 to 10 dB
Increment: 0.1
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:POAC -2.5dB
sets the channel power part of the ACK to 2.5 dB.
Manual operation:
See "Power Offset ACK" on page 201
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:PONAck <PoNack>
(Up to Release 7)
The command sets the channel power part of the NACK in dB.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
463
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<PoNack>
float
Range:
-10 dB to 10 dB
Increment: 0.1
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:PONA -2.5dB
sets the channel power part of the NACK to 2.5 dB.
Manual operation:
See "Power Offset NACK" on page 202
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:HAPattern <HaPattern>
(Up to Release 7)
The command enters the pattern for the HARQ-ACK field (Hybrid-ARQ Acknowledgement). One bit is used per HS-DPCCH packet.
Parameters:
<HaPattern>
string
The pattern is entered as string, the maximum number of entries
is 32. Three different characters are permitted.
1
The HARQ ACK is sent (ACK). Transmission was successful
and correct.
0
The NACK is sent (NACK). Transmission was not correct. With
an NACK, the UE requests retransmission of the incorrect data.
Nothing is sent. Transmission is interrupted (Discontinuous
Transmission, DTX).
*RST:
<empty>
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:COMP REL7
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:HAP "110--110-0"
enters the pattern for the HARQ-ACK field.
Manual operation:
See "ACK/NACK Pattern" on page 202
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:CQI:PLENgth <PLength>
Sets the length of the CQI sequence.
The values of the CQI sequence are defined with command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:CQI<ch>[:VALues]. The pattern is generated
cyclically.
Parameters:
<PLength>
integer
Range:
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
1 to 10
1
464
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:CQI:PLEN 2
the CQI sequence length is 2 values.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:CQI1 -1
the first CQI value is -1.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:CQI2 2
the second CQI value is 2.
Manual operation:
See "CQI Pattern Length" on page 202
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:CQI<ch>[:VALues]
<Values>
Sets the values of the CQI sequence.
The length of the CQI sequence is defined with command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:CQI:PLENgth. The pattern is generated cyclically.
Parameters:
<Values>
integer
Value -1 means that no CQI is sent (DTX - Discontinuous
Transmission).
Range:
*RST:
-1 to 30
1
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:CQI:PLEN 2
the CQI sequence length is 2 values.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:CQI1 1
the first CQI value is -1.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:CQI2 2
the second CQI value is 2.
Manual operation:
See "CQI Values" on page 202
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO[:MODE] <Mode>
Enables/disables working in MIMO mode for the selected UE.
Parameters:
<Mode>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "MIMO Mode (Up to Release 7)" on page 203
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:POAAck <PoaAck>
(up to Release 7)
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
465
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Sets the power offset Poff_ACK/ACK of an ACK/ACK response to two scheduled transport
blocks relative to the CQI Power PCQI ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:
MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:POWer).
The power PACK/ACK used during the HARQ-ACK slots is calculated as:
PACK/ACK = PCQI + Poff_ACK/ACK
Parameters:
<PoaAck>
float
Range:
-10 to 10 dB
Increment: 0.1
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:TTI2:HACK AACK
sets the HARQ-ACK to ACK/ACK.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:POAA -2.5dB
sets the power offset to -2.5 dB.
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Power Offset ACK/ACK" on page 204
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:POANack
<PoaNack>
(up to Release 7)
Sets the power offset Poff_ACK/NACK of an ACK/NACK response to two scheduled transport blocks relative to the CQI Power PCQI ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:
MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:POWer).
The power PACK/NACK used during the HARQ-ACK slots is calculated as:
PACK/NACK = PCQI + Poff_ACK/NACK
Parameters:
<PoaNack>
float
Range:
-10 to 10 dB
Increment: 0.1
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:TTI2:HACK ANAC
sets the HARQ-ACK to ACK/NACK.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:POAN -1.5dB
sets the power offset to -1.5 dB.
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Power Offset ACK/NACK" on page 204
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
466
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:PONAck <PoNack>
(up to Release 7)
Sets the power offset Poff_NACK/ACK of an NACK/ACK response to two scheduled transport blocks relative to the CQI Power PCQI ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:
MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:POWer).
The power PNACK/ACK used during the HARQ-ACK slots is calculated as:
PNACK/ACK = PCQI + Poff_NACK/ACK
Parameters:
<PoNack>
float
Range:
-10 to 10 dB
Increment: 0.1
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:TTI2:HACK NACK
sets the HARQ-ACK to NACK/ACK.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:PONA -1dB
sets the power offset to -1dB.
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Power Offset NACK/ACK" on page 205
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:PONNack
<PonNack>
(up to Release 7)
Sets the power offset Poff_NACK/NACK of an NACK/NACK response to two scheduled
transport blocks relative to the CQI Power PCQI ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:
MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:POWer).
The power PNACK/NACK used during the HARQ-ACK slots is calculated as:
PNACK/NACK = PCQI + Poff_NACK/NACK
Parameters:
<PonNack>
float
Range:
-10 to 10 dB
Increment: 0.1
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:TTI2:HACK NNAC
sets the HARQ-ACK to NACK/NACK.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:PONN -3dB
sets the power offset to -3dB.
467
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Power Offset NACK/NACK" on page 205
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:POCA <Poca>
(up to Release 7)
Sets the power offset Poff_CQI Type A of the PCI/CQI slots in case a CQI Type A report is
sent relative to the CQI Power PCQI ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:
DPCCh:HS:POWer).
The power PCQI Type A used during the PCI/CQI slots is calculated as:
PCQI Type A = PCQI + Poff_CQI Type A
Since the CQI Type B reports are used in a single stream transmission, the power PCQI
Type B = PCQI.
Parameters:
<Poca>
float
Range:
-10 dB to 10 dB
Increment: 0.1
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:MODE:TT2:CQIT TADT
selects CQI Type A Dual TB report for TTI2.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:POCA -4dB
sets the power offset to -4dB.
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Power Offset CQI Type A" on page 205
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:TTICount
<TtiCount>
Selects the number of configurable TTI's.
Parameters:
<TtiCount>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 32
1
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:TTIC 4
sets the number of configurable TTI's to 4.
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Number of TTIs (Up to Release 7)" on page 205
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
468
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:TTI<ch0>:HACK
<Hack>
Selects the information transmitted during the HARQ-ACK slot of the corresponding
TTI.
Suffix:
<ch0>
.
0..Number of TTI -1
Parameters:
<Hack>
DTX | SACK | SNACk | AACK | ANACk | NACK | NNACk
*RST:
AACK (for TTI 1)
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:TTI2:HACK SACK
sets the HARQ-ACK to single ACK.
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "HARQ-ACK (Up to Release 7)" on page 206
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:TTI<ch0>:PCI <Pci>
Selects the PCI value transmitted during the PCI/CQI slots of the corresponding TTI.
Suffix:
<ch0>
.
0..Number of TTI -1
Parameters:
<Pci>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 3
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:TTI2:HACK SACK
sets the HARQ-ACK to single ACK.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:TTI2:PCI 2
sets the PCI.
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "PCI (Up to Release 7)" on page 206
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:TTI<ch0>:CQIType
<CqiType>
Selects the type of the CQI report.
Suffix:
<ch0>
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
.
0..Number of TTI -1
469
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<CqiType>
TAST | TADT | TB
*RST:
TADT
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:TTI2:HACK SACK
sets the HARQ-ACK to single ACK.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:TTI2:CQIT TADT
selects CQI Type A dual TB report for TTI2.
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "CQI Type (Up to Release 7)" on page 206
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MIMO:TTI<ch0>:CQI<di>
<Cqi>
Selects the CQI report transmitted during the PCI/CQI slots of the corresponding TTI.
For single stream transmission (BB:W3GP:MST:DPCC:HS:MIMO:TTI:CQI1), this
command set the CQI values of the following cases:
●
The CQI (the value for CQI Type B report)
●
The CQIS (the CQI value in case a CQI Type A report when 1 transport block is
preferred)
For dual stream transmission (BB:W3GP:MST:DPCC:HS:MIMO:TTI:CQI2), this command sets:
●
The CQI1, the first of the two CQI values of CQI Type A report when 2 transport
blocks are preferred
●
the CQI2, the second of the two CQI values of CQI Type A report when 2 transport
blocks are preferred. The CQI then is calculated as follow:
CQI = 15*CQI1+CQI2+31
Suffix:
<ch0>
.
0..Number of TTI -1
TTI
<di>
1|2
The suffix CQI<1|2> distinquishes between CQI/CQIS/CQI1 and
CQI2.
Parameters:
<Cqi>
integer
Range:
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
0 to 30
0
470
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
8.9.4.3
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:MODE ON
enables MIMO mode for UE 1.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:TTI2:HACK
sets the HARQ-ACK to single ACK.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:TTI2:CQIT
selects CQI Type A dual TB report for TTI2.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:TTI2:CQI1
sets CQI1
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:TTI2:CQI2
sets CQI2
SACK
TADT
1.5
2
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:TTI2:CQIT TAST
selects CQI Type A single TB report for TTI2.
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:TTI2:CQI1 3
sets CQIS
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:TTI2:CQIT TB
selects CQI Type B
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MIMO:TTI2:CQI1 0
sets CQI
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "CQI/CQIS/CQI1/CQI2 (Up to Release 7)" on page 206
Release 8 and Later (RT) Settings
Example: HS-DPCCH Scheduling
The following is a simple example intended to explain the principle. Configured is an
HS-DPCCH scheduling in MIMO Mode and with "Secondary Cell Enabled = 1".
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:COMP REL8
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:TTID 5
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:MMOD ON
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:SC:ENABled 1
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:SC:ACT 0
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:HACK:ROWS 2
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:HACK:REPeat 4
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:ROW0:HACK:FROM 0
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:ROW0:HACK:TO 1
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:ROW0:HACK1 MS_AA_D
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:ROW1:HACK:FROM 3
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:ROW1:HACK:TO 3
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:ROW1:HACK1 MS_NN_NN
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:PCQI:ROWS 2
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:PCQI:REPeat 3
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:ROW0:PCQI:FROM 0
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:ROW0:PCQI:TO 0
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:ROW1:PCQI1:TYPE DTX
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:ROW1:PCQI:FROM 1
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
471
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:ROW1:PCQI:TO 1
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:ROW1:PCQI1:TYPE TADT
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:ROW1:PCQI1:CQI1 10
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:ROW1:PCQI1:CQI2 20
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:ROW1:PCQI1:PCI 2
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:STAT ON
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SFORmat?.................................... 472
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MMODe........................................ 472
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SC:ENABled..................................473
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SC:ACTive.................................... 473
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:HACK:ROWS................................ 473
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:PCQI:ROWS................................. 473
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:HACK:FROM............... 474
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:HACK:TO.................... 474
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:HACK<di>................... 474
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:POHAck...................... 475
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:PCQI:FROM................ 476
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:PCQI:TO..................... 476
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:PCQI<di>:TYPE...........476
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:PCQI<di>:CQI<us>...... 477
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:PCQI<di>:PCI..............477
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:POPCqi.......................477
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:HACK:REPeat............................... 478
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:PCQI:REPeat................................ 478
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SLENgth?..................................... 478
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SLENgth:ADJust............................479
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SFORmat?
Queries the used slot format.
Return values:
<SlotFormat>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 1
0
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Slot Format" on page 192
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:MMODe <MMode>
(Release 8 and Later, Release 8 and Later (RT)
Enables/disables working in MIMO mode for the selected UE.
Parameters:
<MMode>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
0
472
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
see Example "HS-DPCCH Scheduling" on page 471
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "MIMO Mode" on page 193
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SC:ENABled
<SecCellEnabled>
Enables the selected number of secondary cells for the selected UE.
Parameters:
<SecCellEnabled>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 7
0
Example:
see Example "HS-DPCCH Scheduling" on page 471
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Secondary Cell Enabled" on page 193
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SC:ACTive
<SecCellActive>
(Release 8 and Later)
Sets the number of active secondary cells for the selected UE.
Parameters:
<SecCellActive>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 7
0
Example:
see Example "HS-DPCCH Scheduling" on page 471
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Secondary Cell Active" on page 194
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:HACK:ROWS <RowCount>
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:PCQI:ROWS <RowCount>
Determines the number of the rows in the HARQ-ACK respectivelly in the PCI/CQI
scheduling table.
Parameters:
<RowCount>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 32
1
Example:
see Example "HS-DPCCH Scheduling" on page 471
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
473
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Manual operation:
See "Number of Rows" on page 197
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:HACK:FROM
<HackFrom>
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:HACK:TO
<HackTo>
(Release 8 and Later)
Defines the beginning / end of the HARQ-ACK transmissions inside the HARQ-ACK
cycle (specified by HARQ ACK Repeat After). The range is specified in multiples of
intervals (Inter TTI distace).
Suffix:
<ch0>
.
0..<RowCount>
Parameters:
<HackTo>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to dynamic
row index
Example:
see Example "HS-DPCCH Scheduling" on page 471
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "HARQ-ACK From Interval/ HARQ-ACK To Interval"
on page 194
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:HACK<di>
<HarqAck>
(Release 8 and Later)
Sets the information transmitted during the HARQ-ACK slots of the TTIs during the corresponding specified HARQ-ACK From/To range.
For detailed description, see "HS-DPCCH 1/2, HARQ-ACK 1/2/3/4" on page 195. The
Table 8-1 provides the neccessary cross-reference information.
Table 8-1: Cross-reference between the used GUI terms and abbreviations in the SCPI command
Value name
Parameter value
"DTX"
DTX | D_DTX
"PRE, POST"
PRE | POST
"A, N"
A | N
"AA, AN, NA, NN"
M_A | M_N | M_AA | M_AN | M_NA | M_NN
"A/D, N/A, … "
S_A_D | S_N_A | ...
(different combinations possible)
(different combinations possible)
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
474
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Value name
Parameter value
"A/D/D, N/D/D, … "
S2_N_N_N | S2_N_N_A | ...
(different combinations possible)
(different combinations possible)
"AN/NN, D/AA, … "
MS_AA_AA | MS_D_AA ...
(different combinations possible)
(different combinations possible)
Suffix:
<ch0>
Parameters:
<HarqAck>
.
0..<RowCount>
DTX | PRE | POST | A | N | M_A | M_N | M_AA | M_AN | M_NA |
M_NN | S_A_D | S_N_D | S_D_A | S_D_N | S_A_A | S_A_N |
S_N_A | S_N_N | MS_A_D | MS_N_D | MS_AA_D | MS_AN_D |
MS_NA_D | MS_NN_D | MS_D_A | MS_D_N | MS_D_AA |
MS_D_AN | MS_D_NA | MS_D_NN | MS_A_A | MS_A_N |
MS_N_A | MS_N_N | MS_A_AA | MS_A_AN | MS_A_NA |
MS_A_NN | MS_N_AA | MS_N_AN | MS_N_NA | MS_N_NN |
MS_AA_A | MS_AA_N | MS_AN_A | MS_AN_N | MS_NA_A |
MS_NA_N | MS_NN_A | MS_NN_N | MS_AA_AA |
MS_AA_AN | MS_AA_NA | MS_AA_NN | MS_AN_AA |
MS_AN_AN | MS_AN_NA | MS_AN_NN | MS_NA_AA |
MS_NA_AN | MS_NA_NA | MS_NA_NN | MS_NN_AA |
MS_NN_AN | MS_NN_NA | MS_NN_NN | S2_A_D_D |
S2_N_D_D | S2_D_A_D | S2_D_N_D | S2_D_D_A |
S2_D_D_N | S2_A_A_D | S2_A_N_D | S2_N_A_D |
S2_N_N_D | S2_A_D_A | S2_A_D_N | S2_N_D_A |
S2_N_D_N | S2_D_A_A | S2_D_A_N | S2_D_N_A |
S2_D_N_N | S2_A_A_A | S2_A_A_N | S2_A_N_A |
S2_A_N_N | S2_N_A_A | S2_N_A_N | S2_N_N_A |
S2_N_N_N | D_DTX
Example:
see Example "HS-DPCCH Scheduling" on page 471
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "HS-DPCCH 1/2, HARQ-ACK 1/2/3/4" on page 195
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:POHAck
<PoHack>
(Release 8 and Later)
Sets the power offset of a HARQ-ACK response relative to the [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:POWer.
Suffix:
<ch0>
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
.
0..<RowCount>
475
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<PoHack>
float
Range:
-10 to 10
Increment: 0.1
*RST:
0
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Power Offset HARQ-ACK" on page 196
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:PCQI:FROM
<PcqiFrom>
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:PCQI:TO
<PcqiTo>
(Release 8 and Later)
Defines the beginning / end of the PCI/CQI transmissions inside the PCI/CQI cycle
(specified by PCI/CQI Repeat After). The range is specified in multiples of intervals
(Inter TTI distace).
Suffix:
<ch0>
.
0..<RowCount>
Parameters:
<PcqiTo>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to dynamic
row index
Example:
see Example "HS-DPCCH Scheduling" on page 471
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "PCI-CQI From Interval/ PCI-CQI To Interval" on page 197
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:PCQI<di>:
TYPE <CqiType>
Selects the type of the PCI/CQI report.
Suffix:
<ch0>
.
0..<RowCount>
Parameters:
<CqiType>
DTX | CQI | TAST | TADT | TB | CCQI
TAST|TADT
Type A Single TB, Type A Double TB
TB
Type B
CCQI
Composite CQI
Example:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
see Example "HS-DPCCH Scheduling" on page 471
476
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "HS-DPCCH 1/2, PCI/CQI 1/2/3/4 Type" on page 198
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:PCQI<di>:
CQI<us> <Cqi>
Parameters:
<Cqi>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 30
0
Example:
see Example "HS-DPCCH Scheduling" on page 471
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "CQI/CQIS/CQI1/CQI2" on page 199
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:PCQI<di>:PCI
<PCI>
Suffix:
<ch0>
.
0..<RowCount>
Parameters:
<PCI>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 3
0
Example:
see Example "HS-DPCCH Scheduling" on page 471
Manual operation:
See "PCI" on page 199
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:ROW<ch0>:POPCqi
<PoPcqi>
(Release 8 and Later)
Sets the power offset Poff_PCI/CQI of all PCI/CQI slots during the corresponding specified
PCI/CQI From/To range relative to the [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:
MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:POWer.
Suffix:
<ch0>
.
0..<RowCount>
Parameters:
<PoPcqi>
float
Range:
-10 to 10
Increment: 0.1
*RST:
0
Options:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
R&S SMW-K83
477
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Manual operation:
See "Power Offset PCI/CQI" on page 198
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:HACK:REPeat <HackRep>
Defines the cycle length after that the information in the HS-DPCCH scheduling table is
read out again from the beginning.
Parameters:
<HackRep>
integer
Range:
1 to dynamic
Example:
see Example "HS-DPCCH Scheduling" on page 471
Manual operation:
See "HARQ-ACK Repeat After" on page 194
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:PCQI:REPeat <PcqiRep>
(Release 8 and Later)
Defines the cycle length after that the information in the HS-DPCCH scheduling table is
read out again from the beginning.
Parameters:
<PcqiRep>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to dynamic
1
Example:
see Example "HS-DPCCH Scheduling" on page 471
Manual operation:
See "PCI/CQI Repeat After" on page 197
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SLENgth?
(Release 8 and Later)
Queries the suggested and current ARB sequence length.
The current ARB sequence length is adjusted with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:
BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SLENgth:ADJust on page 479.
Return values:
<SLength>
float
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:SLEN?
queries the ARB sequence length
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Suggested / Current ARB Seq. Length (HS-DPCCH)"
on page 199
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
478
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPCCh:HS:SLENgth:ADJust
(Release 8 and Later)
Sets the current ARB sequence length to the suggested value.
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPCC:HS:SLEN:ADJ
adjusts the ARB sequence length
Usage:
Event
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Adjust ARB Sequence Length (HS-DPCCH)" on page 201
8.9.5 DPDCH Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:CCODe?.......................479
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:DATA........................... 479
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:DATA:DSELect..............480
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:DATA:PATTern............. 480
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:SRATe?........................481
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPDCh:FCIO..................................................481
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPDCh:ORATe...............................................481
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPDCh:POWer............................................... 482
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPDCh:STATe............................................... 482
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:CCODe?
The command queries the channelization code of the specified channel. The value is
fixed and depends on the overall symbol rate of the user equipment.
Return values:
<CCode>
float
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:CHAN:DPDC:CCOD?
queries the channelization code for DPDCH 1 of user equipment
1.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Channelization Code" on page 183
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:DATA <Data>
The command determines the data source for the selected DPDCH.
For the enhanced channels of user equipment 1 (UE1), this entry is valid when channel
coding is deactivated. When channel coding is active, data sources are selected for the
transport channels with the commands :BB:W3GPp:MST:CHANnel:DPDCh:DCCH:
DATA and :BB:W3GPp:MST:ENHanced:TCHannel:DATA.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
479
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Data>
PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt |
ZERO | ONE | PATTern
PNxx
The pseudo-random sequence generator is used as the data
source. Different random sequence lengths can be selected.
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:
CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:DATA:DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used The bit pattern for the data is defined by the
command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:
CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:DATA:PATTern.
*RST:
PN9
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:CHAN:DPDC:DATA PN11
selects internal PRBS data with period length 211-1 as the data
source.
Manual operation:
See "DPDCH Data Source" on page 184
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:DATA:DSELect
<DSelect>
The command selects the data list for the DLISt data source selection.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file
name, without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<DSelect>
Example:
<data list name>
BB:W3GP:MST1:CHAN1:DPDC:DATA DLIS
selects the Data Lists data source.
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:W3GP:MST1:CHAN1:DPDC:DATA:DSEL 'dpdch_13'
selects the file dpdch_13 as the data source.
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:DATA:PATTern
<Pattern>
The command enters the bit pattern for the PATTern data source selection. The first
parameter determines the bit pattern (choice of hexadecimal, octal or binary notation),
the second specifies the number of bits to use.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
480
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Pattern>
64 bits
*RST:
#H0,1
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:CHAN1:DPDC:DATA PATT
selects the Pattern data source.
BB:W3GP:MST1:CHAN1:DPDC:DATA:PATT #H3F, 8
defines the bit pattern.
Manual operation:
See "DPDCH Data Source" on page 184
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:SRATe?
The command queries the symbol rate of the DPDCH. The symbol rate depends on
the overall symbol rate set and cannot be modified.
Return values:
<SRate>
D15K | D30K | D60K | D120k | D240k | D480k | D960k
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST4:CHAN2:DPDC:SRAT?
queries the symbol rate of DPDCH 2 of user equipment 4.
Response: 960
the symbol rate is 960 ksps.
Note:
DPDCH 2 is only active once the overall symbol rate is 2 x 960
ksps or more. When overall symbol rates are less, the error
message "???" is returned.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Symbol Rate / State" on page 183
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPDCh:FCIO <Fcio>
The command sets the channelization code to I/0. This mode can only be activated if
the overall symbol rate is < 2 x 960 kbps.
Parameters:
<Fcio>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPDC:FCIO ON
sets the channelization code to I/O.
Manual operation:
See "Force Channelization Code To I/0" on page 182
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPDCh:ORATe <ORate>
The command sets the overall symbol rate. The overall symbol rate determines the
number of DPDCHs as well as their symbol rate and channelization codes.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
481
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<ORate>
D15K | D30K | D60K | D120k | D240k | D480k | D960k |
D1920k | D2880k | D3840k | D4800k | D5760k
D15K ... D5760K
15 ksps ... 6 x 960 ksps
*RST:
D60K
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPDC:ORAT D15K
sets the overall symbol rate to 15 ksps. Only DPDCH1 is active,
the symbol rate is 15 ksps and the channelization code is 64.
Manual operation:
See "Overall Symbol Rate" on page 182
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPDCh:POWer <Power>
The command defines the channel power of the DPDCHs. The power entered is relative to the powers of the other channels. If "Adjust Total Power to 0 dB" is executed ([:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:POWer:ADJust), the power is normalized to a total power
for all channels of 0 dB. The power ratios of the individual channels remains
unchanged.
Note: The uplink channels are not blanked in this mode (duty cycle 100%).
Parameters:
<Power>
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST4:DPDC:POW -60dB
sets the channel power for DPDCH 2 of user equipment 4 to -60
dB. The channel power relates to the power of the other channels.
BB:W3GP:POW:ADJ
the channel power relates to 0 dB.
Manual operation:
See "Channel Power" on page 181
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:DPDCh:STATe <State>
The command activates or deactivates DPDCHs. This always activates or deactivates
all the channels. The number of channels (1...6) is determined by the overall symbol
rate.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:DPDC:STAT ON
activates all the DPDCHs.
Manual operation:
See "State (DPDCH)" on page 181
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
482
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
8.9.6 PCPCH Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:CPOWer.............................................483
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:CPSFormat.........................................483
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:DATA................................................. 484
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:DATA:DSELect................................... 484
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:DATA:PATTern................................... 485
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:DPOWer.............................................485
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:FBI:MODE.......................................... 485
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:FBI:PATTern.......................................486
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:MLENgth............................................ 486
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:PLENgth.............................................486
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:PPOWer............................................. 487
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:PPOWer:STEP....................................487
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:PREPetition........................................ 487
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:RAFTer.............................................. 488
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:RARB.................................................488
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:SIGNature.......................................... 489
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:SRATe............................................... 489
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TFCI...................................................489
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:DPOWer:MPARt?..................... 489
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:DPOWer:PREamble?................490
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:SOFFset.................................. 490
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:SPERiod?................................ 491
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:TIME:PREMp........................... 491
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:TIME:PREPre...........................491
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TPC:DATA..........................................492
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TPC:DATA:DSELect............................ 492
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TPC:DATA:PATTern............................493
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TPC:READ......................................... 493
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:CPOWer <CPower>
The command defines the power of the control component of the PCPCH.
Parameters:
<CPower>
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PCPC:CPOW -10 dB
sets the power to -10 dB.
Manual operation:
See "Control Power" on page 255
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:CPSFormat <CpSFormat>
The command defines the slot format of the control component of the PCPCH.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
483
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
The slot format sets the associated FBI mode automatically:
●
Slot format 0 = FBI OFF
●
Slot format 1 = FBI 1 bit
●
Slot format 2 = FBI 2 bits
Parameters:
<CpSFormat>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 2
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PCPC:CPSF 2
sets slot format 2.
Manual operation:
See "Slot Format" on page 255
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:DATA <Data>
The command determines the data source for the PCPCH.
Parameters:
<Data>
ZERO | ONE | PATTern | PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 |
PN21 | PN23 | DLISt
PNxx
The pseudo-random sequence generator is used as the data
source. Different random sequence lengths can be selected.
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MST:PCPCh:DATA:DSELect[:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:DATA:
DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used. The bit pattern for the data is defined by
the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:
PCPCh:DATA:PATTern.
*RST:
PN9
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PCPC:DATA PN11
selects internal PRBS data with period length 2^11-1 as the data
source.
Manual operation:
See "Data Source" on page 256
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:DATA:DSELect <DSelect>
The command selects the data list for the DLISt data source.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
484
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file
name, without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<DSelect>
string
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PCPC:DATA DLIS
selects data lists as the data source.
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:W3GP:MST1:PCPC:DATA:DSEL 'pcpch_data'
selects the data list pcpch_data.
Manual operation:
See "Data Source" on page 256
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:DATA:PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the data component when the PATTern
data source is selected. The first parameter determines the bit pattern (choice of hexadecimal, octal or binary notation), the second specifies the number of bits to use.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
64 bits
*RST:
#H0,1
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:PCPC:DATA:PATT #H3F,8
defines the bit pattern of the data for the DATA component.
Manual operation:
See "Data Source" on page 256
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:DPOWer <DPower>
The command defines the power of the data component of the PCPCH.
Parameters:
<DPower>
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PCPC:DPOW -10 dB
sets the power to -10 dB.
Manual operation:
See "Data Power" on page 254
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:FBI:MODE <Mode>
The command sets the number of bits (1 or 2) for the FBI field. With OFF, the field is
not used.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
485
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
The FBI pattern automatically sets the associated slot format:
●
FBI OFF = Slot format 0
●
FBI 1 bit = Slot format 1
●
FBI 2 bits = Slot format 2
Parameters:
<Mode>
OFF | D1B | D2B
*RST:
OFF
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST2:PCPC:FBI:MODE OFF
the FBl field is not used.
Manual operation:
See "FBI Mode" on page 255
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:FBI:PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the FBI field when the PATTern data
source is selected. The maximum length of the pattern is 32 bits. The first parameter
determines the bit pattern (choice of hexadecimal, octal or binary notation), the second
specifies the number of bits to use.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
32 bits
*RST:
#H0,1
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PCPC:FBI:PATT #H3F,8
defines the bit pattern of the data for the FBI field.
Manual operation:
See "FBI Pattern" on page 255
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:MLENgth <MLength>
The command sets the length of the message component as a number of frames.
Parameters:
<MLength>
1 | 2 Frames
Range:
*RST:
1 to 2
1 Frame
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST4:PCPC:MLEN 2
the length of the message component is 2 frames.
Manual operation:
See "Message Length" on page 255
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:PLENgth <PLength>
The command defines the length of the power control preamble of the PCPCH as a
number of slots.
Parameters:
<PLength>
S0 | S8
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
S8
486
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PCPC:PLEN S8
sets a length of 8 slots for the power control preamble.
Manual operation:
See "Power Control Preamble Length" on page 253
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:PPOWer <PPower>
The command defines the power of the preamble component of the PCPCH. If the preamble is repeated and the power increased with each repetition, this setting specifies
the power achieved during the last repetition.
Parameters:
<PPower>
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PCPC:PPOW -10 dB
sets the power to -10 dB.
BB:W3GP:MST1:PCPC:PPOW:STEP 1 dB
sets an increase in power of 1 dB per preamble repetition.
BB:W3GP:MST1:PCPC:PREP 2
sets a sequence of 2 preambles. The power of the first preamble
is - 9 dB, the power of the second, -1 dB.
Manual operation:
See "Preamble Power" on page 253
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:PPOWer:STEP <Step>
The command defines the step width of the power increase, by which the preamble
component of the PCPCH is increased from repetition to repetition. The power during
the last repetition corresponds to the power defined by the command [:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:PPOWer.
Parameters:
<Step>
float
Range:
0 dB to 10 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PCPC:PPOW:STEP 2dB
the power of the PCPCH preamble is increased by 2 dB with
every repetition.
Manual operation:
See "Preamble Power Step" on page 253
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:PREPetition <PRepetition>
The command defines the number of PCPCH preamble components.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
487
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<PRepetition>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 10
1
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PCPC:PREP 3
sets three preamble components.
Manual operation:
See "Preamble Repetition" on page 253
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:RAFTer <Repeatafter>
Sets the number of access slots after that the PCPCH structure will be repeated.
Parameters:
<Repeatafter>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 1000
18
Example:
see [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:
RARB on page 488
Manual operation:
See "Repeat Structure After (x Acc. Slots)" on page 252
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:RARB <State>
Enables/disables repeating the selected PCPCH structure during one ARB sequence.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
ON
Within one ARB sequence, the selected PCPCH structure is
repeated once.
OFF
The selected PCPCH structure can be repeated several time,
depending on the structure length ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:SPERiod?) and the
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:
RAFTer.
*RST:
1
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:SLENgth 4
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:MSTation3:PCPCh:TIMing:
SPERiod?
Response: 14
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:MSTation1:PCPCh:RARB OFF
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:MSTation1:PCPCh:RAFTer 20
Manual operation:
See "Repeat Structure After ARB Sequence Length"
on page 252
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
488
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:SIGNature <Signature>
The command selects the signature of the PCPCH (see Table 3 in 3GPP TS 25.213
Version 3.4.0 Release 1999).
Parameters:
<Signature>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 15
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PCPC:SIGN 5
selects signature 5.
Manual operation:
See "Signature" on page 254
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:SRATe <SRate>
The command sets the symbol rate of the PCPCH.
User Equipment 1: When channel coding is active, the symbol rate is limited to the
range between 15 and 120 ksps. Values above this limit are automatically set to 120
ksps.
Parameters:
<SRate>
D15K | D30K | D60K | D120k | D240k | D480k | D960k
*RST:
D30K
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PCPC:SRAT D15K
sets the symbol rate of the PCPCH of user equipment 1 to 15
ksps.
Manual operation:
See "Symbol Rate" on page 255
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TFCI <Tfci>
Sets the value of the TFCI (Transport Format Combination Indicator) field. This value
selects a combination of 30 bits, which are divided into two groups of 15 successive
slots.
Parameters:
<Tfci>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 1023
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PCPC:TFCI 21
sets the TFCI value to 21.
Manual operation:
See "TFCI" on page 256
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:DPOWer:MPARt?
Queries the level correction value for the message part. In case of one UE active, the
power of the message part can be calculated by adding the set RF level.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
489
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Return values:
<MPart>
float
Range:
-80 to 0
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST3:PCPC:TIM:DPOW:MPAR?
queries the level correction value for the message part.
Response: 1.2
the correction value is 1.2 dB.
POW?
queries the RF level.
Response: 2
the RF output level is 2 dBm. The message part power is 3.2
dBm
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Delta Power (Message Part)" on page 250
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:DPOWer:PREamble?
Queries level correction value for the last AICH preamble before the message part.
This value is identical to the correction value for the CD preamble. The level of the
other preambles can be calculated by subtracting the set Preamble Power Step.
Return values:
<PReamble>
float
Range:
-80 to 0
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST3:PCPC:TIM:DPOW:PRE?
queries the level correction value for the last AICH preamble
before the message part.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Delta Power (Preamble)" on page 250
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:SOFFset <SOffset>
This command defines the start offset of the PCPCH in access slots. The starting time
delay in timeslots is calculated according to: 2 x Start Offset.
Parameters:
<SOffset>
integer
Range:
*RST:
Example:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
1 to 14
0
BB:W3GP:MST3:PCPC:TIM:SOFF 1
the start offset of the PCPCH of UE 3 is 2 access slots.
490
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Manual operation:
See "Start Offset #" on page 250
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:SPERiod?
Queries the structure lentgh.
Return values:
<SPeriod>
float
Example:
see [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:
RARB on page 488
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Structure Length" on page 251
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:TIME:PREMp <Premp>
This command defines the AICH Transmission Timing. This parameter defines the time
difference between the preamble and the message part. Two modes are defined in the
standard. In mode 0, the preamble to message part difference is 3 access slots, in
mode 1 it is 4 access slots.
Parameters:
<Premp>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 14
3
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST3:PCPC:TIM:TIME:PREM 3
the difference between the preamble and the message part is 3
access slots.
Manual operation:
See "Transmission Timing (Message Part)" on page 251
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TIMing:TIME:PREPre
<Prepre>
This command defines the time difference between two successive preambles in
access slots.
Parameters:
<Prepre>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 14
3
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST3:PCPC:TIM:TIME:PREP 3
the time difference between two successive preambles is 3
access slots.
Manual operation:
See "Transmission Timing (Preamble)" on page 251
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
491
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TPC:DATA <Data>
The command determines the data source for the TPC field of the PCPCH.
Parameters:
<Data>
ZERO | ONE | PATTern | DLISt
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TPC:
DATA:DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used. The bit pattern for the data is defined by
the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:
PCPCh:TPC:DATA:PATTern. The maximum length is 64 bits.
*RST:
PATTern
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST2:PCPC:TPC:DATA PATT
selects as the data source for the TPC field of user equipment 2
the bit pattern defined with the following command.
BB:W3GP:MST2:PCPC:TPC:DATA:PATT #H48D0,16
defines the bit pattern.
Manual operation:
See "TPC Data Source" on page 256
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TPC:DATA:DSELect
<DSelect>
The command selects the data list when the DLISt data source is selected for the TPC
field of the PCPCH.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file
name, without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<DSelect>
string
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PCPC:TPC:DATA DLIS
selects data lists as the data source.
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:W3GP:MST1:PCPC:TPC:DATA:DSEL 'dpcch_tpc_1'
selects the data list dpcch_tpc1.
Manual operation:
See "TPC Data Source" on page 256
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
492
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TPC:DATA:PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the PATTern data source selection. The
maximum length of the bit pattern is 64 bits.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
64 bits
*RST:
#H0,1
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PCPC:DATA:PATT #H3F,8
defines the bit pattern of the data for the FBI field.
Manual operation:
See "TPC Data Source" on page 256
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TPC:READ <Read>
The command sets the read out mode for the bit pattern of the TPC field of the
PCPCH.
The bit pattern is selected with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:
MSTation<st>:PCPCh:TPC:DATA.
Parameters:
<Read>
CONTinuous | S0A | S1A | S01A | S10A
CONTinuous
The bit pattern is used cyclically.
S0A
The bit pattern is used once, then the TPC sequence continues
with 0 bits.
S1A
The bit pattern is used once, then the TPC sequence continues
with 1 bits.
S01A
The bit pattern is used once and then the TPC sequence is continued with 0 and 1 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on
by the symbol rate, for example, 00001111).
S10A
The bit pattern is used once and then the TPC sequence is continued with 1 and 0 bits alternately (in multiples, depending on
by the symbol rate, for example, 11110000).
*RST:
CONTinuous
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST2:PCPC:TPC:READ CONT
the selected bit pattern is repeated continuously for the TPC
sequence.
Manual operation:
See "Read Out Mode" on page 257
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
493
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
8.9.7 PRACH Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:ATTiming............................................494
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:CPOWer.............................................494
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:DATA................................................. 495
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:DATA:DSELect................................... 495
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:DATA:PATTern................................... 496
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:DPOWer.............................................496
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:MLENgth............................................ 496
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:PPOWer............................................. 496
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:PPOWer:STEP....................................497
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:PREPetition........................................ 497
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:RAFTer.............................................. 497
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:RARB.................................................498
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:SFORmat........................................... 498
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:SIGNature.......................................... 499
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:SRATe............................................... 499
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TFCI...................................................499
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:DPOWer:MPARt?..................... 500
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:DPOWer:MPARt:CONTrol?....... 500
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:DPOWer:MPARt:DATA?........... 500
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:DPOWer:PREamble?................501
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:SOFFset.................................. 501
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:SPERiod?................................ 501
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:TIME:PREMp........................... 502
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:TIME:PREPre...........................502
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:ATTiming <AtTiming>
This command defines which AICH Transmission Timing, time difference between the
preamble and the message part or the time difference between two successive preambles in access slots, will be definded.
Parameters:
<AtTiming>
ATT0 | ATT1
*RST:
Example:
ATT0
BB:W3GP:MST3:PRAC:ATT ATT1
selects the AICH Transmission Timing as the difference
between the preamble and the message part.
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:CPOWer <CPower>
The command defines the power of the control component of the PRACH.
Parameters:
<CPower>
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
494
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PRAC:CPOW -10 dB
sets the power to -10 dB.
Manual operation:
See "Control Power" on page 244
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:DATA <Data>
The command determines the data source for the PRACH.
Parameters:
<Data>
ZERO | ONE | PATTern | PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 |
PN21 | PN23 | DLISt
PNxx
The pseudo-random sequence generator is used as the data
source. Different random sequence lengths can be selected.
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:DATA:
DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used. The bit pattern for the data is defined by
the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:
PRACh:DATA:PATTern.
*RST:
PN9
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PRAC:DATA PN11
selects internal PRBS data with period length 211-1 as the data
source.
Manual operation:
See "Data Source" on page 245
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:DATA:DSELect <DSelect>
The command selects the data list for the DLISt data source.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file
name, without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<DSelect>
Example:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
string
BB:W3GP:MST1:PRAC:DATA DLIS
selects data lists as the data source.
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:W3GP:MST1:PRAC:DATA:DSEL 'pcpch_data'
selects the data list pcpch_data.
495
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Manual operation:
See "Data Source" on page 245
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:DATA:PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the data component when the PATTern
data source is selected. The first parameter determines the bit pattern (choice of hexadecimal, octal or binary notation), the second specifies the number of bits to use.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
64 bits
*RST:
#H0,1
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PRAC:DATA:PATT #H3F,8
defines the bit pattern of the data for the DATA component.
Manual operation:
See "Data Source" on page 245
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:DPOWer <DPower>
The command defines the power of the data component of the PRACH.
Parameters:
<DPower>
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PRAC:DPOW -10 dB
sets the power to -10 dB.
Manual operation:
See "Data Power" on page 244
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:MLENgth <MLength>
The command sets the length of the message component as a number of frames.
Parameters:
<MLength>
1 | 2 Frames
*RST:
1
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST4:PRAC:MLEN 2
the length of the message component is 2 frames.
Manual operation:
See "Message Length" on page 244
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:PPOWer <PPower>
The command defines the power of the preamble component of the PRACH. If the preamble is repeated and the power increased with each repetition, this setting specifies
the power achieved during the last repetition.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
496
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<PPower>
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PRAC:PPOW -10 dB
sets the power to -10 dB.
BB:W3GP:MST1:PRAC:PPOW:STEP 1 dB
sets an increase in power of 1 dB per preamble repetition.
BB:W3GP:MST1:PRAC:PREP 2
sets a sequence of 2 preambles. The power of the first preamble
is - 9 dB, the power of the second, -1 dB.
Manual operation:
See "Preamble Power" on page 243
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:PPOWer:STEP <Step>
The command defines the step width of the power increase, by which the preamble
component of the PRACH is increased from repetition to repetition. The power defined
during the last repetition corresponds to the power defined by the command [:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:PPOWer.
Parameters:
<Step>
float
Range:
0 dB to 10 dB
Increment: 0.1 dB
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PRAC:PPOW:STEP 2 dB
the power of the PRACH preamble is increased by 2 dB with
every repetition.
Manual operation:
See "Preamble Power Step" on page 243
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:PREPetition <PRepetition>
The command defines the number of PRACH preamble components.
Parameters:
<PRepetition>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 10
1
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PRAC:PREP 3
sets three preamble components.
Manual operation:
See "Preamble Repetition" on page 243
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:RAFTer <Repeatafter>
Sets the number of access slots after that the PRACH structure will be repeated.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
497
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Repeatafter>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 1000
11
Example:
see [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:
RARB on page 498
Manual operation:
See "Repeat Structure After (x Acc. Slots)" on page 242
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:RARB <State>
Enables/disables repeating the selected PRACH structure during one ARB sequence.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
ON
Within one ARB sequence, the selected PRACH structure is
repeated once.
OFF
The selected PRACH structure can be repeated several time,
depending on the structure length ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:SPERiod?) and the
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:
RAFTer.
*RST:
1
Example:
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:SLENgth 4
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:MSTation3:PRACh:TIMing:
SPERiod?
Response: 14
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:MSTation1:PRACh:RARB OFF
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:MSTation1:PRACh:RAFTer 20
Manual operation:
See "Repeat Structure After ARB Sequence Length"
on page 241
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:SFORmat <SFormat>
Defines the slot format of the PRACH.
A change of slot format leads to an automatic change of symbol rate [:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:SRATe
When channel coding is active, the slot format is predetermined. So in this case, the
command has no effect.
Parameters:
<SFormat>
0|1|2|3
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
1
498
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:PRAC:SFOR 2
sets slot format 2.
Manual operation:
See "Slot Format" on page 244
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:SIGNature <Signature>
The command selects the signature of the PRACH (see Table 3 in 3GPP TS 25.213
Version 3.4.0 Release 1999).
Parameters:
<Signature>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 15
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PRAC:SIGN 5
selects signature 5.
Manual operation:
See "Signature" on page 243
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:SRATe <SRate>
The command sets the symbol rate of the PRACH.
A change of symbol rate leads to an automatic change of slot format [:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:SFORmat.
Parameters:
<SRate>
D15K | D30K | D60K | D120k
*RST:
D30K
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PRAC:SRAT D15K
sets the symbol rate of the PRACH of user equipment 1 to 15
ksps.
Manual operation:
See "Symbol Rate" on page 245
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TFCI <Tfci>
Sets the value of the TFCI (Transport Format Combination Indicator) field. This value
selects a combination of 30 bits, which are divided into two groups of 15 successive
slots.
Parameters:
<Tfci>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 1023
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:PRAC:TFCI 21
sets the TFCI value to 21.
Manual operation:
See "TFCI" on page 245
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
499
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:DPOWer:MPARt?
Queries the level correction value for the message part. In case of one UE active and
"Level Reference" set to "RMS Power", the power of the message part can be calculated by adding the set RF level.
Return values:
<MPart>
float
Range:
-80 to 0
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST3:PRAC:TIM:DPOW:MPAR?
queries the level correction value for the message part.
Response: 1.2
the correction value is 1.2 dB.
POW?
queries the RF level.
Response: 2
the RF output level is 2 dBm. The message part power is 3.2
dBm.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Delta Power (Message Part)" on page 240
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:DPOWer:MPARt:
CONTrol?
Queries the level correction value for the message control part.
Return values:
<Control>
float
Range:
-80 to 0
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST3:PRAC:TIM:DPOW:MPAR:CONT?
queries the level correction value for the message control part.
Response: -3.24
the correction value is -3.24 dB.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Delta Power (Message Part)" on page 240
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:DPOWer:MPARt:
DATA?
Queries the level correction value for the message data part.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
500
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Return values:
<Data>
float
Range:
-80 to 0
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST3:PRAC:TIM:DPOW:MPAR:DATA?
queries the level correction value for the message data part.
Response: -3.24
the correction value is -3.24 dB.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Delta Power (Message Part)" on page 240
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:DPOWer:PREamble?
Queries level correction value for the preamble before the message part.
Return values:
<Preamble>
float
Range:
-80 to 0
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST3:PRAC:TIM:DPOW:PRE?
queries the level correction value for the last preamble before
the message part.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Delta Power (Preamble)" on page 240
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:SOFFset <SOffset>
This command defines the start offset of the PRACH in access slots. The starting time
delay in timeslots is calculated according to: 2 x Start Offset.
Parameters:
<SOffset>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 50
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST3:PRAC:TIM:SOFF 1
the start offset of the PRACH of UE 3 is 2 access slots.
Manual operation:
See "Start Offset #" on page 240
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:SPERiod?
Queries the structure length.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
501
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Return values:
<SPeriod>
float
Example:
see [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:
RARB on page 498
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Structure Length" on page 241
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:TIME:PREMp <Premp>
This command defines the AICH Transmission Timing. This parameter defines the time
difference between the preamble and the message part. Two modes are defined in the
standard. In mode 0, the preamble to message part difference is 3 access slots, in
mode 1 it is 4 access slots.
Parameters:
<Premp>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 14
3
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST3:PRAC:TIM.TIME:PREM 3
the difference between the preamble and the message part is 3
access slots.
Manual operation:
See "Time Pre->MP" on page 240
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:PRACh:TIMing:TIME:PREPre
<Prepre>
This command defines the time difference between two successive preambles in
access slots.
Parameters:
<Prepre>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 14
3
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST3:PRAC:TIM.TIME:PREP 3
the time difference between two successive preambles is 3
access slots.
Manual operation:
See "Time Pre->Pre" on page 240
8.9.8 HSUPA Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:CCODe?...... 504
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:DATA...........504
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:DATA:
DSELect............................................................................................................. 505
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
502
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:DATA:
PATTern............................................................................................................. 506
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:POWer.........506
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:SRATe?....... 506
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:CHANnel.................... 507
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:CRATe?..................... 507
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DATA.........................507
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DATA:DSELect........... 508
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DATA:PATTern........... 509
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DERRor:BIT:LAYer......509
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DERRor:BIT:RATE...... 509
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DERRor:BIT:STATe.... 509
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DERRor:BLOCk:
RATE................................................................................................................. 510
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DERRor:BLOCk:
STATe................................................................................................................ 510
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DTX:PATTern............. 510
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DTX:STATe................ 511
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:SIMulation:
CONNector......................................................................................................... 511
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:SIMulation:
ADEFinition......................................................................................................... 511
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:SIMulation:
DELay:AUSer......................................................................................................512
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:SIMulation:
DELay:FEEDback?.............................................................................................. 512
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:SIMulation:
MODE................................................................................................................ 512
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:SIMulation:
MRETransmissions.............................................................................................. 513
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:SIMulation:
RVZero...............................................................................................................513
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:SIMulation[:
STATe]............................................................................................................... 514
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ[:
SIMulation]:PATTern<ch>.....................................................................................514
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HPROcesses?............ 514
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:MIBRate?................... 514
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:MODulation................ 515
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:ORATe.......................515
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:PAYBits?....................515
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:STATe....................... 516
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:TBS:INDex................. 516
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:TBS:TABLe................ 516
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:TTIBits?..................... 517
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:TTIEdch..................... 518
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:UECategory?.............. 518
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:CCODe?............................518
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:HBIT..................................518
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:POWer.............................. 519
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
503
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:RSNumber......................... 519
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:STATe............................... 519
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:TFCI..................................519
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:FCIO................................. 520
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:MODulation........................520
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:ORATe.............................. 520
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:STATe............................... 521
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:TTIEdch.............................521
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:EDCH:TTIEdch..................................521
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:EDCH:REPeat...................................522
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:EDCH:ROW<ch0>:FROM.................. 522
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:EDCH:ROW<ch0>:TO........................522
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:EDCH:ROWCount............................. 522
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:
CCODe?
Queries the channelization code and the modulation branch (I or Q) of the E-DPDCH
channel.
The channelization code is dependent on the overall symbol rate set and cannot be
modified.
Return values:
<ChannelCode>
integer
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST4:HSUP:CHAN1:DPDC:E:CCOD?
queries the channelization code and the modulation branch (I or
Q) of E-DPDCH 1 of user equipment 4.
Response: Q,32
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Channelization Code" on page 223
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:
DATA <Data>
The command selects the data source for the E-DPDCH channel.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
504
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Data>
ZERO | ONE | PATTern | PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 |
PN21 | PN23 | DLISt
PNxx
The pseudo-random sequence generator is used as the data
source. Different random sequence lengths can be selected.
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
SOURce:[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:
HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:DATA:DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used. The bit pattern for the data is defined by
the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:
HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:DATA:PATTern.
*RST:
PN9
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:CHAN1:DPDC:E:DATA PN11
selects internal PRBS data with period length 211-1 as the data
source.
Manual operation:
See "E-DPDCH Data Source" on page 223
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:
DATA:DSELect <DSelect>
The command selects the data list for the DLISt data source.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file
name, without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<DSelect>
string
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:MST1:CHAN1:DPDC:E:DATA DLIS
selects data lists as the data source.
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:W3GP:MST1:CHAN1:DPDC:E:DATA:DSEL 'dp1'
selects the data list dp1.
Manual operation:
See "DPDCH Data Source" on page 184
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
505
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:
DATA:PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the data component when the PATTern
data source is selected. The first parameter determines the bit pattern (choice of hexadecimal, octal or binary notation), the second specifies the number of bits to use.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
64 bits
*RST:
#H0,1
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:CHAN1:DPDC:E:PATT #H3F,8
defines the bit pattern of the data for the DATA component.
Manual operation:
See "E-DPDCH Data Source" on page 223
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:
POWer <Power>
The command sets the power of the selected E-DPDCH channel.
Parameters:
<Power>
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:CHAN1:DPDC:E:POW -2.5dB
sets the power of E-DPDCH channel 1 to 2.5 dB.
Manual operation:
See "Channel Power" on page 223
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:CHANnel<ch>:DPDCh:E:
SRATe?
The command queries the symbol rate and the state of the E-DPDCH channel.
The symbol rate and the state of the channels are dependent on the overall symbol
rate set and cannot be modified.
Return values:
<SRate>
D15K | D30K | D60K | D120k | D240k | D480k | D960k |
D1920k | D2X1920K | D2X960K2X1920K
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST4:HSUP:CHAN1:DPDC:E:SRAT?
queries the symbol rate of E-DPDCH 1 of user equipment 4.
Response: 960
the symbol rate is 960 ksps.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Symbol Rate / State" on page 223
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
506
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:CHANnel
<Channel>
The command sets the FRC according to TS 25.141 Annex A.10.
Selection of FRC#8 is enabled only for instruments equipped with option SMW-K83.
Parameters:
<Channel>
USER | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8
*RST:
4
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:CHAN 4
sets the FRC to channel 4.
Manual operation:
See "Fixed Reference Channel (FRC)" on page 210
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:CRATe?
The command queries the relation between the information bits to binary channel bits.
Return values:
<CRate>
float
Example:
SOUR1:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:CRAT?
queries the coding rate.
Response: 0.705
the coding rate is 0.705.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Coding Rate (Ninf/Nbin)" on page 214
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DATA <Data>
Selects the data source for the E-DCH channels, i.e. this paramter affects the corresponding paramter of the E-DPDCH.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
507
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Data>
PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | DLISt |
ZERO | ONE | PATTern
PNxx
The pseudo-random sequence generator is used as the data
source. Different random sequence lengths can be selected.
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:
DPCCh:E:FRC:DATA:DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used. The bit pattern for the data is defined by
the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:
HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DATA:PATTern. The maximum length
is 64 bits.
*RST:
PN9
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:DATA PATT
selects as the data source
BB:W3GP:MST:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:DATA:PATT #H48D0,16
defines the bit pattern.
Manual operation:
See "Data Source (E-DCH)" on page 211
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DATA:
DSELect <DSelect>
The command selects the data list when the DLISt data source is selected for E-DCH
channels.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file
name, without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<DSelect>
string
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:DATA DLIS
selects the Data Lists data source.
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:W3GP:MST:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:DATA:DSEL 'frc_1'
selects the data list frc_1.
Manual operation:
See "Data Source (E-DCH)" on page 211
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
508
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DATA:
PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the PATTern data source selection. The
maximum length of the bit pattern is 64 bits.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
64 bits
*RST:
#H0,1
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:DATA:PATT
#B11110000,8
defines the bit pattern of the data for the E-DCH channels.
Manual operation:
See "Data Source (E-DCH)" on page 211
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DERRor:BIT:
LAYer <Layer>
The command sets the layer in the coding process at which bit errors are inserted.
Parameters:
<Layer>
TRANsport | PHYSical
*RST:
PHYSical
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:DERR:BIT:LAY
TRAN
sets the bit error insertion to the transport layer.
Manual operation:
See "Insert Errors On" on page 220
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DERRor:BIT:
RATE <Rate>
Sets the bit error rate.
Parameters:
<Rate>
float
Range:
1E-7 to 0.5
Increment: 1E-7
*RST:
0.001
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:DERR:BIT:RATE
1e-3
sets the bit error rate to 1E-3.
Manual operation:
See "Bit Error Rate" on page 219
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DERRor:BIT:
STATe <State>
The command activates or deactivates bit error generation.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
509
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
0
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:DERR:BIT:STAT
ON
activates the bit error state.
Manual operation:
See "Bit Error State" on page 219
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DERRor:
BLOCk:RATE <Rate>
Sets the block error rate.
Parameters:
<Rate>
float
Range:
1E-4 to 0.5
Increment: 1E-4
*RST:
0.1
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:DERR:BLOC:
RATE 1E-3
sets the block error rate.
Manual operation:
See "Block Error Rate" on page 220
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DERRor:
BLOCk:STATe <State>
The command activates or deactivates block error generation.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
0
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:DERR:BLOC:
STAT ON
activates the block error generation.
Manual operation:
See "Block Error State" on page 220
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DTX:PATTern
<Pattern>
The command sets the user-definable bit pattern for the DTX.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
string
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
"1"
510
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:DTX:PATT
"11-1-"
sets the bit pattern for the DTX.
Manual operation:
See "User Data (DTX Pattern)" on page 214
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:DTX:STATe
<State>
The command activates or deactivates the DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) mode.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
0
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:DTX:STAT ON
activates the DTX.
Manual operation:
See "State (DTX)" on page 214
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:
SIMulation:CONNector <Connector>
Determines the input connector at that the instrument expects the feedback signal.
Parameters:
<Connector>
LOCal | GLOBal
*RST:
LOCal
Example:
External control signal at the local TM3 connector of Baseband
A.
SOURce1:INPut:TM3:DIRection INPut
SOURce1:INPut:TM3:SIGNal FEEDback
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:MSTation1[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:
HARQ:SIMulation:CONNector LOCal
Example:
External control signal at the global USER6 connector.
SOURce:INPut:USER6:DIRection INPut
SOURce:INPut:USER6:SIGNal FEEDback
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:MSTation1[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:
HARQ:SIMulation:CONNector GLOBal
Manual operation:
See "Connector (HARQ)" on page 218
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:
SIMulation:ADEFinition <ADefinition>
Selects whether a high level (TTL) is interpreted as an ACK or a low level.
Parameters:
<ADefinition>
HIGH | LOW
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
HIGH
511
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
SOUR1:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:HARQ:SIM:
ADEF HIGH
a high level (TTL) is interpreted as an ACK.
Manual operation:
See "ACK Definition (HARQ)" on page 218
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:
SIMulation:DELay:AUSer <AUser>
Selects an additional delay to adjust the delay between the HARQ and the feedback.
Parameters:
<AUser>
integer
Range:
*RST:
-50 to 60
0
Example:
SOUR1:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:HARQ:SIM:
DEL:AUS 20
sets the additional user delay to 20.
Manual operation:
See "Additional User Delay" on page 219
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:
SIMulation:DELay:FEEDback?
Queries the delay between the HARQ and the feedback.
Return values:
<Feedback>
float
Range:
*RST:
0 to 600
378
Example:
SOUR1:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:HARQ:SIM:
DEL:FEED?
queries the delay between HARQ and feedback.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Delay Between HARQ And Feedback (HARQ)"
on page 218
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:
SIMulation:MODE <Mode>
Selects the HARQ simulation mode.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
512
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<Mode>
VHARq
VHARq
This mode simulates basestation feedback. For every HARQ
process (either 4 or 8), a bit pattern can be defined to simulate
ACKs and NACKs.
*RST:
HFE
Example:
SOUR1:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:HARQ:SIM:
MODE VHAR
sets simulation mode Virtual HARQ.
Manual operation:
See "Mode (HARQ)" on page 217
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:
SIMulation:MRETransmissions <MRetransmission>
Sets the maximum number of retransmissions. After the expiration of this value, the
next packet is send, regardless of the received feedback.
Parameters:
<MRetransmission>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 20
4
Example:
SOUR1:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:HARQ:SIM:
MRET 10
sets the maximum number of retransmissions to 10.
Manual operation:
See "Maximum Number Of Retransmissions (HARQ)"
on page 218
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:
SIMulation:RVZero <RvZero>
If activated, the same redundancy version is sent, that is, the redundancy version is not
adjusted for the next retransmission in case of a received NACK.
Parameters:
<RvZero>
ON | OFF
*RST:
1
Example:
SOUR1:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:HARQ:SIM:RVZ
ON
the same redundancy version is sent for the next retransmission.
Manual operation:
See "Always Use Redundancy Version 0 (HARQ)" on page 217
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
513
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ:
SIMulation[:STATe] <State>
Activates or deactivates the HARQ simulation mode.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
0
Example:
SOUR1:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:HARQ:SIM:
STAT ON
activates the HARQ simulation mode.
Manual operation:
See "State (HARQ)" on page 217
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:HARQ[:
SIMulation]:PATTern<ch> <Pattern>
Sets the HARQ Pattern. The maximum length of the pattern is 32 bits.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
string
Example:
SOUR1:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:HARQ:SIM:
HARQ:PATT 1010
sets the HARQ simulation pattern.
Manual operation:
See "HARQ1..8: ACK/NACK" on page 217
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:
HPROcesses?
The command queries the number of HARQ (Hybrid-ARQ Acknowlegement) process.
Return values:
<HProcesses>
integer
Range:
1 to 8
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:HPRO?
queries the number of HARQ processes.
Response: 5
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Number Of HARQ Processes" on page 212
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:MIBRate?
Queries the maximum information bit rate.
Return values:
<MiBRate>
float
Increment: 0.1
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
514
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:HPRO?
queries the maximum ninformation bit rate.
Response: 1353.0
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Maximum Information Bitrate/kbps" on page 210
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:MODulation
<Modulation>
Sets the modulation used for the selected FRC.
Two modulation schemes are defined: BPSK for FRC 1 - 7 and 4PAM (4 Pulse-Amplitude Modulation) for FRC 8.
Parameters:
<Modulation>
BPSK | PAM4
*RST:
BPSK
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:CHAN 8
sets the FRC to channel 8.
BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:MOD 4PAM
sets the modulation.
Manual operation:
See "Modulation" on page 212
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:ORATe
<ORate>
Sets the overall symbol rate for the E-DCH channels, i.e. this parameter affects the
corresponding parameter of the E-DPDCH.
Parameters:
<ORate>
D15K | D30K | D60K | D120k | D240k | D480k | D960k |
D1920k | D2X1920K | D2X960K2X1920K
*RST:
D960k
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:ORAT D2X1920K
sets the overall symbol rate.
Manual operation:
See "Overall Symbol Rate" on page 212
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:PAYBits?
The command queries the payload of the information bit. This value determines the
number of tranport layer bits sent in each HARQ process.
Return values:
<PayBits>
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
integer
515
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:PAYB?
queries the payload of the information bit.
Response: 2706
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Information Bit Payload (Ninf)" on page 213
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:STATe
<State>
The command activates or deactivates the FRC state for the E-DPCCH channels.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
0
Example:
SOUR:BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:STAT ON
activates the FRC state for the E-DPCCH channels.
Manual operation:
See "State (HSUPA FRC)" on page 209
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:TBS:INDex
<Index>
Selects the Transport Block Size Index (E-TFCI) for the corresponding table, as described in in 3GPP TS 25.321, Annex B.
The value range of this parameter depends on the selected Transport Block Size Table
([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:TBS:
TABLe).
Parameters:
<Index>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to max
41
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:TBS:TABL TAB0TTI10
sets the transport block size table
BB:W3GP:MST:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:TBS:INX 127
sets the transport block size index.
Manual operation:
See "Transport Block Size Index (E-TFCI)" on page 213
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:TBS:TABLe
<Table>
Selects the Transport Block Size Table from 3GPP TS 25.321, Annex B according to
that the transport block size is configured.
The transport block size is determined also by the Transport Block Size Index ([:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:TBS:INDex).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
516
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
The allowed values for this command depend on the selected E-DCH TTI ([:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:TTIEdch)
and modulation scheme ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:
DPCCh:E:FRC:MODulation).
E-DCH TTI
Modulation
Transport Block
Size Table
SCPI Paramater
Transport Block
Size Index (ETFCI)
2ms
BPSK
Table 0
TAB0TTI2
0 .. 127
Table 1
TAB1TTI2
0 .. 125
Table 2
TAB2TTI2
0 .. 127
Table 3
TAB3TTI2
0 .. 124
Table 0
TAB0TTI10
0 .. 127
Table 1
TAB1TTI10
0 .. 120
4PAM
10ms
-
Parameters:
<Table>
TAB0TTI2 | TAB1TTI2 | TAB2TTI2 | TAB3TTI2 | TAB0TTI10 |
TAB1TTI10
*RST:
TAB0TTI10
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:ORAT D1920
sets the overall symbol rate
BB:W3GP:MST:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:MOD BPSK
sets the modulation
BB:W3GP:MST:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:TTIE 2
sets the E-DCH TTI
BB:W3GP:MST:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:TBS:TABL TAB0TTI2
sets the transport block size table
BB:W3GP:MST:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:TBS:IND 25
sets the transport block size index
Manual operation:
See "Transport Block Size Table" on page 213
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:TTIBits?
The command queries the number of physical bits sent in each HARQ process.
Return values:
<TtiBits>
float
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:TTIB?
queries the number of physical bits sent in each HARQ process.
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
517
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:TTIEdch
<Ttiedch>
Sets the TTI size (Transmission Time Interval).
Parameters:
<Ttiedch>
2ms | 10ms
*RST:
2ms
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:TTIE 2ms
sets the TTI.
Manual operation:
See "E-DCH TTI" on page 212
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:UECategory?
Queries the UE category that is minimum required for the selected FRC.
Return values:
<UeCategory>
integer
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:FRC:UEC?
queries the UE category.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "UE Category" on page 210
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:CCODe?
Querries the channelization code.
Return values:
<CCode>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to max
1
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Channelization Code" on page 208
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:HBIT <Hbit>
The command activates the happy bit.
Parameters:
<Hbit>
ON | OFF
*RST:
ON
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:HBIT ON
sets the happy bit.
Manual operation:
See "Happy Bit" on page 208
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
518
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:POWer <Power>
The command sets the power of the E-DPCCH channel.
Parameters:
<Power>
float
Range:
-80 dB to 0 dB
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0 dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:POW -2.5dB
sets the power of the E-DPCCH channel.
Manual operation:
See "Power" on page 207
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:RSNumber
<RsNumber>
The command sets the retransmission sequence number.
Parameters:
<RsNumber>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 3
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:RSN 0
sets the retransmission sequence number.
Manual operation:
See "Retransmission Sequence Number" on page 208
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:STATe <State>
The command activates deactivates the E-DPCCH.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:STAT ON
activates the E-DPCCH.
Manual operation:
See "State (E-DPCCH)" on page 207
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:TFCI <Tfci>
The command sets the value for the TFCI (Transport Format Combination Indicator)
field.
Parameters:
<Tfci>
integer
Range:
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
0 to 127
0
519
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPCC:E:TFCI 0
sets the value for the TFCI.
Manual operation:
See "E-TFCI Information" on page 208
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:FCIO <Fcio>
The command sets the channelization code to I/0.
Parameters:
<Fcio>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPDC:E:FCIO ON
sets the channelization code to I/0.
Manual operation:
See "Force Channelization Code To I/0" on page 221
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:MODulation
<Modulation>
Sets the modulation of the E-DPDCH.
There are two possible modulation schemes specified for this channel, BPSK and
4PAM (4 Pulse-Amplitude Modulation). The latter one is available only for the following
Overall Symbol Rates ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:
DPDCh:E:ORATe):
●
2x960 ksps
●
2x1920 ksps
●
2x960 + 2x1920 ksps
●
2x960 ksps, I or Q only
●
2x1920 ksps, I or Q only
●
2x960 + 2x1920 ksps, I or Q only
Parameters:
<Modulation>
BPSK | PAM4
*RST:
BPSK
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPDC:E:ORAT D2x960K2x1920K
sets the overall symbol rate
BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPDC:E:MOD 4PAM
sets the modulation to 4PAM
Options:
Modulation scheme 4PAM requires the HSPA+ option R&S
SMW-K83.
Manual operation:
See "Modulation" on page 222
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:ORATe <ORate>
The command sets the overall symbol rate of all the E-DPDCH channels.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
520
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Parameters:
<ORate>
D15K | D30K | D60K | D120k | D240k | D480k | D960k |
D1920k | D2X1920K | D2X960K2X1920K | D2x960KI |
D2x960KQ | D2X1920KI | D2X1920KQ | D2X960K2X1920KI |
D2X960K2X1920KQ
*RST:
D60K
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPDC:E:ORAT D60K
sets the overall symbol rate
Manual operation:
See "Overall Symbol Rate" on page 221
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:STATe <State>
The command activates or deactivates the E-DPDCHs. This always activates or deactivates all the channels.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPDC:E:STAT ON
activates all the E-DPDCHs.
Manual operation:
See "State (E-DPDCH)" on page 221
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPDCh:E:TTIEdch <Ttiedch>
The command sets the value for the TTI (Transmission Time Interval).
Parameters:
<Ttiedch>
2ms | 10ms
*RST:
2ms
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:HSUP:DPDC:E:TTIE 2ms
sets the value for the TTI to 2 ms.
Manual operation:
See "E-DCH TTI" on page 226
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:EDCH:TTIEdch <Ttiedch>
Sets the value for the TTI size (Transmission Time Interval).
This command is a query only, if an UL-DTX is enabled ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:STATe ON) or an FRC is activated ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:DPCCh:E:FRC:STATe ON).
Parameters:
<Ttiedch>
2ms | 10ms
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
2ms
521
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST[:HSUPa]:EDCH:TTIE 10ms
BB:W3GP:MST:UDTX:TTIE 2ms
BB:W3GP:MST:UDTX:STAT ON
BB:W3GP:MST[:HSUPa]:EDCH:TTIE?
Response: 2ms
Manual operation:
See "E-DCH TTI" on page 226
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:EDCH:REPeat <Repeat>
Determine the number of TTIs after that the E-DCH scheduling is repeated.
Parameters:
<Repeat>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to dynamic
1
Example:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:
EDCH:ROWCount on page 522
Manual operation:
See "E-DCH Schedule Repeats After" on page 227
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:EDCH:ROW<ch0>:FROM
<TtiFrom>
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:EDCH:ROW<ch0>:TO
<TtiTo>
Determines the start/end TTI of the corresponding E-DCH burst.
Parameters:
<TtiTo>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to dynamic
row index
Example:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:
EDCH:ROWCount on page 522
Manual operation:
See "E-DCH TTI To" on page 227
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>[:HSUPa]:EDCH:ROWCount
<RowCount>
Sets the number of the rows in the scheduling table.
Parameters:
<RowCount>
integer
Range:
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
1 to 32
1
522
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Example:
E-DCH scheduling example
BB:W3GP:MST[:HSUPa]:EDCH:TTIE 2ms
BB:W3GP:MST[:HSUPa]:EDCH:ROWC 2
BB:W3GP:MST[:HSUPa]:EDCH:REP 1000
BB:W3GP:MST[:HSUPa]:EDCH:ROW0:FROM 3
BB:W3GP:MST[:HSUPa]:EDCH:ROW0:TO 6
BB:W3GP:MST[:HSUPa]:EDCH:ROW1:FROM 128
BB:W3GP:MST[:HSUPa]:EDCH:ROW0:TO 156
Manual operation:
See "Number of Table Rows" on page 226
8.9.9 UL-DTX and Uplink Scheduling Settings
The following are simple programing examples with the purpose to show all commands for this task. In real application, some of the commands may be ommited.
Example: Configuring the UL-DTX settings
**************************************************
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:LINK UP
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:MODE UDTX
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:TTIEdch 2
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:OFFSet 2
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:ITHReshold 8
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:LPLength 4
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:CYCLe1 4
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:CYCLe2 8
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:BURSt1 1
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:BURSt2 1
// SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:PREamble2?
// SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:POSTamble1?
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:STATe ON
Example: Enabling User Scheduling
**************************************************
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:LINK UP
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:MODE USCH
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:USCH:CATalog?
// queries the files with user scheduling settings *.3g_sch
// in the default directory
// "example", "ul_sch_dpc","up_sch_loop"
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:USCH:FSELect "up_sch_loop"
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:USCH:DELete "example"
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:STATe ON
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:MODE........................................................ 524
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:STATe........................................................ 524
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:TTIEdch......................................................524
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:OFFSet.......................................................525
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:ITHReshold................................................. 525
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
523
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:LPLength.................................................... 525
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:CYCLe<ch>................................................ 526
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:BURSt<ch>................................................. 526
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:PREamble<ch>?..........................................526
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:POSTamble<ch>?....................................... 527
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:USCH:CATalog?..........................................527
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:USCH:DELete............................................. 527
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:USCH:FSELect............................................528
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:MODE <UldtxMode>
Switches between the UL-DTX and User Scheduling functions.
Parameters:
<UldtxMode>
UDTX | USCH
*RST:
UDTX
Example:
see "Example: Enabling User Scheduling" on page 523 and
"Example: Configuring the UL-DTX settings" on page 523
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Mode" on page 165
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:STATe <State>
Enables/disables UL-DTX or user scheduling, as selected with the command [:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:MODE.
Enabling the UL-DTX deactivates the DPDCH and the HSUPA FRC; enabled user
scheduling deactivates the HSUPA FRC.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
see "Example: Configuring the UL-DTX settings" on page 523
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "UL-DTX... / User Scheduling State" on page 165
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:TTIEdch <EdchTti>
Sets the duration of a E-DCH TTI.
Parameters:
<EdchTti>
2ms | 10ms
Range:
*RST:
2ms to 10ms
2ms
Example:
see "Example: Configuring the UL-DTX settings" on page 523
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
524
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Manual operation:
See "E-DCH TTI" on page 166
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:OFFSet <Offset>
Sets the parameter UE_DTX_DRX_Offset and determines the start offset in subframes
of the first uplink DPCCH burst (after the preamble). The offest is applied only for
bursts belonging to the DPCCH burst pattern; HS-DPCCH or E-DCH transmissions are
not affected.
Parameters:
<Offset>
integer
Range:
0 to 159
Increment: depends on E-DCH TTI parameter
*RST:
0
Example:
see "Example: Configuring the UL-DTX settings" on page 523
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "UL-DTX Offset" on page 166
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:ITHReshold <Threshold>
Defines the number of consecutive E-DCH TTIs without an E-DCH transmission, after
which the UE shall immediately move from UE-DTX cycle 1 to using UE-DTX cycle 2.
Parameters:
<Threshold>
1 | 4 | 8 | 16 | 32 | 64 | 128 | 256
*RST:
16
Example:
see "Example: Configuring the UL-DTX settings" on page 523
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Inactivity Threshold for Cycle 2" on page 166
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:LPLength <LongPreamble>
Determines the length in slots of the preamble associated with the UE-DTX cycle 2.
Parameters:
<LongPreamble>
2 | 4 | 15
*RST:
2
Example:
see "Example: Configuring the UL-DTX settings" on page 523
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Long Preamble Length" on page 167
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
525
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:CYCLe<ch> <DtxCycle>
Sets the offset in subframe between two consecutive DPCCH bursts within the corresponding UE-DTX cycle, i.e. determines how often the DPCCH bursts are transmitted.
The UE-DTX cycle 2 is an integer multiple of the UE-DTX cycle 1, i.e. has less frequent
DPCCH transmission instants.
Note: The allowed values depend on the selected E-DCH TTI.
Suffix:
<ch>
Parameters:
<DtxCycle>
.
1|2
UL-DTX cycle 1 or 2
1 | 4 | 5 | 8 | 10 | 16 | 20 | 32 | 40 | 64 | 80 | 128 | 160
*RST:
5
Example:
see "Example: Configuring the UL-DTX settings" on page 523
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "DTX Cycle 1 / DTX Cycle 2" on page 167
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:BURSt<ch> <BurstLength>
Determines the uplink DPCCH burst length in subframes without the peramble and
postamble, when the corresponding UE-DTX cycle is applied.
Suffix:
<ch>
Parameters:
<BurstLength>
.
1|2
UL-DTX cycle 1 or 2
1|2|5
*RST:
1
Example:
see "Example: Configuring the UL-DTX settings" on page 523
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "DPCCH Burst Length 1 / DPCCH Burst Length 2"
on page 167
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:PREamble<ch>?
Queries the preamble length in slots, when the corresponding UE-DTX cycle is
applied.
The preamble length is fixed to 2 slots.
Suffix:
<ch>
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
.
1|2
UL-DTX cycle 1 or 2
526
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Return values:
<Preamble>
integer
Range:
*RST:
2 to 2
2
Example:
see "Example: Configuring the UL-DTX settings" on page 523
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Preamble Length 1 / Preamble Length 2" on page 168
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:POSTamble<ch>?
Queries the postamble length in slots, when the corresponding UE-DTX cycle is
applied.
The postamble length is fixed to 1 slot.
Suffix:
<ch>
Return values:
<PostAmble>
.
1|2
UL-DTX cycle 1 or 2
integer
Range:
1 to 1
Example:
see "Example: Configuring the UL-DTX settings" on page 523
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "Postamble Length 1 / Postamble Length 2" on page 168
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:USCH:CATalog?
Queries the files with uplink user scheduling settings (file extension *.3g_sch) in the
default or the specified directory.
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
Example:
see "Example: Enabling User Scheduling" on page 523
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "User Scheduling File" on page 166
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:USCH:DELete <Filename>
Deletes the selected file from the default or specified directory. Deleted are files with
the file extension *.3g_sch.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
527
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
string
Example:
see "Example: Enabling User Scheduling" on page 523
Usage:
Setting only
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "User Scheduling File" on page 166
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:USCH:FSELect <Filename>
Loads the selected file from the default or the sepcified directory. Load are files with
extension *.3g_sch.
Parameters:
<Filename>
string
Example:
see "Example: Enabling User Scheduling" on page 523
Options:
R&S SMW-K83
Manual operation:
See "User Scheduling File" on page 166
8.9.10 Dynamic Power Control Settings
Example: Configuring the Dynamic Power Control Settings
The following is a simple programing example with the purpose to show all commands
for this task. In real application, some of the commands may be ommited.
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DPControl:DIRection UP
// selects direction up, a high level of the control signals
// leads to an increase of the channel power
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DPControl:STEP 1 dB
// selects a step width of 1 dB.
// A high level of the control signal leads to
// an increase of 1 dB of the channel power,
// a low level to a decrease of 1 dB.
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DPControl:RANGe:DOWN 10 dB
// selects a dynamic range of 10 dB for ranging up the channel power
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DPControl:RANGe:UP 50 dB
// selects a dynamic range of 50 dB for ranging up the channel power
// The overall increase and decrease of channel power,
// i.e. the dynamic range is limited to 60 dB
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DPControl:MODE TPC
// selects the source of the power control signal
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DPControl:STATe ON
// activates Dynamic Power Control for the enhanced channels of UE1
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DPControl:POWer?
// queries the deviation of the channel power (delta POW)
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
528
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
// from the set power start value of the DPDCH
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DPControl:AOUE ON
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:ASSignment............529
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:DIRection............... 529
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:MODE.................... 530
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:CONNector............. 530
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl[:POWer]?............... 530
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:RANGe:DOWN....... 531
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:RANGe:UP............. 531
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:STATe....................531
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:STEP:MANual.........531
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:STEP[:EXTernal]..... 532
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:AOUE.................... 532
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:
ASSignment <ASSignment>
Enabled for UL-DTX mode only ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:UDTX:
STATe ON).
The power control recognizes the UL-DPCCH gaps according to 3GPP TS 25.214.
Some of the TPC commands sent to the instrument over the external line or by the
TPC pattern are ignored, whereas others are summed up and applied later. The processing of the TPC commands depends only on whether the BS sends the TPC bits on
the F-DPCH with slot format 0/ slot format 9 or not.
Parameters:
<ASSignment>
NORMal | FDPCh
*RST:
NORMal
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:UDTX:STAT ON
BB:W3GP:MST:DPC:ASS FDPC
Manual operation:
See "Assignment Mode for UL-DTX" on page 170
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:DIRection
<Direction>
The command selects the Dynamic Power Control direction. The selected direction
determines if the channel power is increased (UP) or decreased (DOWN) by control signal with high level.
Parameters:
<Direction>
UP | DOWN
*RST:
UP
Example:
see Example "Configuring the Dynamic Power Control Settings"
on page 528
Manual operation:
See "Direction" on page 169
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
529
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:MODE
<Mode>
Determines the source of the control signal.
Parameters:
<Mode>
TPC | MANual | EXTernal
*RST:
EXTernal
Example:
see Example "Configuring the Dynamic Power Control Settings"
on page 528
Manual operation:
See "Mode" on page 169
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:
CONNector <Connector>
Determines the input connector at that the instrument expects the external control signal.
Parameters:
<Connector>
LOCal | GLOBal
*RST:
LOCal
Example:
External control signal at the local TM3 connector of Baseband
A.
SOURce1:INPut:TM3:DIRection INPut
SOURce1:INPut:TM3:SIGNal FEEDback
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:
DPControl:CONNector LOCal
Example:
External control signal at the global USER6 connector.
SOURce:INPut:USER6:DIRection INPut
SOURce:INPut:USER6:SIGNal FEEDback
SOURce1:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:
DPControl:CONNector GLOBal
Manual operation:
See "Connector" on page 169
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl[:POWer]?
The command queries the deviation of the channel power (delta POW) from the set
power start value of the DPDCH.
Return values:
<Power>
float
Range:
-60 to 60
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
Example:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
see Example "Configuring the Dynamic Power Control Settings"
on page 528
530
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
User Equipment Settings
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Power Control Graph" on page 170
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:RANGe:
DOWN <Down>
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:RANGe:
UP <Up>
The command selects the dynamic range for ranging up the channel power.
Parameters:
<Up>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0 to 60
0.01
10
dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:DPC:RANG:UP 20dB
selects a dynamic range of 20 dB for ranging up the channel
power.
Manual operation:
See "Up Range/Down Range" on page 170
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:STATe
<State>
The command activates/deactivates Dynamic Power Control.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
see Example "Configuring the Dynamic Power Control Settings"
on page 528
Manual operation:
See "Dynamic Power Control State" on page 169
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:STEP:
MANual <Manual>
This command provides the control signal for manual mode of Dynamic Power Control.
Parameters:
<Manual>
MAN0 | MAN1
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
MAN0
531
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:DPC:MODE MAN
selects manual power control.
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:DPC:STAT ON
activates Dynamic Power Control for the enhanced channels of
UE1.
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:DPC:STEP:MAN MAN0
decreases the level by 0.5 dB.
Manual operation:
See "Mode" on page 169
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:STEP[:
EXTernal] <External>
This command sets step width by which – with Dynamic Power Control being switched
on - the channel power of the enhanced channels is increased or decreased.
Parameters:
<External>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0.5 to 6
0.01
1
dB
Example:
see Example "Configuring the Dynamic Power Control Settings"
on page 528
Manual operation:
See "Power Step" on page 170
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation[:ENHanced:DPDCh]:DPControl:AOUE
<State>
Enables power control of the enhanced channels of all active UEs with the settings of
UE1.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
see Example "Configuring the Dynamic Power Control Settings"
on page 528
Manual operation:
See "Also Control Other UEs" on page 172
8.10 Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
The SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced subsystem contains the commands
for setting the enhanced channels of user equipment 1 (UE1).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
532
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
The commands of this system only take effect when the 3GPP FDD standard is activated, the uplink transmission direction is selected and user equipment 1 is enabled:
●
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:STATe ON
●
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:LINK UP
●
SOURce:BB:W3GPp:MSTation1:STATe ON
TCHannel<di>
The transport channel designations for remote control are TCHannel0 for DCCH,
TCHannel1 to TCHannel6 for DTCH1 to DTCH6.
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:BPFRame?...............................533
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:STATe...................... 534
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:TYPE........................ 534
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:USER:CATalog?........ 535
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:USER:DELete............536
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:USER:LOAD..............536
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:USER:STORe............536
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DERRor:BIT:LAYer................... 537
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DERRor:BIT:RATE....................537
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DERRor:BIT:STATe.................. 538
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DERRor:BLOCk:RATE.............. 538
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DERRor[:BLOCk]:STATe........... 538
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:INTerleaver2.............................539
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:ORATe.................................... 539
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:STATe..................................... 539
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:RMATtribute......540
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:STATe..............540
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:TBCount........... 540
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:TBSize............. 541
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:TTINterval.........541
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:CRCSize.......... 541
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:DATA............... 541
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:DATA:
DSELect............................................................................................................. 542
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:DATA:
PATTern............................................................................................................. 543
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:EPRotection......543
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:INTerleaver.......543
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:PCPCh:CCODing:STATe.......................544
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:PCPCh:CCODing:TYPE........................ 544
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:ENHanced:PRACh:CCODing:STATe................ 544
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:ENHanced:PRACh:CCODing:TYPE.................. 545
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:BPFRame?
The command queries the number of data bits in the DPDCH component of the frame
at the physical layer. The number of data bits depends on the overall symbol rate.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
533
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
Return values:
<BpFrame>
integer
Range:
150 to 9600
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:BPFR?
queries the number of data bits.
Response: 300
the number of data bits is 300.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Bits per Frame (DPDCH)" on page 231
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:STATe
<State>
The command activates or deactivates channel coding for the enhanced channels.
When channel coding is activated, the overall symbol rate ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:ORATe) is set to the value predetermined by
the selected channel coding type ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:
ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:TYPE).
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:CCOD:TYPE M12K2
selects channel coding type RMC 12.2 kbps.
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:CCOD:STAT ON
activates channel coding.
Manual operation:
See "Channel Coding State" on page 230
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:TYPE
<Type>
The command selects the channel coding scheme in accordance with the 3GPP specification. The channel coding scheme selected predetermines the overall symbol rate.
When channel coding is activated ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:
ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:STATe) the overall symbol rate ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:ORATe) is set to the value predetermined by
the selected channel coding type.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
534
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
Parameters:
<Type>
M12K2 | M64K | M144k | M384k | AMR
M12K2
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of 12.2 ksps.
M64K
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of 64 ksps.
M144K
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of 144 ksps.
M384K
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of 384 ksps.
AMR
Channel coding for the AMR Coder (coding a voice channel).
USER
This parameter cannot be set. USER is returned whenever a
user-defined channel coding is active, that is to say, after a
channel coding parameter has been changed or a user coding
file has been loaded. The file is loaded by the command [:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:
CCODing:USER:LOAD.
*RST:
M12K2
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:CCOD:TYPE M144K
selects channel coding scheme RMC 144 kbps.
Manual operation:
See "Coding Type" on page 230
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:USER:
CATalog?
The command queries existing files with stored user channel codings.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.3g_ccod_ul in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR.
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
Example:
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/CcodDpchUser'
selects the directory for the user channel coding files.
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:CCOD:USER:CAT?
queries the existing files with user coding.
Response: 'user_cc1'
there is one file with user coding.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "User Coding ..." on page 231
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
535
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:USER:
DELete <Filename>
The command deletes the specified files with stored user channel codings.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.3g_ccod_ul in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file
name, without the path and the file extension.
The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no *RST value.
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
string
Example:
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/CcodDpchUser'
selects the directory for the user channel coding files.
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:CCOD:USER:DEL 'user_cc1'
deletes the specified file with user coding.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation:
See "User Coding ..." on page 231
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:USER:LOAD
<Filename>
The command loads the specified files with stored user channel codings.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.3g_ccod_ul in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file
name, without the path and the file extension.
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
string
Example:
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/CcodDpchUser'
selects the directory for the user channel coding files.
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:CCOD:USER:LOAD 'user_cc1'
loads the specified file with user coding.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation:
See "User Coding ..." on page 231
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:CCODing:USER:
STORe <Filename>
The command saves the current settings for channel coding as user channel coding in
the specified file.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
536
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.3g_ccod_ul in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory in which the file is stored is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. To store the files in this directory, you only have to give the file name,
without the path and the file extension.
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
string
Example:
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/CcodDpchUser'
selects the directory for the user channel coding files.
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:CCOD:USER:STOR 'user_cc1'
saves the current channel coding setting in file user_cc1 in
directory /var/user/temp/CcodDpchUser.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation:
See "User Coding ..." on page 231
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DERRor:BIT:LAYer
<Layer>
The command selects the layer at which bit errors are inserted.
Parameters:
<Layer>
TRANsport | PHYSical
TRANsport
Transport Layer (Layer 2). This layer is only available when
channel coding is active.
PHYSical
Physical layer (Layer 1)
*RST:
PHYSical
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:DERR:BIT:LAY PHYS
selects layer 1 for entering bit errors.
Manual operation:
See "Insert Errors On" on page 235
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DERRor:BIT:RATE
<Rate>
Sets the bit error rate.
Parameters:
<Rate>
float
Range:
1E-7 to 0.5
Increment: 1E-7
*RST:
0.001
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:DERR:BIT:RATE 1E-2
sets a bit error rate of 0.01.
Manual operation:
See "Bit Error Rate TCH1" on page 235
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
537
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DERRor:BIT:STATe
<State>
The command activates or deactivates bit error generation.
Bit errors are inserted into the data fields of the enhanced channels. When channel
coding is active, it is possible to select the layer in which the errors are inserted (physical or transport layer). When the data source is read out, individual bits are deliberately
inverted at random points in the data bit stream at the specified error rate in order to
simulate an invalid signal.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:DERR:BIT:RATE 1E-2
sets a bit error rate of 0.01.
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:DERR:BIT:LAY PHYS
selects layer 1 for entering bit errors.
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:DERR:BIT:STAT ON
activates bit error generation.
Manual operation:
See "Bit Error State" on page 235
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DERRor:BLOCk:RATE
<Rate>
Sets the block error rate.
Parameters:
<Rate>
float
Range:
1E-4 to 0.5
Increment: 1E-4
*RST:
0.1
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:DERR:BLOC:RATE 1E-2
sets the block error rate to 0.01.
Manual operation:
See "Block Error Rate" on page 236
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:DERRor[:BLOCk]:
STATe <State>
The command activates or deactivates block error generation. Block error generation is
only possible when channel coding is activated.
During block error generation, the CRC checksum is determined and then the last bit is
inverted at the specified error probability in order to simulate a defective signal.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
OFF
538
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:CCOD:STAT ON
activates channel coding.
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:DERR:BLOC:RATE 10E-2
sets the block error rate to 0.1.
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:DERR:BLOC:STAT ON
activates block error generation.
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:INTerleaver2
<Interleaver2>
The command activates or deactivates channel coding interleaver state 2 for all the
transport channels.
Interleaver state 1 can be activated and deactivated for each channel individually ([:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:
INTerleaver).
Note: The interleaver states do not cause the symbol rate to change
Parameters:
<Interleaver2>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:INT2 OFF
deactivates channel coding interleaver state 2 for all the transport channels.
Manual operation:
See "Interleaver 2 State" on page 234
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:ORATe <ORate>
The command queries the overall symbol rate (Overall Symbol Rate) of the enhanced
channels. The value is set with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:
MSTation<st>:DPDCh:ORATe. This setting also defines the number of active channels, their symbol rates and channelization codes.
Parameters:
<ORate>
D15K | D30K | D60K | D120k | D240k | D480k | D960k |
D1920k | D2880k | D3840k | D4800k | D5760k
*RST:
D60K
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:ORAT?
queries the overall symbol rate of the DPDCH of user equipment
1.
Manual operation:
See "Overall Symbol Rate" on page 231
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:STATe <State>
Queries the enhaced state of the station.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
539
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST1:ENH:DPDC:STAT?
Manual operation:
See "Enhanced Channels State" on page 228
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:
RMATtribute <RmAttribute>
Sets data rate matching.
Parameters:
<RmAttribute>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 1024
1
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:TCH:RMAT 1024
sets rate matching to 1024 for DTCH1.
Manual operation:
See "Rate Matching Attribute" on page 234
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:STATe
<State>
The command activates/deactivates the selected transport channel.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:TCH1:STAT
activates DTCH1.
Manual operation:
See "Transport Channel State" on page 232
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:
TBCount <TbCount>
The command sets the transport block count.
Parameters:
<TbCount>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 16
1
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:TCH2:TBC 4
activates 4 transport blocks for DTCH1.
Manual operation:
See "Number of Transport Blocks" on page 233
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
540
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:TBSize
<TbSize>
Sets the size of the data blocks.
Parameters:
<TbSize>
integer
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:TCH2:TBS 1024
sets the length of the transport blocks for DTCH2 to 1024.
Manual operation:
See "Transport Block Size" on page 233
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:
TTINterval <TtInterval>
Sets the number of frames into which a TCH is divided. This setting also defines the
interleaver depth.
Parameters:
<TtInterval>
10MS | 20MS | 40MS
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:TCH2:TTIN 20ms
sets that the transport channel is divided into 2 frames.
Manual operation:
See "Transport Time Interval" on page 233
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:
CRCSize <CrcSize>
The command defines the CRC length for the selected transport channel. It is also
possible to deactivate checksum determination.
Parameters:
<CrcSize>
NONE | 8 | 12 | 16 | 24
*RST:
12
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:TCH:CRCS NONE
deactivates checksum determination for DTCH1.
Manual operation:
See "Size of CRC" on page 234
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:DATA
<Data>
Selects the data source for the transport channel.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
541
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
Parameters:
<Data>
ZERO | ONE | PATTern | PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 |
PN21 | PN23 | DLISt
PNxx
The pseudo-random sequence generator is used as the data
source. Different random sequence lengths can be selected.
DLISt
A data list is used. The data list is selected with the command
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:
TCHannel<di0>:DATA:DSELect.
ZERO | ONE
Internal 0 and 1 data is used.
PATTern
Internal data is used. The bit pattern for the data is defined by
the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:
ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:DATA:PATTern.
*RST:
PN9
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:TCH2:DATA PATT
selects as the data source for the data fields of DTCH2 of user
equipment 1, the bit pattern defined with the following command.
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:TCH2:DATA:PATT #H3F, 8
defines the bit pattern.
Manual operation:
See "Data Source" on page 232
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:DATA:
DSELect <DSelect>
The command selects the data list for the enhanced channels for the DLISt selection.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the file
name, without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<DSelect>
string
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:TCH1:DATA DLIS
selects the Data Lists data source.
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:TCH1:DATA:DSEL 'TCH1'
selects the file tch1 as the data source.
Manual operation:
See "Data Source" on page 232
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
542
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:DATA:
PATTern <Pattern>
The command determines the bit pattern for the PATTern data source selection for
transport channels.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
64 bits
*RST:
#H0,1
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:TCH0:DATA:PATT #H3F, 8
defines the bit pattern for DCCH.
Manual operation:
See "Data Source" on page 232
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:
EPRotection <EProtection>
The command determines the error protection.
Parameters:
<EProtection>
NONE | CON2 | CON3 | TURBo3
NONE
No error protection.
TURBo3
Turbo Coder of rate 1/3 in accordance with the 3GPP specifications.
CON2 | CON3
Convolution Coder of rate ½ or 1/3 with generator polynomials
defined by 3GPP.
*RST:
CON1/3
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:TCH1:EPR NONE
error protection is deactivated.
Manual operation:
See "Error Protection" on page 234
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:TCHannel<di0>:
INTerleaver <Interleaver>
The command activates or deactivates channel coding interleaver state 1 for the
selected channel. Interleaver state 1 can be activated and deactivated for each channel individually. The channel is selected via the suffix at TCHannel.
Interleaver state 2 can only be activated or deactivated for all the channels together
([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:DPDCh:INTerleaver2).
Parameters:
<Interleaver>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
1
543
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Enhanced Channels of the User Equipment
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:DPDC:TCH5:INT1 OFF
deactivates channel coding interleaver state 1 for TCH 5.
Manual operation:
See "Interleaver 1 State" on page 234
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:PCPCh:CCODing:STATe
<State>
The command activates or deactivates channel coding for the PCPCH.
When channel coding is active, the symbol rate is limited to the range between 15 and
120 ksps. Values above this limit are automatically set to 120 ksps.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:PCPC:CCOD:TYPE TB168
selects channel coding type CPCH RMC (TB size 168 bits).
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:PCPC:CCOD:STAT ON
activates channel coding.
Manual operation:
See "Channel Coding State" on page 258
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation:ENHanced:PCPCh:CCODing:TYPE <Type>
The command selects the channel coding scheme in accordance with the 3GPP specification.
Parameters:
<Type>
TB168 | TB360
TB168
CPCH RMC (TB size 168 bits)
TB360
CPCH RMC (TB size 360 bits)
*RST:
TB168
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:PCPC:CCOD:TYPE TB168
selects channel coding scheme RMC 168 bits.
Manual operation:
See "Channel Coding Type" on page 258
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:ENHanced:PRACh:CCODing:STATe
<State>
The command activates or deactivates channel coding for the PRACH.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
0
544
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:PRAC:CCOD:TYPE TB168
selects channel coding type RACH RMC (TB size 168 bits).
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:PRAC:CCOD:STAT ON
activates channel coding.
Manual operation:
See "Channel Coding State" on page 246
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:MSTation<st>:ENHanced:PRACh:CCODing:TYPE
<Type>
The command selects the channel coding scheme in accordance with the 3GPP specification.
Parameters:
<Type>
TB168 | TB360 | TU168 | TU360
TB168
RACH RMC (TB size 168 bits)
TB360
RACH RMC (TB size 360 bits)
*RST:
TB168
Example:
BB:W3GP:MST:ENH:PRAC:CCOD:TYPE TB168
selects channel coding scheme RMC 168 bits.
Manual operation:
See "Channel Coding Type" on page 246
8.11 Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
The signal generator gives you the opportunity to generate predefined settings which
enable tests on base stations in conformance with the 3G standard 3GPP FDD. It
offers a selection of predefined settings according to Test Cases in TS 25.141. The
settings take effect only after execution of command [:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:
TS25141:TCASe:EXECute. For most test cases, the parameters of one or more of
the subsystems SOURce:AWGN, SOURce:W3GPp, SOURce:DM and SOURce:FSIM
are adjusted.
The test setups and equipment requirements for each Test Case are described in
Chapter 7.1, "Introduction", on page 277.
Unlike most of the other commands of the SOURce:BB:W3GPp subsystem, key word
SOURce is without suffix. Signal routing is possible only for Test Cases that do not use
diversity and is performed via command [:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:ROUTe.
Most of the commands are setting commands in mode "User definable" and respectively are query only in mode "According to Standard", see the description of the command [:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:EMODe. The edit mode "According to Standard" puts the required limits in the value ranges of the related commands.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
545
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:CNRatio............................................................. 547
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:ENRatio............................................................. 547
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:POWer:NOISe.................................................... 548
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:RBLock:RATE.....................................................548
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:RPDetection:RATE..............................................548
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:STATe............................................................... 549
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:BSPClass......................................................................549
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:BSSignal:FREQuency.................................................... 549
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:BSSignal:POWer............................................................549
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:EMODe.........................................................................550
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:FSIMulator:STATe..........................................................550
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:BWIDth............................................................ 550
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CNRatio........................................................... 551
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CW:FOFFset.....................................................551
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CW:POWer.......................................................552
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CW:STATe....................................................... 552
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:FOFFset...........................................................552
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:MODulated:FOFFset..........................................553
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:MODulated:POWer............................................553
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:MODulated:STATe............................................ 554
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:MODulated:TYPE..............................................554
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:POWer............................................................. 555
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:SETTing:TMODel:BSTation................................555
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:STATe............................................................. 555
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:TYPE............................................................... 556
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:ROUTe......................................................................... 556
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:RXDiversity................................................................... 556
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:SCODe......................................................................... 557
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:SCODe:MODE...............................................................557
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:TCASe.......................................................................... 557
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:TCASe:EXECute............................................................558
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:TRIGger........................................................................ 558
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:TRIGger:OUTPut........................................................... 558
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:BTYPe............................................................ 559
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DCRatio.......................................................... 559
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:SFORmat............................................ 559
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:RDATa.........................................560
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:RDATa:DSELect........................... 560
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:RDATa:PATTern...........................561
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:SDATa.........................................561
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:SDATa:DSELect........................... 562
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:SDATa:PDSTeps.......................... 562
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:SDATa:PUSTeps.......................... 562
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:CCODing:TYPE................................... 562
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:DERRor:BIT:RATE............................... 563
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:DERRor:BLOCk:RATE..........................563
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:ORATe................................................563
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:FREQuency.....................................................564
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:OBANd............................................................564
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:PCPCh:CCODing:TYPE....................................564
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
546
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:POWer............................................................565
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:PRACh:CCODing:TYPE....................................565
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:STATe............................................................ 565
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:TRIGger[:EXTernal]:DELay............................... 566
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:CNRatio <CnRatio>
Sets/queries the carrier/noise ratio.
Parameters:
<CnRatio>
float
Range:
-50 to 45
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
-16.8
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC73
selects test case 7.3.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:AWGN:POW:NOIS?
queries the noise level of the interfering signal.
Response: -73
the noise level of the interfering signal is -73 dB.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:AWGN:CNR?
queries the signal/noise ratio of the interfering signal.
Response: -16.80
the signal/noise ratio of the interfering signal is -16.8 dB.
Manual operation:
See "C/N - Test Case 7.3" on page 294
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:ENRatio <EnRatio>
Sets/queries the ratio of bit energy to noise power density.
Parameters:
<EnRatio>
float
Range:
-80 dB to 80 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
8.7 dB
Example:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC821
selects test case 8.2.1.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:AWGN:ENR?
queries the ratio of bit energy to noise power density of the interfering signal.
Response: 8.70
the E/N ratio of the interfering signal is 8.7 dB.
547
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
Manual operation:
See "Eb to N0 - Test Case 8.x" on page 316
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:POWer:NOISe <Noise>
Sets/queries the noise level.
Parameters:
<Noise>
float
Increment: 0.01
Example:
see [:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:CNRatio
on page 547
Manual operation:
See "Power Level - Test Case 7.3" on page 294
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:RBLock:RATE <Rate>
Sets the required block error rate. The possible selection depends on the selected fading configuration.
Parameters:
<Rate>
B0 | B01 | B001 | B0001
*RST:
B001
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC893
selects test case 8.9.3.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:AWGN:RBL:RATE B01
sets the required block error rate to < 0.01.
Manual operation:
See "Required BLER - Test Case 8.x" on page 315
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:RPDetection:RATE <Rate>
Sets the required probability of detection of preamble (Pd). The selection determines
the ratio Eb/N0.
Parameters:
<Rate>
PD099 | PD0999
*RST:
Example:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
PD099
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC892
selects test case 8.9.2.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:AWGN:RPD:RATE PD099
sets the required probability of detection of preamble to > 0.99.
The E/N ratio of the interfering signal is -8.8 dB.
548
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
Manual operation:
See "Required Pd - Test Case 8.x" on page 328
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:STATe <State>
Enables/disables the generation of the AWGN signal.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC892
selects test case 8.9.2.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:EMOD USER
selects mode "User definable". Also settings that are not in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:AWGN:STAT OFF
disables the generation of the AWGN signal.
Manual operation:
See "AWGN State - Test Case 8.x" on page 315
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:BSPClass <BspClass>
Selects the base station power class.
Parameters:
<BspClass>
WIDE | MEDium | LOCal
*RST:
WIDE
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:BSPC WIDE
the base station under test is a wide area base station.
Manual operation:
See "Power Class" on page 285
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:BSSignal:FREQuency <Frequency>
Sets the RF frequency of the base station.
Parameters:
<Frequency>
float
Range:
*RST:
100 kHz to 6 GHz
1.0 GHz
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:BSS:FREQ 1GHz
the frequency of the base station under test is 1 GHz.
Manual operation:
See "BS Frequency - Test Case 6.6" on page 347
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:BSSignal:POWer <Power>
Sets the RF power of the base station.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
549
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
Parameters:
<Power>
float
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
-30 dBm
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC66
selects test case 6.6.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:BSS:POW -30
the power of the base station under test is -30 dBm.
Manual operation:
See "BS RF Power - Test Case 6.6" on page 347
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:EMODe <EMode>
Selects the edit mode for the configuration of the test cases.
Parameters:
<EMode>
STANdard | USER
STANdard
Edit mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance
with TS 25.141 are possible. All other parameters are preset.
USER
Edit mode "User definable". A wider range of settings is possible
*RST:
STANdard
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:EMOD USER
selects edit mode "User definable".
Manual operation:
See "Edit Mode" on page 283
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:FSIMulator:STATe <State>
Queries the state of the Fading Simulator.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC892
selects test case 8.9.2.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:FSIM:STAT?
queries the state of the fading simulator.
Response: 0
the fading simulator is disabled.
Manual operation:
See "Fading State - Test Case 8.2.1" on page 316
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:BWIDth <BWidth>
Selects the interferer scenario.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
550
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
Parameters:
<BWidth>
WIDE | NARRow
*RST:
WIDE
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC76
selects test case 7.6.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:IFS:BWID WIDE
selects a 3GPP FDD uplink interfering signal 1
Manual operation:
See "Interferer Bandwidth Type - Test Case 7.6" on page 309
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CNRatio <CnRatio>
In test case 7.4, sets the power ratio of wanted signal to interfering signal.
In test case 6.6, sets the power ratio of interfering signal to wanted signal.
Parameters:
<CnRatio>
float
Range:
-80 dB to 80 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
-63 dB
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC74
selects test case 7.4.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:IFS:CNR?
queries the power ratio.
Response:-63.0
the signal/noise ratio of the interfering signal is -63 dB.
Manual operation:
See "C to I - Test Case 7.4" on page 297
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CW:FOFFset <FOffset>
Sets frequency offset of the CW interfering signal versus the wanted signal RF frequency.
Parameters:
<FOffset>
float
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
10 MHz
Example:
see [:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CW:STATe
on page 552
Manual operation:
See "Interferer 1 and 2 Frequency Offset - Test Case 7.6"
on page 309
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
551
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CW:POWer <Power>
Sets the RF level of the CW interfering signal.
Parameters:
<Power>
float
*RST:
-48 dBm
Example:
see [:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CW:STATe
on page 552
Manual operation:
See "Interferer 1 and 2 Power Level - Test Case 7.6"
on page 310
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CW:STATe <State>
This command enable/disables the CW interfering signal. In mode "According to Standard" (:SOURce:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:EMODe STANdard) the value is fixed to ON.
Sets commands :SOURce2:AWGN:CNRatio and :SOURce2:AWGN:POWer:NOISe
after execution of :SOURce:BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS:EXEC
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC76
selects test case 7.6.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:EMOD STAN
selects mode According to Standard. Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:IFS:IFS:BWID WIDE
selects interferer scenario wideband.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:IFS:CW:FOFF?
queries the frequency offset of the CW interferer.
Response: 10000000
the frequency offset is 10 MHz.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:IFS:BWID NARR
BB:W3GP:TS25141:IFS:CW:POW?
queries the RF level of the CW interferer.
Response: -47
the RF level is -47.00 dBm.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:IFS:CW:STAT?
queries the state of the CW interferer.
Response: 1
the CW interferer is enabled.
Manual operation:
See "Interferer 1 and 2 State - Test Case 7.6" on page 309
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:FOFFset <FOffset>
Sets frequency offset of the interfering signal versus the wanted signal RF frequency. ).
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
552
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
Parameters:
<FOffset>
float
Range:
-40 MHz to 40 MHz
Increment: 0.01 Hz
*RST:
1 MHz
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC74
selects test case 7.4.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:IFS:FOFF 0.5 MHz
sets the frequency offset of the interferer to 5 MHz.
Manual operation:
See "Frequency Offset - Test Case 7.4" on page 297
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:MODulated:FOFFset <FOffset>
Sets frequency offset of the modulated interfering signal versus the wanted signal RF
frequency.
Parameters:
<FOffset>
float
Range:
-40 MHz to 40 MHz
Increment: 0.01 Hz
*RST:
20 MHz
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC76
selects test case 7.6.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:EMOD STAN
selects mode According to Standard. Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:IFS:BWID WIDE
selects interferer scenario wideband.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:IFS:MOD:FOFF?
queries the frequency offset of the modulated interferer.
Response: 20000000
the frequency offset is 20 MHz.
Manual operation:
See "Interferer 1 and 2 Frequency Offset - Test Case 7.6"
on page 309
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:MODulated:POWer <Power>
Sets the RF level of the modulated interfering signal.
Parameters:
<Power>
float
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
-48 dBm
553
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC76
selects test case 7.6.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:IFS:BWID NARR
selects interferer scenario narrowband.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:IFS:MOD:POW?
queries the RF level of the modulated interferer.
Response: -47
the RF level is 47.00 dBm.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:IFS:MOD:TYPE?
queries the type of the modulated interferer.
Response: GMSK
the modulation type is GMSK.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:IFS:MOD:STAT?
queries the state of the modulated interferer.
Response: 1
the modulated interferer is enabled.
Manual operation:
See "Interferer 1 and 2 Power Level - Test Case 7.6"
on page 310
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:MODulated:STATe <State>
Enable/disables the modulated interfering signal.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
see [:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:
MODulated:POWer on page 553
Manual operation:
See "Interferer 1 and 2 State - Test Case 7.6" on page 309
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:MODulated:TYPE <Type>
Selects the type of modulation for the interfering uplink signal in the second path.
Parameters:
<Type>
WCDMa | CW | GMSK | QPSK
*RST:
WCDMa
Example:
see [:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:
MODulated:POWer on page 553
Manual operation:
See "Interferer 2 Modulation - Test Case 7.6" on page 310
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
554
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:POWer <Power>
Sets the RF level of the interfering signal.
Parameters:
<Power>
float
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC75
selects test case 7.6.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:BTYP NARR
selects blocking scenario narrowband.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:IFS:POW?
queries the RF level of the CW interferer.
Response: -47
the RF level is -47.00 dBm.
Manual operation:
See "Power Level - Test Case 7.5" on page 301
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:SETTing:TMODel:BSTation <BStation>
Selects the interfering signal from a list of test models in accordance with TS 25.141.
All test models refer to the predefined downlink configurations.
Parameters:
<BStation>
TM164 | TM116 | TM132 | TM2 | TM316 | TM332 | TM4 |
TM538 | TM528 | TM58
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC66
selects test case 6.6.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:EMOD USER
selects mode "User Definable".
BB:W3GP:TS25141:IFS:SETT:TMOD:BST TM116
the interfering signal is generated according to test model Test
Model 1; 16 Channels.
Manual operation:
See "Interferer Mode - Test Case 6.6" on page 348
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:STATe <State>
Enable/disables the modulated interfering signal.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
1
555
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC75
selects test case 7.5.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:EMOD STAN
selects mode "According to Standard". Only settings in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:IFS:STAT?
queries the state of the interferer.
Response: 1
the interferer is enabled.
Manual operation:
See "Interferer State - Test Case 7.4" on page 297
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:TYPE <Type>
Selects the type of modulation for the interfering signal.
Parameters:
<Type>
WCDMa | CW | GMSK | QPSK
*RST:
WCDMa
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC75
selects test case 7.5.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:EMOD STAN
BB:W3GP:TS25141:IFS:TYPE?
queries the type of the interferer.
Response: CW
the modulation type is CW interferer.
Manual operation:
See "Interferer Modulation - Test Case 7.4" on page 297
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:ROUTe <Route>
Selects the signal routing for baseband A signal which in most test cases represents
the wanted signal (exception test case 6.6). The command is only available for twopath-instruments and only for test cases that do not use both paths anyway.
Parameters:
<Route>
A|B
*RST:
A
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:ROUT B
the baseband signal of path A is introduced into path B.
Manual operation:
See "Baseband A Signal Routing" on page 284
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:RXDiversity <RxDiversity>
Sets the signal generator according to the base station diversity processing capability.
The command is only available for two-path-instruments and only for test cases that do
not use both paths anyway.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
556
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
Parameters:
<RxDiversity>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:RXD ON
the baseband signal of path A is introduced into both paths.
Manual operation:
See "Diversity" on page 284
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:SCODe <SCode>
Sets the scrambling code. The value range depends on whether the generator is used
in uplink or downlink direction (test case 6.6) according to the selected test case.
Parameters:
<SCode>
integer
*RST:
#H0
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:SCOD #H5FFF
sets scrambling code #H5FFF.
Manual operation:
See "Scrambling Code (hex)" on page 285
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:SCODe:MODE <Mode>
Sets the type for the scrambling code for the uplink direction. In downlink direction (test
case 6.6), the scrambling generator can be switched on and off.
Parameters:
<Mode>
OFF | ON | LONG | SHORt
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:SCOD:MODE OFF
deactivates the scrambling code generator.
Manual operation:
See "Scrambling Mode" on page 285
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:TCASe <TCase>
Selects a test case defined by the standard. The signal generator is preset according
to the selected standard.
Depending on the selected test case the parameters of the TS25141 commands are
preset. For most test cases also the parameters of one or more of the subsystems
SOURce:AWGN, SOURce:W3GPp, SOURce:DM and SOURce:FSIM are preset. The
preset parameters are activated with command :BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS:EXEC
Parameters:
<TCase>
TC642 | TC66 | TC72 | TC73 | TC74 | TC75 | TC76 | TC78 |
TC821 | TC831 | TC832 | TC833 | TC834 | TC84 | TC85 | TC86 |
TC881 | TC882 | TC883 | TC884 | TC891 | TC892 | TC893 |
TC894
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
TC642
557
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC73
selects the test case 7.3, Dynamic Range.
Manual operation:
See "Test Case" on page 281
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:TCASe:EXECute
The command activates the current settings of the test case wizard. Signal generation
is started at the first trigger received by the generator. The RF output is not activated /
deactivated by this command, so care has to be taken that "RF State" is "On"
(OUTPut:STATe ON) at the beginning of the measurement.
The command activates the preset parameters of the TS25141 commands and - for
most test cases - also the parameters of one or more of the subsystems
SOURce:AWGN, SOURce:W3GPp, SOURce:DM and SOURce:FSIM.
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC73
selects the settings for test case 7.3, Dynamic Range.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:BSPC MED
sets the base station power class Medium Range BS.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:SCOD #H000FFF
sets the uplink scrambling code 'H000FFF.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:FREQ 1710MHz
sets the wanted signal frequency.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS:EXEC
activates the settings for test case 7.3, Dynamic Range. For all
other parameters the preset values are used.
OUTP ON
activates RF output A.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Apply Settings" on page 286
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:TRIGger <Trigger>
Selects the trigger mode. The trigger is used to synchronize the signal generator to the
other equipment.
Parameters:
<Trigger>
AUTO | PRESet | SINGle
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TRIG AUTO
selects customization of trigger mode for the selected test case
Manual operation:
See "Trigger Configuration" on page 284
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:TRIGger:OUTPut <Output>
Defines the signal for the selected marker output.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
558
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
Parameters:
<Output>
AUTO | PRESet
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TRIG:OUTP PRES
selects that the current marker setting are kept independently of
the selected test case.
Manual operation:
See "Marker Configuration" on page 284
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:BTYPe <BType>
Selects the type of blocking scenario and determines the type of interfering signal and
its level.
Parameters:
<BType>
WIDE | COLocated | NARRow
*RST:
WIDE
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC75
selects the settings for test case 7.5, Blocking Characteristics.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:BTYP NARR
selects the GMSK (270.833 kHz) interfering signal
Manual operation:
See "Blocking Scenario - Test Case 7.5" on page 300
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DCRatio <DcRatio>
Sets channel power ratio of DPCCH to DPDCH.
Parameters:
<DcRatio>
float
Range:
-80 to 80
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC642
selects the settings for test case 6.4.2, Power Control Steps.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:DCR -3 dB
sets a ratio of -3 dB for DPCCH power/DPDCH power
Manual operation:
See "Power Ratio DPCCH to DPDCH - Test Case 6.4.2"
on page 342
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:SFORmat <SFormat>
Sets the slot format for the DPCCH. The slot format defines the FBI mode and the
TFCI status.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
559
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
Parameters:
<SFormat>
float
Range:
*RST:
0 to 5
0
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC642
selects the settings for test case 6.4.2, Power Control Steps.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:DPCC:SFOR 3
selects slot format 3 for the DPCCH
Manual operation:
See "Slot Format DPCCH - Test Case 6.4.2" on page 341
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:RDATa <RData>
Sets the TPC repeat pattern for verification of the base stations power control steps.
Parameters:
<RData>
SINGle | AGGRegated | ONE | ZERO | PATTern | DLISt
*RST:
SINGle
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC642
selects the settings for test case 6.4.2, Power Control Steps.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:DPCC:TPC:RDAT SING
selects the 01 pattern
Manual operation:
See "TPC Repeat Pattern - Test Case 6.4.2" on page 343
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:RDATa:DSELect
<DSelect>
Selects the data list when the DLISt data source is selected for the TPC repeat pattern of the DPCCH.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, only the file name has to be
given, without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<DSelect>
<data_list_name>
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC642
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:DPCC:TPC:RDAT DLIS
selects the data source DLISt
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:DPCC:TPC:RDAT:DSEL
'dpcch_tpc_1'
selects the data list dpcch_tpc1.
Manual operation:
See "TPC Repeat Pattern - Test Case 6.4.2" on page 343
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
560
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:RDATa:PATTern <Pattern>
Determines the bit pattern for the PATTern data source selection.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
64 bits
*RST:
#H0,1
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC642
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:DPCC:TPC:RDAT PATT
selects the data source pattern
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:DPCC:TPC:RDAT:PATT
#HF0C20,19
defines the TPC pattern
Manual operation:
See "TPC Repeat Pattern - Test Case 6.4.2" on page 343
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:SDATa <SData>
Sets the TPC pattern for initialization of the base stations power level.
Parameters:
<SData>
PMAX | DLISt
PMAX
Maximum Power Less n Steps
DLISt
The TPC start pattern is taken from a data list.
*RST:
PMAX
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC642
selects the settings for test case 6.4.2, Power Control Steps.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:DPCC:TPC:SDAT DLIS
selects the data source data list for TPC start pattern.
MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/temp/IQData'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:DPCC:TPC:SDAT:DSEL
'dpcch_tpc_s'
selects the data list dpcch_tpcs.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:DPCC:TPC:SDAT PMAX
selects the pattern "Max. Pow. Less N Steps"
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:DPCC:TPC:SDAT:PUST 100
defines 100 power up bits. The base station is (presumably) set
to maximum transmit power.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:DPCC:TPC:SDAT:PDST 10
defines 10 power down bits. The base station is set to two power
steps below its maximum transmit power. The TPC start patter is
110 bits long.
Manual operation:
See "TPC Start Pattern - Test Case 6.4.2" on page 342
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
561
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:SDATa:DSELect
<DSelect>
Selects the data list when the DLISt data source is selected for the TPC start pattern
of the DPCCH.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, only the file name has to be
given, without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<DSelect>
<data_list_name>
Example:
see [:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:
TPC:SDATa on page 561
Manual operation:
See "TPC Start Pattern - Test Case 6.4.2" on page 342
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:SDATa:PDSTeps
<PdSteps>
Sets the number of power down bits in the TPC start pattern.
Parameters:
<PdSteps>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 1000
1
Example:
see [:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:
TPC:SDATa on page 561
Manual operation:
See "TPC Power Down Steps - Test Case 6.4.2" on page 343
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:SDATa:PUSTeps
<PuSteps>
Sets the number of power up bits in the TPC start pattern.
Parameters:
<PuSteps>
integer
Range:
*RST:
0 to 1000
1
Example:
see [:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:
TPC:SDATa on page 561
Manual operation:
See "TPC Power Up Steps - Test Case 6.4.2" on page 343
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:CCODing:TYPE <Type>
Selects the channel coding scheme in accordance with the 3GPP specification.
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
562
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
Parameters:
<Type>
M12K2 | M64K | M144k | M384k | AMR
M12K2 | M64K | M144K | M384K
Measurement channel with an input data bit rate of respectivelly
12.2 ksps, 64 ksps, 144 ksps and 384 ksps
AMR
Channel coding for the AMR Coder (coding a voice channel)
*RST:
M12K2
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:DPDC:CCOD:TYPE M144K
selects channel coding scheme RMC 144 kbps.
Manual operation:
See "RMC - Receiver Tests" on page 290
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:DERRor:BIT:RATE <Rate>
Sets the bit error rate.
Parameters:
<Rate>
float
*RST:
0.0
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:DPDC:DERR:BIT:RATE 1E-2
sets a bit error rate of 0.01.
Manual operation:
See "Bit Error Rate - Test Case 7.8" on page 312
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:DERRor:BLOCk:RATE <Rate>
Sets the block error rate.
Parameters:
<Rate>
float
Range:
0 to 0.1
Increment: 0.001
*RST:
0.0
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:DPDC:DERR:BLOC:RATE 1E-2
sets a bit error rate of 0.01.
Manual operation:
See "Block Error Rate - Test Case 7.8" on page 313
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:ORATe <ORate>
Sets the overall symbol rate.
Parameters:
<ORate>
D15K | D30K | D60K | D120k | D240k | D480k | D960k |
D1920k | D2880k | D3840k | D4800k | D5760k
15 ksps ... 6 x 960 ksps
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
D60K
563
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC642
selects the settings for test case 6.4.2, Power Control Steps.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:DPDC:ORAT D15K
sets the overall symbol rate to 15 ksps. Only DPDCH1 is active,
the symbol rate is 15 ksps and the channelization code is 64.
Manual operation:
See "Overall Symbol Rate - Test Case 6.4.2" on page 342
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:FREQuency <Frequency>
The command sets the RF frequency of the wanted signal.
Parameters:
<Frequency>
float
Range:
100E3 to 6E9
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
1.95E9
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:FREQ 2.5GHz
sets a frequency of 2.5 GHz for the wanted signal.
Manual operation:
See "Wanted Signal Frequency - Receiver Tests" on page 290
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:OBANd <OBand>
Selects the operating band of the base station for "Wideband Blocking". The operating
band is required for calculation of power levels and interferer modulation.
Parameters:
<OBand>
I | II | III | IV | V | VI
*RST:
I
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC75
selects the settings for test case 7.5, Blocking Characteristics.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:EMOD STAN
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:BTYP WIDE
selects blocking scenario wideband.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:OBAN III
selects operating band III.
Manual operation:
See "Operating Band - Test Case 7.5" on page 300
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:PCPCh:CCODing:TYPE <Type>
Selects the Transport Block Size, 168 bits or 360 bits.
Parameters:
<Type>
TB168 | TB360
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
TB168
564
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC893
selects the settings for test case 8.9.3, Demodulation of CPCH
Message in Static Propagation Conditions.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:PCPC:CCOD:TYPE TB168
selects transport block size 168 bits.
Manual operation:
See "Transport Block Size (TB) - Test Case 8.9.3" on page 338
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:POWer <Power>
Sets the RF level of the wanted signal.
Parameters:
<Power>
float
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
-110.3
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:POW?
queries the RF level of the wanted signal.
Response: -103.1
the RF level is -103.1 dBm
Manual operation:
See "Wanted Signal Level - Receiver Tests" on page 290
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:PRACh:CCODing:TYPE <Type>
Selects the Transport Block Size to 168 bits or to 360 bits.
Parameters:
<Type>
TB168 | TB360
*RST:
TB168
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC883
selects the settings for test case 8.8.3, Demodulation of RACH
Message in Static Propagation Conditions.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:PRAC:CCOD:TYPE TB168
selects transport block size 168 bits.
Manual operation:
See "Transport Block Size - Test Case 8.8.x" on page 334
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:STATe <State>
Enables/disables the generation of the wanted signal.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
1
565
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Remote-Control Commands
Setting up Test Cases according to TS 25.141
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC892
selects test case 8.9.2, CPCH Access Preamble and Collision
Detection in Multipath Fading Case 3.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:EMOD USER
selects mode "User definable". Also settings that are not in compliance with the standard can be made.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:STAT OFF
disables the generation of the wanted signal.
Manual operation:
See "Wanted Signal State - Receiver Tests" on page 289
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:TRIGger[:EXTernal]:DELay <Delay>
Sets an additional propagation delay besides the fixed DL-UL timing offset of 1024 chip
periods.
The additional propagation delay is obtained by charging the start trigger impulse with
the respective delay.
Parameters:
<Delay>
float
Range:
*RST:
0 chips to 65535 chips
0 chips
Example:
BB:W3GP:TS25141:TCAS TC642
selects the settings for test case 6.4.2, Power Control Steps.
BB:W3GP:TS25141:WSIG:TRIG:EXT:DEL 14
sets a additional propagation delay of 14 chips.
Manual operation:
See "Propagation Delay - Test Case 6.4.2" on page 342
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
566
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Reference
Annex
A Reference
Supported channel types
Table A-1: List of supported channel types and their sequence in the 3GPP FDD channel table
Index
Shortform
Name
Function
Optional
Enhanced in
BS1
0
P-CPICH
Primary Common Pilot Channel
●
no
●
●
Specifies the scrambling code in
the scrambling code group (2nd
stage of scrambling code detection)
Phase reference for additional
downlink channels
Reference for the signal strength
1
S-CPICH
Secondary Common Pilot Channel
no
2
P-SCH
Primary Sync Channel
Slot synchronization
no
3
S-SCH
Secondary Sync Channel
●
●
Frame synchronization
Specifies the scrambling code
group
no
4
P-CCPCH
Primary Common Control Phys.
Channel
●
Transfers the system frame number
(SFN)
Timing reference for additional
downlink channels
Contains the BCH transport channel
yes
●
●
5
S-CCPCH
Secondary Common Control Phys.
Channel
6
PICH
Page Indication Channel
7
AICH
Acquisition Indication Channel
no
8
AP-AICH
Access Preamble Acquisition Indication Channel
no
9 / 10
PDSCH
Phys. Downlink Shared Channel
no
DL-DPCCH
Dedicated Physical Control Channel
HS-SCCH
High Speed Shared Control Channel
E-AGCH
E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel
E-RGCH
E-DCH Relative Grant Channel
E-HICH
E-DCH Hybrid ARQ Indicator
Channel
DPCH
Dedicated Phys. Channel
11 - 13
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
no
Transfers the paging indicator
Transfers the user data and the control
information
no
yes
567
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Index
14 - 138
Reference
Shortform
Name
HS-SCCH
High Speed Shared Control Channel
no
HS-PDSCH (QPSK)
High Speed Physical Downlink
Shared Channel (QPSK)
no
HS-PDSCH (16
QAM)
High Speed Physical Downlink
Shared Channel (16 QAM)
no
HS-PDSCH (64
QAM)
High Speed Physical Downlink
Shared Channel (64 QAM)
no
HS-PDSCH (MIMO)
High Speed Physical Downlink
Shared Channel (MIMO)
no
E-AGCH
E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel
no
E-RGCH
E-DCH Relative Grant Channel
no
E-HICH
E-DCH Hybrid ARQ Indicator
Channel
no
F-DPCH
Fractional Dedicated Phys. Channel
no
DPCH
Dedicated Phys. Channel
HS-SCCH
High Speed Shared Control Channel
HS-PDSCH (QPSK)
High Speed Physical Downlink
Shared Channel (QPSK)
HS-PDSCH (16
QAM)
High Speed Physical Downlink
Shared Channel (16 QAM)
HS-PDSCH (64
QAM)
High Speed Physical Downlink
Shared Channel (64 QAM)
HS-PDSCH (MIMO)
High Speed Physical Downlink
Shared Channel (MIMO)
E-AGCH
E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel
E-RGCH
E-DCH Relative Grant Channel
E-HICH
E-DCH Hybrid ARQ Indicator
Channel
F-DPCH
Fractional Dedicated Phys. Channel
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
Function
Transfers the user data and the control
information
Optional
Enhanced in
BS1
no
568
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Reference
Channel tables of the DPDCH and E-DPDCH
Table A-2: Structure of the DPDCH channel table in conjunction with the overall symbol rate
Overall
Symbol
Rate
DPDCH 1
DPDCH 2
DPDCH 3
DPDCH 4
DPDCH 5
DPDCH 6
I or Q branch
I
Q
I
Q
I
Q
15 ksps
State: ON
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: ON
State: ON
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
S-Rate:
960k
S-Rate:
960k
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
S-Rate:
960k
S-Rate:
960k
S-Rate:
960k
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 3
S-Rate: 15k
Ch. Code:
64
30 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate: 30k
Ch. Code:
32
60 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate: 60k
Ch. Code:
16
120 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate:
120k
Ch. Code: 8
240 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate:
240k
Ch. Code: 4
480 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate:
480k
Ch. Code: 2
960 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate:
960k
Ch. Code: 1
2 x 960 ksps
3 x 960 ksps
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
569
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Reference
Overall
Symbol
Rate
DPDCH 1
DPDCH 2
DPDCH 3
DPDCH 4
DPDCH 5
DPDCH 6
4 x 960 ksps
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
State: OFF
State: OFF
S-Rate:
960k
S-Rate:
960k
S-Rate:
960k
S-Rate:
960k
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 3
Ch. Code: 3
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
State: OFF
S-Rate:
960k
S-Rate:
960k
S-Rate:
960k
S-Rate:
960k
S-Rate:
960k
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 3
Ch. Code: 3
Ch. Code: 2
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
S-Rate:
960k
S-Rate:
960k
S-Rate:
960k
S-Rate:
960k
S-Rate:
960k
S-Rate: 960k
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 3
Ch. Code: 3
Ch. Code: 2
5 x 960 ksps
6 x 960 ksps
Ch. Code: 2
Table A-3: Structure of the E-DPDCH channel table in conjunction with the overall symbol rate and no
DPDCH active
Overall Symbol
Rate
E-DPDCH 1
E-DPDCH 2
E-DPDCH 3
E-DPDCH 4
I or Q branch
I
Q
I
Q
15 Ksps
State: ON
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
S-Rate: 15 k
Ch. Code: 64
30 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate: 30 k
Ch. Code: 32
60 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate: 60 k
Ch. Code: 16
120 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate: 120 k
Ch. Code: 8
240 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate: 240 k
Ch. Code: 4
480 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate: 480 k
Ch. Code: 2
960 ksps
State: ON
S-Rate: 960 k
Ch. Code: 1
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
570
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Reference
Overall Symbol
Rate
E-DPDCH 1
E-DPDCH 2
E-DPDCH 3
E-DPDCH 4
I or Q branch
I
Q
I
Q
2 x 960 ksps
State: ON
State: ON
State: OFF
State: OFF
S-Rate: 960 k
S-Rate: 960 k
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
State: ON
State: ON
State: OFF
State: OFF
S-Rate: 1920 k
S-Rate: 1920 k
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
S-Rate: 1920 k
S-Rate: 1920 k
S-Rate: 960 k
S-Rate: 960 k
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
State: ON
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: ON
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: ON
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: ON
State: OFF
2 x1920 ksps
2 x 960 ksps + 2 x
1920 ksps
2 x 960 ksps, I only
S-Rate: 960 k
Ch. Code: 1
2 x 960 ksps, Q
only
State: OFF
S-Rate: 960 k
Ch. Code: 1
2 x 1920 ksps, I
only
State: ON
S-Rate: 1920 k
Ch. Code: 1
2 x 1920 ksps, Q
only
State: OFF
S-Rate: 1920 k
Ch. Code: 1
2 x 960 ksps + 2 x
1920 ksps, I only
2 x 960 ksps + 2 x
1920 ksps, Q only
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
State: ON
State: OFF
S-Rate: 1920 k
S-Rate: 960 k
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
State: OFF
State: ON
State: OFF
State: ON
S-Rate: 1920 k
S-Rate: 960 k
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
571
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Reference
Table A-4: Structure of the E-DPDCH channel table in conjunction with the overall symbol rate and
one DPDCH active
Overall Symbol
Rate
E-DPDCH 1
E-DPDCH 2
E-DPDCH 3
E-DPDCH 4
Active HSDPCCH?
No
No
Yes
Yes
Q
I
I
Q
State: ON
State: OFF
State: ON
State: OFF
I or Q branch
15 ksps
30 ksps
60 ksps
120 ksps
240 ksps
480 ksps
960 ksps
2 x 960 ksps
2 x1920 ksps
2 x 960 ksps, I only
2 x 960 ksps, Q
only
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
S-Rate: 15 k
S-Rate: 15 k
Ch. Code: 128
Ch. Code: 128
State: ON
State: OFF
State: ON
S-Rate: 30 k
S-Rate: 30 k
Ch. Code: 64
Ch. Code: 64
State: ON
State: OFF
State: ON
S-Rate: 60 k
S-Rate: 60 k
Ch. Code: 32
Ch. Code: 32
State: ON
State: OFF
State: ON
S-Rate: 120 k
S-Rate: 120 k
Ch. Code: 16
Ch. Code: 16
State: ON
State: OFF
State: ON
S-Rate: 240 k
S-Rate: 240 k
Ch. Code: 8
Ch. Code: 8
State: ON
State: OFF
State: ON
S-Rate: 480 k
S-Rate: 480 k
Ch. Code: 4
Ch. Code: 4
State: ON
State: OFF
State: ON
S-Rate: 960 k
S-Rate: 960 k
Ch. Code: 2
Ch. Code: 2
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
S-Rate: 960 k
S-Rate: 960 k
S-Rate: 960 k
S-Rate: 960 k
Ch. Code: 2
Ch. Code: 2
Ch. Code: 2
Ch. Code: 2
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
State: ON
S-Rate: 1920 k
S-Rate: 1920 k
S-Rate: 1920 k
S-Rate: 1920 k
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
State: OFF
State: ON
State: ON
State: OFF
S-Rate: 960 k
S-Rate: 960 k
Ch. Code: 2
Ch. Code: 2
State: OFF
State: OFF
State: ON
State: ON
S-Rate: 960 k
S-Rate: 960 k
Ch. Code: 2
Ch. Code: 2
572
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
Reference
Overall Symbol
Rate
E-DPDCH 1
E-DPDCH 2
E-DPDCH 3
E-DPDCH 4
Active HSDPCCH?
No
No
Yes
Yes
Q
I
I
Q
State: OFF
State: ON
State: ON
State: OFF
S-Rate: 1920 k
S-Rate: 1920 k
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
State: OFF
State: OFF
I or Q branch
2 x 1920 ksps, I
only
2 x 1920 ksps, Q
only
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
State: ON
State: ON
S-Rate: 1920 k
S-Rate: 1920 k
Ch. Code: 1
Ch. Code: 1
573
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
List of Commands
List of Commands
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:GPP3:VERSion?...................................................................................................... 355
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:CNRatio........................................................................................ 547
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:ENRatio........................................................................................ 547
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:POWer:NOISe.............................................................................. 548
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:RBLock:RATE.............................................................................. 548
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:RPDetection:RATE.......................................................................548
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:AWGN:STATe.......................................................................................... 549
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:BSPClass..................................................................................................549
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:BSSignal:FREQuency.............................................................................. 549
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:BSSignal:POWer...................................................................................... 549
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:EMODe..................................................................................................... 550
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:FSIMulator:STATe.................................................................................... 550
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:BWIDth....................................................................................... 550
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CNRatio...................................................................................... 551
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CW:FOFFset.............................................................................. 551
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CW:POWer.................................................................................552
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:CW:STATe................................................................................. 552
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:FOFFset..................................................................................... 552
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:MODulated:FOFFset.................................................................. 553
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:MODulated:POWer.....................................................................553
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:MODulated:STATe..................................................................... 554
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:MODulated:TYPE....................................................................... 554
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:POWer........................................................................................555
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:SETTing:TMODel:BSTation....................................................... 555
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:STATe........................................................................................ 555
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:IFSignal:TYPE.......................................................................................... 556
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:ROUTe......................................................................................................556
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:RXDiversity............................................................................................... 556
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:SCODe..................................................................................................... 557
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:SCODe:MODE..........................................................................................557
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:TCASe...................................................................................................... 557
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:TCASe:EXECute...................................................................................... 558
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:TRIGger.................................................................................................... 558
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:TRIGger:OUTPut...................................................................................... 558
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:BTYPe....................................................................................... 559
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DCRatio.....................................................................................559
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:SFORmat..................................................................... 559
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:RDATa................................................................. 560
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:RDATa:DSELect.................................................. 560
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:RDATa:PATTern..................................................561
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:SDATa................................................................. 561
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:SDATa:DSELect.................................................. 562
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:SDATa:PDSTeps................................................. 562
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPCCh:TPC:SDATa:PUSTeps................................................. 562
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:CCODing:TYPE........................................................... 562
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:DERRor:BIT:RATE.......................................................563
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:DERRor:BLOCk:RATE.................................................563
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
574
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
List of Commands
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:DPDCh:ORATe......................................................................... 563
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:FREQuency...............................................................................564
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:OBANd...................................................................................... 564
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:PCPCh:CCODing:TYPE............................................................564
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:POWer.......................................................................................565
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:PRACh:CCODing:TYPE............................................................565
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:STATe....................................................................................... 565
[:SOURce]:BB:W3GPp:TS25141:WSIGnal:TRIGger[:EXTernal]:DELay.......................................................566
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel:DPCH:CCODing:USER:CATalog?................432
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel:DPCH:CCODing:USER:DELete....................428
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:BPFRame?.............. 428
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:SFORmat.................429
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:SRATe?................... 429
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:STATe......................430
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:TYPE....................... 430
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:USER:LOAD............ 432
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:CCODing:USER:STORe..........432
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:BIT:LAYer.................. 443
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:BIT:RATE...................443
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:BIT:STATe................. 444
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:BLOCk:RATE.............444
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DERRor:BLOCk:STATe........... 445
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:CONNector............. 440
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:DIRection................440
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:MODE.....................441
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:RANGe:DOWN.......441
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:STATe.................... 441
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:STEP:MANual........ 442
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:STEP[:EXTernal].... 442
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl[:POWer]?................442
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:INTerleaver2............................ 433
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:STATe...................................... 426
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di0>:CRCSize........ 433
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di0>:DATA............. 434
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di0>:DATA:
DSELect.................................................................................................................................................. 434
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di0>:DATA:
PATTern.................................................................................................................................................. 435
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di0>:DTX................435
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di0>:EPRotection... 435
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di0>:INTerleaver.... 436
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di0>:RMATtribute...436
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di0>:STATe............437
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di0>:TBCount.........437
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di0>:TBSize........... 437
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:TCHannel<di0>:TTINterval...... 438
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:CCODing:INTerleaver<di>............................. 438
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:CCODing:STATe............................................ 438
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:CCODing:TYPE?............................................438
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:ENHanced:PCCPch:STATe............................................................ 427
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
575
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
List of Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:OCNS:MODE...................................................................................379
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:OCNS:SEED....................................................................................379
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:OCNS:STATe.................................................................................. 378
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation:PRESet............................................................................................ 355
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:DERRor:BIT:LAYer.............. 445
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:DERRor:BIT:RATE...............445
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:DERRor:BIT:STATe............. 446
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:DERRor:BLOCk:RATE.........446
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation[:ENHanced]:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:DERRor:BLOCk:STATe....... 446
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel:HSDPa:HSET:PRESet............................................. 379
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel:PRESet..................................................................... 380
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:AICH:ASLOt....................................................380
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:AICH:SAPattern..............................................380
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:APAIch:ASLOt................................................ 381
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:APAIch:SAPattern.......................................... 381
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:CCODe........................................................... 381
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DATA.............................................................. 382
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DATA:DSELect............................................... 383
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DATA:PATTern...............................................383
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:MCODe..............................................383
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:PLENgth............................................ 384
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:POFFset:PILot...................................384
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:POFFset:TFCI................................... 385
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:POFFset:TPC.................................... 385
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TFCI...................................................385
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TFCI:STATe...................................... 386
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA.........................................386
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:DSELect..........................387
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:PATTern......................... 387
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:MISuse...................................... 387
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:PSTep....................................... 388
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCCh:TPC:READ........................................ 388
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:DATA............................ 389
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:DSELect.............390
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:DATA:PATTern.............390
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:MISuse......................... 391
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:PSTep...........................391
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:FDPCh:DPCCh:TPC:READ............................391
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:BMODe[:STATe]................................392
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:CVPB................................................. 392
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:ACLength................................ 393
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:ALTModulation........................ 394
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:AMODe................................... 393
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:BCBTti<di>?............................394
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:BPAYload<di>?.......................394
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:CLENgth..................................395
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:CRATe<di>?........................... 395
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:DATA.......................................396
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:DATA:DSELect....................... 396
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:DATA:PATTern....................... 397
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
576
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
List of Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:HARQ:LENGth........................ 397
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:HARQ:MODE.......................... 398
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:HSCCode................................ 398
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:MODulation<di>...................... 398
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:NAIBitrate?..............................399
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:PREDefined............................ 399
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:PWPattern...............................400
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:RVParameter<di>................... 400
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:RVPSequence<di>................. 400
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:RVSTate..................................401
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:S64Qam.................................. 402
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:SCCode...................................402
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:SEED...................................... 402
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:SLENgth:ADJust..................... 403
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:SLENgth?................................403
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:SPATtern<di>?........................404
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:STAPattern..............................404
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:TBS:INDex<di>....................... 405
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:TBS:REFerence...................... 406
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:TBS:TABLe<di>...................... 406
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:TPOWer.................................. 405
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:TYPE.......................................407
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:UECategory?...........................407
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:UEID........................................408
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:HSET:VIBSize<di>............................ 408
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:MIMO:CVPB<di>............................... 408
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:MIMO:MODulation<di>...................... 409
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:MIMO:PWPattern...............................409
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:MIMO:STAPattern............................. 409
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:MODE................................................ 410
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:HSDPa:TTIDistance....................................... 410
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:POWer............................................................ 411
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:SFORmat........................................................411
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:SRATe............................................................ 411
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:STATe.............................................................412
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:TOFFset..........................................................412
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>:TYPE.............................................................. 412
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:IFCoding............................. 413
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:TTI<di0>:AGSCope............ 414
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:TTI<di0>:AGVIndex............414
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:TTI<di0>:UEID....................414
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:TTICount.............................414
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EAGCh:TTIEdch.............................. 415
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:CTYPe..................................415
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:DTAU................................... 416
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:ETAU?..................................416
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:RGPAttern............................416
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:SSINdex............................... 417
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:EHICh:TTIEdch................................417
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:CTYPe................................417
User Manual 1175.6690.02 ─ 08
577
R&S®SMW-K42/-K83
List of Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:DTAU..................................418
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:ETAU?................................418
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:RGPAttern.......................... 418
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:SSINdex............................. 418
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CHANnel<ch0>[:HSUPa]:ERGCh:TTIEdch..............................419
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:DLFStructure.............................................................. 419
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:METHod......................................................................419
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGD.....................................................420
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGL<di>.............................................. 420
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGPL................................................... 420
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:PATTern<ch>:TGSN.................................................. 421
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:CMODe:STATe.........................................................................422
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:DCONflict:RESolve...................................................................422
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:DCONflict[:STATe]?..................................................................423
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:ENHanced:CHANnel<ch0>:DPCH:DPControl:RANGe:UP...... 441
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:ENHanced:PCPich:PATTern.................................................... 427
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:OLTDiversity............................................................................. 423
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:PINDicator:COUNt....................................................................423
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:SCODe..................................................................................... 424
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W3GPp:BSTation<st>:SCODe:STATe......................................................................... 424
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:W